AmigaOS 3.9 the book

Umfassend.

On 500 pages become all themes round around the alterations from OS3.5 and
OS3.9 discusses. Additional offers the book an ampleness from tips and
advertence to all program and special chapter to the installing and
to the solution from problem-pronounce.

For Einsteiger.

Through the light clear language and the many clues and tips
is the book particularly good for they suitable, the till now still no
hard drive arranged and only little on the settings of Amiga
changed have. Also the mounting from rom and the installing from
program is detailed described. The book explains each point in
more understandable, german language.

For pros.

The book contains all alterations in clearer and bulk form and
relieved with it the location from informations. Through the comprehensive
treatise from themes how Preferences, Commodities and ViNCEd is it also
an ideal reference for the daily work in Amiga.

The book sets he on all operator from OS3.5 and 3.9, the an
clear and light understandable book seek, the all fields
detailed discusses.

2. Reworked edition

From the content

    .   Installing
    .   The Workbench
    .   The Prefs the Workbench
    .   The tools the Workbench
    .   The new Shell
        the Tool the pros
    .   The Commodities
    .   The multimedia-tools
    .   Further program's for OS3.9
    .   AmigaOS and the Internet
    .   ARexx
        introduction in the Scriptsprache
    .   WarpOS
        Volle achievement for the PowerPC
    .   The Tastaturkrzel
    .   Help by problems
    .   Tips & artifices

this book is Petro Tyschtschenko dedicated.

Many thank for all, what you for the Amiga did have. Without your
support would AmigaOS never advanced been.

1. Prelude
    1.1. Foreword
    1.2. Conventions
    1.3. Architecture of manual page
    1.4. The novelties from OS3.5/3.9 in the survey
2. Installing from AmigaOS 3.9
    2.1. Emergency diskette produce
    2.2. Mounting the Kickstart-rom
        2.2.1. The mounting in the A1200
        2.2.2. The mounting in the A3000 Desktop
        2.2.3. The mounting in the A3000T
        2.2.4. The mounting in the A2000
        2.2.5. The mounting in the A500
    2.3. Prepare the hard drive
        2.3.1. IDE
        2.3.2. SCSI
        2.3.3. Fit the hard drive
            2.3.3.1. Activating the HDToolbox
            2.3.3.2. Step 1 - fit
            2.3.3.3. Step 2 - Partitionieren
    2.4. AmigaOS 3.9 install
3. The Preferences the Workbench (Prefs)
    3.1. The "Prefs"-directory
    3.2. The defaults (Presets)
    3.3. The standard-menu the Preferences
        3.3.1. Menu "project"
        3.3.2. Menu "defaults"
        3.3.3. Menu "settings"
    3.4. WarpOS-Preferences (OS3.9)
    3.5. DefIcons-Preferences (OS3.9)
        3.5.1. Datatypes
        3.5.2. Actions
            3.5.2.1. Add
            3.5.2.2. Enfernen
            3.5.2.3. Learning...
        3.5.3. The menu
            3.5.3.1. Project
            3.5.3.2. Defaults
            3.5.3.3. Icon
    3.6. ASL-Preferences (off OS3.9)
    3.7. The Workbench-Preferences (off OS3.5)
    3.8. ReAction-Preferences (off OS3.5)
    3.9. CacheCDFS
        3.9.1. The CacheCDFS-Preferences
    3.10. Font-Preferences (Font)
        3.10.1. Font-Auswahlwindow
    3.11. The IControl-Preferences
        3.11.1. Screen draw
        3.11.2. Schirmversatz by menu
        3.11.3. Filter Texteingabefeld
        3.11.4. Flickering Vermeiden
        3.11.5. Mode transfer
        3.11.6. 1:1 Seitenverhltnis (OS3.9)
    3.12. Input-Preferences (Input)
        3.12.1. Mouse speed
        3.12.2. Mouse acceleration
        3.12.3. Blueprint Doppelklick
        3.12.4. Delay by Tastenwiederholung
        3.12.5. Speed for Tastenwiederholung
        3.12.6. Keyboard test
        3.12.7. Keyboard assignment
    3.13. National-Preferences (Locale)
        3.13.1. Employ of national-Preferencess
    3.14. Guard zone-Preferences (Overscan)
    3.15. Colour-Preferences (palette)
    3.16. Mouse pointer-Preferences (Pointer)
    3.17. Printer-Preferences (Printer)
        3.17.1. Printer type
            3.17.1.1. Printer connection
            3.17.1.2. Strangers device driver (Use Custom Device)
            3.17.1.3. Device driver (Port Device)
            3.17.1.4. Oneness (Port Unit)
        3.17.2. Page size & edges (footboy Size & Margins)
            3.17.2.1. Paper type
            3.17.2.2. Paper size
            3.17.2.3. Character density
            3.17.2.4. Line density
            3.17.2.5. Paper length (lines)
            3.17.2.6. Left edge (lines)
            3.17.2.7. Right edge (lines)
            3.17.2.8. Density
        3.17.3. Settings (Settings)
            3.17.3.1. Stress quality
            3.17.3.2. Shade
            3.17.3.3. Image
            3.17.3.4. Image position
            3.17.3.5. Coloration
            3.17.3.6. Level
            3.17.3.7. Left corner/Linker edge
            3.17.3.8. Image centers
            3.17.3.9. Weichzeichnen
            3.17.3.10. Colour correction
            3.17.3.11. Limitations
            3.17.3.12. Stress example
        3.17.4. Tips to the acceleration of print procedure for graphics
    3.18. Graphic printer-Preferences (PrinterGfx)
    3.19. PostScript-printer-Preferences (PrinterPS)
        3.19.1. Driver mode
        3.19.2. Copies
        3.19.3. Paper size
        3.19.4. Paper width and Papierlnge
        3.19.5. Horizontal DPI and Vertikal DPI
        3.19.6. Text-settings
        3.19.7. Edges-settings
        3.19.8. Graphic-settings
        3.19.9. Graphic-scaling
    3.20. Screenmode-Preferences (ScreenMode)
        3.20.1. Announce mode
        3.20.2. Mode attributes
        3.20.3. Breadth/height
        3.20.4. Colors
        3.20.5. Car-roles
    3.21. Serial-Preferences (Serial)
        3.21.1. Baud-instalment
        3.21.2. Input buffer size
        3.21.3. Journal
        3.21.4. Parity
        3.21.5. Bits/Char
        3.21.6. Stop bits
        3.21.7. Default-oneness
    3.22. Sound-Preferences
    3.23. Time-Preferences (tIME)
    3.24. Workbench-pattern-Preferences (WBPattern)
        3.24.1. Selection of Hintergrundmusters
        3.24.2. Selection from picture
        3.24.3. Layout (OS3.9)
        3.24.4. Menu "defaults"
4. The tools the Workbench
    4.1. AmiDOCK
        4.1.1. Docks
        4.1.2. Categories
        4.1.3. Pictograms
        4.1.4. Backdrops
        4.1.5. Dock-behavior
        4.1.6. General. Dock-behavior
        4.1.7. Configurations save and shop
    4.2. Animated Icons
        4.2.1. Create one "Animated Icon"
        4.2.2. Optionally tees for "Transferanims"
    4.3. BenchTrash - the clever garbage can
        4.3.1. The Preferences from BenchTrash
        4.3.2. Tees from BenchTrash
    4.4. Calculator (pocket calculator)
        4.4.1. Menu of pocket calculator
    4.5. EditPad
        4.5.1. Project
        4.5.2. Process
        4.5.3. Navigation
        4.5.4. Settings
    4.6. HDToolbox
        4.6.1. The Hauptwindow
            4.6.1.1. Inferface
            4.6.1.2. Adr
            4.6.1.3. LUN
            4.6.1.4. Drive (Drive)
            4.6.1.5. Bigness
        4.6.2. Partitionieren one disk drive
            4.6.2.1. Hard drive partitions
            4.6.2.2. Adapt the bigness one Partition
            4.6.2.3. Relocating from partitions within the
                     Partitionierungsleiste
            4.6.2.4. Add one new Partition
            4.6.2.5. Rename one Partition
            4.6.2.6. Discharge one Partition
        4.6.3. Standard configuration for drives
        4.6.4. Save and formatting the new partitions
        4.6.5. Options to the Partitionierung for Erfahrene user
        4.6.6. Prepare single sculler new hard drive
        4.6.7. Re design from Dateisystemen
        4.6.8. File system association
            4.6.8.1. Add of new Dateisystems
            4.6.8.2. Discharge of Dateisystems
            4.6.8.3. Update of existing Dateisystems
            4.6.8.4. Error handling
    4.7. The Icon-editor "IconEdit" (off OS3.5)
        4.7.1. Processing field
            4.7.1.1. Selection "normal"/"Ausgewhlt"
        4.7.2. Colour selection field
        4.7.3. The tools
            4.7.3.1.  Full pattern-symbols
            4.7.3.2.  Freehand drawing-symbol
            4.7.3.3.  Freehand lines-symbol
            4.7.3.4.  Circle-symbol
            4.7.3.5.  More filled circle-symbol
            4.7.3.6.  Rectangle-symbol
            4.7.3.7.  Filled rectangle-symbol
            4.7.3.8.  Lines symbol
            4.7.3.9.  Colt-symbol
            4.7.3.10. Rescinded-symbol (Undo)
            4.7.3.11. Reconstitute-symbol (Redo)
            4.7.3.12. Discharge-symbol
            4.7.3.13. Pipettes-symbol
            4.7.3.14. Arrow-symbols
        4.7.4. The menu
            4.7.4.1. Menu "project"
            4.7.4.2. Menu "Bearbeiten"
            4.7.4.3. Menu "kind"
            4.7.4.4. Menu "emphasizing"
            4.7.4.5. Menu "images"
            4.7.4.6. Menu "extras"
            4.7.4.7. Menu "options"
        4.7.5. Tees (Tooltypes)
    4.8. IomegaTools
        4.8.1.  The installing
        4.8.2.  The handling
        4.8.3.  Ver-/unlock
        4.8.4.  Diskettes formatting
        4.8.5.  Settings
        4.8.6.  Pose
        4.8.7.  Diskettes status
        4.8.8.  Drive status
        4.8.9.  Drive activating
        4.8.10. Drive parking
        4.8.11. Help
        4.8.12. The menu from "IomegaTools"
            4.8.12.1. Menu "project"
            4.8.12.2. Menu "window"
            4.8.12.3. Menu "settings"
    4.9. XAD-Entpacker
5. ViNCEd - the new Super-Shell
    5.1. ViNCEd menu
    5.2. ViNCEd settings
6. Commodities - the "peewees" helper
    6.1.  Prelude
    6.2.  General information tees (Tooltypes)
    6.3.  Tastenkombinationen
    6.4.  AutoPoint (Autoaktivierung)
    6.5.  Blanker (screen saver)
    6.6.  ClickToFront
    6.7.  CrossDOS (Konvertieren from DOS-write)
    6.8.  Exchange (Commodities-accociation)
    6.9.  Find (fast seeking)
    6.10. Fkey (application keypad mode)
    6.11. Mouse Blanker (Mauspfeil blind out)
    6.12. NoCapsLock
    6.13. RAWBInfo
        6.13.1. The RAWBInfo-Preferences
            6.13.1.1. The file-Preferences
            6.13.1.2. The Icon-Preferences
        6.13.2. The RAWBInfo-menu items
            6.13.2.1. The project-menu
            6.13.2.2. The type-menu
            6.13.2.3. The images-menu
    6.14. WB Clock
        6.14.1. Hand
        6.14.2. Dial
        6.14.3. Colors
        6.14.4. Noises
7. The Neuen multimedia-tools
    7.1. Action - the video-Player
        7.1.1. The surface
        7.1.2. Requirements
        7.1.3. Supplementary video-formats and Codecs
            7.1.3.1. AVI-Videoformat
            7.1.3.2. Supplementary audio-Codecs from AVI
            7.1.3.3. QuickTime (.mov, .qt)
            7.1.3.4. Supplementary audio-codes from QuickTime
        7.1.4. The tees from Action
            7.1.4.1.  FILES
            7.1.4.2.  DITHER
            7.1.4.3.  MODEID
            7.1.4.4.  NOSOUND
            7.1.4.5.  NOSKIP
            7.1.4.6.  FPS
            7.1.4.7.  LOOPED
            7.1.4.8.  VERBOSE
            7.1.4.9.  NOCENTER
            7.1.4.10. WINDOWPLAY or WINP
            7.1.4.11. FORCE16
            7.1.4.12. AKIKO or WRITECHUNKYPIXELS
            7.1.4.13. SDBL or DOUBLEHEIGHT
            7.1.4.14. NOVIDEO
            7.1.4.15. MONITOR parameter
            7.1.4.16. NOGUI
            7.1.4.17. PUBSCREEN or PS
            7.1.4.18. WINX and WINY
            7.1.4.19. MABFIX
            7.1.4.20. NOSURROUNDMONO or NSM
            7.1.4.21. ZORRO2 or ZORRO2GFXBOARD
            7.1.4.22. AUTOPLAY or AP
            7.1.4.23. NOAUTOEXIT or NAE
            7.1.4.24. GRAPHICBOARDSCREENWIDTH or GBSW
            7.1.4.25. GRAPHICBOARDSCREENHEIGHT or GBSH
            7.1.4.26. BUFSIZE
            7.1.4.27. DEFAULTPATH
            7.1.4.28. COLORKEY
    7.2. AMPlifier
        7.2.1. The Abspieler ("Player")
        7.2.2. The Abspielliste
        7.2.3. The Equalizer
        7.2.4. Menu items
            7.2.4.1. Project
            7.2.4.2. Settings
        7.2.5. Config
            7.2.5.1. Audio I/O
            7.2.5.2. MP3-Audioplayer
            7.2.5.3. X-audio/AHI-giving out
            7.2.5.4. Options
            7.2.5.5. Advertisement
    7.3. Multiview - the all purpose-indicator
        7.3.1. Project
        7.3.2. Process
        7.3.3. Window
    7.4. The new "Picture Datatype"
    7.5. PlayCD
8. Further program's
    8.1. Warp3D
        8.1.1. Installing
        8.1.2. Directory structure
        8.1.3. Error handling
    8.2. AHI
        8.2.1. AHI-Preferences
        8.2.2. Extended settings
    8.3. Smart file system (SFS)
        8.3.1. SFS fit
        8.3.2. The clever garbage can
        8.3.3. The SFS-tools
            8.3.3.1. Diskspeed
            8.3.3.2. SFSformat
            8.3.3.3. SFScheck
            8.3.3.4. SFSsetcache
            8.3.3.5. SFSDefragmentGUI
    8.4. Colorwheel
    8.5. Fontcache
    8.6. NewIconEmu
9. AmigaOS and the Internet
    9.1. Prelude to the Internet
    9.2. Genesis - the access in Internet
        9.2.1. Prelude
        9.2.2. Online in 5 minutes - step for step in Internet
        9.2.3. Local network Aufbauen
        9.2.4. The Genesis-Preferences (Prefs)
        9.2.5. Interfaces
            9.2.5.1. Interface
            9.2.5.2. Sana II
            9.2.5.3. Modem
            9.2.5.4. Services
            9.2.5.5. Happening
            9.2.5.6. Resolv
        9.2.6. Options
            9.2.6.1. Advertisement
            9.2.6.2. Different
            9.2.6.3. Carry out
            9.2.6.4. Extended
        9.2.7. Modem/TAs
            9.2.7.1. Modem/TA
            9.2.7.2. Device
            9.2.7.3. Comands
            9.2.7.4. Results
        9.2.8. File
            9.2.8.1. Groups
            9.2.8.2. Protocols
            9.2.8.3. Services
            9.2.8.4. Grips
            9.2.8.5. Inetd
            9.2.8.6. Networks
            9.2.8.7. RPC
        9.2.9. User
            9.2.9.1. General
            9.2.9.2. Countdown
        9.2.10. Different
            9.2.10.1. Socks
            9.2.10.2. General
            9.2.10.3. Socks Server
            9.2.10.4. With cut
            9.2.10.5. Authentification
            9.2.10.6. Filter
        9.2.11. Cost
            9.2.11.1. Costs
            9.2.11.2. General
    9.3. AWeb
        9.3.1. Special features from AWeb
        9.3.2. Settings
        9.3.3. System requirements
        9.3.4. Installing
        9.3.5. The Steuersymbole from AWeb
        9.3.6. The Browserwindow
            9.3.6.1. Through pages move (scrollen)
            9.3.6.2. Frames
            9.3.6.3. Left-hand
            9.3.6.4. FTP-Links
            9.3.6.5. Single images
            9.3.6.6. Embedded images
            9.3.6.7. Download
            9.3.6.8. Popup-menu
            9.3.6.9. Clipboard-use
            9.3.6.10. AppWindow-property
            9.3.6.11. Ikonifizieren
        9.3.7. AWeb-settings
            9.3.7.1. Browser settings
            9.3.7.2. Progam-settings
            9.3.7.3. GUI-settings
            9.3.7.4. Network-settings
            9.3.7.5. The menu
            9.3.7.6. Image-functions
            9.3.7.7. Left-hand-functions
            9.3.7.8. Fram-functions
        9.3.8. Frequently problems
        9.3.9. Use of Low-week Amiga
    9.4. AmigaMail
            9.4.0.1. The Preferences "user"
            9.4.0.2. The Preferences "SMTP Server"
            9.4.0.3. The Preferences "POP Server"
            9.4.0.4. The Preferences "POP settings"
            9.4.0.5. New mail compose
    9.5. Tips & alternatives
        9.5.1. Interesting Amiga-pages in the Internet
10. ARexx
    10.1. Introduction - what is ARexx?
    10.2. First steps
    10.3. The remote controlled Workbench
        10.3.1. I know what
        10.3.2. Many beautiful window
        10.3.3. Pictograms move he
        10.3.4. Menu and Tastenkombinationen
            10.3.4.1. "Workbench"-menu
            10.3.4.2. "Window"-menu
            10.3.4.3. "Icon"-menu
            10.3.4.4. "Resource"-menu
        10.3.5. What otherwise still possible is
    10.4. Commodities active
11. WarpOS - full achievement for the PowerPC
    11.1. Introduction
    11.2. WarpOS install
        11.2.1. Which PPC-Board have you!
        11.2.2. WShell-compatible
        11.2.3. Selection the Grafikkarte
        11.2.4. Would like she WarpOS V16 or the PowerUP-compatibles V7
                fit
    11.3. The WarpOS-Prefs
    11.4. First help by difficulties with WarpOS
12. Picasso the Treibersystem for Amiga Grafikkarten
    12.1. Supplementary Grafikkarten
    12.2. No espoused Grafikkarten:
    12.3. What software collaborates with Picasso together?
    12.4. The installing
    12.5. The use from Picasso
    12.6. The tees the Monitordateien
    12.7. PicassoMode: the Bildschirmmodus-Preferences
    12.8. Help by problems
13. Keyboard macros (Shortcuts)
    13.1.  Workbench
    13.2.  Editpad
    13.3.  ASL - Dateiauswahl
    13.4.  Texteingabefelder
            13.4.0.1. Text.datatype
    13.5.  Commodities
            13.5.0.1. Exchange
            13.5.0.2. FKey
            13.5.0.3. Blanker
            13.5.0.4. CrossDOS
            13.5.0.5. RAWBInfo
            13.5.0.6. Find
            13.5.0.7. AmiDOCK
    13.6.  AWeb
    13.7.  AmigaMAIL
    13.8.  Genesis
    13.9.  AMPlifier
    13.10. Iomega tools
14. Problems and solutions
    14.1. Preparation to the installing
    14.2. Problems with Patches, Icons, NewIcons, MagicWB and SetPatch
    14.3. Problems with RTG, Picasso 96, CyberGraphX
    14.4. Hard drives-problems
    14.5. Problems with uses
    14.6. Problems with Internet-program
    14.7. Sundries problems
15. Glossary
    15.1.  A
    15.2.  B
    15.3.  C
    15.4.  D
    15.5.  E
    15.6.  F
    15.7.  G
    15.8.  H
    15.9.  I, J
    15.10. K, L
    15.11. M
    15.12. N, O
    15.13. P, Q
    15.14. R
    15.15. S
    15.16. T
    15.17. U, V
    15.18. W, Z

1. Prelude

1.1. Foreword

in oct 1998 happened he unusual for the AMIGA-community -
an new AmigaOS-version became announced. Towards 6 years of
"standstill" finally again an officially sign, because a
wirklichen standstill had it never given. Always against have indefatigable
programmer new software developed and developer new hardware on
the market brought. The market lived from one immense number from amplifications the
Amiga-Workbench, the visual representative of AmigaOS-"Look & Feel" and
also of actual Amiga-operating system. The explain goal all these
program's is the improvement the handling, the embellishment the
Workbench and the Erstellen the necessary tools, around actual trends
how multimedia and Internet of use to able.

The plurality the tools and amplifications brought it but with he, that
this to the a only conditional system-conforming implemented were and he to the
other more standard parallel evolved. A the jobs from
AmigaOS 3.5 and also from AmigaOS 3.9 is it hence, the most weighty
functions and program's to a new whole zusammenzubringen.

AmigaOS 3.5 began with so urgent necessary functions how the
support from hard drives greater 4Gb, a CD-ROM-Filesystem,
berarbeiteten Datatypes, a new printer driver-system and one
plurality from Fehlerbereinigungen and betterments in Kernsystem. To this
came an complete restyling the graphing Benutzerschnittstelle
with new pictograms and nine Systemeinstallern, Internet-program's for
the Surfen in the WWW and as transportation from E-mail, as soon as an standard for the
support from PowerPC-amplifications.

Towards the promulgation from AmigaOS 3.5 in the oct 1999 was the
advertisement from AmigaOS 3.9 for December 2000 sure again an
emergency. An update to only scanty 14 month? Those speed
was one already long not more usual...

AmigaOS 3.9 links seamless on this strategy on and sets new
emphases by the support from multimedia-format, Internet-
program and one plurality from amplifications the Workbench. New are
hence program's to the playback from MP3, Quicktime and AVI, an send
run-ledge, an comfortablier Entpacker, an automated
Datatypes-recognition, an real professional-Shell, an swiftly Suchfunktion
and innumerable another betterments.

Glances one on the chops and changes, the he from these both update
yield, so can one ascertain, that he Gewaltiges did has.
Especially the handling of AmigaOS is dramatic enhanced and the
range of function strong extended been. The look the Workbench is
with the new GlowIcon-style and the modern formation the surface
increased. Through the plurality on program has one from beginning on all
together, around efficient and comfortable Sounds abzuspielen, videos study
and relaxed in the Internet to surfen. What want one more...

We wish you much fun by these reading.

Markus Nerding
The author's

1.2. Conventions

we have attempted, this book so clear how possible to fashion
and by it the language so easy how possible to hold. All the same must on
unite places concept pp of einfhren or uses become, without the the
descriptions not possible are.

This book is and shall no substitute for the original-AMIGA-handbooks
is, the you with you Amiga get have. A updated copy the
handbooks find you in the HTML- and PDF-format on the OS 3.5- and OS 3.9-
CD-ROM. Those books, and herewith particularly the book "Workbench",
describe the fundamental architecture of AmigaOS and the handling the
separate components of Amiga and the Workbench. "Whole back" catches
this book hence not on. When you however already some with you Amiga
operated have, then ought you this book for the handling in the
general and for the use the new functions from OS 3.5/3.9
suffice, because the is of us goal.

When you an concept not clear is, then able you as first in the
"glossary" check, in the some important concept explains become.
When this not helps, then must you really to the original-
documentation reach [for]. We think and hope however, the this not often
the fall is is.

The book uses following conventions, around appointed things there-deliver:

<Ctrl>             The buttons the keyboard become in the rule in
                   sharpen braces personated. Ought more buttons
                   simultaneous pressed become, then sees this e.g.
                   So from:

                   <Ctrl>+<Shift>+<i>

                   here shall so the buttons <Ctrl>, <Shift> and <i>
                   simultaneous pressed become.

<R-Amiga>          with this is the <rechte Amiga>-key meant.
                   Corresponding is <L-Amiga> the <linke Amiga>-key.

WRINKLE, hint,     this book deposits very much worth on tips, clues
                   and important informations, because there stands in the
                   rule the, after what you by problems seek. Around the
                   Auffiden from tips and advertence if possible spectacular
                   to fashion, become this special highlighted.

Double-click       this concept beudeutet an fast double
                   Klicken with the lefthand Maustaste.

Auswahltaste       that opines the left Maustaste, because with you
                   mostly some picked is.

Mentaste          that opines the raked Maustaste, because with it is
                   the Menleiste of accordingly program in
                   upper Bildrand activates. With unite program
                   must one he by the way with the mouse direct above in
                   the Menleiste find, around this with the right
                   Maustaste invoice to able.

1.3. Architecture of manual page

chapter 1 - prelude

The prelude stands the novelties from OS3.5 and 3.9 in bulk form
before and helps you so by the selection the for you important capital.

Chapter 2 - installing

those chapter describes the Systemanforderungen, the mounting the Kickstart
3.1-rom, the preparation the hard drive and the installing the
software.

Chapter 3 - The Preferences the Workbench

this chapter deschftigt he with all Preferencesn of AmigaOS, how
e.g. Workbench, ReAction, CacheCDFS, onscreen, printer, here able you
the system on your presentations and needs acclimatize.

Chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench

The leistungsfhigen tools of AmigaOS are the subject this chapter.
Discussed become AmiDOCK, Animated Icons, EditPad, HDToolbox, IconEdit
and the IomegaTools.

Chapter 5 - The new Shell

the chapter describes the new Shell ViNCEd, the elusive
functions offers.

Chapter 6 - Commodities - the "peewees" helper

in these chapter become the so-called "Commodities" discussed. That
are small aid programs, the in the background run and always to the place
are, when one she needs. Typical agent are Find, Click To front,
Fkey and RAWBInfo.

Chapter 7 - The Neuen multimedia-tools

this chapter describes the new multimedia-tools from OS3.9: CD-Player,
AMPlifier, Action and MultiView.

Chapter 8 - further program's

Zu OS3.9 belong to  still an row from program, the not so easy
assign are (mostly system program) and the so-called
"Contributions", so program's, the from the author's as free of charge makeweight
to the zur ~ - at one's disposal posed become. We stand here before all Warp3D (3D-
driver), AHI (Soundtreiber) and SFS (fast Filesystem) before.

Chapter 9 - AmigaOS and the Internet

the Internet is sure of the most interesting themes. From the fact are the
instructions to Genesis, AWeb and AmigaMAIL very detailed.

Chapter 10 - introduction in ARexx

this chapter is as well as an introduction in the Scriptsprache ARexx, as
also an short presentation the ARexx-possibilities the Workbench.

Chapter 11 - WarpOS

in these chapter is WarpOS envisaged, the PowerPC-Kernel for the
Amiga.

Chapter 12 - Picasso

this chapter describes the Treibersystem for Grafikkarten and
PicassoMode, the Preferences the software.

Chapter 13 - The Tastaturkrzel

in these chapter become the Tastaturkrzel the most weighty program's in
clearer form envisaged.

Chapter 14 - error reports and solutions

possible and publicly known sources of errors and Lsungshinweise there to.

Chapter 15 - glossary

the glossary contains an description to important understood from the
computer- and AMIGA-area.

1.4. The novelties from OS3.5/3.9 in the survey

in these chapter become the novelties from OS3.5 and 3.9 short envisaged,
with it you he in ease an image of it make able, which fields for
you at present in most interesting are. You get hence also direct
reproofs on the chapter, in which you another informations get.

With what start? Those question stands he by the plurality from new
program and functions already. We start hence with Themenblcken.

Program's for the Internet

AWeb           the Web-browser was already in OS3.5 hold and lies
               now in the version 3.4 SE the OS3.9 by. AWeb is an
               very faster and compatibles browser for the Internet
               or. The WWW. He bolstered the HTML-standard inclusive
               charts, Frames and Javascript.

               Further informations: chapter 9 - Internet

Genesis        the access to the Internet. With Genesis choose you he by
               you Provider (e.g. By T-Online) an, the you then the
               access in Internet enables. Genesis verfgy over an
               voluminous Provider-file, the the most weighty
               Call-passer-Call-offerer contains. You must only still a
               choose - the remainder done Genesis for you.

               Further informations: chapter 9 - Internet

AmigaMAIL      The electronically mailing. AmigaMAIL is an swiftly and
               simple solution, around electronically mailing, the so-called E-
               mail, to broadcast and to receive.

               Further informations: chapter 9 - Internet

program's for music and video

CD-Player      the music-CD-gambler. With the CD-Player able you all
               herkmmlichen music-CDs play back. He disposes over the
               resemble control elements how the CD-Player one stereo-
               plant and is hence very easy to attend.

               Further informations: chapter 7 - multimedia

AMPlifier      the MP3-gambler. AMPlifier play next to the straight so
               populren MP3-format also still AIFF-, MAUD-, WAV-and ROH-
               files off. Also these Player leaves he very easy
               attend. He owns besides an Abspielliste, a
               Equalizer to the Klangeinstellung and an Skin-system, with the
               you is look new fashion able. In Internet find
               you there to hundreds from Skins to the Downloaden.

               Further informations: chapter 7 - multimedia

Action         the video-gambler. Action can as well as Quicktime-, as also
               AVI-videos play back. Then he very ressourcenschonend is,
               can he also on Amigas with little achievement deployed
               become.

               Further informations: chapter 7 - multimedia

PowerPC-support

WarpOS         the PowerPC-Kernel. WarpOS is an multitasking-kernel for
               PowerPC-processors (PPC), whereby PPC-program's on the
               Amiga used become able. WarpOS can one in about
               compare with "Exec", the operating system-kernel of
               AmigaOS. With OS3.9 is the new version 5 delivered;
               besides able the most weighty settings now with a
               special progam resolved to do become.

               Further informations: chapter 11 - WarpOS

program's to the change the Workbench

AmiDOCK        The progam-Startleiste. Whom has she not already disturbed -
               the disorder on the Workbench: anywhere lie progam-
               Icons around and when one some seeks, then is it either
               concealed or one finds it easy not. Here brings
               AmiDOCK remedy, in that all program's, to categories
               assorted, in one Startleiste disposed become able -
               and the easy through Hineinziehen.

               Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench

IconEdit       the Icon-editor. Indeed is IconEdit already always
               component of OS been, but first ever since OS3.5 is he an
               real strong tool for the building from
               pictograms become. He offers correct Malfunktionen and
               many special extras for Icons. Natural helps he also
               at creation of "glowing" for the "GlowIcons"-style.

               Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench

Animated Icons Bewegte pictograms. The "animierten IUcons" become with the
               Weihnachtsthema of BoingBag #1-update from OS3.5
               pp of einfhren. With it is an GIF- order transfer-animation
               as Icon defined. When you the Animationen clever
               choose and appropriate on the Workbench place,
               get you a individual, animierten Desktop how
               him otherwise no one has.

               Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench

RAWBInfo       The progam-info. ReAction Worbench info -
               short RAWBInfo can more as one first thinks. Displayed
               become the general informations to the angewhlten file,
               on wish but also version number and creation date
               or the bigness of list and the number the
               ingoing files. Natural able here also the
               write protection, the tees and another Icon-
               attributes gesetz become. New is the possibility, Icons
               to exchange, to change or as default to define.
               And the is still long not all...

               Further informations: chapter 6 - Commodities

ReAction-Prefs the surfaces-Preferences. ReAction is the graph
               surface from OS3.5 and 3.9. The settings for
               background, the font the headings and the style
               the buttons and Rollbalken from ReAction-basierten program
               able you here eintellen.

               Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the
               Workbench

Workbench-Prefs
               the Workbench-Preferences. Also the Workbench has ever since OS3.5
               a Preferences, around drives to hide, by
               pictograms the GlowIcon- and NewIcon-style interrupt
               and the pop stack (Stack) as soon as the keyboard-
               Auswahlverzgerung to set.

               Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the
               Workbench

The "peewees" helper

Picasso        the Grafikkarten-driver. Picasso is an Treibersystem for
               Grafikkarten. It is to the familiarize standard CyberGraphX-
               compatible and bolstered nearly all familiarize
               Grafikkarten, self very old types. Over a Preferences
               able nearly all values from Grafikkarte and monitor
               on each other attuned become.

               Further informations: chapter 12 - Picasso2000

CacheCDFS      the CD-ROM-Filesystem. With these Filesystem able you
               all gngigen CD-ROM-drives in Amiga bustle. It
               bolstered the formats Amiga RockRidge, ISO-9660, Mac-HFS,
               Hybrid-CDs, Multi-Session and Multi-vom by von from.

               Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the
               Workbench

HDToolbox      the hard drives-tool. The HDToolbox became for OS3.5
               complete new written. With you direct you hard drives
               an, alter partitions and determine the Filesystem.
               Important is the HDToolbox but also to the securing of RDB,
               without the you your hard drive to a defect often not
               reconstitute able.

               Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench

EditPad        the small editor. You will a board text write
               or easy only quick an change on the
               "user-startup"-file carry out? Then is EditPad exactly the
               correct editor for you. He is quick charged and easy
               to attend.

IomegaTools    the Zip- and Jaz-administrator. The IomegaTools serve to the
               formatting and Verwalten from Zip- and Jaz-disk drive.

               Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the Workbench

ViNCEd         The professional-Shell, actual is ViNCEd an "console
               Handler", however able many with these concept little
               begin. In ground is he an strong rectified Shell with
               History-function, variable TAB-completion and so
               elusive many functions, that it hierfr a
               Preferences with 25 cut off gives. Who frequent with the Shell
               or the CLI collaborates, ought he ViNCEd on each fall
               closer look at.

               Chapter 5 - The new Shell

Find           fast seeking. Where was the file alike still? Or - in
               which file had I some to the subject xyz read? With it
               is now end, because "Find" finds every file on your
               hard drive and it can also to keyword in the files
               seek. Suchbegriff enter, Laufwerk(e) choose and loose
               goes's...

               Further informations: chapter 6 - Commodities

WB Clock       The clock on the Workbench. They wanted you not already always
               an clarify analogous-clock with a selbstgestalteten
               Hintergrundbild on your Workbench have? Possession - wish
               fills!

               Further informations: chapter 6 - Commodities

DefIcons-Prefs The Datatypes-recognition. With DefIcons able you for all
               Datatypes (MP3, IFF, JPG, etc.) without pictograms an
               progam define, the this announce or play (e.g.
               IFF-images with Multiview show leave). DefIcons is
               by it natural not on the Dateiendung dependent,
               but can by means of of any attribute the file the
               type recognize.

               Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the
               Workbench

Printer-Prefs  the printer-Preferences. The Drucksystem of AmigaOS became
               in OS3.5 fundamental changes. The expression follow now
               faster and electively also in Echtfarben. The
               different Preferences older OS-versions become besides
               collected together.

               Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the
               Workbench

ASL-Prefs      the ASL-Preferences. Determin you self the bigness and
               position of Dateiauswahl-window and lay you fast, how
               assorted become shall.

               Further informations: chapter 3 - The Preferences the
               Workbench

XAD            XAD is an Entpacker-system for files, the with LHA, LZX
               or ZIP gotta become. With a Doppelklick on an
               gotta file opens he an Dateiauswahl for the goal.

               Further informations: chapter 4 - The tools the
               Workbench

2. Installing from AmigaOS 3.9"

2.1. Emergency diskette produce

before you new Kickstart-rom in and the update on OS3.9 on you Amiga
fit is it particularly weighty, an Notfalldiskette to produce.

In you Amiga-system must an functioning CD-ROM-drive installert
is. Layering you now the OS3.9 CD-ROM in you drive and doppelklicken you
on the OS3.9-Installationssymbol. It opens he an newer onscreen and
the installer appear in bottom right edge of the screen.

The first entry in the Auswahlt is "Notfalldiskette unconditional first
produce" and is vorausgewhlt. Choose you "further" and follow you the
assignments of installers. Holding you an 3 custom-diskette
ready, the with the emergency-data described become can.

When you the assignments follow, is first of all the mentioned diskette
requested, the formated and installed is. After this become all
necessary data on the diskette copied. To this belong to  an particular
Startup-Sequence, possibly existing Grafikkarten-driver and
self-evident the CD-ROM-driver. The procedure lasts ever to
installierter hardware approx. 5 minutes.

Eventually become you to the hardware-driver asked, on the you CD-ROM-
drive connected is and to the hardware-ID. Please answer you
the recitations correct.

Towards more concluded installing is it advisable, the Notfalldiskette
auszuproblieren. Letting you the diskette and the OS3.9 CD-ROM in the drive
and commence the Amiga new.

When all frictionless serves has, ought you system to short
time over the CD-ROM already OS3.9 boot. When you but still the
old Kickstart-rom (Bersion 39 or smaller) implemented have, is the
procedure abbort. Reading you then in the next section wider.

Credit you already Kickstart-rom 3.1 (version 40) in you system
installed, able you the following section jump and in the
bernchsten section "prepare the hard drive" weiterlesen.

2.2. Mounting the Kickstart-ROM

the mounting the ROM-elements stands a erheblichen encroachment in the
Amiga there. When you he these encroachment not confide should, leave
you these from a autorisierten Amiga-trader carry out. With wrong
mounting the rom become this inevitable destroys. The author and had silver plated &
partner adopt no adhesion for upcomming damages.

Before you with the ROM-installing start, toggle you please the
computer and all angeschlossenen hardware from.

2.2.1. The mounting in the A1200

turning you the A1200 around and enternen you all screws on the
bottom. Layering you the calculator again right around and heave the
cover, as soon as the keyboard high and flap this to behind off.

The rom should next to the enlargement-Slot uncover wein. Elevation you
rom careful with a Schlitzschraubenzeiher from the socle. Walk you
by it very careful before, then you the rom and also the socle damage
could.

Plug you thereafter the 3.1-rom in the socle. The ROM with the inscription
391773 comes in the socle with the lettering U6A. The dent must by it
in direction of PCMCIA-ports show. The other ROM (391774) stick you
in the socle with the lettering U6B. Squeeze you the rom fast in the
socle, then this otherwise destroys become could.

You able now the calculator in inverted order again
assemble.

2.2.2. The mounting in the A3000 Desktop

draw you all cable from 3000D off. Undoing you the bolt on the backplane
and press the facing to in the front off. Now ought the AMIGA without
facing before you stand.

Building you all Zorro-edge-mounted from, before you he the Laufwerksbrcke
devote. Undoing you on the Laufwerksbrcke the 3 screws on the front and
the 2 on the reverse. You able the Laufwerksbrcke now light to
above jack, around the battery, the hard drives- and
Diskettenlaufwerkskabel from the motherboard to solve (the jack for the
Stormversorgung is with a spring catch secured). Building you now
the complete Laufwerksbrcke from.

Attempts you now, the rom, the next to the joystick un the Mausport
lie with a slotted screwdriver auszuhebeln. Here is care
necessary, then you the socle and the rom with too much force damage
could.

Take you now the new ROM to the hand and set you this in the
appositely socle an. Eighth you thereupon, that the rom right around (the
nicks from the joystick-ports off) and also in the correct socle
inserts become. The ROM with the inscription U180 comes in the socle with
the lettering U180. The others ROM (U181) stick you in the socle with
the lettering U181. Squeeze you the rom fast in the socle, then this
otherwise destroys become could.

You able now the calculator in umgekehreter order again
assemble.

2.2.3. The mounting in the A3000T

screws you the screen of 3000T off. Undoing you then the 4 screws on
front and reverse of Festplateten-sledge. Attempts you disen from
the Tower to remove (this cost some on power).

Levers you now the rom with enem Schlitzschraubenzeiher from the socle,
fit you by it on, that you the socle not damage.

Plug you now the 3.1er rom in the socle. The ROM with the inscription
U180 comes in the socle with the lettering U180. The dent must in
direction the interfaces-connections show. The other ROM stick you
in the socle with the lettering U181. Squeeze you the rom fast in the
socle, then this otherwise destroys become could.

You able now the calculator in inverted order again
assemble.

2.2.4. The mounting in the A2000

screws you the casing yours A2000 on and take you it off. Now
see you the Festplattenschlitten, the you remove must. Undoing you
the screws on fore- and reverse of sledge and heave him
out.

The ROM lies between the battery, the 68000 CPU and the FAT LADY-chip.
Attempts you the ROM with a slotted screwdriver from the socle U500
to remove.

Take you then the new ROM to the hand and press it with the dent in
direction the Anschluports (audio, video...) in the socle. Squeeze you
the ROM fast in the socle, then this otherwise destroys become could.

You able now the calculator in inverted order again
assemble.

--- WEIGHTY --------------------------------------------------------------
when you a A2000 from 1989 commodore MAGGOT IN GERMANY (BSW) possession,
must you modifications in ROM hear. Further details see you in the
hint, the the ROM beiliegt.

2.2.5. The mounting in the A500

turning you the A500 around and remove all screws on the bottom.
Turning you the calculator again right around and try you, the casing
to open. Keyed you now the keyboard to behind off.

The ROM-socle with the old ROM lies next to the FAT AGNUS-chip of A500.
Attempts you the ROM careful with a slotted screwdriver from the
socle to heave.

Take you now the new ROM to the hand and press it with the dent in
direction the Anschluports in the socle. Squeeze you the ROM fast in the
socle, then this otherwise destroys become could.

You can now the calculator in inverted order again
assemble.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when you Rev. 3 or 5 possession, must you modifications in ROM
carry out. Further details see you in the hint, the the ROM beiliegt.

2.3. Prepare the hard drive

after you now an Notfalldiskette generated and the new rom in yours
Amiga implemented have (so far you not already the correct had),
devote we us now the furniture the hard drive.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
basic is these step only notwenig, when you an new and with it
vacuously hard drive with the new system install want or when
really the emergency occurred is and your hard drive an
irreparable malfunction has.

Fundamental gives it two hard drives-Bussyteme for the AMIGA:

    .   AT-BUS
    .   SCSI

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
with the AT-bus-hard drives differs one still between IDE, ATA and
UltraATA, where the last-mentioned type the recent is.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
with SCSI-hard drives gives it the standard SCSI 1, 2, 3 (ultra-Wide) and 4
(ultra 2 Wide). Of it become in Amiga only SCSI 1, 2 and 3 bolstered.

2.3.1. IDE

IDE-hard drives are in the rule more easily to konfiguriueren. You are
but special on the Amiga much slower as SCSI-hard drives. The
systematics by IDE based on on one Master/Slave-topology, i.e. The boat-
hard drive must always the "Master" is. As "Slave" is normalweise the
CD-ROM or an other IDE-device defined.

On a IDE-bus permit always only maximally two hardware hang. If you
e.g. A 4-subject adapter for yours IDE-controllers possession, able you
till to four hardware (on two Kabelstrngen) anschlien.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
eighth ie at Anschulu the IDE-hardware always on the Polung. On one
side of IDE-cord ought he an red marked cable find.
This must at jack of IDE-device on the position "1" lie (is
normally-wise on the hard drive characterized). A false Polung can
to the destruction of IDE-device lead!

2.3.2. SCSI

SCSI is an very wide scattered partyline Partyline on the Amiga, then many
Amigas standard SCSI implemented have, SCSI is normalweise much
faster as IDE (SCSI1=10Mb/braised, SCSI2=20Mb/braised, UW-SCSI=40Mb/braised, U2W-SCSI=
80Mb/braised), for it are hard drives, CD-burner and CD-rom also around some
dearer.

SCSI is more pretentious to configure, but for it offers it also more
possibilities, how till to 14 hardware on a hank (bus). The hardware per
bus hang natural from the SCSI-standard off.

SCSI rebuilds on the UNIT-topology on, i.e. One configured the hardware
to "Units". The order is by it not relevantly, only to the digest
ought one e.g. The hard drives first (Unit 0 & 1) and the CD-ROM on
Unit 3 set. The "Units" ought one so be taken, that she for he
logical appear.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
The Unit "7" permit not allocates become, then the SCSI-controllers this Unit
allocates. It permit also no Doppelbelegungen the "Units" come forward, then
that system then probable not work is.

The beginning and the end of SCSI-rope must always "scheduled" is.
That is particularly by UW-SCSI weighty, then this without termination very
probable not work is. In best is it active
terminators to use, then this the data, the arrive again
give back and not fizzle out leave.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
you should also if possible the interference from different SCSI-standard
report, because the SCSI-controllers thereby on the lowest the existing
SCSI-penance in the system decelerated is.

Also by SCSI is on the Polung to respect. With UW-SCSI can one the
hardware not verpolen, then the cable only in an direction aufsteckbar are.
With SCSI 2 must one but at ribbon cable on the correct Polung
respect. In most cases are SCSI-Jabek gegeb Verpolung protected, but regrettably however
not always.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
the Benutzen from SCSI-adapter (e.g. Around SCSI-2-hardware on a UW-SCSI-bus
to connect) ought weitmglichst debared become, because this
in the first place the SCSI-bus brakes and secondly the SCSI-bus instabiler makes.

2.3.3. Fit the hard drive

building you hard drive in yours calculator an and close you she how
described on (ever after if it an IDE- or SCSI-device is). Now
should you the calculator commence, around the hard drive to configure.

Activating you yours calculator now with ein inserted Notfalldiskette and AmigaOS
3.9 CD-ROM. Doppelklicken you to the boot on the Diskettensymbol the
"Emregency-Disk" and commence likewise with a Doppelklick the HDToolbox
Program.

The actual config one hard drive runs in three they strode off:
1. Fit, 2. Partitionieren and 3. Formatting. The has go now this
steps systematic through:

2.3.3.1. Activating the HDToolbox

night the boot the HDToolbox from the Notfalldiskette, become you
requested the device driver to select, on the your hard drive
connected is.

In example choose we the "cybppc.device" and toggle on "Wide SCSI
adapter" in bottom edge. The brings about, that all 16 IDs the on these device
angeschlossenen hard drives on the existence one hard drive inspected
become. Is "Wide SCSI adapter" not active, e.g. At normal
"scsi.device" become merely the maximally 8 IDs inspected.

2.3.3.2. Step 1 - fit

towards the selection of device driver and click on "OK" become the bus
searched and the gefundenen hard drives in one list displayed.

Choose you the obversely hard drive from and press you now
"hard drive install". The HDToolbox is you in front of it warn, that the
content the plate destroys is. Squeeze you "OK". You become now
asked if an RDB generated become shall, press you "new".

Now opens he an new window. Squeeze you "harvest config" and
the HDToolbox reads the data the hard drive from. Now should
fabricator, Festplattenname etc. Filling is. Squeeze you now still
"fit". You reach then again on the Startbildschirm the
HDToolbox.

The hard drive is now installed and already automatic partitioniert.
You must so no one adjustments more carry out and able the HDToolbox
leave and direct with the formatting the hard drive leave
(step 3). You able now but also the point "hard drive
partitionieren" invoice and the division the plate kongrollieren and
if necessary alter.

2.3.3.3. Step 2 - Partitionieren

when you in the HDToolbox the point "hard drive partitionieren invoked
have, then appear the above Preferences. Ever to bigness the
Fesplatte are an or more partitions vorkonfiguriert. Those able
you so adopt.

The bigness the partitions able you but also with the
Schiebereglern alter. Now must you her Bootpartition only still
"bootbar" make (as far as you an Bootpartition fix will). Choose
you easy the Bootpartition above by the partitions from (ought now
blue is) and toggle "Bootbar" on (left next to the "Hinzu./Update"-
button).

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when an Partition "bootbar" made become shall, then must on each fall
the complete Partition (beginning and end) below the 4Gb-border lie.

The Fesplatte is is now fertif partitioniert, you must only still
"save" drkken. After this must you a restart of computer
carry out, when it not automatic happens.

The partitions should now on the Workbench-surface as
"Unformatiert" appear. Choose you this on and commence from the menu
"Icon" the entry "Disk formatting". Please use you
exclusive of the option "rapid" to the formatting, because this saves time
and is besides complete insufficient.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
with the formatting should you the partitions meaningful names give, the
the purpose the Partition correspond to. As standard has he for the system-
Partition "system" and for the job-Partition "Work" achieved.

Towards the formatting able you the hard drive use and the the new
AmigaOS 3.9 install.

Further info to the HDToolbox find you in a separate chapter.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
general information tips to hard drives

save you frequent the RDB ("Ridged Disk block" your hard drive on
a other data medium (e.g. An diskette) off. The RDB contains all
important basic settings. When he once by one
Festplattenoperation destroys is, have you no intervention more on the
data your hard drive.

The HDToolbox offers in the Tetelleisten-menu on the side a point "RDB
computer store" on. The companion there to is then the function "RDB load".
Save you by these contingency also alike the Mount-art off. Also
this function is over a Munpunkt offered.

Please think you at it, the RDB and the Mount-art by every one change the
hard drives-settings with the HDToolbox renewed to backup!

With hard drives is sufficient it, at formatting the option "rapid" to
choose. The Formatiervorgang runs then monumental faster off.

2.4. AmigaOS 3.9 install

after now the Notfalldiskette prepared is and possibly an new
hard drive formated became, open you ie CD-ROM "AmigaOS3.9" and
doppelklicken on the drawer OS-Version3.9.

Activating you the Installationsvorgang with Doppelklick on the Icon
"OS3.9 installing". The has ahead, at creation the Notfalldiskette, is
an newer onscreen open and the Installationsfenset in bottom
right edge of the screen displayed.

Here see you, next to the already beschribenen option "Notfalldiskette
produce", 6 another options, the in the following Beschrieben become:

OS3.9 update-installing over OS3.5

Ist already an OS3.5-Instllation on your hard drive existing and
want you this merely on OS3.9 update, is sufficient the selection these
option. Hereby become all changed parts of the program from OS3.5 and new
added applications and Systemnestandteile installed. Towards the
Instllation is an restart enforderlich.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
The installing is not carried out, when few as 20Mb
fixed-disk storage on the hard drive to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stand or when the
Kickstart 3.1 not installed is.

OS3.9 Vollinstallation over OS3.1 or on emptiness HD

Whlen you this option, when you an vacuously Partition your hard drive with
a system install want or when you an with OS3.1
installed Partition on OS3.9 update will. Also herewith is an
restart to the installing compulsary.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
The installing is not carried out, when few as 20Mb
fixed-disk storage on the hard drive to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stand or when the
Kickstart 3.1 not installed is.

Internet program's, Genesis, AWeb and EMailer

with the selection the installing the Internet-program's is zuncht
supervised, if already OS3.9 installed is. Is this not the fall, is
the procedure with one accordingly error message receipted. Fit
you then first of all OS3.9, how in the previous cut off described.

With the installing the Internet-program's is for every parcel discrete
asked, if it installed become shall or not. The TCP/IP-Stack
Genesis must installed become, around generally with the program AWEb or
a any other Internet-progam access to even that to
attain.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when you already an Einternet-parcel how for instance NetConnect
installed have, is it advisable the Internet-Instllation NOT
carry out. Activating you the installing all the same, is you an
more corresponding hint displayed and it your decision abandon, if
you the Instllation all the same carry out want.

PowerPC Support. WarpOS version 5.0

WarpOS is ever since appearance from AmigaOS 3.5 the standard-Treibersystem for
Dualprozessor-PowerPC-Turbokarten the firm Phase5/DCE Dellert. The new
version 5 offers some betterments and also support for already
announced applications how the PowerPC-macintosh-emulator iFusion.

Fit you this Treibersystem, when in you Amiga an such
PowerPC turbokarte installed is.

CD-ROM driver

the CD-ROM Treibersystem has an special position by the installing from
OS3.9. Finally must already an CD-ROM-driver in you system
installed is, around generally AmigaOS 3.9 from the CD install to
able. It is hence advisable existing driver not with it to
assign, then by the diversity available device driver not
guaranted become can, that the the AmigaOS 3.9 enclosed driver on
every system faultless work is.

Is the AmigaOS3.9-installing to the boot from the Notfalldiskette
through led, is the CD-ROM-driver from the Notfalldiskette automatic
on the picked Partition transfer and with it automatic
installed.

When you sure sin, that the AmigaOS3.9 CD-ROM-driver on yours system
serves, able you however with these Installationsoption other
boat-partitions as the, from the booted became, with a CD-ROM-driver
provide.

Languages Aktualisieren

the has by the AmigaOS3.9-Vollinstallation become you also by the selection
from "languages update" asked, which languages on your boat-
Partition installed become shall. With this able hind other
Sprachvarianten the system program installed become.

3. The Preferences the Workbench (Prefs)

The Workbench stands at AmigaOS the greatest part of user-inferface
there. Corresponding extensive are the Einstellmglichkeiten (English:
Preferences or short Prefs). The Preferences find he standard
in the directory "Prefs" on the system-Parition. You be able with it the
behavior of great in part of AMIGA-intrasystem bias and
appropriate yours Wschen adjust. e.g.:

    .   Sampling one keyboard assignment
    .   Tuning the wished language
    .   Re design the Workbench-screen display
    .   Re design the colors for the Workbench
    .   Re design the form of Mauspfeils
    .   Give of print page and of it attitude for the
        Grafikausgabe
    .   Configuring of modems
    .   Tuning from time and date

3.1. The "Prefs"-directory

The drawer "Prefs" contains the Preferences and the drawer "Presets"
(defaults).

The Preferences the "Prefs"-drawer

in the following art are the Editoren in the order listed, in
the she in these chapter explained become.

ASL                the Preferences for the ASL-Dateiauswahl (off OS3.9)

DefIcons           the Preferences for the competent definition from
                   default-pictograms (off OS3.9) for files the no
                   own pictograms possession.

Font (font) sampling the fonts for Piktogrammtexte, Screen-
                   and window-headings and for the Shell.

IControl           sampling differently Systemoptionen, e.g. The key
                   to the draw of screen.

Input (input)    tuning the Mausgeschwindigkeit, the
                   Wiederholungsgeschwindigkeit the keyboard and the
                   national-keyboard assignment.

Oertlich (land)      sampling from language, land and time zone.

Overscan           tuning the bigness of reading area for text and
(guard zone)      graphics.

Palette (colour)    re design the colors the Workbenchobjekte.

Pointer            re design the bigness, form and colour of Mauspfeils and of
(Mauszeiger)       Wartezeigers (Busypointer).

Printer (printer)  selection of printer driver for yours Drukker and the
                   accompanying options, e.g. Paper size and
                   Randeinstellungen.

PrinterGfx         tuning of print page for the giving out from graphics.
(Graphic printer)    Ist off OS3.5 an Bestandtel of "Printer"-Preferencess.

PrinterPS          taxes the giving out on PostScript-Drukkern.
(PostScript-
printer)

ReAction           here become settings for the new GUI-system
                   ReAction resolved to do (off OS3.5).

ScreenMode         sampling the screen resolution.
(Screenmode)

Serial (serial)   tuning the specifications for the serial
                   interface, the to the communicating with modems and
                   hardware-doings serves.

Sound              Festlegen of clay (Sound) for the acoustic signal
                   by Systemfehlern.

TIME (time)        tuning from date and time.

WarpOS             the Preferences for WarpOS (off OS3.9).

WBPattern (pattern) sampling and Erstellen from Hintergrundmustern for the
                   Workbench-window and -screens.

Workbench          here become fundamental settings of behavior
                   the Workbench adjusted (off OS3.5).

3.2. The defaults (Presets)

The drawer "Presets" is the Speicherort for defaults, the with the
separate Voreinstllern resolved to do become and special gespreichert
become. Every one Preferences disposes over the Menpunke: "project",
"defaults" and "settings". With help of menu "Project" able you
files with differently defaults computer store and load. That
enables you a expeditious change between differently
configurations, without that an restart of intrasystem necessary is.
Standard become this files in the drawer "Presets" (this
find you on the hard drive under SYS:Prefs/Presets) saved. You
able however on every one from you desired position saved become.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when you pictograms for this files create (through sampling from
"pictograms produce?"), able you the settings through undoing of
pictograms activate.  That saved you the call of respective ones
Preferencess.

When you in Preferencesn "save" to the save the adjustments
anklicken, become the settings under following path saved:

    SYS:Prefs/Env-archives/Sys/name.prefs

with it stands SYS: for the names of data medium, the the file contains,
and "name" for the names of specific Preferencess. With the system start
become the in the drawer "Env-archives" store settings
uses.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
with use of menu item "save as" commends it he, the
Vorgabedatei (Preset) under the angegebenen path to computer store.

3.3. The standard-menu the Preferences

with exception of time-Preferencess (tIME) disposes every one Preferences over
following menu: project, defaults and settings. Those shall in the
following short envisaged become.

3.3.1. Menu "project"

over the in the following described menu "project" able you the
settings of editor in one file computer store or ahead created
files open.

Undoing             shop the data one angegebenen file with defaults.

Save as      Angeben the file, in the the actual settings
                   as defaults saved become shall. In
                   Dialogwindow is in the drawer "Presets" an
                   standard-filename displayed. Re design you these names,
                   in case several Vorgabedateien for the editor uses
                   become.

Termination            termination of editor without save the adjustments.
                   Those option has the same function how "breaking off".

3.3.2. Menu "defaults"

over this menu able you ahead appropriated settings or.
Default settings wiederhelstellen. The following menu items stand you
to the zur ~ - at one's disposal.

On defaults       Zurcksetzen the settings of editor on the
disfavour       default settings of intrasystem

Auf at last        Zurcksetzen the settings of editor on the
savings      settings, the at last with "save" saved
                   become.

On previous     Zurcksetzen on the settings of editor at
condition              first undoing of editor

The menu "defaults" of Workbench-pattern-Preferencess (WBPattern) and of
Mauspfeil-Preferencess (Pointer) have following additional options:

Ausschneiden       copying of entirety area of expertise in the
                   buffer (Clipboard), thereafter discharge in the
                   advertisement.

Copying           copying of entirety area of expertise in the
                   clipboard.

Integrate           substitution of entirety area of expertise through the at last
                   ausgeschnittenen or replicated data from the
                   clipboard.

Discharge            discharge the data in the entirety area of expertise.

Withdrawals         undoing the zultzt carried out action.

Wiederhestellen    Stellt the at last widerrufenen condition again here.

Image load...      Undoing of Dateiauswahlwindows, in the the name
                   one Bilddatei entered become can, the as
                   Hintegrundmuster or -picture uses is.

With these menu items able you pattern and Mauspfeilbilder more easily
edit. Employ you the menu items "Ausschneiden", "copying" and
"Einfgen", around images from editor to a progam to transfer, the on
the clipboard seize can and the over more extensive
Zichenfunktionen disposes (e.g. The progam "IconEdit"). Employ you
"image load", around standard-IFF-bitmap-images in the editor to load.
(Images, the greater are as the area of expertise of editor, become neim
shop or. Integrate in the editor on the trailing edge or. On the right
side cropped.)

3.3.3. Menu "settings"

the menu "settings" contains the menu item "pictograms produce?",
With of it help you project-pictograms for Vorgabedateien computer store
able. When you e.g. Your Druckerspezifikationen in the file
"SYS:Prefs/Presets/Canon.prefs" computer store, appear the corresponding
pictograms in the window "Presets" (defaults). Click you to the activate
the settings these file the Icon double on.

3.4. WarpOS-Preferences (OS3.9)

a detailed description to these Preferences find you in the chapter
11.

3.5. DefIcons-Preferences (OS3.9)

with DefIcons able you for all Datatypes (e.g. .mp3, .iff, .jpg etc.)
the standard no Icon possession, an standard-Icon
define, which then an voreingestelltes progam actuates (e.g. IFF-
images with Multiview show leave). Thereby is the Workbench still
stronger and the workings monumental simplified. It must e.g. Not
more on the side an Bildanzeiger charged become, around an image to look,
but one doppelklickt easy the Icon of picture on and already
is it with the voreingestellten progam displayed.

Around DefIcons in you system einzubinden, lay you the DefIcons-
main program in the WBstartup-drawer. In addition must in the directory
"Prefs" the DefIcons-Preferences and in "ENV-archives/sys" must default-
pictograms (e.g. def_iff.info) be there. With the update- or
Vollinstallation from AmigaOS 3.9 is this already automatic
resolved to do.

The DefIconsPrefs-Preferences apportions he in two fields: "Datatypes" and
"actions".

3.5.1. Datatypess

here become in one list all use Datatypes displayed. Around a
new data type to create, press you on the button "New" below the
list. Around a bestehenden from the art to clean, press you
"remove". With the arrows, on the right next to the "remove"-button able
you the position of Dateityps change. Around he the defined
pictograms and the appropriated progam of Dateityps show to
leave, click you easy double on a Dateityp. Now must he
an Informationswindow open (how in the RAWBInfo chapter describe, am
mapping).

Left-hand in the Informationswindow see you the defined pictograms for the
Dateityp. When you now in the Informationswindow on the submenu
"pictograms" klickken is there an standard program specified (so far the
Icon from type "project" is). This standard program gives on, with
which progam the picked Dateityp invoked is (e.g. Multiview
by the Dateityp "IFF" or EditPad by "TXT"-files).

3.5.2. Actionen

right next to the Datatypesliste is the area "actions". Here become
the Vergleichsoperatoren of gewhlten Dateityps displayed, i.e. Here
become the pattern specified, whereby DefIcons the Dateityp firm found.

3.5.2.1. Add

here able you a Vergleichsoperator give. Here gives it following
comands:

comparison          here give you in the gleichnamigen input field the
                   character string on, the in the file on the under
                   "position" angegebenen place to find is ought.
                   Is "Sensitiv" picked, so is between grand- and
                   use of small letters unterschiden. Is an sign the
                   angegebenen strings not representable (it finds
                   he no key on the keyboard there to), so able you
                   the ASCII-worth of sign in hexadezimaler
                   notation give, e.g. "\xff" for decimal 255 or
                   "\x0a" for decimal 10.

Quest              with these comand able you direct in the file to
                   a particular codeword, the for these Dateityp
                   typical is, seek. Through selection from "Sensitiv" is
                   between grand- and use of small letters discriminated. Is
                   "blanks ignore" picked, so become
                   blanks and tabs the the to seeking
                   character string precede flashed, other sign
                   the with the character string no agreement have
                   lead to the breaking-off the quest. Also here able
                   hexadecimal worth with vorangehenden \x entered
                   become.

Filesize         here is to one particular bigness inspected. Credit
                   e.g. Appointed files always the same bigness, able
                   through this method also these files light an
                   DefIcon allocated become.

Pattern             here able you to a particular pattern in the
                   file names seek leave. When you e.g. "Pattern #?.iff"
                   at Dateityp "IFF" give, become all files the
                   with ".iff" end as IFF-images recognized. Those
                   process is sure very quick, is but e.g. By IFF-
                   picture without extension fustily.

Cover             here become the Schutzbits supervised. You able here
                   choose which Schutzbits one file steady or
                   excluded is must, with it this the ausgewhlten
                   Dateityp allied become can.

Or               with "or" knot you different operators
                   together, how e.g. By the Guide-format: "pattern
                   #?.guide" or "seek @file" that means, that the
                   to berprfende file either on ".guide" end must
                   or the character string "@file" in you hold is
                   must with it you as Guide-file recognized is.

Is ascii          berprft if the file an text file is or not.
                   The use these action is only for the ASCII-
                   Dateityp certain.

Makroklasse        is this action gesetz, so able possibly another
                   defined actions sure there to lead, that the
                   picked Dateityp recognized is, however is is
                   Icon first uses, when an subclass of
                   Datatypes also bereinstimmt and this self no
                   Icon owns.

3.5.2.2. Enfernen

action is from the list distant.

3.5.2.3. Learning...

Through sampling of counter appear an Dateidialog, there become you
solicited at least 2 files resemble model to select. On basis of
byte for byte arrangement is then an list from actions created, the
to the identification of ausgewhlten Dateityps used is.

Around the chops and changes to store press you please left back on the
Button "save".

3.5.3. The menu

the Titelleistenmen apportions he in three subassemblies:

3.5.3.1. Project

undoing             with it able you an Konfigurationsdatei load.

Attach            with it can an Konfigurationsdatei on the consisting of
                   Konfigurationsdatei appended become.

Speichem as...    Here able you an new Konfigurationsdatei
                   conserve.

Seeking             here able you the list to a Dateityp
                   rummage.

Next           put the quest on the actual position within the
                   Datatypesliste forth.

Over               copyright and author from DefIcons is here show.

Termination            Schliet the DefIcons-Preferences.

3.5.3.2. Defaults

on defaults       here is all again on the defaults reset.
Disfavour

on at last        it loads the file the at last store config.
Stored

on previous     Setz all on the condition before the change.
Condition

3.5.3.3. Icon

info        here able you the Infodialog of ausgewhlten
                   Dateityps invoice.

Editing          with this able you the Icon of gewhlten
                   Dateityps in the IconEdit load.

3.6. ASL-Preferences (off OS3.9)

Ab OS3.9 is the Preferences for the ASL-Auswahldialoge foothold component
of Betrievssystems. With the ASL-Preferences able you the bigness, position
and sorting the ASL-Dialogwindow fix.

Position

default setting
                   the has from OS defaulted.

In window         Zentriert the ASL-Dateiauswahl in the window of
centers         program, the she open has.

On onscreen     Zentriert the ASL-window on the Bildschrim.
Centers

Oben left in the      it opens the ASL-window above-left in the window.
Window

Oben on the right on    it opens the ASL-window above-left on the onscreen.
Onscreen

Mauszeiger         it opens the ASL-window direct in Mauszeiger.

Left corner         The Randbreite for the left side (only bie "in window
                   centers" and "Auf onscreen centers").

Waiter corner         The Randbreite for the above lying edge (only by "in
                   window centers" and "Auf onscreen centers").

Bigness              default setting: how from OS defaulted.

Relative            breadth and height able with the Preferencesn free
                   adjusted become.

Breadth             The breadth in %

height               The height in %

with the folgeden three settings is the giving out within of
Dateiauswahlwindows fixed:

assortment to     The giving out can to name, date and bigness assorted
                   become.

Directories      here is the processing the directories fixed.
                   Directories able "in beginning", "in end" or
                   "einsortiert" personated become.

Sortierreihenfolge The Sortierreihenfolge can "ascending" or
                   "descending" is.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------

Am best is it, the function "position" on "Mauszeiger" to stand, then
this in most comfortable and fastest to attend is.

3.7. The Workbench-Preferences (off OS3.5)

this Preferences serves to the Festlegen some kind of more fundamental parameter for
the Workbench: The list "hid hardware" left in the window contains an
itemization all physical drives on you calculator (i.e.
Hard drive partitions, CD-ROM drives, etc.).

When you the tick left from respective ones Laufwerksnamen set, so is
this drive not on the Workbench displayed, stays but furthermore
over the CLI, from Dateidialogwindown, etc. Obtainable.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------

you able this option use, around e.g. Drives to hide, the only
temporary data hold or on the you from the Workbench not
seize will or. Must. To the example an Festplattenpartition of
Mac-emulator.

In section pictograms able you the following options adjust:

no one              when this option active is, so become neither NewIcon-
Farbpiktogramme    pictograms, still the Icon-data from OS3.5-
                   pictograms uses, but the 8-coloured
                   pictograms, the in OS3.1 and earlier versions
                   standard were.

No one NewIcons     when this option active is, so become the NewIcon-
                   data from pictograms older AmigaOS-versions
                   ignored and instead of this the respective ones OS-standard-
                   Icon uses, in case existing.

MagicWB colors     with these option become the first 8 coloured chalk with the
(OS3.9)            familiarize MagicWB colors vorbelegt, so that MagicWB
                   pictograms in the correct colors displayed become.

Quality           this menu deposits fast, how the colors for the
                   pictograms picked become shall. Ever superior the
                   assurance level is, the you here choose, the better
                   see the pictograms in the representation from,
                   but stand simultaneous also few colors to the
                   zur ~ - at one's disposal, the from applications programmes on the
                   Workbench used become able.

                   One detected this excessive Farbbelegung e.g. At it,
                   that the IconEdit a own Screen at activating
                   opens. Re design you the quality on "Schlecht" is he
                   possibly again on the Workbench displayed become.

Rahmengre        this menu deposits globally fast, which Rahmengre
                   pictograms use shall, or. That for pictograms
                   generally no frame to use is. Please note
                   you, that you pictograms produce able, the also by
                   eingeschaltetem globalen frame self no frame
                   have.

Icon in      to the selection stand here "graphic-" or "other
(OS3.9)            memory". With this lay you fast, if Piktogrammdaten
                   so-called chip-Mem acknowledgement shall or in fasts-ram
                   permit. Natural serves the whole only,
                   when you an Grafikkarte installed have. With the
                   use normally Amiga graphic on AGA or ECS chip-
                   sentences has the attitude "Icon in other
                   memory" no result.

No one Titelleiste  with this toggle you the Titelleiste the Workbench from
(OS3.9)            and the Hintegrundbild takes the complete height of
                   Workbench-screen an. With click on the raked
                   Maustaste appear the Titelleiste so you
                   pressed hold.

No one              Ab oS3.5 became for Workbench Festplattenwindow the in
Fllstandsanzeige  lefthand windowrand disposed Fllstandsanzeige
(OS3.9)            pp of einfhren. The option "no one Fllstandsanzeige" leaves
                   you now the choice, if she displayed become shall or
                   not.

Pop stack-    here able you the pop stack (Stack)-bigness for
bigness              program's fix, the without Icon from the
                   Workbench from restarted become. With all other is
                   the Stapelgre in the respective ones Icon defined.

Keyboard-selection-  here able you the time in seconds fix, to
delay        the the buffer for the keyboard-controlled
                   Piktogrammauswahl against depleted is and an
                   Tastatureingabe as Neueingabe and not as
                   Forsetzung of Piktogrammnamens considered is.

3.8. ReAction-Preferences (off OS3.5)

ReAction is the graph surface off AmigaOS 3.5 and can with the
accordingly Preferences yours request adapted become. To this stand the
following options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

Refresh-kind        here stand you an, to which method the
                   Bildschirminhalt built up (refresh) become shall.

                   In the attitude "smart" become blanketed
                   windowteile, to the Nachvorne-Holen, very quick
                   again picked up, for it is but the Speicherbedarf
                   superior.

                   In the attitude "simple" is few memory
                   required, for it lasts the refreshing longer.

Emergency-           credit you in the font-Preferences a font
font        elective, the so great is, that appointed window not
                   more on the onscreen fit wren, so attempted
                   ReAction, the windowerneut under use this
                   font to open. From diemes ground should you
                   also a relative lower-case font as Fallback
                   Zeichensatez auswlen.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
an click on the Default-button extinguishes the content of emergency-font
field, so that the internal emergency-font from ReAction uses
is.

Hintergrundmuster  in diemsem field able you the path to a image
                   enter, the in the background from ReAction-window
                   displayed qweswn aoll.

Headings      here stand you the font an, the for
                   Gruppenberschriften, how e.g. "Window", "group" and
                   "look" in the ReAction-Preferences uses is. An
                   click on the <Vorgabe>-button extinguishes the actual
                   attitude, so that the standard-font for
                   Gruppenberschriften uses is.

Adjustment        those menu deposits fast, if Gruppentitel left adjusted,
                   centered or right aligned placed become.

3D caption     with these switch able you the stereoscopic
                   look the Gruppenberschriften on- and disable.

Colour              with these buttons able you the colour for the
                   Gruppenberschriften choose. When you on the
                   Farbplatte the Workbench no one adjustments resolved to do
                   have, are this black, white and blue.

Style               with these menu able you between different
                   defaults for the look from ReAction-basierten
                   program choose.

Clearance           in these field able you fix, how dense the
                   separate elements from ReAction-uses
                   along lie shall. It acts he herewith
                   not around setier distances but around appointed
                   Abstandsstufen, where less values less distances
                   mean.

3D-Rollbalken      when these switch active is, become the Rollbalken
                   from wiles stereoscopic designed.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
test you easy the different styles from and settle you he
for the, the you in best pleasing or with the you in best work
able.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
The adjustments on these settings have only aftermath on
program's, the on the Oberflchenbibliothek from ReAction base. All
other program's are of it not affected.

3.9. CacheCDFS

CacheCDFS is an strong CD-ROM-Filesystem, the it you
allows, CD-rom the most different formats to read. It is with the
OS3.9-Installer on you system installed, after this have you multifaceted
possibilities, the intervention yours intrasystem on CD-ROM adjust and to
optimalize.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
consider you please, that some the options and settings from
CacheCDFS influence on the stability yours intrasystem have able. When you
the effect one option or attitude on you system not exactly
know, should you she unchanged leave.

It follow now explanations to the most the verfgbaren options.
Some options shall here not closer explained become, because she to
special are. The not beschriebenen options are in the social intercourse also some
censorious, hence should he only user with them concern, the an
comprehensive knowledge over device driver and Dateisysteme possession.

3.9.1. The CacheCDFS-Preferences

activating you now the CacheCDFS-Preferences "Prefs" on you boat-
drive. Thereupon there opens he the following window:

whole left in the window is he an list, in the the verfgbaren CD-
ROM-drives listed become. It become only the CD-ROM-drives
listed, the CacheCDFS as Filesystem use. Click you now on
a entry (with great probability is he only an entry
in the list. You become notice, that the options in the window, the before
the click in sucked. "Geisterschrift" personated become, now normal
personated become and so active and eligible are. The means, that the
in the wider course from you vorgenommenen settings on the elective
CD-ROM-drive work.

Below the list is he an selection, the normally on
"Multi-Session" switched is. CacheCDFS can as well as so. "Multiple-Session"
as also "Multi-vom by von from"-CDs read. Multiple-Session beduetet, that the CD-ROM
in several, from each other proper unconnectedly field created became.
Stands the selection in CacheCDFS on "Multi-Session", become this "part"
the CD-ROM on the Workbench so personated, as would it he around an
sole, zusammenhngendes file-directory on the CD-ROM act.
Normally finds he Multi-Session consideration by selbstgebrannten
CD-rom, the to and to composed become, i.e. e.g. Became first
an directory on the CD-R blazed, then the Session closed and
later an further directory on the CD-R written etc.
Normally must one hence between the Session switch, around on all
contents the CD-ROM seize to able. With Multi-Session can one he
the changeover save and on all contents the CD-ROM how usual
seize.

"Multiple-vom by von from" is an concept, that in very soon with partitions on one
hard drive commensurable is. Indeed acts it he also here around more
"Sessions", the but all defferent "names" carry, commensurable
with the Diskettennamen. In "Multi-vom by von from"-mode appear this Sessions
on the Workbench then every for he as own, virtual drive.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
please note you by the building one "Multi-vom by von from"-CD-ROM, that
this from adereren Dateisystemen, e.g. Windows, in the rule not read
become able. Those become e.g. Only on the first volume seize
able.

Right next to the list find he some switch ("BootPri" and
under), the the speed and ah the stability yours intrasystem
bias able. Normally needs no one the here incorporated
values and no the options changed to become. The speed is
during the installing from CacheCDFS already on you system optimized,
the stabilittsbeeinflussenden options on you system adapted.

Consider you, that here frivolous resolved to do settings great
problems cause able. Change you this options and values only,
when you whole exactly know, what you do!

As next follows the option "quest first to". Those selection is only
by so-called "Hybrid-CDs" meaningful usable. "Crossbred-CDs"hold data
in differently format, most known example is an CD, the
as well as for PC as also for Mac usable is. On the PC are most only the
data obtainable, the in the format "ISO-9660" on the CD discarded become. On
a Mac however sees one only the content the CD, the in the Mac HFS-Fomat
discarded became. With "quest first to" able you choose, on which part
one Hybrid-CD you preferred seize want.

"SCSI direct" - those option should you with care treat. You has
strong only an, when problems at intervention on CD-ROM occur.
Normally is this function switched off and needs in the most
cases also not active become (the is hanging from use
Host-adapter and of it driver-software).

"Without Changelnt" affect the behavior at change from CDs. Shall you
Amiga the change one CD not automatic recognize, should you this
option plug. Acknowledges the Amiga the change then how from
floppy usual, computer store you the attitude. Worse luck has the
option the disadvantage, that the Systemperformance an little harmed
is. Those option is normally only by very old Host-Adptern or
more obsolete driver-software necessary.

"Engine from", "Ruhib", those options determine, if the CD-drive to
a read access the engine the arbor whole disable shall or only the
speed of Spindelmotors lower shall. The most CD-ROM-drives
more modern make react but not more on this options, then
she already obversely mechanisms implemented have.

The group "cover" serves there to, the advertisement and evaluation the so-called
"cover-bits" globally to control. To the subject "cover-bits" should you
in the "AmigaDOS"-guide on the AmigaOS-3.9-CD consult. There is then
also the signification the cover-bits explains. The in CacheCDFS Prefs
use cover-Bit-notations are with those in the AmigaDOS identical.

"Files in lower case" worrys to activation for it, that by the
advertisement of contents one CD the file names exclusive of in
lower case displayed become, independent of it, how the file names
on the CD discarded become.

"Drives in lower case" serves how by "files in
lower case", only become here the Diskettennamen (by "Multi-vom by von from"-
CDs also the names the separate Sessions) in lower case displayed.

"Konvertiere first sign" transforms capital letters in lower case and
Amiga-foreign Zeichenkodierungen in obversely Amiga-Zeichenkodierungen.
Those commutation follow only at first Ziechen of file names. The
other sign bleilen unsolicited. CDs in a such format are
but very seldom to encounter.

"Automatic Kleinschreiben" - is an CD in the drive inlaid, the
not in the special Amiga-format created became, become the sign all
file names automatic by the advertisement in lower case converted. Is
the CD in the Amiga-own format created been, become the file names
exact so displayed, how she on the CD discarded are.

"Little one RockRidge names" - then RockRidge-format is an special Amiga-
format and can from other Computern not read become.

"RockRidge grand-/use of small letters" - Erlabut the use from grand- and
use of small letters in file names.

"No one Joliet names" - the Joliet-format is an special Windows-
format, the also long file names untersttz. With the naming has
Joliet, ever to standard, some austerities.

"No one fhrenden Punke" - shall he on the one insert CD files
find, whose names with a point begins, is by activation these
option these point by all Zugriffsarten ignored. It is then so, as
would the point in the file names not exist.

"MSDOS file names permit" - MSDOS knows in the rule only the so-called
8+3 file names, i.e. 8 sign for the names plus 3 for the enhancement.

"Mac HFS" - Mac HFS is an special macintosh-format.

Whole back in the window find you from left to really still following
switch:

"Speichem" - The for the elective CD-ROM-drive vorgenommenen
settings become saved and by a restart of intrasystem
automatic for this drive again activates.

"Use" - The vorgenommenen settings become for the elective
drive activates but not saved. With the next restart of
intrasystem worth again the settings, the at last saved been
are.

"Breaking off" - Verwift the vorgenommenen settings and schlit the
window from CacheCDFS. It worth the settings, the to a
"Speichem" or "Benutzen" at last active were.

3.10. Font-Preferences (Font)

with the font-Preferences (Font) able you font, -attribut
and -size the fonts fix, the for the Benutzerschnittstelle
of Amiga uses become.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
in unite uses are fast default fonts adjusted. The
settings in the font-Preferences (Font) have then no
aftermath on this fonts.

With help the three field able you the to alter Textart choose.

Workbench-         font for the lettering from pictograms in
Icon-text    Workbench-window alter. Only for this Textart able
                   text- and background color elective become.

System-default-    font for the advertisement from data, e.g. In the
text               Workbench-Ausgabewindow and in the mode "content list
                   to names" alter.

Onscreen-texts   font alter, the for menu, Titelleisten and the
                   most Dialogwindow uses is.

Debit the font for more Textarten changes become, must you the
fonts one after the other alter. To this must you however the window
"font-Preferences (Font)" not leave.

Ought the adjustments for the actual meeting and later meeting
saved become, choose you to the clasps of window "font-
Preferences (Font)" "save" from. With selection from "Benutzen" worth
the adjustments only for the actual meeting. Towards selection one these
options is the window closed, and the computer attempted, the
Workbench automatic the Einsttellungen appropriate reset. You
become requested, all project-, progam- and Shell-window to
close. Disk- or Schubladenwindow able open remained.

Choose you "breaking off" from, around the window "Ziechensatz-Preferences (Font)"
without activate the adjustments to leave.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
The change of font for Workbench-Icon-text makes an
clearance all pictograms in all geffneten window needed.
Choose you the menu item "Workbench/all update" from, around the
previous position the pictograms wiederherzustellen.

3.10.1. Font-Auswahlwindow

in the three font-Auswahlwindown become the verfgbaren
fonts and character sizes (in point) as soon as the actual font
for the picked Textart displayed.

All Zeichanstze able for Workbench- and vdu display uses
become. For standard-system-text must however an so-called "monospaced"
font uses become, e.g. Topaz or Courier. With these
fonts have all sign the same breadth.

With help the Rolleiste or the Rollpfeile able you through the list the
verfgbaren Zeichenstz browse. Show you to the sampling of sign
on the wished font and click you him with the Auswahltaste
on. Subsequent choose you an size of type from the aufgelisteten bulks
from or give you the new bigness an.

In font-Auswahlwindow for Workbench-pictograms-text able you
with help of Blttersymbols "mode" the colour for text or. The colour for
text and Zeichenhintergrund ("text + field") give:

text:              when you by "mode" the option "text" choose, is
                   the text in the colour displayed, the in the accompanying
                   field picked became. The background stays
                   diaphanous.

Text + field:       with selection from "text + field" able you an colour for
                   background give. When you this option choose,
                   is the text independent from Hintergrundmuster of
                   screen always legibly. Click you to the re design the
                   text- and background color an colour in the display panel
                   next to the field for "text" and "Hintergrd." On.
                   Eighth you thereupon, that you two defferent colors
                   choose. Otherwise is the text later not legibly.

The number the verfgbaren colors is through the use Workbench-
Bildschirmmodus fixed. The each use colors become over the
colour-Preferences (palette) fixed. The for the Workbench use
colors able only in the colour-Preferences "palette" changes become.

3.11. The IControl-Preferences

with the IControl-Preferences able you Systemeinstellungen alter (e.g.
The Sondertaste to the draw of screen and the filter for the
Texteingabefeld).

3.11.1. Screen draw

over the Auswahlfelder for "screen consider" able you next to or instead
the <linke Amiga>-key other Sondertasten to the draw of screen
give. Click you to the sampling one key the corresponding Auswahlfeld
on.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
that commends he, when for instance in a user program the
left Amiga-key and the Auswahltaste (mouse) other functions serve.
In general is an change here not necessary.

3.11.2. Schirmversatz by menu

those option is for user thought, the with screen work, the
greater are as the reading area of monitor (virtueller Screen). In
the rule appear the Workbench-menu left above on the onscreen.
Is the left edge of screen not uncover and became "Schirmversatz
by menu" activates, is the Workbench-onscreen at squeeze the
Mentaste so deferred, that you on the menu seize able. The
onscreen stays only so deferred, how the Mentaste pressed
be expected to is.

3.11.3. Filter Texteingabefeld

over the option "filter Texteingabefeld" is specified, if Steurzeichen
in Texteingabefeldern as normal sign or as Editierbefehle
interpreted become. Under a control character understands one an
key combination (in the rule the key <Ctrl> and an
alphabetic key), with whose help normally an appointed function
invoked is.

The following Standardsteuerzeichen become to the input from text uses:

Ctrl-M             Dient derselbern function how the enter key.

Ctrl-H             Lscht the sign left next to the cursor (serves
                   the same function how the Rcktaste).

Ctrl-X             Lscht an detailed row.

Ctrl-r.p.m.             Lscht all sign left next to the cursor.

Ctrl-K             Lscht all sign from cursor till to the Ender the row.

Cursor to left  put the cursor around an sign to left.

Custor to on the right put the cursor around an sign to on the right.

Ctrl-A             Stellt the cursor on the Zeilenanfang.

Ctrl-Z             Stellt the cursor on the end of line.

Is the option "filter Texteingabefeld" activates and is of these
control character entered, when the cursor he in a nichtnumerischen
field is, has the control character the above called function. Is the
filter not activates, is the control character in the entered
character string absorbed. On the onscreen appear control character as
above-board rectangle or as other sign, the not to the
standard-font character heard.

Also independent from the attitude for "filter Texteingabefeld" able
you anytime control character in an Texteingabefeld enter. Holding you
there to the key <Ctrl> and the <linke Amiga>-key pressed and press you
the obversely alphabetic key.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
in window with several Texteingabefeldern able you the cursor through
squeeze the skip key in the next field stand. In these window
must you always the <linke Amiga>-key and the <Tabulatortaste> press,
around an Tabulatorzeichen in an Texteingabefeld to enter.

3.11.4. Flickering Vermeiden

through the option "flickering avoid" is hindered, that by a in the
background existing onscreen the Zeilensprungdarstellung activates
is, when an davorliegender onscreen how an Rollo to back pulled
is. With default setting is this option activates.

3.11.5. Mode transfer

through the option "mode adopt" is the Softwarefunktion to the
Vermeiden the Zeilensprungdarstellung (eng. Software Deinterlacing
Feature) controlled, the on Amiga-Computern with WATER-chip-setting to the
zur ~ - at one's disposal stands. With selection from "mode adopt" able through
uses open PAL- and NTSC-screens automatic so adapted
become, that an flimmerfreier Bildschirmmodus uses is. With
Videoarbeiten commends it he, this option to inactivate. Further
informations to these subject find you in you original Workbench-
guide in the chapter 7 or on the OS3.9-CD.

3.11.6. 1:1 Seitenverhltnis (OS3.9)

those new functionality brings about, that the aggrandizement-symbol in the
window frame now scner and proporationaler Aussieht. On Grafikkarten
was it often interfering, that the bottom Schieberegler in the window frame and the
Vergrenungs-symbol very flat with a Seitenverhltnis from 1:2
displayed became. The has the bottom mapping shows, sees it now essential
geflliger from.

3.12. Input-Preferences (Input)

over the input-Preferences (Input) able you the Arbeitsgeschwindigkeit
for the mouse and the keyboard alter un the keyboard assignment choose.

3.12.1. Mouse speed

over the Schieberegler "Mausgeschwindigkeit" able you the relative
speed of Mauspfeils on the onscreen in bezug on the
speed give, with the the mouse on the table deferred is.
Ever faster he the arrow on the onscreen animates, the few place
and pains is at shift the mouse enforderlich.

You able between three Mausgeschwindigkeiten choose: 1, 2 and 3.
With it stands 1 for the lowest, 3 for the highest speed.
Draw you to the re design the Schieberegler "Mausgeschwindigkeit", till the
desired worth displayed is. The Mausgeschwindigkeit is forthwith by
the attitude active, so that you the speed without quitting of
editor try out able. The Standardwert is 3.

3.12.2. Mouse acceleration

The function "Mausbeschleunigung" is uses, around the Mauspfeil quick
over great screen areas postpone to able, the arrow but
simultaneous by less distances exact ctrl to able. Ever faster
the Mauspfeil deferred is, the superior is its speed. In
the default setting is this option not activates.

3.12.3. Blueprint Doppelklick

with the Schieberegler "blueprint Doppelklick" lay you fast, how quick the
Doppelklicken the Auswahltaste happen must.

You able values in the area from 1 till 200 enter. In field "Doppelklick
demonstrate" is the period, the the ausgewhlten worth complies,
demonstrated, in that for the specified period an shade
displayed is. The Standardwert is 75 (i.e. An blueprint from approx. 1
second).

3.12.4. Delay by Tastenwiederholung

The most buttons ferfgen over an automated Wiederholungsfunktion,
the abert first to one selectable Verzgerungszeit inserts. With help
of Schiebereglers "delay" able you the delay for the
Tastenwiederholung adjust.

Next to the Schieberegler is the actual worth displayed. The range of values
lies between 0.02 and 1.50 seconds. The Standardwert is 0,6 seconds.

3.12.5. Speed for Tastenwiederholung

with help of Schiebereglers "speed" lay you the
speed fast, with the buttons to the anfnglichen delay
widerholt become.

The range of values between 0,24 and 0 seconds. The Standardwert is 0,05
seconds.

3.12.6. Keyboard test

with help of field "Tastaturtest" able you the settings for the
delay or. Speed the Tastenwiederholung as soon as the
keyboard assignment try out.

Choose you "Tastaturtest" from and hold you an the alphabetischen
buttons the keyboard pressed. In field "Tastaturtest" is the the key
obversely sign the ausgewhlten keyboard assignment appropriate
zngezeigt. With it recognize you direct the actual settings for the
delay/speed the Tastenwiederholung.

3.12.7. Keyboard assignment

in the list "keyboard assignment" able you the for you landesspezifisches
system convenient keyboard assignment choose. With selection the direct
keyboard assignment complies this the lettering the separate buttons.
That enables you a expeditious intervention on the landesspezifischen
special character for your language. When you no USA-keyboard use,
able you Akzenttasten for letters with Akzentzeichen use. In
chapter 10.1.6 "KeyShow" the Workbench-hint find you informations
to Akzenttasten.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when you no Standardbelegung for USA-keyboards use, must you
the obversely keyboard assignment/keyboard activate. They are you not
sure, which keyboard assignment/keyboard to use is, turn you he
on yours trader.

When you an appointed keyboard assignment choose, is the corresponding
file in the drawer "Devs/Keymaps" (hardware/Tastaturbelegungen)
activates. To the sampling one occupancy click you this in the input-
Preferences (Input) on.

In the following table are the Tastaturbelegungen and whose mark
in the Tastaturbelegungsliste listed:

keyboard assignment   mark in list

gb                 Britisch

cdn                Canadian Francais

dk                 Dansk

D                  german

usa2               Dvorak

e                  Espanol

and following page                  Francais

ignoring                  Italiana

waiting                  Norsk

po                 Portgus

ch2                Switzerland

ch1                Suisse

braised                  Svenskt

if the for you erfoderliche keyboard assignment not in the list
hold is, means this, that the keyboard assignment in the drawer
"Devs/Keymaps" not existing is. Fit you to the Beheben this
problem the enforderliche keyboard assignment. Lead you there to following
operation steps from:

1.  Undoing you first of all the drawer "Storage" and adjacent the
    drawer "Keymaps" (Tastaturbelegungen).

2.  Draw you the requisite Icon in the drawer
    "Devs/Keymaps" (hardware/Tastaturbelegungen).

Subsequent able you the desired keyboard assignment in the input-
Preferences (Input) activate. To the recitations the keyboard assignment able
you the progam "KeyShow", the he in the drawer "tools" is,
use.

3.13. National-Preferences (Locale)

over the national-Preferences (Locale) able you the language choose, in
the the texts for menu, dialogs and error reports on the AMIGA
displayed become. The default setting is "USA English".

Your landesspezifischen settings work he on following functions
from:

text               over the national-Preferences (Locale) able you the
                   language for following elements choose:
                   Bildschirmtitel, windowtitel, menu, Dialogwindow and
                   messages.

Pocket calculator     the Tastenblock for the pocket calculator complies the
(Calculator)       ausgewhlten land and the accompanying language. The
                   Dezimalzeichen can e.g. An comma or an point is.

Clock                the format the angegebenen time complies the
                   lokalen standard for you land and the picked
                   language.

Date              the format of angegebenen date complies the
                   lokalen standard for you land and the picked
                   language.

Date/time in the   the format the time and of date in
directory        Verzeichnislisten correspond to the standard for you
                   land and the picked language.

Quantitative             the format from quantitative complies the standard for you
                   land and the picked language. The
                   Tausendertrennzeichen can e.g. An point or an
                   blanks is.

3.13.1. Employ of national-Preferencess

the national-Preferences (Locale) enables you the selection yours
national, the time zone and the prefers languages.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
with the installing the software on the hard drive, able you an
language only for the Installationsvorgang choose. As soon as you the
computer new commence, is however for the Workbench again english as
Standardsprache adjusted. Choose you in the window "national-Preferences
(Locale)" the language from, the you by the tglichen work use
want.

Choose you during the installing the Workbench-software all languages
from, the later uses become shall. When you however from fault an
language forget, able you the absent language later with the
installer from the CD install.

In Auswahlfeld "Verfgbare languages" are the languages listed, the to the
time on you computer installed are. Through Anklicken the respective ones
language in the Auswahlfeld able you the languages give, the you preferred
use. Each language, the you anklicken, appear in the field "favoured
languages".

Choose you the languages in the order the Verwendungshufigkeit from.
It appears the in hufigsten appropriated language not on first place in the
field "favoured languages", choose you "languages clean" from.
Subsequent choose you renewed your prefers languages from. Is no
preferred language specified, is english as Standardsprache uses.

Uses, the on the landesspezifischen functions of Amiga
seize, take the field "favoured languages" the to appropriating
language. Stands on you computer the first called language not to the
zur ~ - at one's disposal, is the next (in the computer available) language from this
list uses. Is no the aufgefhrten languages installed, is the
Standardsprache uses, most english.

In field "land" able you you land choose. Your selection has
aftermath on the format from Zeitangeben, date and quantitative.

Over the selection in the field "land" become following parameter fixed:

.   Landesname

.   Landestelefonvorwahl

.   Telefonnummernformat

.   Units of measure

.   Combined/unconnectedly time-/specified date (Langform)

.   Combined/unconnectedly time-/specified date (short form)

.   Zahlenformat

.   Whrungsformat (credit)

.   Whrungsformat (debit)

.   Currency symbol

.   International currency symbol

.   Also the in OS3.9 new introduced Internet-Provider-list is hereof
    affected. With the Internet-installing is you so always aptly
    to you land also an Internet-Provider list offered.

Click you to the tuning the time zone the correspond to area on the
Weltkarte on. In accompanying display panel is the difference to the GMT-time
(Greenwich Mean tIME) specified. Those attitude is where appropriate. From unite
uses uses. From the Workbench is she however not
considered.

Choose you to the save the landesspezifischen settings "save"
from. Ought the adjustments the landesspezifischen settings only for
the actual meeting uses become, choose you "Benutzen" from. The
Workbench-menu, the Titelleiste and the Disk-window become forthwith in the
ausgewhlten language displayed. Eventually gestarteten program's.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
program's how "Clock" (clock) and "IconEdit", the already restarted become,
remained first of all in the original language. With it an progam, the
landesspezifisch adapted become can, in the prefers language
displayed wurd, must this language at undoing of program activates
is.

3.14. Guard zone-Preferences (Overscan)

over the "guard zone-Preferences" (Overscan) able you yours onscreen
increase. With more corresponding attitude is the guard zone outside
of actual Monitorbildschirms for the onscreen uses. The is
particularly for Videoanwendungen interesting, where one a visible
andersfarbigen frame around the actual reading area avoid want.

In the list the monitor-kinds are the Monitortreiber listed, the to the
time activates are. Monitor file in the drawer "DEVS:monitor"
(hardware/monitors) become at system start automatic activates. Each
monitor-kind serves to the control sucked. "Tty groups" (i.e. One row
from Bildschirmmodi).

When you the Ranbereichswerte for an appointed monitor-kind alter, necessary
this change for all modes with these monitor-kind. Ought the
Randbereichswerte for an monitor-kind changes become, choose you the
monitor-kind from the shortlist from. The picked group is
highlighted. Chapter 7 of original Workbench-manual page contains wiles
with the admissive Maximalwerten for the guard zones by the separate
Bildschirmmodi.

The differently dimensions the screens become on the right in the window
displayed. The bulks become in Bildpunkten specified. With it stands the
first worth for the breadth, the second worth for the height of screen.

With PAL- or NTSC-groups become the bulks for standard-HiRes-
screens (modes with high resolution) specified. With selection from
"Multiscan" appear the bulks for a fecundity-onscreen without
Zeilensprungdarstellung. With other Bildschirmmodi within one
Monitorgruppe work he the settings proportional to the
angegebenen Bildschirmmodi from.

The following Bildschirmabmessungen become displayed:

Minimalgre       Standardgre without guard zone

Textgre          Aktuelle Textgre with guard zone

Grafikgre        Aktuelle Grafikgre with guard zone

Maximalgre       Maximal admissive bigness with guard zone (by text or
                   graphics)

3.15. Colour-Preferences (palette)

with help of colour-Preferencess (palette) able you the colors for the
Workbench alter.

With Amiga-Computern with WATER-chip-setting become on the lefthand side of
window "colour-Preferences (palette)" the four or eight actual
Workbench-colors in the Auswahlfeld displayed. Over it out appear an
Farbrad with Helligkeitsanzeige and Schieberegler as soon as three colour-
Schieberegler. Ever to attitude in the menu "colour-Schieberegler" follow
over this Schieberegler an RGB-attitude (RGB: red, green, blue) or
an FSH-attitude (FSH: tint, saturation, brightness). The default
is RGB.

In right part of colour-Preferencess (palette) is an Blttersymbol for
the Farbmodus disposed. This has the both modes "Mehrfarbenmodus" and
"4-colour-mode". The latter serves the attitude from only four Workbench-
colors. The mode is the use Editoren and uses
appropriate to select.

The window "colour-Preferences (palette)" contains following nine Mensymbole,
for the you the colors separate choose able:

.   Background

.   Text

.   More important text

.   Brightness edges

.   Dark edges

.   Titelbalken acting window

.   Titltexte acting window

.   Menu-background

.   Menu-text

below these list with Workbench-element is an Farbauswahlfeld
with four or. Eight colors agezeigt. This field complies the
Farbauswahlfeld upside of Farbrades.

Ever to Bildschirmmodus, breadth and height, the over the Bildschirrmodus-
Preferences (ScreenMode) adjusted become, is in the bottom area of
window "colour-Preferences (palette)" an Beispielwindow displayed. In
these window become the Farbnderungen immediate zngezeigt. Is the
Beispielwindow not displayed, appear instead of of it the symbol
"example show...". Click you this symbol on, around the Beispielwindow
with the new ausgewhlten colors to call. Through Anklicken able you in
these Beispielwindow single elements choose, whose colors changes
become shall.

Click you the following on, around an colour or. An element for the change
to select:

.   An Farbfeld in a the both Farbauswahlfelder

.   An element in the list with the Mensymbolen

.   An element in the Beispielwindow

with the following four components able you the colors or. Whose
tint alter:

.   Farbschieberegler in the RGB-mode

.   Farbschieberegler in the FSH-mode

.   Farbrad

.   Schieberegler next to the Farbrad

The change the settings for white and black can aftermath on
the stereoscopic formation the Bildschirmsymbole have. The colors,
through the black compensates is, must always darker is as the
Ersatzfarben for white.

Walk you to the re design one colour with help of Farbrades how follows before:

1.  Click you with the Auswahltaste an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld
    upside of Farbrades or. Below the list with the Workbench-
    element on.

2.  Show you on the Helligkeitsanzeige in the Farbrad (the highlighed
    point within of Farbrades). Holding you the Auswahltaste pressed.

3.  When you the Mauspfeil move is the advertisement in the Farbrad mitbewegt,
    and the colors in the Auswahlfeld and in the Beispielwindow alter he
    appropriate. Letting you the Auswahltaste again loose, when the
    desired colour adjusted is.

Walk you to the re design the brightness with the Schiberegler next to the
Farbrad how follows before:

1.  Click you with the Auswahltaste an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld
    upside of Farbrades or. Below the list with the Workbench-
    element on.

2.  Goats you on the highlighed beam in the Schieberegler and hold
    you the Auswahltaste pressed.

3.  When you the Mauspfeil to above or. Back consider is the colour
    brighter or. Darker.

Walk you to the re design one colour in the RGB-mode how follows before:

1.  Click you with the Auswahltaste an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld
    upside of Farbrades or. Below the list with the Workbench-
    element on.

2.  Employ you to the re design these colour the Schieberegler. The colors in the
    Auswahlfeld un in the Beispielwindow alter he at draw of
    Schiebereglers.

Walk you to the re design one colour in the FSH-mode how follows before:

1.  Click you with the Auswahltaste an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld
    upside of Farbrades or. Below the list with the Workbench-
    element on.

2.  Employ you to the re design these colour the Schieberegler. The colors in the
    Auswahlfeld un in the Beispielwindow alter he at draw of
    Schiebereglers.

With the tint-Schieberegler is the tint, with the saturation-
Schieberegler the intensity the colour and with the brightness-
Schieberegler the brightness the colour adjusted.

Next to the standard-Preferences-menu disposes the colour-Preferences (palette)
in the menu "defaults" over the menu item "defaults", bner the more
default Farbeinstellungen called up become able. Over it out
able you over the menu item "settings" give, which kind "colour-
Schieberegler" for the Farbnderung uses is.

With Monochrom-monitors or when you in the Bildschirmmodus-Preferences
(ScreenMode) as Farbanzahlt "2" choose, become in the colour-Preferences
(palette) only RGB-Farbschieberegler displayed.

3.16. Mouse pointer-Preferences (Pointer)

over the Mauspfeil-Preferences (Pointer) able you the colour, the bigness
and the form of Mauspfeils and of Wartzeigers alter. On the lefthand
side this Preferencess is he an Bearbeitungsfeld with the
actual Mauspfeil. Left-hand next to these field see you less copies of
Mauspfeils before the different use Workbench-colors.

With the Blttersymbol "normal/wait" over the Bearbeitungsfeld able you
to the editing the Mauspfeil or the Wartezeiger choose.

The Mauspfeil disposes over three changeable colors on a not
nderbaren background. Fields, in those the background color uses
is, are diaphanous.

Walk you to the re design the colour of existing Mauspfeil how follows before:

1.  Choose you an colour in the Farbauswahlfeld from.

2.  Re design you dit red- green- and Blauanteile through draw the accompanying
    Schieberegler.

When you a complete new Mauspfeil create will, able you him
pixel for pixel chart:

1.  Choose you first of all the background color and adjacent "discharge"
    from, around the content of Bearbeitungsfelds to clean.

2.  Choose you the desired colour from.

3.  Show you in the Bearbeitungsfeld on an place, on the an pixel
    appear shall, and press you the Auswahltaste. Holding you the
    Auswahltaste pressed, around in the ausgewhlten colour to chart.

Widerholen you the operation steps 1 till 3, till the Mauspfeil complete
designed is.

1.  Choose you "point set" from and click you adjacent a the
    pixel within of arrow on, around the goal of Mauspfeils
    quote.

2.  Click you to the Verwenden of Mauspfeils for the actual meeting
    "Benutzen" on. Debit these Mauspfeil also in spteren sessions
    uses become, click you "save" on.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
with selection from "test" able you the look of genderten Mauspfeils
and of it really bigness examine, without the Mauspfeil-Preferences
(Pointer) to leave.

When you "breaking off" choose, become all adjustments rescinded made
and the window is closed.

With selection from "discharge" is the content of Bearbeitungsfeldes with
exception the background color excluded, around a new Mauspfeil chart
to able.

With the Blttersymbol on the right above able you between the settings
"HiRes" and "LowRes" choose (only on Amigas with WATER-chip-setting). Through
"HiRes" stand double so many pixel to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, so that you your
drawing with major exactness create able.

With help from "point set" choose you the point from, the later by the
use the mouse on the wished elements steady become must. In
Bearbeitungsfeld is these point in one other colour framed. Choose
you "point set" from and click you the pixel on, the as goal
uses become shall.

With selection from "old colors" become the colors recovered, the
at call of Preferences-editor displayed become.

The menu "project" and "defaults" hold the menu items "undoing",
"save as", "quitting", "Ausscheiden", "copying", "Einfgen",
"discharge", "Rckgngig", "image load", "Auf defaults disfavour", "Auf
at last savings" and "back on default".

3.17. Printer-Preferences (Printer)

with help of printer-Preferencess (Printer) able you the from you
appropriated Druckermodell give and settings for the printout
carry out.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
older people AmigaOS-versions decreed over three unconnectedly Preferences for the
printer: Printer, PrinterGfx and PrinterPS. The both erstgenannten are
ever since AmigaOS 3.5 in the printer-Preferences (Printer) collected together.

In window "printer-Preferences (Printer)" able you a printer driver,
the printer connection and different text- and Grafikoptionen give. The
vorgenommenen settings (this necessary also for the PostScript-Preferences
PrinterPS) become as default values uses, when elsewhere no
settings follow are. Uses how word processing program
stand in the rule obversely own options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, the the
data in Preferences atleast to the part out of power set.

With "printer-Gerteinheit" is the oneness picked for the you the
config fix. You able till to 10 chunks configure. The
first oneness is from all program automatic used. In future
become the program's extended around also another chunks choose to
able. Next to it able you the oneness a names give. This name is
from the program in future by the selection the oneness with displayed
and relieved you the choice of correct print page.

Example: Benennen you an config for a Netzdrukker
"Netzdrucker", for a printer driver, the with help yours modems fax
sends and feels "fax" etc.

3.17.1. Printer type

Auf these side happen the generellen settings to the accessing of
Drukkers.

Under "printer type" is an list the verfgbaren printer driver
displayed, the to the time in "DEVS:Printers" (hardware/printer) installed
are.

Show you to the sampling of printer driver on the accompanying names
and click you him with the Auswahltaste on. The picked driver is
highlighted.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when you a PostScript-printer driver choose, must you the text-
and Grafikeinstellungen in the PostScript-Preferences (PrinterPS) carry out.
Those settings assign the data of printer-Preferencess
(Printer). All the same must you on these place a printer connection
choose.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
be he neither in the drawer "DEVS:Printers" (hardware/printer) still
in the drawer "Storage/Printers" (hoard/printer) an printer driver
for yours printer (or a printer, the you printer emulieren can),
choose you "Generic", the Standardtreiber, from.

3.17.1.1. Printer connection

gives the kind of connection on, with the you printer bound is:
serial or Parallel. With selection from "serial" must you examine, if
the bertragungseinstellungen in the serial-Preferences (Serial) you printer
correspond to.

3.17.1.2. Strangers device driver (Use Custom Device)

credit you the printer not on the internal parallel or serial
interface connected, but on an interface one
expansion card or over a Netzwerktreiber, so choose you this
option on. You must then also a Treibernamen for the giving out and
an oneness give.

3.17.1.3. Device driver (Port Device)

Whlen you here the driver for the interface from. The Dateiauswahl
shows you the directory "DEVS:", in that the most driver lie.
Many a one expansion card have no Treiberdatei in "DEVS:" installed.
Then must you the names in the documentation of driver look up.

3.17.1.4. Oneness (Port Unit)

The oneness, the for the driver used become shall. The most
expansion card bid more as only an additional interface on
and use different chunks around the different interfaces
to respond.

3.17.2. Page size & edges (footboy Size & Margins)

Auf these side happen the settings, the influence on the
Papiergre, Papierrnder and resolution have.

3.17.2.1. Paper type

gives the kind of use paper on. The following options stand to the
zur ~ - at one's disposal: "continuous" (over tractor pulled in paper) and "Einzelblatt"
(eng. single sheet).

3.17.2.2. Paper size

gives the bigness of use paper on. With selection from "Individuell"
able difficulties at printing with matrix printer avoid become.
When you "Individuell" choose, must you behind "Papierlnge (lines)"
an Zeilenanzahl give, the the use paper size complies.

3.17.2.3. Character density

gives the number the print character per custom (cpi = characters by inch) in
level direction on. Ever superior the worth, the closer is listed.
The following options are available: pica (10 cpi), elite (12 cpi) and Eng
(15-17 cpi).

3.17.2.4. Line density

gives the number the line of text per custom (lpi = lines by inch) in
upright direction on. Choose you 36 lines/Zoll2 (lpi) or 38 lines/
Zoll2 (lpi) from. Ever superior the worth, the less is the distance
between the separate lines.

3.17.2.5. Paper length (lines)

gives the total number the on one side printables lines including
upper and lower edge on. Example: 12-custom-paper (normal
continuous paper) with 6 lines per custom yields 72 lines per side (US-format:
11 custom and 66 lines). Choose you to the re design of Standardwertz the field
"Papierlnge (lines)" from. Discharge you the default worth and give
you a new worth an. Squeeze you adjacent the enter key.

3.17.2.6. Left edge (lines)

gives the breadth of lefthand edge on, i.e. The number the blanks from
the lefthand edge of paper till to the place, on the the printer to
print start shall. The Druckdichte (number the sign per custom in
level direction) works he on the breadth of edge from. Was
for instance as Druckdichte Pic (10 cpi) specified, yields he by
one attitude of lefthand edge on 10 an 1 custom broader edge. Choose
you to the re design of Standardwertz the corresponding field from. Discharge you the
default worth and give you a new worth an. Squeeze you
adjacent the enter key.

3.17.2.7. Right edge (lines)

gives the breadth of right edge on, i.e. The number the sign from the
lefthand edge of paper till to the place, on the the printer not more
print shall. Choose you to the re design of Standardwerts the corresponding field
from. Discharge you the default worth and give you a new worth an.
Squeeze you adjacent the enter key.

3.17.2.8. Density

over this option lay you the Druckdichte for graphics fast. Ever
inferior to the worth, the faster is the image on printer listed,
by those several Druckdichten available are. With selection one higher
density leads the rise the Druckpunktanzahl to a schrferen image.
Thereby is however the printing speed abates.

Under the Druckdichte is the resolution displayed, the the printer for
the picked Druckdichte used.

Below the resolution can - ever to printer driver - also still an
info over special attributes the ausgewhlten Druckdichte
happen. Many a one printer driver of use different Druckerdichten - by
same resolution - around different settings, to carry out:
Tintenmenge, compression the data etc. New printer driver give you
an Kurzinformation over that.

Right next to these options become you the ausgewhlten settings
on a example clarified:

The know surface complies in yours relationship between breadth and height
the ausgewhlten paper size. The normally blue dargestellten
Textrnder are hanging from the ausgewhlten character density, Zeilendichte,
Papierlnge, right and lefthand edge.

The normally black dargestellten Graphikrnder are hanging from
paper size, the density un the printer driver.

Under the paper is the Papiergre specified.

The both values under are only for newly printer driver filling.
You give the upper and lefthand edge on the paper on, the the printer
from physical grounds not fall below can. With the most
printer is these edge from 1 till 6 mm. An progam can this edges
use, around the giving out exact on the paper to position.

Lastly is the bedruckbare area displayed. That is the surface of
paper, the through the Graphikrnder enfold is.

3.17.3. Settings (Settings)

those side contains options, the he on Druckqualitt and -look
cover. Especially this options become from many program
overwritten.

3.17.3.1. Stress quality

places the Druckqualitt for the expression fast. With selection from "design"
(eng. draft) is the Druckqualitt in support of the printing speed
reduced. With selection from "letter" (eng. (near) letter) yields he an
slower printing speed but an high Druckqualitt.

3.17.3.2. Shade

with "shade" become pattern from verschiedenfarbigen points (or from
Punktmustern differently blackening) listed, the how an Mischfarbe
or Graustufe appear. Thereby yield he in the image smoother
transition and the image appears more colors/Grauabstufungen to possession.
For the Schattieren stand following options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

Geordnet           that is the Standardverfahren to the Schattieren. The
                   defferent Farbintensitt yields he through an
                   arranged Punktmuster. The points able
                   verschiedenfarbig is, have but the same
                   Druckdichte. You become in straight lines and chinks
                   listed.

Semitone            The defferent Farbintensitt is through the
                   Variieren the spot size un -dense attains.

Floyd-Steinberg    with these process yields he the defferent
                   Farbintensitt through a komplexen (thereby
                   zeitintensiven) algorithm. Through this process
                   yields he an gleichmigere shade, then the
                   Farbintensitt of respective ones pixel on the
                   working point, the these pixel form, as soon as on the
                   adjoining points distributed is.

New Druckertreibe able this shades however through own
methods replace. In particular is the Floyd-Steinberg-shade not
for all modern printer suitable.

In unterstehenden mapping are the result the differently
Schattierungsverfahren personated. The images become with a printer
with one Aflsung from 300 dpi (dots by inch - points per custom)
listed.

Scaling         under "scaling" understands one the mastabsgetreue
                   Grennderung of picture. The final bigness of
                   expression is over the attitude "limit"
                   fixed. Following options stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

fraction          The bigness of picture complies rough the under
                   "limit" (braised.U's.) fest determine bigness. With it can it
                   to distortions come. The pixel become the
                   requirement appropriate belittles or
                   enlarges. It commends he, this option to the printing
                   from picture with many shades, but not for
                   texts to use.

Integer           The number the Punke in the expression complies a
                   ganzzahligen multiples the pixel on the
                   onscreen. Has the on the onscreen displayed image
                   an bigness from 320 x 200 Bildpunkten, can the
                   typography an bigness from 320 x 200, 640 x 400, 960 x
                   600 points etc. Have. Those option should you
                   use, when the to printing image thin vertical
                   and horizontal lines (e.g. An grid or writing)
                   contains.

3.17.3.3. Image

those option deposits fast, if an image as "positive" or as "negative"
listed is. You makes in the general only by black-white and
Grauskala print sense. With selection from "positive" is the image so
listed, how it on the onscreen personated is. When you "negative"
choose, become the Bildschirmfarben in the expression inverse personated.
Those option is with the negatives of photographs commensurable.

3.17.3.4. Image position

over this option is the Druckrichtung for the image fixed. When
"Horizontal" adjusted is, is the image so listed, how it on the
onscreen displayed is. With selection from "Vertikal" is the image at
printing around 90 revolved.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
consider you, that not every progam this attitude bolstered.

3.17.3.5. Coloration

over the accompanying options able you the to druckenden colors
choose. Those options become however not from all printer
bolstered. The following options stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

black/white       colors become either as black or as white
                   listed. It follow no shade.

Grauskala 1        colors become in different Graustufen
                   represented.

Grauskala 2        with deser option become maximally 4 Graustufen
                   bolstered. Employ you this attitude to the
                   printing from picture, the on a A2024-monitor
                   created become.

Colour              colour become the screen display appropriate
                   listed. Those option can only for color printer
                   uses become.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
consider you, that new printer driver the coloration through own methods
replace able, e.g. Could an driver for a printer without Farboption
the coloration "colour" through a costlier Grauskala-stress
replace.

3.17.3.6. Level

over these worth become the on the onscreen angezeigten colors
fixed, the in the expression as black or white appear. Those
option works he so only by black/white-coloration from. Ever superior the
level, the more colors become as black listed. With stress in
Grauskala or colour use some printer driver these level in
other wise man, mostly as level one Gammakorrektur. Especially in
these fall is the level enormous weighty for the quality of
expression.

3.17.3.7. Left corner/Linker edge

over this option lay you the worth fast, around the the typography to
on the right deferred is. That complies the attitude of lefthand
edge. Is "image centers" activates, is the worth for "left corner"
ignored.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when as Maenheit "custom/10" displayed is, so is your national-
attitude (Locale) not right. Choose you the "Locale"-Preferences in
the "Prefs"-drawer and stand you the land e.g. On "Germany" an,
then appear the details in mm (millimeter).

3.17.3.8. Image centers

over this option is the typography in level direction centered.
Is "image centers" activates, is the worth for "left corner" ignored.

3.17.3.9. Weichzeichnen

those option serves to the polish diagonal lines, the normally
dental or treppenfrmig appear. Those option characterizes he
in particular for program's, the Grafikausdrucke from text create. Is
"Weichzeichnen" activates, can this to one retardation of
print procedure lead.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
Floyd-Steinberg-shade and "Weichzeichnen" able not together
uses become.

3.17.3.10. Colour correction

those option leads to one disabuse ballot between the colors on
the onscreen and the colors in the expression. You able this function for
the colors red, green and blue as soon as combinations these colors use.

Through Farbkorrektur is the number the printed colors abates. Is
this option not activates, able color printer all on a Amiga-
onscreen verfgbaren colors print. Is an colour corrected, go
more Farbstufen these colour lost.

3.17.3.11. Limitations

over this Blttersymbol lay you fast, how the boundary values for "breadth"
and "height" in dependency from the attitude for "kind" interpreted
become shall. The following options stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

Ignorieren         The boundary values for breadth and height become ignored.
                   The bigness of typography complies the from
                   user program angeforderten bigness. With it can the
                   breadth but following boundary value not overshoot:
                   (right edge - left edge) + 1 / sign per custom
                   or mm. The height is in the rule through the length of
                   paper confined.

A maximum of. Values         The bigness of typography is through the boundary values for
                   breadth and height fixed.

                   Example: debit the typography an bigness from 100 x 130
                   mm have, give you for breadth and height the values 100
                   and 130 an.

Absolute            The boundary values for breadth and height become as absolute
                   values interpreted.

                   Example: debit the typography exact 100 x 130 mm great
                   is, give you for breadth and height the values 100 and
                   130 an. Subsequent choose you "absolute" from. With
                   these selection is the image these data
                   appropriate scaled. That can to distortions
                   lead. With use these option must you for
                   "scaling" the option "fraction numbers" choose.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when as unit of measure "custom/10" displayed is, so is your national-
attitude (Locale) not right. Choose you the "Locale"-Preferences in
the "Prefs"-drawer and stand you the land e.g. On "Germany" an,
then appear the details in mm (millimeter).

                   With selection from "absolute" able you however also an
                   typography with a normal Seitenverhltnis get,
                   the an appointed breadth or height has. Places you
                   there to the breadth or height on the wished worth an
                   and give you for the each other boundary value naught
                   an. Example when you the breadth on 100 mm adjust
                   and the height on 0, is the height so accounts, that the
                   correct Seintenverhltnis represented is. Formation
                   both boundary values on naught adjusted, is the image
                   with the maximum breadth and the for the correct
                   Seitenverhltnis requisite height listed.

Pixel         The values for breadth and height become as
                   Bildpunktanzahlen interpreted. Is one the both
                   boundary values on naught steady, worth the same precepts
                   how for the option "absolute". The expression has the
                   specified breadth or. Height and the the correct
                   Seitenverhltnis obversely height or. Breadth.

Factors           The breadth and height of Originalbilds is with the
                   border evaluate for breadth or. Height multiplied.
                   Example: Ist 2 as breadth and 4 as height specified,
                   is the typography double so wide how the Originalbild
                   (in Bildpunkten) and four times so high.

Breadth/height        over this field able you the measure of typography
                   fix. The worth is ever to attitude in
                   tenth custom or millimeter specified, so far not
                   "pixel" or "factors" as "kind" picked
                   become. Choose you to the input of worth the
                   Texteingabefeld from. Discharge you the default worth
                   and give you the correct worth an. Squeeze you
                   adjacent the enter key.

3.17.3.12. Stress example

in the right upper corner is he an example, how an small
image (left) through the expression on the paper (on the right) appear. This
example considered the settings for scaling, image, Bildlage,
coloration, level (in as much he he on black-white-stress correlates),
left edge, centering and limit.

However can this example only a unsubtle impression over the
really result the impression-setting wheel give.

3.17.4. Tips to acceleration of Druckvorganga for graphics

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
.   Give you a low worth for "density" on.

.   Choose you for "Bildlage" the option "Horizontal" instead from
    "Vertikal" from.

.   When you dichroic images print, stand you "coloration" on
    "black/white" an. The expression follow faster as an Grauskala-
    or Farbausdruck.

.   Employ you the option "Weichzeichnen" only for the endgltigen
    expression, then he thereby the Druckzeit double can.

.   Employ you the Schattierungseinstellungen "Geordnet" or
    "semitone". With use from "Floyd-Steinberg" doubled he the
    Druckzeit likewise.

3.18. Graphic printer-Preferences (PrinterGfx)

the Graphikdrucker-Preferences (PrinterGfx) exist only still to the
compatibility with elders AmigaOS-versions. To the attitude of print page
use you please the printer-Preferences (Printer).

Shall an progam the Graphikdrucker-Preferences commence, so refer he
on the printer-Preferences and opens these with one for the
Graphikausdruck important Karteiseite.

3.19. PostScript-printer-Preferences (PrinterPS)

with help of PostScript-printer-Preferencess (PrinterPS) able you
data to the control the functions for PostScript-printer make. You
able these Preferences only use, when an PostScript-printer on
you Amiga connected is and "PostScript" in the window "printer-
Preferences (Printer)" picked became.

In menu "settings" of PostScript-printer-Preferencess (PrinterPS)
stands additional the menu item "Masystem" to the zur ~ - at one's disposal. In accompanying
submenu able you "centimetre", "custom" or "point" choose. The
picked oneness is for the advertisement the settings for breadth,
height and edges uses. The default setting is "custom".

The window "PostScript-printer-Preferences" contains following field and
symbols:

3.19.1. Driver mode

with the Blttersymbol "Treibermodus" able you between "PostScript" and
"reproducible copy" choose. With the PostScript-mode converted the driver
all Textausgabedaten in PostScript-format and sends she adjacent on
the printer, the in the printer-Preferences (Printer) picked became. With
selection from "reproducible copy" become the data under bypass of PostScript-
printer driver direct on the connection sent. Over the option
"reproducible copy" is it program, the data self already in the PostScript-
format issue, enables, the PostScript-data direct on the printer to
broadcast.

3.19.2. Copies

KUber this option able you the number the copies give, the from every one
side listed become shall. You able a worth between 1 and 99
give.

3.19.3. Paper size

with these option able you the bigness of use paper give:
r.p.m..Page. Letter, r.p.m..Page. Kosher, DIN 44 and Individuell. As soon as you this
Blttersymbol anklikken, become the values in the feathers "paper width" and
"Papierlnge" the angegebenen format appropriate changes.

3.19.4. Paper width and Papierlnge

in the field "paper width" and "Papierlnge" able you the exact measure
for individuals Seitengren enter. Those both field become in
Geisterschrift (few clear) displayed, when in the field "paper size"
not "Individuell" picked is.

3.19.5. Horizontal DPI and Vertikal DPI

in the field "Horizontal DPI" and "Vertikal DPI" able you the number
the points per custom (dpi = dots by inch) for the expression give. The
driver uses this resolution for all shade- and
Verarbeitungsverfahren. When you not the for yours PostScript-printer
vorgesehenen DPI-settings use, can this to distortions in the
expression lead.

Over the attitude-Blttersymbol on the right above able you options in
four Einstellungsgruppen choose: text-options, text-settings,
graphic-options and graphic-scaling. Ever to selection become appointed
options displayed.

3.19.6. Text-settings

font (Font) Whlen you the for the expression wished font
                   from. With it acts it he around in the Drukker
                   integrated fonts, the for the printing from
                   write uses become.

Character density      Whlen you "normal", "Engschrift" or "wide font"
                   from.

Orientation       Whlen you "Aufrecht" or "cross" from. To the pressing
                   from envelopes use you the option "cross".

Tab          on these place give you an, around how much sign or.
                   Custom the printed text through an
                   Tabulatormarkierung deferred is. You have following
                   choices: 4 sign, 8 sign,  custom, 
                   custom and 1 custom. With Proportionalzeichenstzen
                   use you Zollangaben.

3.19.7. Edges-settings

field to the         give you the four edges for the auszudrukkenden text
Randeinstellung    an. The angegebenen edges stand for the distance to
                   respective ones paper edge, where the breadth and length of
                   paper ahead specified become must.

Font-spot size    give you the size of type of font (in point)
                   on, the for the on the printer gesendeten data
                   uses become shall.

Line space      give you the distance between the separate line of text
                   on. That is the distance in point between the bottom
                   edge one row and the upper edge the following
                   row.

Lines ever custom     in these field is the rough number the lines per
                   custom (lpi = lines by inch) displayed. This worth is
                   from the for Font-spot size and line space
                   angegebenen evaluate accounts.

Lines ever side    in these field is the rough number the printables
                   lines per printed page displayed. This worth is from
                   the evaluate for Font-spot size, line space,
                   Papierlnge as soon as upper and lower edge accounts.

3.19.8. Graphic-settings

Linker edge/       over this values is the print area to the print
right edge/      from graphics fixed (confer. Randeinstellung for
breadth/height        Textausdruck).

Image               positive/negative.

Coloration         Whlen you an the verfgbaren options (black/white,
                   Grauskala or colour) from.

Shade       Whlen you "default", "Gepunktet", "Vertikal"
                   or "Horizontal" from, when you "Grauskala" as
                   coloration activates have. "Default" complies
                   one standardmigen Halbtonschattierung. The option
                   "Gepunktet" is with the Halbtonschattierung
                   commensurable. The points are however fundamental
                   greater, whereby he special effects yield. With
                   selection from "Grauskala" yield he the Graustufen
                   through vertical or. Horizontal lines
                   differently fatness, the in small distance
                   disposed are.

3.19.9. Graphic-scaling

in these Einstellungsgruppe able you the bigness, the Bildlage and the
scale factor for the typography give. The aftermath the
differently options are in the four Beispielskalierungen back
on the right in the window forthwith to see. The shades expanses stand
print area differently bigness and form there. With change the
settings for the differently options alter he the
Druckergebnisse for same Originalbild.

Image position           Whlen you to the printing from graphics "normal" or
                   "cross" from. The where appropriate. Necessary rotation is before all
                   other process at printing one graphic
                   including scaling carried out.

Skalierungsart     Whlen you an the seven Skalierungsarten from. Over
                   the Skalierungsarten is the representation of picture in the
                   print area controlled, which over the. Field to the
                   edge- and Greneinstellung fixed became. With the
                   selection one proportionalen Skalierungsart remained the
                   Seitenverhltnisse get. With the Skalierungsarten
                   to the adaption on the print area is this not the
                   fall.

The following Skalierungsarten stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

1.  No one. The image is without scaling listed. If the image not in
    the angegebenen print area goes, is it where appropriate. On the right and/or back
    cropped.

2.  Proport.: Breadth. The breadth of picture is on the breadth of
    print area adapted and the height the Seitenverhltnis appropriate
    scaled. Is the image adjacent to high for the print area, is
    it on the right cropped.

3.  Proport.: Height. The height of picture is on the height of print area
    adapted and the breadth the Seitenverhltnis appropriate scaled.
    Is the image adjacent to wide for the print area, is it
    on the right cropped.

4.  Proport.: Both. The image wirt under retention of
    Seitenverhltnisses on the maximum bigness within of print area
    scaled.

5.  Adaption breadth. The breadth of picture is on the breadth of
    print area adapted. Subsequent is the height scaled, till she
    the Seitenverhltnis complies or the height of print area
    attains is. In opposition to Skalierungsart 2 goes the image always in
    the print area and is never back cropped.

6.  Adaption height. The height of picture is on the height of print area
    adapted. Subsequent we the breadth scaled, till she the
    Seitenverhltnis complies or the breadth of print area attains
    is. In opposition to Skalierungsart 3 goes the image always in the
    print area and is never on the right cropped.

7.  Adaption both. The Bildhhe and -wide become on the dimensions
    of print area scaled. With it is the Seitenverhltnis not
    considered.

8.  Centering. Choose you "no one", "Horizontal", "Vertikal" or "both
    directions" from. The centering is the last procedure before the
    eingentlichen printout and follow to the scaling.

3.20. Screenmode-Preferences (ScreenMode)

with help of Bildschirmmodus-Preferencess able you the Bildschirmmodus
for yours Workbench-onscreen choose. Then the separate modes
defferent attributes have and defferent hardware
necessitate, read you the carrying out in these chapter and in chapter 7
of original Workbench-manual page. Subsequent choose you a
Bildschirmmodus from, the in you system available is and yours
requirement equitable is.

On the lefthand side are the verfgbaren Bildschirmmodi listed. On
the right side become the attributes of each augewhlten mode
displayed.

3.20.1. Announce mode

Whlen you a the verfgbaren modes from the list "Anzeigemodus" from.
With help the Rollsymbole able you through the list browse. In these
list become all to the time activated Monitortreiber displayed.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
ought Anzeigemodi constant available is, stand you the accompanying
Monitordateien in the drawer "Devs/monitor" (hardware/monitors).

Click you to the sampling of Anzeigemodus the accordingly mode on.
The picked mode is highlighted. Choose you "save" from, around
the ausgewhlten mode to use and as Standardmodus for later
sessions to computer store. Choose you "Benutzen" from, when the mode only
during the actual meeting uses become shall.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
will you different Anzeigemodi try out, choose you to the quitting
of editor "Benutzen" and not "save" from. As soon as you the to
verwendenden Anzeigemodus found have, computer store you him. With these
strategy able you the original mode problem-free
reconstitute, when you inadvertent a mode choose, the not
to you monitor compatible is.

With selection from "breaking off" is the Preferences without save the
adjustments leave.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
Ist by the selection from "save" or "Benutzen" an use- or
an Shell-window on the Workbench-onscreen open, become you
requested, all geffneten window with exception from Schubladenwindown
to close. Towards clasps all use- and Shell-window is the
Workbench-onscreen automatic rewound and the new Bildschirmmodus
appropriate displayed.

The picked Anzeigemodus necessary only for the Workbench-onscreen. Some
uses open own screens. Informations to the from these
uses espoused Bildschirmmodi find you in the each
mitgelieferten documentation.

3.20.2. Mode attributes

in display panel "Moduseigenschaften" are the attributes of
ausgewhlten mode listed. The field contains data to the bigness of
screen, to the maximum number from colors as soon as to wider
attributes.

The screen size at ausgewhlten mode is in Bildpunkten specified.
The first number stands for the Bildschirmbreite, the second number for of it
height.

Observable bigness    bigness of visible field of screen, the
                   through the Randbereichseinstellungen for text fixed
                   is.

Fractional bigness     Kleinste screen size, the from ausgewhlten mode
                   bolstered is.

Maximally bigness     Grte screen size, the from ausgewhlten mode
                   bolstered is. A another restriction yields he
                   where appropriate. Through the capacity of verfgbaren chip-RAM.

Maximally           Maximale number from colors, the at ausgewhlten mode
Farbanzahl         on the onscreen displayed become able.

The following Moduseigenschaften become where appropriate. Displayed:

Interlace/Zeilsp.  Screenmode with Zeilensprungdarstellung
                   (Interlace).

Required ECS       only available, when you Amiga atleast over a
                   advanced chip-setting (ECS) disposes; this
                   Moduseigenschaft is also by intersystem with WATER-chip-setting
                   available.

Supplementary        the Bildschirmmodus bolstered the use from
Genlock            video-Genlock-device.

Extractable            with these Bildschirmmodus can the Workbench-
                   onscreen to back pulled become, around other
                   open screens behind uncover to make.

3.20.3. Breadth/height

over the input fields "breadth" and "height" able you the bigness of
Workbench-screen yours requirement appropriate alter. Give you
a worth an, the between the Extremwerten lies or these
complies. Towards input of worth is these independent from each
ausgewhlten Bildschirmmodus uses.

With input from evaluate, the over the peak value or. Under the
Minimalwert lie, is automatic the peak value or. The Minimalwert
uses.

Over the field "default" next to the respective ones input field able you the
default setting for breadth/height choose. Those complies the bigness
of on the Normalbildschirm visible field.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
you able for "breadth" and "height" values give, the the visible
area essential overshoot. On these particularly size Workbench-
onscreen able you greater and more window open (the he not
interleave) as at normal Workbench-onscreen. Those function is
only through the available chip-RAM confined.

3.20.4. Colors

over the Schieberegler "colors" able you the number the on the
onscreen anzeigbaren colors adjust. Ever few colors specified
become, the faster become screens updated and the few
Speicherkapazitt is needed.

3.20.5. Car-roles

with selection from "car-roles" is the onscreen automatic rolled,
as soon as the Mauspfeil the edge of visible Bildschirmbereichs attains.
The use these option commends he, when you for the onscreen
an "breadth" or "height" defined have, by the only an part of
screen in the reading area appear.

3.21. Serial-Preferences (Serial)

over the serial-Preferences (serial) able you settings to the
seriellen communicating in you system carry out.

The seriellen data, the over modems and networks sent and receive
become, must to the device compatible is with the you comunicate. The
informations to the requisite settings find you in the
documentation, the together with you seriellen device delivered became.

3.21.1. Baud-instalment

The baud-instalment deposits fast, how many bits per second (bps = bits by
second) over the serial interface transfer become able. With the
seriellen communicating become the bits individual one after the other sent or.
Receive. Then an sign in the rule from 10 bits (1 Starbit, 8 data bits
and 1 Stoppbit) consists, able you the rough number the per second
bertragenen sign (cps = characters by second) compute, in that you
the baud-instalment through 10 divide.

The picked baud-instalment must with the baud-instalment of device agree,
with the you comunicate. Ever superior the worth, the faster become the
data transfer. You able an the following baud-rates choose: 110,
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 31250 baud. The actual
attitude is next to the Schieberegler displayed. The Standardwert is
9600.

3.21.2. Input buffer size

the input buffer is an storage area, the for the
buffering incoming serieller data reserved is. You able
an the following bulks choose: 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384,
32768 or 65536 byte. The actual bigness is left next to the
Schieberegler displayed. Ever superior the adjusted baud-instalment and number
the from Amiga carried out actions, the greater ought the
input buffer is. The default setting is 512.

3.21.3. Journal

over an journal is the data flow between the seriellen Schnitstelle
and the connected device controlled. With it data transfer become
able, must in the computer and in the angeschlossenen device same journal
activates is. You able an the following options choose:

XON/XOFF           with it acts it he around the in hufigsten appropriated
                   journal. In the between the device bertragenen
                   data become the special character XON and XOFF inserted,
                   over the the data flow controlled is.

RTS/CTS            the data flow is over separate control lines
                   adjusted: RTS (Request up Send = Sendeaufforderung)
                   and CTS (Clear up Send = Sendebereit). To this need
                   you an duly engaged serial cable.

No               the journal is deactivated, i.e. The data flow
                   follow without austerities and control. Walk you
                   by the use these option very careful before.

3.21.4. Parity

by means of the parity become transmission parity error discovered, in that the
attitude the parities-bits supervised is. The Parittsbit is
additional transfer and so steady, that the number more set bits for
an sign always on an straight (or. Odd) number complemented is. You
able between following Parittseinstellungen choose:

no one              all bits become for data uses. Is mostly
                   uses, when "bits/sign" on 8 adjusted is.
                   It follow no Parittsberprfung.

Straight             The Gesamtanzahl the "1"-bits in every sign incl.
                   Parity bit must always an straight number is.

Odd           The Gesamtanzahl the "1"-bits in every sign incl.
                   Parity bit must always an odd number is.

Bitwert 1          the Parittsbit is always "1".

Bitwert 0          the Parittsbit is always "0".

3.21.5. Bits/Char

under "bits/Char" give you the number the bits on, the over the serial
interface transfer become, around an sign to broadcast. Simultaneous
gives these worth the number the bits on, the for every received sign
expected become.

This worth must the attitude for the parity correspond to. Is parity
on "straight", "Ungerade", "Bitwert 1" or "Bitwert 2" adjusted,
stand you Bitz/sign rather on 7 an, then some system the eighth Bit
to the Parittsberprfung use. Is back parity "no one" adjusted,
able you "bits/Char" on 8 adjust. When you however the full 8-Bit-
font use and transfer will, must you also 8 choose.

3.21.6. Stop bits

Stoppbits are additional bits, the in end of sign added
become. Through this bits can the calculator the distance between words
recognize and when the transfer of sign cancels is. That necessary
for all over the serial interface gesendeten and received data.

With computer with inferior to Verarbeitungsgeschwindigkeit are in the rule
two Stoppbits needed. With computer, whose
Datenbertragungsgeschwindigkeit by 300 baud or superior lies, is in the
rule 1 Stoppbit insufficient. When eight data bits uses become, able
you only an Stoppbit give, then otherwise by the data transfer data
lost go.

3.21.7. Default-oneness

when you system with several seriellen interfaces endowed is,
able you an Standardeinhalt or. Default-oneness give, in that you in
the Befehlszeit to the invocation "Serial" the option UNIT add or the
attribute UNIT for the Programmpiktogramm give. Thereby is in the window
"serial-Preferences (Serial)" the field "default-oneness" displayed. In
this field give you the Einheitennummer the to verwendenden
interface an, when no specific interface over an other
method specified is. With it stand "0" and "1" for the serial
interface the motherboard. In the rule contains the documentation to
seriellen accessories the for the interfaces to verwendenden
Einheitennummern. The in the serial-Preferences (Serial) vorgenommenen
settings work he on all interfaces from.

3.22. Sound-Preferences

with help of Sound-Preferencess able you the kind and the attributes of
from Amiga outputted Warntons fix. To the hint on an
Eingabeaufforderung of user program or of
Verarbeitungsfehlers can the advertisement of Amiga flash and/or an tone
issue.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
with it the Amiga or. The monitor tone issue can, must he with
loudspeaker endowed is. The informations to the connection from
loudspeaker find you in the Hardwaredokumentation or get you
by you Amiga-trader.

You able "tone issue", "advertisement flash" or an combination from
both functions choose. It commends he not, both functions
simultaneous to deactivate, then then no visual and acoustic
signals more displayed become and Eingabeaufforderungen light leave out
become.

When you only "advertisement flash" choose, glares the advertisement, as soon as an
Eingabeaufforderung or an error displayed is. With selection from "tone
issue" stand following settings to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

kind of clay       Whlen you "chirp" or "Digitalisierter Sound" from.
                   "Chirp" stands for a simple tone. With selection
                   from "Digitalisierter Sound" able you an file with
                   a digitized Sound give. You able with
                   help of Digitizers self an Sound-file
                   create. In addition able you an digitized
                   Sound-file load, whose data type in the system defined
                   is. In addition are in the specialized trade ditialisierte Sound-
                   files for the Amiga obtainable.

Audibleness         here stand you the Lautstrkewert an. Ever wider you
                   the governor to on the right move, the clear is the
                   rendition.

Pitch            here stand you the pitch an. Ever wider you the
                   governor to on the right move, the superior is the tone.
                   With the chirp steers these worth the really
                   pitch (high or low frequency). With
                   digitalisiertem Sound is over these worth the
                   Abspielgeschwindigkeit (number the Abtastwerte per
                   second) controlled, the he as well as on the pitch as
                   also the Tondauer take.

Piepslnge         places you a worth between 6,4 ms and 0,6 braised an.

Sound choose    Whlen you "Sound choose" and adjacent a
                   file names in the Dateiauswahlfeld from. With it able only
                   digitized Sound-files specified become, for the
                   the obversely data type in the system defined is
                   (e.g. 8SVX). When you this settings computer store,
                   must the file with the ausgewhlten Sound by every
                   boot/restart of computer on the hard drive to the
                   zur ~ - at one's disposal stand.

Towards selection from "chirp" or details of digitized Sounds able
you the tone examine, around to guarantee, that he the from you
wished attributes has. Choose you there to "tone test" (the
loudspeaker-symbol on the right back) from. While this test are the
field "save", "Benutzen" and "breaking off" inactivated.

3.23. Time-Preferences (tIME)

with help of time-Preferencess (tIME) able you the date and the time
om Ojrem system adjust.

Walk you to the tuning of date how follows before:

1.  Click you the Blttersymbol above on the right so often on, till the correct
    Monatsname displayed is.

2.  Choose you the input field for the Jahresangabe from. Discharge you the
    false date and give you the correct data an.

3.  Choose you in the calendar the correct day from. The picked day is
    highlighted.

Walk you to the tuning the time how follows before:

1.  Click you on the Schieberegler for hours or. Minutes.

2.  Draw you the governor to the increase of worth to on the right or. To the
    Reduzieren to left. When the correct worth displayed is, leave
    you the Maustaste loose. Lead you this operation steps for both
    Schieberegler from.

3.24. Workbench-pattern-Preferences (WBPattern)

with help of Workbench-pattern-Preferencess (WBPattern) able you the
Hintergrundanzeige for the onscreen and the Workbench and whose window
alter.

With help of Blttersymbols behind "Plazierung" can the following as
background picked become:

Workbench          Workbench-window, independent of it, if "Workbench as
                   background" picked is.

Window            Disk- or Schubladenwindow, but no Shell- or
                   Programmwindow.

Screen             Workbench-onscreen, when "Workbench as background"
                   not picked is.

With help of Blttersymbols behind "type" able you the following choose:

pattern             allowed the attitude of new or the
                   use of default model for "Workbench",
                   "window" or "screen".

Image               allowed the selection of picture for "Workbench",
                   "window" or "screen".

3.24.1. Selection of Hintergrundmusters

you able for not through window filling fields of screen
an available Hintergrundmuster choose or an own pattern
create. With default setting is no Hintergrundmuster uses.

Walk you to the sampling of default model how follows before:

1.  Choose you in the Blttersymbol "Plazierung" an the possibilities
    "Workbench", "window" or "screen" from.

2.  Choose you "pattern" in the Blttersymbol "type" from.

3.  Choose you of the 8 defaults-pattern from, the he direct under the
    Musteranzeige find. This pattern appear then in the
    darberliegenden display panel.

4.  You able additional <Test> choose. The pattern is then without
    quitting of Preferencess for the onscreen activates.

Walk you to the Erstellen of own model how follows before:

1.  Choose you in the Blttersymbol "Plazierung" an the possibilities
    "Workbench", "window" or "screen" from.

2.  Choose you "pattern" in the Blttersymbol "type" from.

3.  It appears in the Bearbeitungsfeld an pattern, choose you "discharge" (the
    Icon on the right outside in the first row the tools) from, whereby the
    field with the ausgewhlten colour as background color filled is.

4.  Choose you to the drawing of model an colour from the Farbauswahlfeld
    from. You able also an pattern from the field "defaults" choose and
    adjacent with the mouse edit.

5.  Click you with the Auswahltaste the place in the Bearbeitungsfeld on, on
    the with the drawing begun become shall.

    On the position of Mauspfeils appear an pixel with the
    ausgewhlten colour. When you the Auswahltaste pressed hold and the
    mouse postpone, able in bit more pixel designed
    become. If needed, choose you to the drawing other colors from.

    With the Erstellen of model in the Bearbeitungsfeld is the pattern
    simultaneous in the field over "defaults" in the real bigness
    displayed. This field shows you, how the pattern by of it
    copy in a greater area looks. When you at
    drawing an error unterluft, choose you "Rckgngig" from, around the
    last with the mouse carried out action rescinded to make.

    When the pattern complete created became, choose you <Test> from, around
    the look of model on the onscreen to examine.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
since AmigaOS 3.5 gives it to the drawing the pattern some Malwerkzeuge and
eight buttons with vorbelegten patterning. The vorbelegten pattern find he
direct under the Zeichenflche. Right next to find he the
Malwerkzeuge. In the first row (from left to on the right) are: point
paint, rectangle, circle, line, Undo and discharge. In the second realms
are Freihandlinie, filled rectangle, more filled circle, colt and Redo.

3.24.2. Selection from picture

you able for the background the Workbench, the window or of
screen an image or an Grafikdatei choose. Images able with
a Zeichenprogramm created become. You able also digitalsierte
Bilddateien in the editor load. The images become on the colors of
screen adapted.

Walk you to the selection one Bilddatei how follows before:

1.  Choose you "image" in the Blttersymbol "type" from.

2.  Click you on the symbol "image choose..." (The symbol on the right
    next to Bilddateinamen).

3.  Give you over the Dateiauswahlwindow the file names of wished
    picture on.

4.  You able additional "test" choose. The pattern is then without
    quitting of Preferencess for the onscreen activates.

3.24.3. Layout (OS3.9)

new added is the possibility images in the Hintegrund tiled,
centered or scaled there-deliver. Is you onscreen e.g. 800*600
pixel great, you image but only 200*140 pixel, so able you with the
attitude the following Festlegen:

Zentriert          the image is on the Bildschirmhintergrund in the
                   centre with the Originalgre from 200*140 pixel
                   displayed.

Tiles            the image is horizontal and vertical several times
                   repeatedly displayed, till the entire background
                   filled is.

Scaling          the image is on the bigness from 800*600 hochgerechnet
                   (so enlarges) personated.

Better skalieren   the image is likewise how by "scaling" scaled,
                   but with better quality, what he seasonal clear
                   noticeable makes.

3.24.4. Menu "defaults"

the menu "defaults" of Workbench-pattern-Preferencess (WBPattern) contains
menu items, over the you other Zeichenprogramme to the Erstellen and
editing from patterning as soon as existing images from other sources
use able. You able for instance to the Erstellen of model
the Zeichenfunktionen of program "IconEdit" use and the pattern
adjacent in the progam "WBPattern" (Workbench-pattern-Preferences)
load.

Clipboard       Kopiert the contents of Bearbeitungsfeldes in the
                   clipboard (Clipboard) and extinguishes the Nachfolgende.
                   It remains only the background color in the
                   Bearbeitungsfeld.

Copying           copying in the clipboard without re design of
                   Bearbeitungsfelds.

Integrate           copying of IFF-picture from the clipboard in the
                   Bearbeitungsfeld. With it is the actual content of
                   field compensates. Images, the the bigness of
                   Bearbeitungsfelds from 64 x 64 Bildpunkten
                   overshoot, become back and on the right cropped.

Discharge            discharge of model in the Bearbeitungsfeld and set on
                   the background color.

Withdrawals (Undo)  the last Bearbeitungsschritt is with it rescinded
                   made.

Reconstitute   with this is the function "withdrawals (Undo)" again
(Redo)             taken back.

Image load...      Undoing of Dateiauswahlwindows, over the the name
                   one Bilddatei entered become can, the as
                   Hintergrundmuster uses is.

On defaults       Zurcksetzen of Workbench-model on the
disfavour       default settings (no pattern).

On zeletzt        Wiederherstellen the at last store
savings      settings.

On previous     Wiederherstellen the settings, the at undoing of
condition              Preferences-editor active were.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when you "save" or "Benutzen" choose, become all ausgewhlten
pattern or. Images saved and/or on the angegebenen place
uses. With selection from "breaking off" become also over the field "test"
appropriated pattern distant.

4. The tools the Workbench

under "tools" become in these chapter not only the program's pp of verstehen,
the he in the drawer "tools" find, Vielmehr are here also
program's from the "system"-drawer how e.g. AmiDOCK represent. "Tools"
is here so more of him signification equitable and contains the
tools (eng. Tools), the in the AmigaOS hold are.

AmiDOCK, the new Programmstarter from AmigaOS 3.9 is surely an god
example for an very helpfully tool, even so the HDToolbox to the
reduction from hard drives, the pictograms-editor IconEdit and the new
IomegaTools. All this tools are very competent and it remunerates he
with safety, she once particularly to view.

4.1. AmiDOCK

AmiDOCK is an Commodity, on the you only still reluctant forego want,
when you it first once tested have. Sure know you some tools,
the an like function have, but hardly of is so easy and
practical to handle how AmiDOCK.

The in principle function from AmiDOCK is quick and short described:
it stands you an so-called dock-window on the Workbench to the
zur ~ - at one's disposal, the often required program's on Mausklick actuates. You need
then not first in the depths your hard drive to particular program
to seek, not first complicated a few Verzeichniswindow open and
again schlien, but able program's easy with a Mausklick
commence. With it stays it but not, one can namely also files with the
program, the he in the dock find, read in.

Example: you have the EditPad in you AmiDOCK and will a text
read in. Draw you then easy the Textpiktogramm direct on the
EditPad-Icon in AmiDOCK. Now is the text direct with the EditPad
read in and you able him edit. With it is long seeking in
Auswahlwindown superfluous and you able all beautiful from the Workbench
from edit.

Those functions stand a few other tools also to the zur ~ - at one's disposal. AmiDOCK
goes but some steps wider: where normally complicated
config the docks necessary is, need you by AmiDOCK easy only
an Icon over the dock to abandon (eng. "drag & drop"), around it
to the dock to add. In the most cases is the already all, what you
to the config yours personal docks do must. Simple and
practical!

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when you an file between two pictograms fallenlassen, then is the
file in the dock inserted; leaves one you over a Icon fall,
then is the file from the those concerned progam edited (one can
very good recognize, when an progam choosen became, because then changed
he the Icon).

That AmiDOCK in the normal case no one particular config need, means
but not, that it hardly configurable is, in the converse. AmiDOCK leaves
he on multifaceted wise man on your needs adjust. The
most weighty possibilities stand we you here before.

The Konfigurationswindow reach you over the AmiDOCK-menu or over
the Titelleiste. The Konfigurationswindow is subdivided in three wiles
(with accompanying board) and three functional groups, the the look
and the behavior from AmiDOCK control.

4.1.1. Docks

in these list find you all dock-ledges, the you till now arranged
have. With the button "add" below the list able you an
another dock-ledge add. With the button "remove" is the
momentary choosen (shaded) dock from the list excluded.

4.1.2. Categories

sure is you the small switch in the Ziehleiste from AmiDOCK
struck. With these switch able you between the categories
within one dock-ledge switch. Those list contains all till now
defined categories. By means of "add" create you an new
category. "Remove" extinguishes the momentary elective category from the
list. Sense the categories is it, an one dock-ledge from the duty
here related program's under a title summarize. You
have with it quasi an "Multi"-dock.

An example: you define an category "photographs" and lay in these
category an Scan-progam, an image processing and an stress-progam
off. Those three program's appear then always together, as soon as you with
the switch in the dock the category "photographs" choose. You have with it the
important program's for an duty forthwith in the intervention and need not
long to every separate pictograms to seek - and place on the
Workbench saves this method also still!

4.1.3. Pictograms

those list contains all program's, the in the dock hold are. You able
here program's from hand add and remove (what but seldom necessary
is is). With "Auf" and "Ab" able you the order, in the the
pictograms in the dock appear, change. With "assortment" able you the
program's also alphabetic assort leave.

4.1.4. Backdrops

you able pattern or images as background for Ziehleiste (left edge
of dock) and Icon-area give. Test you an little around,
actuate you he an little as surfaces-designer and embellish you
your Workbench and AmiDOCK, how it you pleasing.

4.1.5. Dock-behavior

with the option "Oriertierung" able you fix, if the dock vertical
or horizontal laid against become shall. You able the orientation of
docks anytime alter. "Icon-names" deposits fast, how many lines the
names under the pictograms take permit. With "on Bildrand sew"
come we to one the most interesting functions from AmiDOCK. You
able AmiDOCK about this direct, he always on a selectable
edge of the screen or one Bildschirmecke to stop. "Notebooks" is here
by the way literal to take. Choose you e.g. "Left-hand", displaces he
AmiDOCK forthwith on the lefthand edge of the screen and leaves he also not more
from edge move. You able it to above or back postpone, but
not to on the right. Credit you "left back" elective, sticks AmiDOCK in the
lefthand bottom edge yours screen, and sure so long, till you under
"on Bildrand sew" against some other choose.

4.1.6. General. Dock-behavior

"Aufblitzende Icons" worrys for it, that the pictograms at Anklicken
flash.

"Featuring Griffleiste" brings about, that in edge, the the Ziehleiste
gegenberliegt, an Griffleiste strobed is. Those Griffleiste
enables it, the bigness of docks with the mouse to change. Holding you
the left Maustaste over the Griffleiste pressed, around the bigness of docks
in horenzontaler and upright direction to change. AmiDOCK accommodates the
apportionment the pictograms automatic on the new Drockgre on.

4.1.7. Configurations save and shop

as soon as you in the Konfigurationswindow on "save" press, become the
vorgenommenen settings saved. Further possibilities to the shop
and save the Konfigurationsdateien finds one in the Titelleisten-menu.
Here is also the function "lastly saved", which the at last
stored Konfiruation again invites.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
benefit you the possibilities, the the categories from AmiDOCK bid! In most cases
become for an appointed duty more program's in one determine
order invoked. The categories enable it, this program's in the
dock summarize and in the appositely order to the invocation
offer.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
benefit you the "on Bildrand sew"-function! Observanc you, which
places on you onscreen at workings most free remained and sew
you AmiDOCK there fast. So have you the dock always in the field of vision and able
quick thereupon seize, without it constant to must. Then it then only still
confined or at all  not relocatable is, is the experiment also
not so great, it by lack of space on the onscreen under a dozen
window to bury.

4.2. Animated Icons

"Animated Icons" are encouraged pictograms, with those one its Workbench
embellish and interessanter fashion can. "Animated Icons" gives it only
for the AmigaOS, hence should you this Features of use ;-)

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
the progam "AnimatedIcon" is he in the "system"-drawer. It
has but no direct function, hence reacted it also not on
Anklicken. The progam is over an special attribute (Tooltype) of
Icon restarted.

An "Animated Icon" is first once an whole normal Icon (the he
even some "animates"). Is an Doppelklick thereupon carried out, is an
window with following options open:

shop              it loads an new animation or a new Sound.

Termination            Entfernt the encouraged Icon.

More               shows general informations over the "Animated Icon"
                   on, how e.g. The number the Animationsbilder, the
                   momentary "images per second" etc.

Breaking off          Schliet the information-window.

4.2.1. Create one "Animated Icon"

around self an "Animated Icon" to create, must you first once
an GIF- or an so-called "transfer"-animation created have. To this
able you e.g. The progam "GIFToolkit", "WhirlGIF" (both program's
finds one in the Aminet) or "UltraConv" use.

Around this Antimationen now as "Animated Icon" to declare, must you
in the Infodatei (how in chapter "RAWBInfo" described; Icon
anklicken and <rechte Amiga>+<i> press) the animation the Piktogrammtyp
on "project" alter (in case it this still not happen is). After this
go you in the submenu "Icon" and carry you as
standard program "AnimatedIcons" an (the sees then in the rule how
follows from: "SYS:utilities/AnimatedIcons").

Now able you still appointed tees for "Animated Icons" give:

icon_X=XXX         here is the X-position of "Animated Icon" in pixel
                   specified.

icon_Y=XXX         here is the Y-position registered.

FPS=XXX            gives the speed (images per second) of
                   "Animated Icon" on.

4.2.2. Optionally tees for "Transferanims"

First=X,Y          position of first picture in the streak.

Delta=X,Y          Relative position of Einzelbildes.

That is the representation one "Transferanim" in MultiView.

That is an GIF-animation in MultiView (am hint).

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when you an GIF-animation in MultiView show or in an
Grafikprogramm invite, then is in the rule only the first image the
animation personated. When you the Einzelbilder edit want, so
must you before the animation in her Einzelbilder take apart. For this
able you the progam "GIFToolkit" or "UltraConv" use.

4.3. BenchTrash - the clever garbage can

"BenchTrash" is an Workbench-progam, the an new "garbage can"-
Icon on the Workbench-surface arranges. Files, the on him
flung become, become either on requirement direct excluded or in
the "Trashcan"-formatters of disk drive shoved (the files become then
not forthwith excluded, but first, when you this want).

Additional able with BenchTrash also diskettes ejected become, when
you drives this lean. For this must the diskettes-Icon
on the garbage can consider.

BenchTrash leaves he through tees "ToolTypes" or over a Preferences
configure.

4.3.1. The Preferences from BenchTrash

with this is adjusted, what BenchTrash with the files make shall, the
in him flung become. With the buttons under can one between the
following possibilities choose:

clearance!         Emptied the globalen garbage can manual. All files,
                   the older as "MAXAGE" days are, become distant. That
                   serves even then, in case the option for the
                   globalen garbage can cut out became. With this able
                   no the other garbage can-directories on other
                   media emptied become.

All clean      all files, the in the garbage can flung become,
                   become forthwith excluded.

More mixed mode   here become the files usually in the garbage can on
                   the respective ones vehicle saved. Only in case these
                   garbage can miss or he the files already in the
                   garbage can find, become she excluded.

Local garbage can  The files become in an garbage can-directory on the
                   respective ones vehicle deferred. Shall it missing, can it
                   on enquire from BenchTrash created become.

Global garbage can The files land in a globalen garbage can-
                   directory, which he on your hard drive
                   is.

Lschproze        shows the Lschproze graphical on.

Safety query it asks before files entgltig excluded become.

First copy,     Spezifiziert, how BenchTrash files in the globalen
later clean     garbage can displaces. If abgehakt, is the
                   complete record first complete copied and the
                   originals become first later excluded. To this is more
                   place on the Dateitrger required, but the
                   Lschproze is safer.

Selection            it opens an Dateiauswahl for the globally garbage can-
                   directory. You able the Dateipfad also manual in
                   the input field on the right next to these button enter. You
                   able only a garbage can choose, when the function
                   "Globaler garbage can" activates is.

Save          Speichert the settings for the next boot from
                   BenchTrash.

Use           The genderten settings become off now uses,
                   however not conserved. With the next boot from
                   BenchTrash become again the at last store
                   settings active.

Breaking off          The adjustments become ignored and the window
                   closed, BenchTrash runs but wider.

4.3.2. Tees from BenchTrash

the following tees (Tooltypes) able in the pictograms from BenchTrash
registered become:

MODE=deletemode    with this is picked, how BenchTrash with in him
                   geworfenen files to proceed has.

MODE=DELETE        The files become to query excluded.

MODE=LOCAL         The files become in the lokalen garbage can on the
                   those concerned vehicle deferred. BenchTrash is
                   possibly a garbage can lay against, in case no one
                   existing is. You should but this
                   Mlleimerverzeichnisse from time to time manual
                   vacate.

MODE=MIXED         that is an mixture from both Arbeitsmodi. Here
                   become only the files thrown away, for the no
                   garbage can found became or the he already in the
                   garbage can find - natural become you ahead around
                   confirmation solicited. All wider files become in
                   the garbage can-directories deferred.

MODE=GLOBAL        it is an global directory uses, around the garbage
                   to computer store. Those directory can also time to time
                   from BenchTrash automatic emptied become. The
                   default is the "SYS:Trashcan" directory,
                   this can also changes become.

PROGRESSBAR=on/off BenchTash stands the delete process with a beam
                   graphical there. An button to the breaking off is even so
                   existing. With the clasps of window is the
                   delete process cancels. If on "off" posed, is
                   this function deactivated.

ICONX=             places the horizontal position of Icon fast, on
                   the BenchTrash on the Workbench appear. That is
                   usually the left edge of Workbench-
                   screen.

ICONY=             places appropriate the vertical position (height) fast,
                   on the the BenchTrash appear is. Voreingestellt
                   is here the bottom edge of screen.

MAXAGE=            here able you an Tagesanzahl give to the the
                   garbage can depleted is.

EJECT              Whlt more script to the Medienauswurf. More as an
                   EJECT-argument can specified become. An argument
                   sees by it how follows from:

                   <Gertename>:<Auswurfkommando>

                   i.e. Around an ZIP-diskette of Gertenames ZIP
                   auszuwerfen, must here

                   EJECT ZIP:C:ZipTool >NIL: EJECT ZIP:

                   entered become. The redirection the giving out on "NILE:"
                   is not real necessary, constrained but an
                   nervendes window.

                   If you instead of this the Auswurfkommando to the
                   Exec-device driver direct will, replace you please
                   the double point through a oblique "/" and the
                   Gertenamen through the names of device driver, where
                   the text "device" through the Gertenummer compensates become
                   must. The example above would in these second notation
                   so look:

                   EJECT oktagon.6/C:ZipTool >NIL: EJECT ZIP:

                   where we assume, you ZIP is through the
                   "oktagon.device" controlled and allocates the SCSI-ID 6.

TRASHDIR=Pfad      an directory, the BenchTrash as globalen
                   garbage can use shall. Those function is only
                   uses, in case the Lschmodus on "GLOBALLY" posed
                   is. The default is "SYS:Trashcan".

COPYFIRST=on/off   if this codeword specified became, become
                   first the complete data records copied and first
                   later excluded. Dierzu must on your hard drive sure
                   more place available is, but the operation is some
                   safer.

DONOTASK=on/off    if DONOTASK on "on" stands asks BenchTrash before the
                   emptying of garbage can not more, if he it real
                   do shall. If DONOTASK on "off" stands asks
                   BenchTrash before the Lscehn, if he it real do shall.

4.4. Calculator (pocket calculator)

the pocket calculator offers the functions addition, subtraction,
multiplication and division. Through undoing of accompanying Icon is
the pocket calculator activates.

He serves how an handelsblicher pocket calculator. The
Bildschirmfelder correspond to the "buttons", of pocket calculator, the he
from Zifferntasten from 0 till 9 and function keys compose:

APPROX                 discharge all earlier inputs (Clear all). The
                   pocket calculator is on 0 rewound.

CE                 discharge the actual input (Clear entry).

x                  Multiplizieren.

:                  Divide.

+                  add.

-                  Subtract.

,                  Decimal point.

                  Discharge of at last eingegebenen sign.

                  re design of sign for the actual entry.
                   The positive quantitative become negative and reverse.

=                  announcement of Rechenergebnisses.

Click you to the "squeeze" one key of pocket calculator the corresponding
field with the Auswahltaste on or press you the obversely key on
the keyboard. You able by it the standard-keyboard-quantitative or the
Zehnerblock use. With inputs over the keyboard correspond to the
enter key and the key <Enter> the Zehnertastatur the
equality sign (=). The Rcktaste complies the Taschenrechnertaste
.

On the pocket calculator appear where appropriate. The error reports
"error:overflow!" And "division through naught".

Choose you to the quitting of pocket calculator the Schliesymbol from.

4.4.1. Menu of pocket calculator

in Taschenrechnerprogramm stand three menu to the zur ~ - at one's disposal: project,
defaults and window.

The menu "project" contains following menu items:

input clean    discharge the actual input.

All clean      discharge all inputs and resetting of
                   pocket calculator on naught.

Quitting          clasps of pocket calculator.

In menu "defaults" stand following menu items to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

Ausschneiden       copying of actual entry in the buffer
                   (Clipboard) with subsequent discharge the input.

Copying           copying of actual entry in the buffer
                   without discharge.

Integrate           shop the actual data from the buffer in
                   the pocket calculator.

The menu "window" contains only the menu item "paper strip". With selection
these option become the inputs and Rechenergebnisse in a own
window how by a calculator with printed work displayed. The angezeigten
data able copied become. Then however no menu for this action
available is, must you the wished values through draw choose and
through squeeze the key combination raked Amiga-key-C in the
buffer copy.

4.5. EditPad

EditPad is an smaller and faster editor. You able him to the editing
all ASCII-files use (e.g. The "user-startup"-file). He
offers only the basic functions of editor and is hence very easy to
attend. Some functions able over Tastaturkrzel controlled become.
A table for this find you in the chapter "Tastaturkrzel".

The surface offers only three pictograms:

Ausshneiden:       Markieren you a area within of text and
                   press on this key. The text is cut out
                   and from onscreen excluded. He is he
                   but still in the clipboard (Clipboard) and
                   can with the succeeding functions again inserted
                   become.

                   Keyboard macros: <rechte Amiga>+<x>.

Copying:          Markieren you a area of text and press
                   on this key. The text stays get and
                   simultaneous is he in the clipboard copied. With
                   the succeeding function can he against inserted
                   become.

                   Keyboard macros: <rechte Amiga>+<c>.

Integrate:          with these function able you a text, the he in
                   the clipboard (Clipboard) is, on the
                   actual Kursorposition again integrate.

                   Keyboard macros: <rechte Amiga>+<v>.

The most functions are over the menu "projects", "Bearbeiten",
"navigation" and "settings" obtainable.

4.5.1. Project

new                new text file create.

Undoing             text file open.

Integrate           a other text file integrate.

Save          file save.

Save as...   File under specified names computer store.

Printing            text print.

Over               informations over the progam.

Ikonifizieren      Schliet the window and deposits an Icon on the
                   Workbench-surface.

Termination            Beendet the progam.

4.5.2. Process

Ausschneiden       Schneidet the highlighting text block from (am above).

Copying           Kopiert the highlighting text block in the clipboard
                   (am above).

Integrate           Fgt the text block from the clipboard an (am
                   above).

Discharge            Lscht the angewhlten text.

Wirderrufen        force the at last gettigten step rescinded.

Reconstitute   force an "withdrawals"-action again rckgngig.

4.5.3. Navigation

finding             with this able you in the text to word etc. Seek.

Find next     shows the next search result on.

Finding & substitution  you able in the text to word etc. Seek and this
                   through an other word replace leave.

Go to row      with this able you in an appointed row bounce.

4.5.4. Settings

Erzeuge            made for every with EditPad created text file an
pictograms        pictograms.

Settings      Speichert the settings.
Computer store

4.6. HDToolbox

HDToolbox (eng. For hard drives-Werkzeugkiste) unifies an plurality from
functions to the control the hard drive.

Walk you how follows before, around HDToolbox from the hard drive from to commence:

1.  Undoing you the Partition "system" or "Workbench".

2.  Undoing you the drawer "tools".

3.  Click you the Icon "HDToolbox" double on.

Then appear the onscreen "hard drives initialize and
Partitionieren" (hardware Drive Preparation, Partitioning and Formatting).

Over these first onscreen able you the following functions the
HDToolbox invoice:

.   Partitionieren

.   Prepare one new hard drive

.   Configuring of Festplattentyps

.   Physical formatting the hard drive

.   Define the Dateisystemmerkmale

.   Add, discharge and re design from Dateisystemen

.   Shop and save of RDB and the Mount-list (am subsequent
    tip)

in the wider cut off this chapter become this functions and
whose use detailed explained.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
general information tips to hard drives

save you frequent the RDB ("Rigid Disk block" your hard drive on a
other data medium (e.g. An diskette) off. The RDB contains important
basic settings. When he once through a handling error, an
faulty software or at all  a virus destroys is, have you no
intervention more on the data your hard drive.

The HDToolbox offers in the Titelleisten-menu a point "RDB computer store" on.
The Genstck there to is then the function "RDB load". Save you by
these contingency also alike the Mount-list off. Also this function
is over a menu item offered.

Please think you at it, the RDB and the Mount-list to every one change
the hard drives-settings with the HDToolbox renewed to backup!

With hard drives is sufficient it, at formatting the option "rapid" to
choose. The Formatiervorgang runs then erhablich faster off.

4.6.1. The Hauptwindow

Auf these onscreen is an list the on you system angeschlossenen
hard drives displayed. Is you system with more Festplattenlaufwerken
endowed as displayed become, able you this with help the on the right
next to the list angeordneten Rolleiste or Rollpfeile show.

For every physically drive become following data displayed:

4.6.1.1. Inferface

type the hard drive. The Festplattentypen are SCSI and XT - latter is
nowadays not more uses. Others Festplattentypen, e.g. IDE, become
as SCSI displayed.

4.6.1.2. Adr

worth between 0 and 6 (or. 0 and 13 for WEIT-SCSI), the you for the
respective ones SCSI-device adjusted have. Over this address finds the
calculator the separate drives. Every SCSI-device yours intrasystem must an
unequivocally address have.

The SCSI-controller is as device 7 adjusted. Acts it he by the
delivered hard drive around an SCSI-device, complies the position the
plug-in strap (Jumper) the oneness 6. The most hard drives are by
delivery as device 0 configured, so that she without change ageschlossen
become able. Formation another hard drives added, must this on
new (not appropriated) addresses eingstellt become. Give the
Steckbrckenpositionen for two hardware the same address on, become
program's not duly carried out or the device become at all  not
recognized. Further informations to these subject, in particular
Steckbrckenpositionen, find you in the documentation to the respective ones
hard drive.

With IDE-device is in the rule the as Master gejumperte device as
oneness 0 and the as Slave gejumperte as oneness 1 displayed.

4.6.1.3. LUN

logical Einheitennummer (LUN = Logical Unit Number) of disk drive. The
worth lies between 0 and 7. The LUN-issue is an secondary address.
You is uses, when an device more other hardware steers. A
controller-card can for instance more hard drives ctrl, the
each over an unequivocally LUN-issue dispose must (confer. Addresses for
SCSI-hardware).

In the rule is the LUN-issue of SCSI-Festplattenlaufwerks 0. In the
documentation to the controller-card able you look up, if the controller
more LUN-numbers bolstered and how this if necessary to alter
are.

4.6.1.4. Drive (Drive)

name of Laufwerkherstellers and version number.

4.6.1.5. Bigness

gives the bigness of disk drive in GB on.

--- ANNOTATION ------------------------------------------------------------
the name and the issue attune if necessary not with the data in
the documentation to the drive berein. The name became the HDToolbox from
drive sent.

Is the drive with Laufwerkstyp "unknown" (Unknown) displayed, is it
not partitioniert. In these fall must you the drive over the
option "hard drive install" arrange.

With SCSI-Bandlaufwerken (Tape-Streamer) is always the Laufwerkstyp
"unknown" displayed, even so by the most CD-ROM-disk drive, when
no CD inlaid is. Those hardware able from the HDToolBox not
edited become.

Over the verbleibenden symbols able you the functions the HDToolbox
invoice, the in the wider cut off this chapter explained
become.

--- WARNING --------------------------------------------------------------
Erstellen you before use of program always an archival backup copy the
on your entirety hard drive ingoing data, then by the most
Funktionnen the HDToolbox the on the hard drive store data
excluded become able. To this able you the progam HDToolbox use.

When you the field "termination" (Cancel) choose, inverts the progam to the
previous Einstellwindow back, without the adjustments of actual
Einstellwindows to computer store.

4.6.2. Partitionieren one disk drive

partitions are subdivisons of Festplattenbereichs. Each Partition
yours intrasystem is through an Icon on the Workbench-onscreen
personated.

4.6.2.1. Hard drive partitions

The voluminous Speicherkapazitt your hard drive can in less
fields, sucked. Partitions, subdivided become. Thereby able you your
work better organize. You able for instance the Systemdateien
and other from calculator appropriated files from yours applications programmes
and the accompanying data apart hold. With add of
zustzlichen operating system on you Amiga (e.g. MacOS, MS-DOS via
emulator or UNIX) able you this in one from AmigaDOS unconnectedly
Partition instellieren.

HDToolbox  disposes over an advertisement, with whose help you your hard drive
problem-free partitionieren able. That is needed, when an new
hard drive partitioniert or. An already existing hard drive new
partitioniert become shall.

The Partitionierung the hard drive follow u's.a. From following grounds:

.   Arbeitsorganisationen. Eventually computer store you the files in one
    particular Partition, around she more easily find.

.   Separation from AmigaDOS and a additional installed
    operating system (e.g. LINUX).

.   Aggrandizement the partitions.

--- WARNING --------------------------------------------------------------
it commends he, the hard drive before whose use right to
partitionieren. When you the hard drive later new partitionieren, become
all data in the genderten partitions excluded! Create you where appropriate. Before
the Partitionierung one hard drive an archival backup copy the entirety
data. To this able you an standard back up-progam use. On
this wise man able the data to conclusion the Partitionierung
recovered become.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
fore the Partitionieren ought one he exactly consider, how many
partitions one arrange want and how great this is shall, because
at spteren re design the Partitionsgre go the data, the he on the
betroffenen partitions find, lost.

Hear user able with the HDToolbox additional following functions
use: re design the number from sector-Pufferspeichern (cache), re design
the Dateisysteme for partitions and tuning the boot-priority for
boat-partitions. Those options become later in these chapter
explained.

Paging you to the Partitionieren the hard drive the point "hard drives
initialize and Partitionieren" (hardware Drive Preparation,
Partitionierung and Formatting) on and lead you following sections
from:

1.  Click you in the list the hard drives the hard drive on, the
    partitioniert become shall. The picked hard drive is
    highlighted.

2.  Choose you "drive partitionieren" (Partition Drive) from. Then
    appear the Einstellwindow to the Partitionierung.

The on the hard drive available Speicherkapazitt is through an
horizontal ledge (the Partitionierungsleiste) displayed. The issue of
last coil erscheitn on the right above on the onscreen. With
default setting the Workbench-Fabern is the actual (picked)
Partition blue displayed. The capacity the Partition appear below
this field. The wider partitions are shaded and through
highlighed lines from each other apart. No appropriated area
become monochrome gray personated. Employ you to the Erstellen the new
partitions the Partitionierungsleiste and the mouse.

Before you with the Partitionierung start, read you the data in
following field of screen:

Partitionsname     Gertename the ausgewhlten Partition (eng. "Partition
                   name"). Click you to the sampling the desired
                   Partition in the Partitionierungsleiste on.

File system       Filesystem the ausgewhlten Partition (eng. "File
                   system").

Bootbar            details, if the system from the ausgewhlten Partition
                   from restarted become can. The Standardangabe for the
                   first Partition is, that she restarted become can
                   ("bootbar" is with a tick provide), for all
                   wider partitions, that she not restarted become
                   able (no tick next to "Bootbar").

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when an Partition "bootbar" made become shall, must on each fall the
complete Partition (beginning and end) below the 4Gb-border lie.

Reading you the following informations, around the partitions yours
requirement appropriate adjust to able.

4.6.2.2. Adapt the bigness one Partition

1.  Click you the blue triangle below the Partitionerungsleiste with
    the lefthand Maustaste on and hold you this pressed.

2.  Relocating you the triangle on the new position and leave you the
    Maustaste loose.

You able the triangle not in the area one other existing
Partition postpone.

The new bigness the Partition is below of triangle displayed.

4.6.2.3. Relocating from partitions within the Partitionierungsleiste

you must possible. Partitions postpone, around place for new partitions to
create or free fields summarize. You able partitions
not over existing partitions postpone, but only over free
fields the Partitionierungsleiste.

1.  Click you the to displacing Partition with the Auswahltaste on and
    hold you this pressed.

2.  Relocating you the Partition on the desired position and leave
    you the Auswahltaste loose.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
Ist an Partition so small, that she not problem-free angeklickt become
can, able you also with help the lefthand or. The right Cursortaste
from one Partition to the other alternate.

4.6.2.4. Add one new Partition

you able no Partition in the area one already existing Partition
create. Is the overall Festplattenkapazitt uses (i.e. The
overall Partitionierungsleiste is filling), must you first of all
existing partitions decrease, around Kapizitt for the new Partition
provide (siehye chapter "adapt the bigness one Partition"
wider above). Open air fields become monochrome gray displayed.

1.  Relocating you the existing partitions, so that in the
    Partitionierungsleiste an contiguous grayer area for the
    new Partition entitled comes.

2.  Choose you the field "new Partition" from. The field is highlighted.

3.  Click you in the free area the Partitionierungsleiste the position
    on, on the the new Partition created become shall.

The new Partition fills the till now free area from. In Texteingabefeld
"Partitionname" (Partition name) appear an default mark,
e.g. "IDH0:", the you if necessary alter able.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
The default mark for Festplattenpartitionen sets he from the
first letters of manufacturer, e.g. "Ignoring" for IBM, "Q" for quantum etc.,
The mark "HD" and one consecutive issue together.

4.6.2.5. Rename one Partition

1.  Click you in the Partitionierungsleiste the Partition on, the
    renamed become shall. Thereby is she to the actual Partition.

2.  Click you the Texteingabefeld "Partitionsname" on, in the the name
    the actual Partition displayed is.

3.  Discharge you the angezeigten names. Subsequent give you the new
    names an and press the enter key.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
it commends he, no blanks in the Partitionsnamen to use.

4.6.2.6. Discharge one Partition

1.  Click you in the Partitionierungsleiste the Partition on, the
    excluded become shall. Thereby is she to the actual Partition.

2.  Choose you the field "breeze Partition" (Delete Partition) from.

3.  The picked Partition is excluded. The first Partition (left)
    in the Partitionierungsleiste is picked.

4.6.3. Standard configuration for drives

make the manuellen Partitionierung able you he on for an the
Standardkonfigurationen the HDToolbox settle:

1.  Click you the field "standard attitude" (Default Setup) with the
    lefthand Maustaste on and hold you this pressed. It opens he an
    menu with the entries "automatic" as soon as "1" till "8". When you
    "automatic choose, is the Fesplatte, hanging from hers bigness,
    in an meaningful number gleichgroer partitions divided, during
    "1" till "8" the plate in an till eight gleichgroe partitions
    aufteilt.

2.  The first Partition given the names QDH0:, the second Partition the
    names QDH1:. With it stands Q for the first letters of
    Festplattenherstellers. Follow you to the Umbenennen the Partition the
    assignments in the accordingly chapter.

4.6.4. Save and formatting the new partitions

when the new partitions yours presentations correspond to, must you the
settings computer store.

1.  Choose you the field "save" from. The new Partitionsdaten become
    on the hard drive saved. After this inverts program's to the onscreen
    "hard drives initialize un Partitionieren" back.

2.  When the adjustments a restart of intrasystem needed make, so
    is the HDToolbox you abieten, these automatic carry out.
    Also when you this supply turn aside, should you the calculator new
    commence, because otherwise an unobjectionably function not guaranteed
    is.

3.  Towards the restart is every Partition the hard drive through an
    Icon personated. Formatting you now the separate
    partitions, with it this uses become able.

4.  Click you to the formatting the first Partition on the Workbench the
    corresponding Icon on. Choose you in the menu "pictograms" (Icons) the
    menu item "Disk reformat" from. With hard drives is sufficient it, "rapid"
    to choose. The Formatiervorgang runs then monumental faster off.

5.  Click you the first new Partition on. Choose you in the menu
    "pictograms" the menu item "Umbenennen" from. Subsequent give you
    the new names for the Partition an.

Repeat you the last both steps for every new Partition.

4.6.5. Options to the Partitionierung for Erfahrene user

when you an erfahrener user are and exactly know, what you do,
able you the parameter for the Festplattenpartitionen particularly give.
Fore change of worth must you of it signification exactly know.

The following options are for experienced user thought, the all
parameter your partitions till in detail bias will. Those
options find you likewise on the Einstellwindow for the
Partitionierung:

walk you to the re design the Texteingabefender how follows before: Klicken you the
desired field on. Discharge you the existing number and give you the
new worth an. Confirm you every input through squeeze the
enter key.

First Zyl         issue of first coil (boot Cyl) the
                   ausgewhlten Partition. With it can it he with
                   exception of last coil around each cyl the
                   actual Partition or a any cyl in the
                   free area before the actual Partition act. The
                   field "sum Zyl" is appropriate changes.

Last Zyl        issue of last coil (- terminal Cyl) the ausgewhlten
                   Partition. With it can it he with exception of first
                   coil around each cyl the actual Partition
                   or a any cyl in the free area behind
                   the actual Partition act. The field "sum Zyl"
                   is appropriate changes.

Sum Zyl          total number the cyl (Total Cyl) in the ausgewhlten
                   Partition. The field "last Zyl" is appropriate
                   changes.

Buffer             number the Pufferspeicher (cache) for the picked
                   Partition. Buffer decrease the
                   Festplattenzugriffszeit. Pros buffer are however 512
                   byte Speicherkapazitt erfoderlich. The number the from
                   you use buffer is only through the available
                   Speicherkapazitt confined. It commends he in the
                   rule, per Partition ever to whose bigness, the number
                   the on you ingoing files as soon as the existing
                   memory 80-400 buffer to use. The bigness of
                   proved storeroom computes he from the Pufferanzahl
                   multiplied with the Blockgre of Dateisystems
                   (am chapter "KAndern from Dateisystemen").

Boat priority     details, from which drive or. Which Partition from
                   the system restarted is (boat Priority). This field
                   is only for appropriate prepared, startfhige
                   partitions valid. Debit the system from one
                   Festplattenpartitionen from restarted become, must you
                   ahead the AmigaOS-files on this Partition copy.

                   The specified Priottswert can between -127 and +128
                   lie. Ever superior the worth, the superior the priority.
                   The Priorittswer for the Amiga-floppy
                   (DF0:) is 5.

                   Give you for Festplattenpartitionen never a higher
                   Priorittswert as 5 an. Set you the worth for the
                   boot-Partition on 1 and the worth for another
                   partitions, from those from the system restarted become
                   can, on 0.

Bootbar            details, if the system from the ausgewhlten Partition
                   from restarted become can. The Standardangabe for the
                   first Partition is, that restarted become can
                   (Bootable), for all wider partitions, that she
                   not restarted become able (Non-Bootable). Through
                   Anklicken of field able you between the data
                   there- and herschalten.

                   With it the system from one Partition from restarted
                   become can, must you this Partition adjacent
                   how follows prepair: formatting you the Partition.
                   Fit you the AmigaOS-files on the Partition.
                   Subsequent commence you you system new. After this able
                   you the progam HDToolbox invoice. Paging you renewed
                   the Einstellwindow to the Partitionierung on and choose
                   you the field "Bootbar" from.

Change...       Invocation of Einstellwindows "tees of Dateisystems"
                   (file system Characteristics). Over these Preferences
                   able you the Filesystem the ausgewhlen Partition
                   alter (eng. "Chang...").

In addition/update...   Invocation of Einstellwindows "Dateisystemverwaltung"
                   (file system Maintenance). Over these Preferences
                   able you Dateisysteme zinzufgen, clean and alter
                   (eng. "Add/update...").

4.6.6. Prepare single sculler new hard drive

when you the available Festplattenspeicherkapazitt not more
is, able you you system around an new Festplattenlaufwerk
broaden. After you the hard drive according to the assignments of
Herstelllers connected have, use you HDToolbox, around you system
with the new Festplattenspezifikationen to configure.

Walk you to the prepare the hard drive how volgt before:

1.  Click you the Icon "HDToolbox" double on. The Einstellwindow
    "Festplattern initialize and Partitionieren" (hardware Drive
    Preparation, Partitioning and Formatting) is displayed. The new
    hard drive has  the names "unknown" (Unknown).

2.  Choose you the drive "unknown" from. The drive is
    highlighted.

3.  Choose you the field "hard drive install" (Install Drive) from.
    HDToolbox is you in front of it warn, that the content the plate destroys
    is. Squeeze you "OK".

4.  You become now asked if an RDB generated become shall, press you
    "new".

5.  An new window ought he now open. Squeeze you "harvest
    config" and the HDToolbox ought the data the hard drive
    choose. Now should fabricator, Festplattenname etc. Filling
    is. Squeeze you now still "fit".

A fuller description of reduction one new hard drive
find you wider in the front in the chapter "installing".

4.6.7. Re design from Dateisystemen

an Filesystem steers the Datenorganisation on one hard drive. Amiga-
system use the FastFileSystem (FFS). This efficient
Filesystem saves time and Festplattenkapazitt.

The progam HDToolbox enables you, to a other Filesystem,
e.g. One aktualisierten AmigaDOS-version or a benutzerdefinierten
Filesystem, to alternate. You able new Dateisysteme in the list the
verfgbaren Dateisysteme add. Dateisysteme from the list clean
and existing Dateisysteme alter.

--- ATTENTION --------------------------------------------------------------
those function became for experienced user developed. The change of
Dateisystems for an Partition can the intervention on the before
store data impossible make.

Paging you to the re design of Dateisystems for an Partition the
Einstellwindow "Fesplatten Initalisieren and Partitionieren" (hardware Disk
Prepoaration, Partitioning and Formatting) on and lead you following
operation steps from:

1.  Choose you the field "hard drive partitionieren" (Partition Drive) from.
    The Einstellwindow to the Partitionierung is displayed.

2.  Choose you the field "Verndern..." From.

3.  The Einstellwindow for the Filesystem-settings (file system
    Characteristics) is displayed. The name the ausgewhlten Partition
    appear above on the onscreen.

Use you the Aufklappmen "file system" (file system) around the
desired Filesystem to select:

standard Filesystem

Ist this system elective, so stand still the following options to the
zur ~ - at one's disposal:

.   Fasts file system: employed the modern "fasts file"-system. You
    should these switch only deactivate, when you an consisting of
    Partition from one hard drive use want, the with one very
    old AmigaOS-version created became.

.   International mode: those option ought likewise always activates
    is, it be because, you know exactly, what you do.

.   Directory-cache: The use of directory-cache (directory
    cache) is for Festplattenlaufwerke not commended - only in
    exception ought this option activates become.

Strangers Filesystem

Dient to the installing from own Dateisystemen (Custom file system).

Further installed Dateisysteme

Auf the antecedently both choices follows an list the
already in HDToolbox eingebundenen Fremd-Dateisysteme (am also chapter
"Dateisystemverwaltung"). Those are through a DOS-type characterized:
"SFS/01" stands in the rule for SmartFileSystem (am chapter "further
program's) as soon as "PFS/03" for the for-sale Filesystem
ProfessionalFilesystem 3. "UNICOLOURED/01" stands by it to the example for
partitions, the for an UNIX-operating system reserved are.

Towards sampling of Dateisystems must you the requisite values how
follows enter:

Klicken you the respective ones field on and clean you the therein ingoing
data. Give you the new number an and press you the enter key
(hexadecimal quantitative must with 0x start).

Identification

Hexadezimale number (code), the the appropriated Filesystem for AmigaDOS
indents (narrow. "Identifier"). This worth ann only by use
own Dateisysteme (Custom file system) changes become.

Mask

Hexadezimale number to the definition the storage area, on the by DMA
(Direct Memory Access) accessed become can (eng. "Mask"). This field
is only in union with "fasts file system" and "own Filesystem"
available. Please read you in the documentation to yours hard drives-
controller, which worth you here adjust should. For Zorro 3- or
Turbokarten-Festplattencontroller is in the rule an worth from
"0xFFFFFFFC" good suitable.

MaxTransfer

Hexadezimale number, with the the maximum Bytezahl for every DMA-transfer
fixed is. "A maximum of transfer" is only in union with "fasts file
system" and "own Filesystem" available. MaxTransfer can for modern
SCSI-controller on "0xFFFFFF" steady become, by IDE-hard drives is
however care necessary: self modern IDE-hard drives are often not in
the position, blocks greater as 128 KByte in bit to transfer. Here is an
worth from "0x1FE00" recommendable - by old IDE-hard drives flips it
however from time to time only with "0xFE00". When MaxTransfer to high steady is,
can it at copying from great files error give.

Glockgre Filesystem

places the Blockgre of Dateisystems fast (file system block size). Big
values bring frequently a Geschwindigkeitsvorteil with he, have but
also a certain Platzverlust to the follows, then every file always an
ganzzahliges multiple the  Blockgre allocates. With one Blockgre from
16384 would e.g. Every file at least 16384 bytes acknowledgement, an 16385
byte great file already 32768 bytes, etc. An good composition is it,
an Blockgre from 1024 or 2048 bytes to use. Larger Blockgren
make only by very great files sense.

Reserved blocks in beginning

number the blocks in beginning the ausgewhlten position, the for DOS
reserved are (Reserved blocks at beginning). The Standardwert is 2. In
the rule permit no less worth as 2 entered become.

Reserved blocks in end

number the blocks in end the ausgewhlten Partition, the for DOS
reserved are (Reserved blocks at week). The Standardwert is 0.

In addition stand still following options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

Partition automatic announce

places fast, if the Partition to the boot forthwith to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stands,
or before the ertsten use with the "Mount"-comand declared become
must (eng. "Automount this partition"). No automatic declared
partitions able later manual declared become.

Be own boat-code

allowed the use of benutzerdefinierten Bootladers, e.g. Around the
Linux-Bootmanager "Lilo" use to able (eng. "Use custom boot
code"). Is this option activates, must you also the number the blocks
enter, the the Bootlader uses.

Number own boat-blocks

see "Nutze own boat-code".

When you these Preferences leave will, without the adjustments to
save, then choose you "breaking off" (Cancel) from.

To the save the new values for the Filesystem go you how follows before:

1.  Choose you the field "OK" from. The progam inverts to the Preferences for
    the Partitionierung back.

2.  Choose you there the field "save" (Save) from. The adjustments become
    on the drive saved.

3.  The progam inverts to the Hauptwindow the HDToolbox back.

4.6.8. File system association

with help of Einstellwindows to the Dateisystemverwaltung, the she over
"Hinzu/update" reach, able you the list the verfgbaren
Dateisysteme alter. In these chapter become following functions
explained:

.   Add of new Dateisystems

.   Discharge of Dateisystems

.   Re design of existing Dateisystems

paging you the Startblidschirm the HDToolbox on, around an the above
genannten functions to carry out. Subsequent lead you following
operation steps from:

1.  Choose you the field "hard drive partitionieren" from. The Preferences
    to the Partitionierung is displayed.

2.  Choose you the field "Hinzu/update..." From. The Preferences to the
    Dateisystemverwaltung is displayed.

Above on the onscreen become the address and the LUN-issue of
ausgewhlten disk drive displayed. The under displayed list contains
all Dateisysteme, the on the ausgewhlten drive saved are. For
every Filesystem are following data available: identification (hexadezimaler
code), version, bigness in byte and Dateisystemname.

4.6.8.1. Add of new Dateisystems

paging you the Einstellwindow to the Dateisystemverwaltung on and lead you
following operation steps from:

1.  Choose you the field "Filesystem add..." From. It opens he
    an Dateiauswahlwindow.

2.  Give you the complete path for the new Filesystem an or.
    Use you the Dateiauswahlwindow, around the Filesystem to choose.
    Confirm you the Auswahlwindow with "OK".

3.  The progam inverts to the window for the Dateisystemverwaltung back.
    Give you now under "identification" an convenient identification an. Typical
    values are: "0x444F5303" ("DOS/03") for FastFilesystem from AmigaOS,
    "0x50465303" ("PFS/03") for ProfessionalFilesystem and "0x53465301"
    ("SFS/01") for SmartFilesystem. Reading you please also the hint to
    yours Filesystem!

4.  Choose you also here the field "OK" from. The progam inverts subsequently
    to the window for the Partitionierung back.

5.  Choose you here the field "save" from. The adjustments become
    saved and the progam inverts to the Startbildschirm the HDToolbox
    back.

4.6.8.2. Discharge of Dateisystems

paging you the Einstellwindow to the Dateisystemverwaltung on and lead you
following operation steps from:

1.  Choose you the Filesystem from, the excluded become shall. The
    picked Filesystem is highlighted. Click you to the sampling
    of other Dateisystems the desired on.

2.  Choose you the field "Filesystem clean" from. The picked
    Filesystem appear not more on the onscreen.

3.  Choose you now the field "OK" from. The progam inverts to the onscreen
    for the Partitionierung back.

4.  Choose you on the onscreen to the Partitionierung the field "save"
    from. The adjustments become saved and the progam inverts to the
    Hauptbildschirm the HDToolbox back.


4.6.8.3. Update of existing Dateisystems

paging you the Einstellwindow to the Dateisystemverwaltung on and lead you
following operation steps from:

1.  Choose you the field "Filesystem renew..." From. An small window
    is displayed.

2.  Give you the complete path for the new version of Dateisystems
    an or. Use you the Dateiauswahlwindow, around the Filesystem to
    choose. Confirm you the Auswahlwindow with "OK".

3.  The progam inverts to the onscreen for the Partitionierung zruck.
    Quitting you this with "OK".

4.  The progam inverts to the window for the Partitionierung back. Choose
    you now the field "save" from. The adjustments become saved
    and the progam inverts to the Hauptwindow the HDToolbox back.

4.6.8.4. Error handling

switching you the calculator from. Check you, if all cable and the
hard drive/waiting duly on the AMIGA connected are.

Symptom
is the hard drive with help of program HDToolbox configured and the
system before formatting of hard drive new restarted, appear the
Festplattenpiktogramm where appropriate. Not on the onscreen "Workbench".

Processing
undoing you an Shell and give you the following for every Partition an:

    you Partitionsname:

after this able you every Partition with help from AmigaDOS reformat.

Symptom
no one DOS-hard drive in drive 1. Oneness appear on onscreen
"Workbench" as "no formated".

Account
hard drive is prepared, but not formated.

Processing
formatting you the hard drive from the "Workbench" or the "Shell" from.

Symptom
with the activating of intrasystem from the hard drive from is the data medium for
the Workbench requisited.

Processing
squeeze you to the Neustarten of intrasystem following key combination: <Ctrl>+
<rechte and left Amiga-Taste>. Is the Workbench furthermore requisited,
must you where appropriate. The hard drive new base on.

4.7. The Icon-editor "IconEdit" (off OS3.5)

IconEdit is an progam to the Erstellen and Bearbeiten from pictograms
(Icons). With it able you the Workbench yours request appropriate
fashion, in that you existing pictograms alter or new create.
IconEdit was also already before OS3.5. Component the Workbench, however was the
old version really umkomfortabel and offered hardly functions to the time.

The window from IconEdit is dreigeteilt. In lefthand area is the
Bearbeitungswindow in the one Pktogramme edit or new create
can. In middle area are the display panels "normal" and
"Ausgewhlt", which the Icons in hers real bigness represent,
over that find he the Malwerkzeuge (e.g. For circle, Rechtek, straight).
In right part are the Farbtabelle and the FarbPreferences.

The both display panels "normal" and "Ausgewhlt" are so-called
"AppWindows", so that you to the shop from files the accompanying pictograms
in the field consider and he the use from menu save able.
"AppWindows" become in chapter 3.3.2 of original-Workbench-manual page
beschriben. When you the display panel "normal" aklicken, is there also the
for the Icon picked image displayed, so you the
Auswahltaste pressed hold.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
with IconEdit able you also every Icon an additional image allocate,
the on computer uses is, the still not with AmigaOS 3.5
endowed are. For this serves the menu "OS3.5 Icon"/"old
Icon", the he direct over the Zeichenflche is. The under
"OS3.5 Icon" defined image is on OS3.5-intersystem uses, the
andeerer on intersystem with OS3.1 or elders versions of AmigaOS.

4.7.1. Processing field

in these field able Sit with help the mouse pictograms chart. Squeeze
you the Auswahltaste (left Maustaste), with it an pixel in the
ausgewhlten farbe appear. Holding you to the drawing the Auswahltaste
pressed and postpone you the mouse.

In Bearbeitungsfeld takes the Mauspfeil the form of reticles on.
The new pixel appear in the centre of reticles. Below
the Titelleiste above in the centre of window IconEdit appear the
pixel-coordinates (e.g. "X:20, Y:24", which the relative position of
reticles in bezug on the left upper corner show.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
draw you to the shop of Icon the desired Icon easy
in the Bearbeitungsfeld.

4.7.1.1. Selection "normal"/"Ausgewhlt"

simple pictograms go through from only a ("normal") image. Many
pictograms change but you look at sampling. To this needs one
an second Icon, the here with "Ausgewhlt" designates is.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
The selection "normal"/"Ausgewhlt" certain, which the both images in the
Bearbeitungswindow personated is.

4.7.2. Colour selection field

here is the actual Zeichenfarbe picked. Except for the usual method
the Farbauswahl (Anklicken the wished colour with the Auswahltaste)
able you two colors simultaneous choose. Those colors become for the
Fllmuster, filled circle and filled rectangles uses. Choose you
to the use the Fllmuster first of all the first colour from. Holding you
adjacent the shift key pressed and choose you the second colour
from. The button bar with the different Fllmustern changes then
appropriate the representation, so that the both gewhlten colors to see
are.

Below of Farbauswahlfeldes is he the field "reproducible copy". The
here incorporated colour is as transparent discusses. Thereby appears
the respective ones Workbench-background through this places of Icons. Without
transparency would be the Icons always rectangularly blocks.

Around an appointed colour (mostly the colour, the in the Hindergrund of Icons
lies) as diaphanous to determine click you first on the colour and
then on the field next to "reproducible copy". An click on the "transparency"-
field deactivated the transparency again.

4.7.3. The tools

4.7.3.1. Full pattern-symbols

with these symbol able you the Fllmuster choose, the for getllte
rectangles, filled circle and the Fllwerkzeug uses is.

4.7.3.2. Freehand drawing-symbol

The function (first Icon in the second row) is to the expeditious drawing
or. To the set individual pixel thought. With the expeditious drawing are
not unconditional all points bound.

4.7.3.3. Freehand lines-symbol

those function (first Icon in the third row) complies the
Freihandzeichnen, however become here all points bound. That can at
expeditious time under circumstance to delays by the advertisement the line
lead.

4.7.3.4. Circle-symbol

walk you how follows before, around a circle or an Oval to chart:

1.  Choose you the Kreissymbol from.

2.  Show you in the Bearbeitungsfeld on the place, on the he the
    center the Ellpise find shall. Holding you the Auswahltaste
    (left Maustaste) gedrvkt and postpone you the mouse.

3.  Letting you the Auswahltaste loose, as soon as the desired bigness and form
    displayed is.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when you at mounting the elipse the shift key pressed hold,
is an circle designed.

4.7.3.5. More filled circle-symbol

those function complies the normal circle-function, however become the
circle or. Ovals with the actual Fllmuster filled.

4.7.3.6. Rectangle-symbol

walk you to the drawing of oblong how follows before:

1.  Choose you the rectangle-symbol from.

2.  Show you in the Bearbeitungsfeld on the place, on the he an corner
    of oblong find shall. Holding you the Auswahltaste pressed and
    postpone you the mouse.

3.  Letting you the Auswahltaste loose, as soon as the rectangle the desired
    bigness and form attains has.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when you at mounting of oblong the shift key pressed hold,
is an square designed.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when you 3D-rectangles chart will (e.g. The light elevated performing
effect, the the Workbench uses), must you at drawing of
oblong an the both <Alt>-buttons pressed hold. The left and
upper edge become then in the actual colour designed, the rights and
the bottom edge in the colour, the at present as second colour for the
Fllmuster elective is.

4.7.3.7. Filled rectangle-symbol

sequels you the they strode for normal rectangles, around an filled rectangle
or square to produce; by it is the actual Fllmuster uses.

4.7.3.8. Lines symbol

walk you to the drawing one straight line how follows before:

1.  Choose you the Liniensymbol from.

2.  Show you in the Bearbeitungsfeld on the place, on the the line
    start shall.

3.  Holding you the Auswahltaste pressed.

4.  Relocating you the mouse, till the Mauspfeil the desired Liniendende
    attains.

5.  Letting you the Auswahltaste loose.

4.7.3.9. Colt-symbol

with this is an area of Bearbeitungsfelds with the ausgewhlten colour
fill. Choose you the colt-symbol from and click you in a
area on. This is now with the actual colour filling.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
over the colt-symbol able you no already gemusterten expanses
fill. With more corresponding Farbauswahl able she however uniform
Farbbereiche with a the other Fllmuster fill.

4.7.3.10. Rescinded-symbol (Undo)

with this is the last action rescinded made, the you with the mouse
carried out have.

4.7.3.11. Reconstitute-symbol (Redo)

those function brings about the converse the "Rckgngig"-function, stands
so the old condition before the invocation again here.

4.7.3.12. Discharge-symbol

with "discharge" able you the complete content of Bearbeitungsfeldes
clean. The Bearbeitungsfeld is by it with the ausgewhlten colour
filling.

4.7.3.13. Pipettes-symbol

with the "pipette" able you the colour of Bildpunktes to the actual
colour make. Choose you the pipettes-function from and click you in the
Bearbeitungswindow on the pixel, of it colour you to the actual
Malfarbe make want.

4.7.3.14. Arrow-symbols

with the arrow-symbol able you the image in the Bearbeitungsfeld in the
respective ones direction postpone. With these function leave he screen content
within of Bearbeitungswindows postpone around she better in the general view
to place.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
Bildteile, the from the area of Bearbeitungsfeldes shoved become,
go lost.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
squeeze you to the pixelweisen relocating of picture the obversely
Cursortaste.

4.7.4. The menu

4.7.4.1. Menu "project"

with help the menu items in the menu "project" able you Icon-files
open and computer store.

New                it loads for the to the time picked Icon-kind the
                   default-Icon. The Icon-kind is in the menu
                   "kind" fixed. Were the adjustments in the window
                   not saved, become you in a Dialogwindow
                   asked, if she saved become will.

Undoing             it opens an existing pictograms-file. In a
                   Dateiauswahl-window become you to the input of
                   file names requested. In these Auswahlwindow
                   become only the names the verfgbaren drawers and
                   ".info"-files displayed.

Widerherstellen    it opens the at last stored version the Icon-
                   file. Thereby go all adjustments lost, the ever since
                   the last memory of Icon made become.
                   Was the Icon still not saved, so leaves
                   he these menu item also not invoice.

Save          Speichert an existing Piktogrammdatei. Files with
                   the same names become berschieben. In these fall
                   goes the ahead created Icon lost.

Save as      Dient to the details of new file names for the
                   actual image. In a Dateiauswahlwindow become you
                   to the input the Zieldatei for the edited Icon
                   requested. On this wise man avoid you the
                   overwriting one existing Piktogrammdatei.

Save as      Speichert the actual image as default-Icon for
Vorgabepiktogramm  the to the time picked Icon-kind. This image
                   is as pattern for every new Icon or. Pseudo-
                   Icon these kind uses and for all
                   pictograms, the with help of menu item "new" in the menu
                   "project" created become.

Quitting          Dient to the quitting of program IconEdit. Was the
                   actual image not saved, become you a
                   Dialogwindow asked, if the image before quitting of
                   program saved become shall.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when you an drawers-Icon create and adjacent "save
as Vorgabepiktogramm" choose, is this Icon by selection of
Workbench-menu item "content show/all files" to the representation from
drawers without own Icon uses.

4.7.4.2. Menu "Bearbeiten"

The menu items in the menu "Bearbeiten" enable it you, IFF-ILBM-files
from the clipboard (eng. "Clipboard") to import, the with other
Zeichenprogrammen created become.

Clipboard       Lscht the image in the Bearbeitungsfeld and copied it in
                   the clipboard.

Copying           Kopiert the image in the Bearbeitungsfeld in the
                   clipboard.

Integrate           Kopiert an image from the clipboard out in the
                   Bearbeitungsfeld. With it is the actual content of
                   Bearbeitungsfeld compensates.

Discharge            Lscht the image in the Bearbeitungsfeld. Formation the data
                   ahead not saved, become she final excluded.

Withdrawals         force the last procedure rescinded.

Reconstitute   Kehrt the function from "Wiederrufen" around and stands so
                   the condition in front of it again here.

Tie-clip open        Kopiert an existing IFF-ILBM-file in the
                   clipboard. In a Dateiauswahlwindow become you
                   requested, the names the to ffnenden file
                   to enter. Subsequent able you the menu item
                   "Einfgen" use.

Tie-clip computer store     Speichert the actual content the clipboard in
as...             The specified file.

Tie-clip show        shows the content the clipboard on. With it is the
                   progam "MultiView" uses. Stands the progam
                   "MultiView" not to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, can this function
                   not invoked become.

4.7.4.3. Menu "kind"

over the menu items in the menu "kind" able you the kind of Icon
give, the changes or. Created become shall.

Disk               Disk-pictograms, the in the Workbench-window displayed
                   become.

Drawer          drawers-pictograms, the in a data medium-
                   window displayed become, e.g. The drawers
                   "utilities" (aid programs) and "tools" (program's).

Progam           progam-pictograms, e.g. Calculator (pocket calculator),
                   Clock (clock) or IconEdit.

Project            project-pictograms for files, the with a progam
                   created become, e.g. Pictograms, the he in the
                   drawers of list "Storage" (hoard)
                   find.

Paperbasket         Icon for the paperbasket.

4.7.4.4. Menu "emphasizing"

over the points in the menu "emphasizing" able you the look from
ausgewhlten pictograms fix.

Reverse             with the Anklicken of Icon become all colors
                   reverse personated. When you beispielweise the
                   default Workbench-colors use and the
                   Icon in an gray field skirted is, alternates
                   the background color from grey to blue. Those option is
                   only in the mode "old Icon" available.

Except for background  with the Anklicken of Icon become the colors of
                   Icons, but not the background color, inverse.
                   When you for instance the default Workbench-
                   colors use and the Icon in an gray field
                   skirted is, stays the background to selection of
                   Icon gray. Those option is likewise only in the
                   mode "old Icon" available.

Alternative image  allowed the use of second picture for the
                   "ausgewhlten" condition of Icon at sampling
                   with the mouse. With the drawers-pictograms the
                   Workbench acts it he e.g. Around such pictograms:
                   with the Anklicken of drawers-symbol is the image
                   one geffneten only by "OS3.5 pictograms" possible.

4.7.4.5. Menu "images"

over the points of menu "images" able you the images in the
Anzeigefeldern "Noirmal" and "Ausgewhlt" exchange and IFF-ILBM-images
import, the with other Grafikprogrammen created become.

Swapping        Tauscht the images in the Anzeigefeldern "normal" and
                   "Ausgewhlt" together from.

Copying           The functionality these option hangs from ausgewhlten
                   Druckknopfsymbol off. Is "normal" adjusted, so is
                   the "normal" image to "Ausgewhlt" copied. Is
                   "Ausgewhlt" adjusted, so is the "picked"
                   image to "normal" copied.

Vorgabepiktogramm  it loads an standard-Icon in the Bearbeitungsfeld.
                   Subsequent  able you the new Icon on basis
                   this standard-Icon create.

Shop              it loads ahead stored images, without the names of to
                   editierenden Icon to alter. As soon as you on the
                   Mrnpunkt "landing" show, is an submenu displayed
                   (braised.U's.).

Save as image Speichert an image as standard-IFF-ILBM-file, not
                   as Icon.

Widerherstellen    Stellt the settings of window IconEdit again
                   here, the by undoing of window or. Before selection from
                   "new" or "undoing" defaulted were.

The menu item "images/shop" contains following sub-dots:

IFF-image           it loads ever to activated symbol an with a other
                   progam created IFF-ILBM-file in the display panel
                   "normal" or "Ausgewhlt".

Norm image...   It loads from angegebenen Icon the not "picked"
                   image ever to activated stress knopfsymbol in the
                   display panel "norm" or "Ausgewhlt". That
                   complies the draw of Icon in of the
                   both field.

Ausgewhltes       it loads from angegebenen Icon the "picked" image
image...            Ever to activated tast in the display panel
                   "norm" or "Ausgewhlte".

Both images...    It loads from angegebenen Icon the "normal" and the
                   "picked" image ind the accordingly field.

4.7.4.6. Menu "extras"

with the points of menu "extras" able you another useful functions
of rogramms IconEdit ctrl.

Larger            Vergrert the Zeichenflche from IconEdit, the already
Zeichenflche      painted image stays by it unchanged and is he
                   in the lefthand upper corner the amplified
                   Zeichenflche.

Less           Verkleinert the Zeichenflche from IconEdit. With it is
Zeichenflche      the surface from on the right and back here belittles. Shall
                   through the invocation this menu item the Zeichenflche so
                   small become, that no place more for the at present
                   edited Icon existing would, so opens he
                   an Dialogwindow, that around confirmation or breaking-off of
                   process begs.

Fractional           Verkleinert the Zeichenflche, so that the raked and
Zeichenflche      bottom edge of Icon each with the right
                   and bottom edge the Zeichenflche coincide.

Automat. Above      Verschiebt the image in the upper left corner of
left              Bearbeitungsfeldes.

Glheffekt         this menu item provides the Icon automatic
add         with a Glheffekt, how he by the standard-
                   pictograms from OS3.5 uses is.

Frameless          when you these menu item activate, so is the
                   Icon without edge conserved.

4.7.4.7. Menu "options"

with help the menu items in the menu "options" able you different
settings for the progam IconEdit give.

Grid use?   With selection these option is every one pixel in the
                   Bearbeitungsfeld individual displayed and is with the
                   background color skirted. Is this option not
                   activates, become the pixel bergangslos
                   displayed. With default setting is the option
                   aktivieirt.

Optimized          with selection these option is the Transparenzfarbe
computer store          to possibility the Farbnummer naught allocated and
                   all not use colors become from the palette
                   distant.

Pictograms        with selection these option is an Icon for every
produce?          IFF-Pinseldatei saved, the with the menu item
                   "save as image" created is. Is this option
                   not activates, is no Icon saved. With
                   default setting become pictograms saved.

Farbmodell         in these submenu able you auswahlen, if the
                   Farbregler to the tuning the colors the RGB- or the
                   HSB-Farbmodell use shall.

Options computer store Speichert all actual settings, including
                   the bigness and position of Icon Edit- and Dateiauswahl-
                   window as soon as all settings from menu items.

4.7.5. Tees (Tooltypes)

some Eingenschaften of IconEdit leave he already at activating
activate. Around this adjust choose you the IconEdit-Icon on
and choose in the Workbench-menu "pictograms" the point "informations
show". Exchange you now on the Karteireiter "Icon", then able
you the tees direct in the field "tees" fill out.

The following tees become from progam IconEdit bolstered:

PUBSCREEN=<Name>   gives because ffentlichen onscreen (eng. "Oeffentlich
                   screen") on, on the IconEdit is window open shall.

TEMPLATE=<Pfad>    the path to the pictograms, the from the function
                   "stencil use" charged become.

HSB                for the Farbregler is the HSB-Farbmodell uses.

OPTIMIZE           with the securing the pictograms is the palette
                   optimized.

CLIPUNIT=<n>       gives the to appropriating clipboard-oneness on. The
                   Standardwert is 0.

XMAG=<n>           Verbreitert the Bearbeitungsfeld. You able values
                   between 4 and 16 enter. The Standardwert is 4.

YMAG=<n>           it leads to one greater height of Bearbeitungsfeldes.
                   You able values between 4 and 16 enter. The
                   Standardwert is 4.

LEFTEDGE=<n>       gives the position the lefthand edge of Editorwindows
                   on.

TOPEDGE=<n>        gives the position the upper edge of Editorwindows
                   on.

SHOWCLIP=<Pfad>    gives the complete path to the auxiliary routine on, the
                   to the announcement the clipboard serves. The Standardpfad
                   is "SYS:utilities/Multiview".

NOICONS            Deaktiviert the building from pictograms at
                   save from files, e.g. At save one file
                   as IFF-Pinseldatei.

NOGRID             Deaktiviert the grid in the Bearbeitungsfeld.

ICONDRAWER=<Pfad>  gives the Standardschublade on, the in
                   Dateiauswahlwindown displayed is, the to selection
                   the menu items "undoing" and "save as" in the menu
                   "project" appear.

ILBMDRAWER=<Pfad>  gives the Standardschublade on, the in
                   Dateiauswahlwindown displayed is, the to selection
                   the menu items "shop" and "save" in the menu "images"
                   appear.

CLIPDRAWER=<Pfad>  gives the Standardschublade on, the Dateiauswahlwindown
                   displayed is, the to selection the menu items "undoing
                   tie-clip" and "save tie-clip as" in the menu "Bearbeiten"
                   appear.

ALTDRAWER=<Pfad>   gives the Standardschublade on, the in
                   Dateiauswahlwindown displayed is, the to selection
                   the menu item "shop" in the menu "images" appear.

4.8. IomegaTools

"IomegaTools" is an progam to the accociation from ZIP- and JAZ-disk drive
the firm Iomega.

"IomegaTools" offers under other following functions:

.   Set or remove of Schreibschutzes of medium

.   Ejection of medium

.   Formatting of medium

.   Informations over drive and ein inserted vehicle

.   Re design the disk drive-config

"IomegaTools" bolstered complete the SCSI-versions following Iomega-
drives, where all familiarize SCSI-Hostadapter also from
"IomegaTools" bolstered become.

.   ZIP 100

.   ZIP 250

.   JAZ 1Gb

.   JAZ 2Gb

ATAPI-and Parallelport-versions the above aufgefhrten Iomega-drives
become on principle also bolstered, when the driver of use
Inferfacve-adapter (IDE-Hostadapter or Parallelport-
Schnittstellenkarte) the HDSCSICMD-Betriebssytstem-interface
bolstered or emulated. They are you he not sure, if the by you
inferface-adapter the fall is turn you he on the fabricator of
adapter. A guarantee for the function with ATAPI- or Parallelport-
disk drive can but in not fall given become.

"IomegaTools" bolstered and acknowledges all Amiga-Dateisystems, the
conformist programmed become, e.g. FAT95, CrossDOS, CrossMAC etc.

4.8.1. The installing

IomegaTools is by the installing from AmigaOS 3.9 mitinstalliert.
With it attempted the installing-script, the config of
interface driver un of disk drive independent carry out. Worse luck
gives it SCSI-Hostadapter, by those the automated config
must you the installing-script an little "on the bounds help".
You must then the names of interfaces-driver (Device, e.g.
"1230scsi.device") and the disk drive-issue (Unit, e.g. "5") from hand
enter. In general is sufficient it but, the vorgeshlagene configurations
to accepting.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
shall you the manual config Vorziehen or the automated
config in spite of your support the drive not configure
able, fesen you please in the "IomegaTools"-Guide on the "AmigaOS 3.9"-CD
the section "installing". There find you onward informations
to the config and support by Konfigurationsproblemen.

4.8.2. The handling

The Iomega-tools find he in the directory "tools". Towards the activating
appear the "IomegaTools"-window on the Workbench. In these window
find you the control elements from "IomegaTools". When you the window
again again close, stays "IomegaTools" furthermore active. You able
the "IomegaTools"-window anytime with one key combination again
open. Standard is for it the combination "<CTRL>+<linke ALT>+<i>"
adjusted. Those key combination is free definable ("IomegaTools"
is an "Commodity", info over that find you in the chapter
"Commodities").

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when the "IomegaTools"-window not by every restart yours arithmetician on
the Workbench appear shall, licken you once in the title-ledge of
"IomegaTools"-window and choose you from the menu "settings" the
menu item "Programmeinstellungen". Remove you the tick before "with the
boot appear". You should "IomegaTools" but not from the
directory "WBStartup" remove, around the window not more on the
Workbench to have, then "IomegaTools" to every restart yours intrasystem the
from you gewhlten Laufwerkseinstellungen to the drive transmits (am
"settings" in these hint).

The Programmwindow contains nine switch and an list the verfgbaren
Iomega-drives. Possibly are some the switch in
"Geisterschrift" personated. In these fall is in the gewhlten drive
no vehicle inlaid. As soon as you in this drive an vehicle inserting,
become the switch normal personated and are then unsuitable.

4.8.3. Ver-/unlock

it opens he an window with the title "media ver-/unbolt", the
you following options offer:

"write protection" - Aktiviert the write protection for the one insert vehicle,
like the write protection-quarter-wave contact piston the herkmmlichen diskette. You able
electively an keyword give, that by a spteren pick up of
Schreibschutzes again entered become must. On this wise man able you
the vehicle in front of it protect, from meddlers with data described to become.
Trespasser user able on this vehicle then only still reading
seize.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
objections you but, that you self likewise only still from these vehicle
read and not thereupon computer store able, when you the keyword forget
should!

"Harvest- and write protection" - Aktiviert sowohol the write protection as also
a Leseschutz. The vehicle appear then as "BATH" on the Workbench
and it can in no one wise man thereupon accessed become, till the harvest-/
write protection temporary abrogated is (am back) or the cover
complete distant is. The details of keyword is here unconditional
needed, around these cover to activate (even so natural by the
distance of protection, equal if temporary or final.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
objections you also here: without the keyword is an such deschtztes
vehicle in no one wise man more usable! The cover leaves he in the fall, that
you the keyword forget have, only still through an formatting of
medium again remove, where then but all on the vehicle
store data get lost!

"Transient unbolt" - credit you the "write protection" with or without
keyword or the "harvest-/write protection" for the inlaid vehicle activates,
can the obversely cover, to input of keyword, with these
function temporary abrogated become. The respective ones cover of medium is
then so long deactivated, how he the vehicle in the drive is. Is
the vehicle ejected (by "IomegaTools" or manual), is the respective ones
cover of medium at the moment again active!

"Vehicle unbolt" - Entfernt the "write protection" or "harvest-/
write protection" everlasting from vehicle. You have thereafter again full
intervention on the vehicle (reading and writing), also when the vehicle from the
drive ejected is. Credit you "harvest-/write protection" or
"write protection" with keyword on the vehicle activates, must you natural
here the keyword with give, around the cover to lift.

"Keyword alter" - Ist the one insert vehicle with a keyword protected,
the you gladly alter want, able you an new keyword enter.
At first must you the momentary valid keyword for the vehicle enter and
thereafter then the new keyword. When the vehicle with "write protection" with
keyword secured is, and you the "write protection" without keyword activate
want, leave you the input line for the new keyword easy empty.

4.8.4. Diskettes formatting

here able you the one insert vehicle in the gewhlten Iomega-drive
reformat.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
attention: with these procedure go all on the vehicle store data
irrevocable lost! Convince you he, the no for you important
data on the one insert vehicle saved are!

Then the media for ZIP-/JAZ-drives only for PC or Mac preformats
extradited become, is it necessary, an "ladenfrisches" vehicle first
with the Amiga new to reformat.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
shall you "CrossDOS" or an alike PC-format-compatible
Filesystem on you Amiga installed have, able you the new vehicle
also without Neuformatierung use. Here gives it but an small
restriction: ever to employed Filesystem can the length the
file names on 8 sign plus 3 sign for the sucked. "Extension" confined
is. Shall you "CrossMAC" or an other macintosh-compatible
Filesystem installed have, able you for macintosh preformatted
media likewise without Neuformatierung use.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
objections you but, that an exchange such media with a other
Amiga-owner to difficulties lead can, when these no
corresponding Filesystem on its Amiga installed has!

Normally should you new media hence first once new reformat,
before you data with other user exchange.

"Newer Diskettenname" - here able you a names for the vehicle
enter. The name is also from operating system required, around by several
resemble disk drive the one insert media from each other distinguish to
able.

Might assign you hence if possible unique and meaningful names for the media.
The names able also you by the order and Archivierung your data
useful is.

"Dos type" - you able the one insert vehicle with a Filesystem your
choice reformat. Those list offers you the on you Amiga
installed Dateisysteme to the selection on. In normal case is "FFS Intl."
The correct choice and for the verschiedensten purpose complete insufficient.

Shall you more Partition on the vehicle lay against will, read you
please in the "IomegaTools"-Guide the section "formatting". There find you
going on informations to the themes "Dateisysteme", "partitions"
and also informations to possible. Existing austerities by the
formatting.

"Garbage can lay against" - fault you this option with a tick, around to
the formatting an "garbage can"-directory on the vehicle lay against to
leave (am also Workbench-guide, chapter "formatting").

"Schnellformatierung" - those kind the formatting serves only by
preformatted media. The formatting is here essential faster
carried out, as by the other kinds the formatting. Severe taken
is only the Verzeichnisstruktur excluded and the Diskettenname changes.
With a new vehicle is the Schnellformatierung insufficient, then the
media already preformats extradited become.

"Formatting without checking" - the one insert vehicle is complete
formated. It is not supervised, if the formatting all sectors
of medium error-free follow is. The formatting without checking goes
some faster as with checking, then every one formatted sector not
still once to the checking read in is.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
shall one the formatted sectors but uncommitted is,
get you over that no error message! You should this kind the
formatting hence only then choose, when you he sure are, that the
one insert vehicle no surfaces-error show.

Objections you also, that by a uncommitted formatted vehicle your data
possibly changed become able, also when you at Schreibvorgang
no error message get! From these ground should you only
"formatting with checking" choose.

"Formatting with checking" - the one insert vehicle is complete
formated and the formatting the separate sectors supervised. Shall
one the sectors uncommitted formated been is, get you an
error message with the possibility, the procedure for these sector to
repeat. Was the sector to a or several wider attempts
faultless formated, carts "IomegaTools" with the formatting the
by the way sectors independent forth.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
shall the formatting of sector whole fail, ought you the
vehicle not more use! Your data able on a such vehicle,
in spite of successful formatting the other sectors of medium, complete
unforeseeable changed become or even whole lost go!

Those kind the formatting lasts longer as the formatting without
checking, then every one sector of medium to the formatting still once
read in is.

4.8.5. Settings

in these window able you different settings for you ZIP-/JAZ-
drive carry out and everlasting computer store.

"Writing with checking" - with every Schreibvorgang is supervised, if
the data correct on the vehicle saved become. Then herewith the data
to the eingentlichen Schreibvorgang to the checking still einaml
read in become, lasts the Schreibvorgang altogether longer. The
(relative small) delay should you your data but worth is.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
to the time serves this option reliable only with JAZ-disk drive. On
ZIP-drives has this option at present no Enflu.

"Drive park in..." - With these Schieberegler able you the time
adjust, to the the elective drive in the "Standby"-mode
deactivates. Is from the drive for the duration the eingestellten time not
accessed, is the rotation of medium stopped and the authoring-/
Lesekpfe become in the park-position go. In these condition
used up the drive an bit few stream and the life from
vehicle and drive is lengthened.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
Normalerweise runs the drive independent again on, when thereupon
accessed is. Dependent from use Hostadapter and Laufwerkstyp
can it but come forward, that the drive not independent again starts.
In these fall use you please the switch "drive commence" in the
"IomegaTools"-Hauptwindow.

"Save", "Benutzen", "breaking off" - you able the vorgenommenen
settings computer store, use (without to computer store) or the attitude
abbort (it worth then the previous settings again).

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
consider you, that the settings not on the vehicle or in the drive
saved become, but on the boat-drives yours intrasystem (e.g.
Hard drive) discarded become. From these ground ought "IomegaTools" also
by every restart automatic restarted become, then it the on you boat-
drive off place settings for the Iomega-drives at boot
ausliest and on the respective ones drives transmits.

4.8.6. Pose

with these switch is the vehicle direct from the in the list gewhlten
drive ejected.

4.8.7. Diskettes status

an window is open, the different informations over the
one insert vehicle displayed. In separate are the following informations:

"capacity" - The total capacity of one insert medium in block. An
block (sector) of ZIP-/JAZ-medium contains normally 512 bytes.
Is here e.g. "196608 blocks" displayed, has the vehicle so an
total capacity from 96Mb.

"Diskettenbelegung" - to the time on the vehicle off place data in percent
the total capacity. Is here e.g. 56% displayed, are as much percent the
total capacity of vehicle already described and you able still 44% the
total capacity of medium on data on the vehicle computer store.

"Current issue" - a Identifikationsnummer of medium, the by the
formatting of medium be taken is.

"Diskettentyp" - it is specified, which vehicle to the time in the gewhlten
drive inlaid is. Interesting is this info particularly then,
when you e.g. An ZIP 250-drive possession and next to the 250Mb-media
also still older 100Mb-media substitute.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
credit you forget, which kind from vehicle you inlaid have, need
you it not auszuwerfen and renewed einzulegen, around the kind of medium
to find. Letting you he easy the Diskettenstatus show!

"Dos type" - here is the name of on the vehicle use Dateisystems
displayed, e.g. "FFS Intl." Or "MS-DOS MSH" etc.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
is an ein inserted vehicle on the Workbench with "BATH" or "????"
Displayed, so able you with help the informations of "Diskettenstatus"
ascertain, if the vehicle berhaupft formated is or with which
Filesystem it formated became.

"Present condition", "lingering lifetime" - those announcement give an
rough presentation of it, how long the one insert vehicle still
usable is. The advertisement "Jetziger condition" gives information over that,
how many the sectors (in percent the total number the sectors of
medium) from drive self as uncommitted recognized become and by
Schreibvorgngen not more used become.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
those defective sectors have not unconditional some with defective
sectors to do, the by one formatting of medium as uncommitted
displayed become. The Iomega-drives have, like how hard drives, the
ability, faulty sectors independent to recognize. Those sectors
become in an sucked. "Bath block"-list registered and from drive not
more accessed. The Filesystem yours Amiga gets from alledem nothing
with and goes from a fehlerfreien vehicle from. In normal firm works
he the also not on the data integrity from, then the drive self
all grips on this defective sectors suppresses.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
The advertisement "lingering lifetime" shows real only very coarse on, how
long the vehicle to thought from Iomega still einwandrei serves. The
computation the life follow on base the till now recognized
defective sectors in bezug on the past time ever since the last
Low-levels-formatting. In general hold the media by good
storage and more careful processing very long.

4.8.8. Drive status

"fabricator", "Laufwerkstyp", "ROM version", "ROM date" - here become
details to the gewhlten drive displayed. Normally are this
informations not from signification for the operator and only in the fall from
physical Schwierigkeitem with the drive from benefit (e.g.
Garantiefall, repair etc.).

"AmigaOS driver" - here find you the names of driver yours
Hostadapters (e.g. "1230scsi.device").

"AmigaOS oneness" - an SCSI-Hostadapter can till to 7 drives
head on, the with help the "Unit number" (oneness-issue) discriminated
become. Here could by a ZIP-drive e.g. "5" or "6" stand, then
an this both numbers in ZIP-drive adjustable is. The momentary in
drive adjusted issue is here displayed.

"Treiberversion" - The version number of driver for yours Hostadapter.

"Selftest commence" - with these switch able you the eingebauten
Sebsttest yours ZIP-/JAZ-disk drive commence. You get to conclusion
this process an report over issue or washout of test.

4.8.9. Drive activating

with these switch able you an ZIP-/JAZ-drive, that he in the
"Standby"-mode is, again "arouse". The vehicle is again in
rotation put and the authoring-/Lesekpfe over the vehicle go. It
can a instant last, till the drive again ready is.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
this switch must you also actuate, when the drive to the
eingestellten time under "drive park in..." Self in the "Standby"-
mode gechaltet has and by a authoring-/read access not independent
again starts.

4.8.10. Drive parking

with these switch able you the elective drive "from hand" in the
"Standby"-mode toggle. The function is alike the "drive park
in...", Has but immediate effect. The rotation of medium is
forthwith stopped and the authoring-/Lesekpfe in the Parkposition go.

4.8.11. Help

with these switch able you the Online-help from "IomegaTools" in the
AmigaGuide-format invoice. Here find itself also onward
informations to "IomegaTools" and ZIP-/JAZ-disk drive, e.g.
Partitionierung from media, austerities the use Dateisysteme,
tips and artifices in the social intercourse with the Iomega-disk drive on different SCSI-
Hostadaptern etc.

4.8.12. The menu from "IomegaTools"

the Hauptwindow from "IomegaTools" offers you self-evident also
an menu with different options. It follows an recital the
separate menu and an clarification the menu items.

4.8.12.1. Menu "project"

"SCSI hardware comb" - it starts an quest to the in SCSI-Hostadapter
ageschlossenen device. Displayed become all gefundenen ZIP-/JAZ-
drives. Useful is these menu item particularly then, when you
first an new drive connected have and of it oneness-issue
not know.

"Laufwerksliste comb" - lists all ZIP-/JAZ-drives on, the on
you SCSI-Hostadapter connected are.

"Settings new load" - with this able you the at last store
settings again load, e.g. After you chops and changes on the time till
to the parking carried out have, the attitude to the Ausprobieren "used"
have and then however rather again the previous attitude use
want.

"Ikonifizieren" - the Programmwindow is belittles and as Icon
on the Workbench discarded. Through a Doppelklick on this Icon
able you the window from "IomegaTools" again open.

"Conceal" - the Programmwindow is closed. "IomegaTools" stays
but furthermore active and can with help the from you gewhlten or the
standard default key combination again open become.

"Termination" - Beendet "IomegaTools" final. You able the
angeschlossenen Iomega-drives self-evident furthermore use how
usual, but able you no settings on the disk drive
carry out, so "IomegaTools" not again restarted is.

4.8.12.2. Menu "window"

here find you all switch of Hauptwindows still once as
menu items. The functions these menu items distinguish he not from
those the switch, hence become we here thereupon forego, the separate
points still once to explain.

4.8.12.3. Menu "settings"

this menu bestitzt only a only one menu item, and sure the point
"Programmeinstellungen". Here opens he an further window, in the you
programmspezifische settings for "IomegaTools" carry out able, e.g.
The behavior of Hauptwindows at run (undoing or Verbergen)
and some more.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
some the options able he on the behavior of program in the
compatibility with drive and SCSI-Hostadapter very negative take!

The special functions become here from these ground not discusses.
Shall you despite that some the "dangerous" settings change
will, schalgen you please in the "IomegaTools"-Guide on the AmigaOS 3.9-CD
in the Kapiutel "Programmeinstellungen" to, around more over this options and
her effect to hear.

"Premonitions show" - when you an function accomplish want, the he
possibly adverse on your data take can, is an warning
displayed, the you over existing ventures by the realisation the
gewhlten function aufklrt. With these switch able you this
premonitions on- or deactivate.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
you should the premonitions only then deactivate, when you whole exactly
know, how the separate functions from "IomegaTools" work! Many a one
these functions able he immediate on the integrity your data
take and should hence with Bedacht used become!

"As Icon open" - this switch affect the behavior from
"IomegaTools" at first boot of program, like how "with the boot
appear". "IomegaTools" is, when "as Icon open" with a tick
provide is, direct to the boot "Ikonifiziert" and appear then as
Icon on the Workbench. You able then the Programmwindow, how
above already explains, with a Doppelklick on the Icon open.

"Onscreen" - here able you the names of so-called "ffenlichen
screen" (Public Screen) give, on the the window from
"IomegaTools" open become shall. Reading you there to also in the Workbench-
guide the chapter over screens on the Amiga. There is in the individuals
explains, what public screens are and how one she arranges.

"Auswurfverzgerung" - here able you an space of time in 50stel
seconds give, the from "IomegaTools" bided is, around you Iomega-
drive time to the ejection of medium to give. With the most SCSI-
Hostadapter-drive-combinations ought proper also an "0"
suffice, but one can never careful enough is. When the emission the
media for you to long lasts, try you it with a low
worth in these input line.

"Startverzgerung", "Schreibverzgerung", "Sperrverzgerung" - here necessary
the same how by the "Auswurfverzgerung".

"Left edge", "waiter edge" - here able you the position of
"IomegaTools"-window on the onscreen give. An worth "-1" in these
input line brings about, that he "IomegaTools" self an advantageous
position for is window on the onscreen seeks. The position of
window is in Bildpunkten, outgoing from the lefthand upper corner of
screen specified.

"Icon X position", "Icon Y position" - The same function how at
Hauptwindow from "IomegaTools", where you here but the position of
Icon give able, the to invocation from "Verbergen" in the menu
"project" on the Workbench appear. Also here brings about the input from
"-1" in both input line, that he "IomegaTools" self an advantageous
position for the Icon seeks.

"With the boot appear" - with these switch able you fix, if the
window from "IomegaTools" at boot open become shall, or if he
"IomegaTools" direct to the boot in the "foothills"-mode happens. Is
here an tick to see, appear the Programmwindow to the first
boot from "IomegaTools" on the Workbench or the from you gewhlten
ffentlichen onscreen. Remove you the tick, when you the
"IomegaTools"-window rather by need with the key combination (CX
Tastenbefehl) open want.

"CX priority" - here ought an "0" stand. It brings in the general
no advantages, the here standing worth to change.

"CX key combination" - here able you the key combination define,
the the "IomegaTools"-window opens, when he "IomegaTools" in the
"Verbergen"-condition is. The already incorporated standard-
key combination "<Ctrl>+<linke Alt>+<i> means, that you the <CTRL>-
key", the <linke ALT>-key and the key <i> simultaneous press
must, around the Programmwindow from "IomegaTools" to open.

"Save", "Benutzen", "breaking off" - the has usual able you the here
vorgenommenen settings everlasting computer store, easy only use
(without to computer store), or the settings quash and again to the
Hauptwindow return.

4.9. XAD-Entpacker

the XAD-Entpacker can files, the with LHA, LZX, DMS and ZIP gotta
are, again extracting. The whole happens by it complete in the Hintegrund.
When you in future on an archive Doppelklicken, so is automatic the
XAD-Entpacker restarted and it opens he an Dateiauswahl, in the you
the goal-directory for the extracting files give able. When you
an selection hit and on "OK" gelickt have, then find you in
briefness in the Zielverzeichnis the entpackten files before.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
the XAD-Entpacker consists in the kernel from one Library ("xad.library"). Those
is from XAD-Entpacker uses, the again over DefIcons in system
linked is.

5. ViNCEd - the new Super-Shell

ViNCEd is in first line an strong advanced Shell. He grants hence
the input from AmigaDOS-ordering, with those one e.g. Data medium and
files copy, files rename or Befehlssequenzen accomplish can.
ViNCEd offers besides possibilities, the wide over the publicly known functions
the standard-Shell of AMIGA go out. An survey these
possibilities gives following list:

.   Histroy-function: when more text in the ViNCEd-window stands, as in the
    visible area goes, then become Rollbalken added, around the
    entire text also furthermore in the intervention to have.

.   Adjustable Tab-Ergnzugen: through simple or double squeeze
    the <TAB>-key can ViNCEd inputs complete. Z.B's. Is the
    input "ed braised:sta<TAB>" to "ed braised:startup-sequence". When ViNCEd more
    as an possibility finds, is an Dateiauswahl open and you
    able the correct file choose.

.   Window-buttons: ViNCEd has, next to the publicly known Amiga Shell-buttons
    another in upper right windowrand. The third button from left is
    to the Ikonifizieren of Shell-window. Left-hand hereof are two text-
    buttons, the macros invoice. "Settings" opens the ViNCEd-
    Preferences and "help" opens the help-file.

.   Menu, e.g. With the function, with the window to the next onscreen
    zy bounce or the text in the window to computer store.

.   Tastatursteuerung: each key can an particular, free
    configurable signification have. Standard are the following
    buttons allocates:

    function keys:   carry out from macros.

    Help:              it calls the "help"-macro.

    Shift-arrow        cursor bounces the half side in the direction of
    combination:       arrow.

    Ctrl-arrow         cursor bounces on the extreme windowgrenzen.
    Combination:

    Ctrl-a:            Kursor pringt to the beginning the row.

    Ctrl-c:            Beendet the current progam.

    Further clues to the key layout find you in the
    englischsprachigen hint.

.   Shell/bracket-Handler: through ViNCEd have you direct intervention on
    all AmigaDOS-comands. ViNCEd is free configurable, so that you
    self determine able, how your Shell-window work shall.

5.1. ViNCEd menu

ViNCEd can as "normal" Shell uses become, i.e. You able
AmigaDOS-comands enter, the to squeeze the input-key carried out
become. Then ViNCEd but much stronger is, has he also an
extensive menu.

In following are all entries, the by "Leichte config"
switched off are, with (*) marked.

Project

new window      it opens an new Shell-window. (<R-Amiga>+<N>)

undoing             it opens an Dateiauswahl and you able an ahead
                   stored file in the Shell-window load.
                   (<R-Amiga>+<O>)

History open     it opens an Dateiauswahl and you able an ahead
                   stored History-file in ViNCEd load. The History
                   tps of umfassen all comands, the you in the Shell entered
                   have.

Save under... It opens an Dateiauswahl and you able the actual
                   text computer store. (<R-Amiga>+<S>)

History computer store  it opens an Dateiauswahl and you able the actual
                   History computer store.

Maximally bigness     Bringt the ViNCEd window to in the front and enlarges it,
                   so that it the entire onscreen fill.
                   (<R-Amiga>+<+>)

Minimale bigness     Verkleinert ViNCEd on the least feasible bigness.
                   (<R-Amiga>+<->)

Auf original  Bringt the ViNCEd-window back on the bigness and
position           position, how it open became. (<R-Amiga>+<Z>)

Nchster           Bringt the next onscreen to in the front.
Onscreen to    (<R-Amiga>+<.>)
in the front

Iconifizieren      Ikonifiziert the ViNCEd-window. (<R-Amiga>+<I>)

Auf the next   Bringt the next "ffentlichen" onscreen to
screen             in the front and placed ViNCEd on this screen.
                   (<R-Amiga>+<J>)

help...           It opens the help-file.

Settings...   It opens the SetVNC-Prefs-progam, with it you the
                   settings edit able.

Over ViNCEd        gives info over ViNCEd from.

Window close  Schliet ViNCEd. (<R-Amiga>+<Q>)

Edieren

Ausschneiden       Schneidet the with the Mauspfeil aufgezogenen
                   Textbereich from and copied him in the clipboard
                   (Clipboard). (<R-Amiga>+<X>)

copying           Kopiert the selektierten Textbereich in the
                   clipboard. (<R-Amiga>+<C>)

Blockmarke clean Deselektiert selected texts. (<R-Amiga>+<H>)

Einfgen           Kopiert the content the clipboard in the ViNCED-
                   window. Care, Zeilenumbrche become herewith so
                   discusses, as become you the cr-key actuate.
                   The preceding text is then from the Shell as
                   comand recognized and carried out. (<R-Amiga>+<P>)

all Selektieren  Selektiert the entirety windowinhalt. (<R-Amiga>+<A>)

window clean    Lscht the complete windowinhalt. (<R-Amiga>+<L>)

Bis Pufferende     Lscht all texts from the cursor position till to the end
clean            of Eingabepuffers. (<R-Amiga>+<E>)

terminal           put the terminal on the Ursprungszustand back. The
disfavour       is then necessary, when about through the versehendliche
                   announcement one Binrdatei by means of "letter" the
                   soft copy jumbles get is ought.
                   (<R-Amiga>+<R>)

quest forwards     Durchsucht the History to elders inputs with the in
                   the command line eingegebenen Suchmuster.
                   (<R-Amiga>+<F>)

quest backwards    Durchsucht the History to new inputs.
                   (<R-Amiga>+<B>)

macros

in "macro"-menu find you the ViNCEd-macros; this macros able you e.g.
With the Preferences or by means of "macros clipboard" the own request
acclimatize. (R-Amiga-0 till R-Amiga-9).

Macros             around an macro auszuschneiden, give you first the
clipboard       Makrotext in ViNCEd an. Select you now the
                   just now eingegebenen text and choose you in the submenu
                   "macros clipboard" that macro from, which you
                   through the selektierten text replace will.

Settings

in settings-menu find you some frequently uses settings
from SetVNC. Reading you more over this settings under "SetVNC:ViNCEd
settings" or in the Online-help-file.

Around the first three menu-options: Buffergre, under row and waiter
row adjust, give you in ViNCEd an, how great an buffer is
shall, and select these number. Now are this menu-options
activates; when you the accordingly menu item choose, is it the
entered number clipboard and in the presettings transfer.

All other options work as on/From-switch.

5.2. ViNCEd settings

through Anklicken from "Settings" in the ViNCEd-window or through the activating
of program "SetVNC" in the "Prefs"-directory commence you the Einstell-
progam for ViNCEd. Here able you many functions so define, that
the Shell just the same reacted, how you it he wish.

SetVNC is in eight fields subdivided, the he how Karteireiter in
upper edge of window find. Every one these fields has another
undersides, the with the buttons <Pfeil-links> and <Pfeil-rechts>
gated become able.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
towards the fit is he SetVNC in the standard-mode, in the only
the functions uncover are, the one in the normal case needs. When one
intervention on all options want, so must one on the second side of
"over"-Menks the option "Leichte config" deactivate.

In following are all entries, the by "Leichte config"
switched off are, with (*) marked.

Over (side 1)

afore gsp.         It opens the at last stored Einstellungsdatei.

Benutzten          employed the at last benutzten settings.

Window            bernimmt the settings from (Shell)window, from the
                   SetVNC restarted been is.

Standard           Stellt the settings on the standard-ViNCEd-
                   settings.

Over...            It opens the help-file.

Over (side 2)

Leichte            if choosen, is only that part the
config      config offered, the real from the plural
                   the user uses is. Hereby not available
                   configurations are in the following text with a
                   asterisk (*) provide and must so first duch
                   remove this Hckchens available made become.

Save under... It opens the Dateiauswahl - you able now your
                   settings name and computer store.

Ark               it opens the Dateiauswahl - you able now an ahead
settings...   Stored Einstellungsdatei load.

Macros (side 1 and 2)

here are the macros defined, the Sim in ViNCEd-macros-menu find
able and the with the Tastaturkrzel <Rechte Amiga>+<0> till <9> invoice
able. Macros in ViNCEd are Zeichenreihen, the, so how she defined
are, in the Shell-window "how with the keyboard typed" entered become.
Hereby able you frequently used functions quick invoice. Give
you e.g. By macro 0 an: "ViNCEd is class!", Click you on the "in the
window"-button, around the settings to adopt, and use you
<R-Amiga>+<0>, around to see, how the serves.

Macros (side 3)

here are the macros defined, the in the ViNCEd-Titelleiste as switch
to see are. Click you "back" or "forward" around the previous or.
Next macro new to define. With "Einfgen" or "remove" able
you another macros add, or not more required remove.

More over macros hear you in the help-file.

Keyboard (*)

here able you Tastaturkrzel define, the ViNCEd-functions
accomplish. On side 1 define you the macros and on side 2 give you
them an function.

Around an Tastaturkrzel to define, give you this in the field on the right above
on side one an, choose you the with the key to drckenden
Erweiterungstasten and go you then on side 2, around the desired
function to select. More there to finds he wider back. From the there
angebotenen list choose you an function from and click then on
"transfer".

Keyboard (side 1) (*)

ASCII code         is the ASCII-code for the key used or the
                   Tastecode? When "ASCII code" selected is, is an
                   "z" with on one German keyboard (Keymap)
                   defined, also still an "z" with one englischen
                   Keymap is, although the key he on one other
                   place is. It is meaningful, "ASCII code" always
                   selected to have. Objections you herewith however, that
                   the buttons "", "", "" and "" on the most no-
                   German-Keymaps not come forward.

Shift left till    Qualifier-buttons, i.e. The selected key must
Amiga on the right       together with the Qualifier-key pressed become. It
                   is always meaningful an these options to select, then
                   you otherwise the gewhlten letters not more to the
                   writing in the Shell use knnen(!).

Only with NumLock    The picked key serves only, when "NumLock"
                   activates is.

Key              in input field "key" able you an key enter.

Keyboard (side 2)

in the list able you an function choose, then click you on
"Benutzen" around the picked key to activate. With "back" and
"next" able you they buttons leafed, the an on the right
choosen functions accomplish.

Diredit (side 1)

Uneingeschrnkte   when selected, ignored ViNCEd by the Cusorbewegung
Cursorbewegung (*) and at discharge and Einfgen from text the difference
                   between Benutzereingaben and Programmausdrucken.

No in the edge  when selected, able you the cursor not from the
scrollen           text scrollen.

Cursor movements   when selected, is the cursor not mitrollen, when
how in the XTerm/CON   you the ViNCEd-Rollbalken use.

More inflexible XTerm-     when selected, able you the cursor not through
cursor             Klicken with the mouse place.

Cursorsteuerung    when selected, able you the buttons of Ziffernblock
through Ziffernblock use around the cursor to place. You able then
                   but the buttons <0> till <9> of Ziffernblocks
                   not for the text entries use.

Diredit (side 2)

underline-cursor when selected, used ViNCEd a "underline"-
                   cursor, otherwise a "block"-cursor.

Flashing-cursor  cursor blinks.

Printed text    when selected, is at copying from text in the
not in the       clipboard only the from operator entered text
clipboard (*) saved, Programmausgaben become ignored.

Highlighting text    when selected, is the highlighting text forthwith in the
forthwith in the      clipboard undertaken, without the you for it an menu
clipboard     or an key use must.

Mean Maustaste when selected, is the <Mittlere Maustaste>-function
not use    to the copying from text from the clipboard not
                   used. Here for serves then <Ctrl>+<linke Maustaste>.

Diredit (side 3)

ANSI-colors as    when selected used ViNCEd the ANSI-colors (know
presettings   letters on scharzem underground). The colors become
                   with it also independent from the Farbgestaltung the
                   Workbench.

Inverse ANSI-  when selected, and "ANSI-colors as default"
colors             active is, revolves ViNCEd the ANSI-colors black and
                   white around, you have then black letters on white
                   underground.

No Sondermodus   when not selected, yields the input from <Return>
for CR in          in Zeilenanfang an vacuously row.
Zeilenanfang (*)

backspace in       backspace in Zeilenafang is ignored, when not
Zeilenanfang       selected, is with it this row with the
ignore (*)     vorangehenden joined.

Text assign when selected, is the old text by the input
(*)                assign, otherwise is the new text on the
                   cursor position inserted. Those function can one also
                   with the "Ins" = "alto 0" key on the Ziffernblock
                   switch.

Diredit (side 4)

Asynchroner        when selected, is the entered text first then
Tastaturbuffer (*) displayed, when an progam thereafter asks, otherwise
                   remain she in the Tastaturbuffer.

Lowest row in  when selected, is the lowest row in lower
edge deliver    edge justified, when you an ViNCEd-window
(*)                increase.

Shell (side 1)

macro to the          when selected, calls ViNCEd in the Shell-mode an macro
windowschlieen   on when you the window close. This macro calls
                   then typically "EndCLI" on.

Versehentliches    when selected, able you the window not with the
windowschlieen   Close-Gadget left above in the window close, when more
                   as an Shell-case active is.

Close-Requester    when selected, and versehentliches "windowschlieen"
plug (*)    prevent" active is, then brings ViNCEd at
                   windowschlieen an safety query.

Shell-mode as    when selected, opens he ViNCEd always in the Shell-
default     mode and activates with it the menu and the TAB-
                   completion.

Only EOF broadcast,    when selected, is an EndOfFile only notified, when
in case all         all in the window current litigations wait. (Very
litigations wait    technical and ought only from experts changed
(*)                become.)

Shell (side 2)

Kommandobuffer is when selected, is the Kommandopuffer cyclic. The
cyclic           is, when you with the arrow the next
                   command choose, and you are at last command
                   arrived, catches ViNCEd again with the first on.

Identical lines  when selected, is an input line also then in
in the History     the History absorbed, when she identical to the last
receive          eingegebenen row is.

Scroller also in the   when selected, able you also then the Scroll-
ROH mode          functions use, when the in the Shell current
plug (*)    progam the Vollbildschirm-editor may interrupt. (For
                   experts: when the window in an ROH:-window
                   changed is).

Bigness of TAB-     ViNCEd hold TAB-Extensions in a cache; here able
cache             you enter, how much directories in these cache
                   absorbed become shall (1-256).

Shell (side 3)

Tab-Ergnzugen     those settings is on an/more (*) pages
settings      distributed, where every an appointed kind the TAB-
                   completion with regard to.

Dual-TAB         when selected, opens an zweifaches squeeze from
Dateirequester     <TAB> within one appointed time (am "timing")
                   an Dateiauswahl.

First TAB complemented towards the first TAB gives ViNCEd instead of one enhancement
complete        of Suchmusters a complete file names from.

Requester, in case   if more possibilities to the completion be there,
completion not    opens ViNCEd an Dateiauswahl.
Of one meaning

ViNCEd supplements when selected, shows ViNCEd in the Dateiauswahl not
in the Requester   only the selected directory, but also all
                   other possibilities. Files the he on other
                   Gertetrgern or other list find
                   become even so displayed how files in the aktivien
                   directory.

Shell (side 4) (*)

sign behind     if active, is the text behind the cursor-position
cursor ignore  by the TAB-enhancement not as part of Suchmusters
(*):               considered.

Supplements in the with this is the Dateirequester through a simple
bracket print    expression the possible supplements in the Shell-window
(*):               compensates.

Shell (side 5) (*)

TAB-supplements    here able you the priority from files, formatters,
priorities (*):   hardware, etc. Set. Files with a higher
                   priority become first considered. Drops the
                   priority one completion under -127, so is this at all 
                   not considered. You able so appointed
                   Suchpfade from obverse herein draw out.

Shell (side 6) (*)

when you an Ikon on an Shell-window consider, is normally the
complete path inserted. When you the key under "only names integrate"
pressed hold, is only the filename inserted. When you the key
under "only path integrate" pressed hold, is the path inserted, the
filename self however not.

Shell (side 7) (*)

TAB amplifications- here able you adjust, on which place the
Requesterposition  Dateiauswahl positioned is, and how great the
(*)                window is shall. When "Dateirequester not
                   position" selected is, become the settings
                   ignored and instead of this the attitude of "ASL"-
                   Eintellers uses.

Window (side 1)

bigness the History  give you here on, how much command-lines in the buffer
                   remain shall.

Waiter lines       give you here on, how much lines over the visible
                   text at Scrollen in the buffer remained shall.

Under lines      give you here on, how much lines in the window and
                   below of windowrandes in the buffer be expected to become
                   shall.

Monitor (*)        here able you yours Standardmonitor choose.

Writing (*)        here able you an font for your ViNCEd-window
                   choose.

Window (side 2)

Auf these side able you Farbregister set, the used become, when
ViNCEd a own onscreen opens. Around an colour to edit,
choose you first if you the register set or ANSI-colors define
will. The colour-quarter-wave contact piston are now active and you able this
Farbregister edit. With "back" and "forward" browse you through
the available colors. "Cc." (Left from colour 0) is the cursor-colour.

Window (side 3)

Close-Gadget only   when selected, is no Schliesymbol (Close-Gadget)
on enquire        generated, it be because, you commence an ViNCEd-window
produce (*)       with the Tooltype "WINDOW=VNC:CLOSE". That complies
                   the behavior of usual "CON:" driver.

Iconifizierungs-   when selected, is no Iconifierungs-symbol
Gadget only on     generated, it be because, you commence an ViNCEd window
enquire (*)        with the Tooltype "WINDOW=VNC:ICONIFY".

No one horizontal with this able you the horizontal or. The vertikalen
Scroller and       Scroller to wish deactivate.
No vertikalen
Scroller

timing (*)

all timing-values are in milliseconds specified.

Cursor-Blinkzeit   here able you adjust, how quick the cursor
(in ms) (*)        blinks (only when you under "Edit" the function
                   "Blinkender cursor" steady have).

Barrier for       with this control you the Toleranzschranke the
Scrollzeit (*)     Scrollgeschwindigkeit, off the ViNCEd begins, the
                   Bildschirmaufbau for the purpose of Geschwindigkeitserhhung not
                   more uncover to make.

Time till           gives on how long ViNCEd to Unterdrkkung of
reconstruction (*)   Bildschirmaufbaus waits, till the Schirminhalt again
                   corrected is.

Dual-TAB         here able you adjust, in which period the
Zeitinterval (*)   double squeeze from <TAB> still as dual-TAB
                   saw is.

Verzgert        if activates permit ViNCEd the soft copy
reconstruction (*)   thereby accelerate, in that expenditure only still in a
                   buffer flit, but not more uncover made
                   become. Precise Timingvorgaben become through the quarter-wave contact piston
                   above checked.

System (side 1)

ViNCEd help-file give you here the path to the ViNCEd.Guide help-file
                   an.

Fehlerumgehung for when selected, is the cursor, as soon as he in right
line break (*)  windowrand is, an row to back placed. That
                   is an Fehlerumgehung for some UNIX-tools, in case
                   ViNCEd as bracket uses is. (Only for experts!)

line break in   when selected, become lines in right windowrand
windowrand        umgebrochen and not in end of from ViNCEd gesetzten
                   worth.

No level  when selected, scrollt ViNCEd the window-inhalt
Scrolling through    not by expenditure. As soon as you with the inputting
the DOS (*)        begin, bounces the cursor to the correct place.

VT-220             when selected, collaborates ViNCEd in the VT-220-
compatibility-   Kompatibilittsmodus. More zierzu find you in the
modus (*)          ViNCEd.Guide-file. Consider you, that this mode not
                   compatible to the Shell is!

System (side 2) (*)

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
please note you, that re design the settings on these side to
Kompatibilittsprobleme lead able! Change you here only the
inputs, whose effect you overlook!

DEL and BS clean when selected, clean the DEL (Delete) and BS
at expression (*)  (Backpacke Kontrollcodes) by the giving out sign.
                   Otherwise bewwegt BS only the cursor backwards, and DEL
                   prints an Schmierzeichen.

Enfgemodus for    when selected, complies ViNCEd DOS-expenditure in window
DOS expenditure (*)   an, instead of existing text to assign.

Dough command on  when selected, is at "Einfgen" not the text
DOS send (*)   from the Clipboard inserted, but the "Paste"-
                   command is on the DOS clever and the progam must
                   self the "Paste-action" accomplish. Attention: no
                   compatible to the Shell!

No in the edge  with "Delete x row" and "Fge x row an", is the
in integrate    bottom buffer (the part of text the under the
(*)                bottom windowrand stands), out of eight disregarded.
                   Kompatibilittsschalter for some UNIX-
                   Terminalwendungen.

System (side 3) (*)

here become system-macros defined, the from ViNCEd internal used become.

End Shell (*)   this macro is invoked when you the Shell
                   close.

End Progr. (*)  this macro is invoked when you ViNCEd close,
                   but straight an other progam out of the Shell active
                   is.

New window (*)  this macro is invoked when you in the menu "project"
                   "new window" choose. That opens an new
                   ViNCEd-window.

Shell produce (*) this macro is invoked when you <Ctrl>+<z>
                   drkken. That opens an new CLI in the resemble ViNCEd-
                   window.

Help invoice (*) this macro is invoked when you the <Help>-key
                   press. That opens the ViNCEd.guide-file.

System (side 4)

settings (*)  this macro is invoked when you in the project-Menu
                   "settings..." Choose.

Iconpfad           here able you a path to a Icon engeben, the
                   at Ikonifizieren used become shall. The appendix
                   ".info" one Icon-file need you not
                   to enter.

IconTitel          here able you a name enter, the the Icon
                   by Ikonfizieren have shall.

Standardpfad (*)   when ViNCEd without arguments, so e.g. As "VNC:"
                   invoked is, is instead of this these Standardpfad
                   used.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------

(*) those options are by the attitude "Leichte config" (am
second side of "over"-menu) not uncover!

6. Commodities - the "peewees" helper

6.1. Prelude

The drawer the "Commodities" is he in the drawer "tools" and
contains an whole special kind from program - the sogennanten
"Commodities". That are small aid programs, the in the background
run off and special jobs how e.g. Application keypad mode,
screen saver, the Hervorholen of window at Doppelklicken on
the windowtitel adopt.

Commodities become in the rule in the drawer "WBStartup"
(SYS:WBStartup) discarded and then at start of AMIGA restarted.

Over the progam "Exchange" able the current Commodities checked
and cancels become.

The following list shows Commodities, the dum scope of delivery from 3.5 or.
3.9 belong to :

AutoPoint          Aktiviert automatic the window, the he under the
                   Mauszeiger is.

Blanker            when an appointed for some time no Tastatureingaben
                   or. Mausbewegungen happen, then is an so-called
                   "screen saver" (Screenblanker) activates. With it
                   is however not the onscreen switched off, but
                   an small progam restarted, the colourful lines over
                   a black background animates.

ClickToFront       Holt an window in the foreground, as soon as you it
                   double anklicken.

CrossDOS           Steuert text-options for CrossDOS-drives. CrossDOS
                   is enables the reading from MS-DOS-diskettes and the
                   conversion from Textdateien. It bolstered however
                   not the reach file names, the with Windows95
                   pp of einfhren become.

                   Further informations to CrossDOS find you in chapter
                   11 of original-Workbench-manual page.

Exchange           berwacht and steers all Commodity-program's.

Find               fast seek to file names or in files.

Fkey               Ordnet function keys special functions to.

Mouse Blanker      Blendet the Mauszeiger by one Tastatureingabe from.

NoCapsLock         it leads to one vorbergehenden deactivation the key
                   "only capital letters".

WB Clock           a comfortable analogous-clock for the Workbench.

6.2. General information tees (Tooltypes)

from all Commodity-program is an standard-attribute uses:

CX_Priority=<n>    Weist Commodity-program Priorittswerte to.

The standard-Priorittswert for all program's is 0. When you in the attribute
for an particular progam a higher Priottswert enter, is
this progam before all other Commodity-program with lower
Priorittswert carried out.

Example: you work with two Commodities, with those you function keys
appointed functions assign able. When both program's the
function key <F1> an appointed function assign, barricades the progam
with the higher priority this function key for the intervention through
other Commodity-program's.

Two another tees worth only for program's, through the window open
become able:

CX_POPUP           with details from CX_POPUP=NO is at undoing of
                   progam-Icon no Programmwindow open. The
                   progam is sure to Doppelklicken on the
                   Icon activates, but it appear no window.
                   The default setting is CX_POPUP=YES.

CX_POPKEY          places the Tastenbefehl for an Commodity-progam fast.
                   As soon as the for the Tastenbefehlt requisite key
                   (or. Key combination) pressed is, appear the
                   Programmwindow automatic in the foreground of
                   screen. When the window "hidden" is, is it
                   open. Over this Tastenbefehle able you no
                   program's commence. The syntax to the details from
                   Tastenbefehlen is: CX_POPKEY=<Taste>.

With the details from Tastenkombinationen must you each an blanks
between the buttons integrate.

Example:
CX_POPKEY=F9
CX_POPKEY=Shift F4
CX_POPKEY=LShift LAlt LAmiga X

6.3. Tastenkombinationen

with the input from key combination for an Commodity-progam able
you the function keys (F1 till F10) and buttons the keyboard give
(quantitative, letters, Soinderzeichen etc.). Every one key must however
at least an identification for an Sondertaste prefixed become.
The following identifications for Sondertasten are allowable:

identification            key

alto                an the <Alt>-buttons

RAlt               raked <Alt>-key

LAlt               left <Alt>-key

Shift              an the shift key

RShift             <rechte Umschalttaste>

LShift             <linke Umschalttaste>

LAmiga             <link Amiga>-key

RAmiga             <rechte Amiga>-key

CTRL               <Ctrl>

Numericpad         gives an key the Zehnertastatur on.

Rightbutton        Gedrckthalten the Mentaste (raked Maustaste)

Leftbutton         Gedrckthalten the Auswahltaste (left Maustaste)

Middlebutton       Gedrckthalten the middle Maustaste (by three
                   buttons)

those Sondertasten able also in union with function keys specified
become. That is but not needed. You able an any
combination from Sondertasten give, so far in end an functional-
or Standardtaste specified is. With it become several times entered
identifications only once recognized:

LAlt RAmiga LAlt F10 complies LAlt RAmiga F10

The following list contains valid Tastenkombinationen:

alto F64
LAmiga 8
Ctrl LShift Y
Leftbutton Ctrl CapsLock = (*)
Numericpad 8 (**)

(*)     holding you the Auswahltaste (left Maustaste) pressed and press
        you the key combination <Ctrl>+<"only capital letters">-
        <Gleichheitszeichen>.

(**)    squeeze you the key <8> the Zehnertastatur and not the <8> the
        "normal" keyboard.

6.4. AutoPoint (Autoaktivierung)

the progam "AutoPoint" enables you the selection from window, without
the Auswazhltaste (left Maustaste) press to must. Of the progam
"AutoPoint" is automatic the window activates, the he below of
Mauszeigers is.

Click you to the activating from "AutoPoint" the corresponding Icon double
on. The progam is forthwith active and it is no window open.

To the Deaktivieren from "AutoPoint" click you the corresponding Icon
renewed double on. You able also the progam "Exchange" open,
"AutoPoint" choose and adjacent "remove" press.

6.5. Blanker (screen saver)

when the progam "Blanker" activates is, is the onscreen automatic
ausgeblendet, when over a before fest determine period no inputs
over keyboard or mouse vergenommen become.

In window "Blanker" able you the period (in seconds) enter, to
the the onscreen ausgeblendet is. The default setting is 60
seconds. Is during this period neither an key pressed still the
mouse deferred, is the screen saver activates. The onscreen is
then in the simplest fall black or become (colourful) lines over a
black onscreen-background animates.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
with elders monitors inhibited the shutdown of picture an baking
in the Monitorrhre, because then could one the image also still by
ausgeschaltem monitor shadowy see. With new monitors step
these effect but not more on.

The progam "Blanker" has two another options:

animation          when this option steady is, is an beautiful
                   Linienanimation as screen saver personated.

Through colors       those option is only available, when "animation" active
browse           is. The Linienanimation gets then continuous
                   colors.

When you the "Blanker" disable will, so open you the progam
"Exchange". Choose you "Blanker" and deducible "remove" from. The
able the progam also over the menu item "termination" in the menu "project"
of Programmwindows leave. The Tastenbefehl for the progam
"Blanker" is <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<B>.

"Blanker" bolstered following tees:

SECONDS=60         period in seconds without keyboard-/Mausaktivitt,
                   to which the onscreen ausgeblendet is. The
                   Standardwert is 60.

ANIMATION=YES      gives on, if the progam "Blanker" Spline-curves
                   show shall. The default setting is "YES" (yes).

CYCLECOLORS=YES    gives on, if the progam "Blanker" a Farbzyklus
                   travers shall. The default setting is "YES"
                   (yes).

6.6. ClickToFront

with help of program "ClickToFront" able you an window in the
foreground call, without the fore-/Hintergrundsymbol to use. Debit
an window with the progam "ClickToFront" in the foreground brought
become, hold you the <linke Alt>-key pressed and click you the
desired window double on.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
place the <linken Alt>-key can over "tees" also some other
elective become. Often is it practical, when you the window direct through
the Doppelklick in the foreground bring able. Click you there to on
the "ClickToFront"-Icon and choose you "info show". Under
the rubric "Icon" able you by "tees" the point with the
"Qualifier" exclude:

(QUALIFIER=Left_Alt)

Klicken you to the activating of program "ClickToFront" the corresponding
Icon double on. For this progam is no window open.

To the Deaktivieren of program "ClickToFront" open you the window
"Exchange" and choose "ClickToFront" (under "Verfgbare Commodities") and
adjacent "remove" from. To the Deaktivieren able you also the
corresponding progam-Icon renewed double anklicken.

ClickToFront bolstered the tees QUALIFIER. This attribute enables
you the details one Sondertaste, the at Doppelklicken in a
window pressed be expected to become must, around the window in the foreground to
call. You able following seven Sondertasten give:

Lalt               <linke Alt>-key (standard)

Left_Alt           <linke Alt>-key

Ralt               <rechte Alt>-key

Right_Alt          <rechte Alt>-key

CTRL               <Ctrl>

STEUERN            <Ctrl>

None               no Sondertaste

example: when you QUALIFIER=CTRL specified have and "ClickToFront"
activates is, hold you the key <Ctrl> pressed and click the
window, the in the foreground fetched become shall, double on.

6.7. CrossDOS (Konvertieren from DOS-write)

the progam "CrossDOS" steers the Textkonvertierungsoptionen for active
CrossDOS-drives. In window "CrossDOS" become the verfgbaren drives
displayed. In addition able you "Textfilter" and "Textkonvertierung" for
the separate drives adjust. Tastenbefehl: <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<c>.

In the shortlist on the lefthand side are the Gertenamen all to the
time angemeldeten (activated) CrossDOS-drives listed. Choose you
to the call the accompanying settings the desired drive from.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
The options (right area) are only for the straight highlighting CrossDOS-
drive valid! Eighth you hence unconditional thereupon, that the drive, the
you to the conversion use will also real, in the list on the
lefthand side, choosen is.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
Whlen you the options "Textfilter" and "Textkonvertierung" only then from,
when with help from CrossDOS Textdateien converted become shall.
Deactivate you the options, when font-, graphic- or other
Binrdateien (program's) copied become, around adjustments on the data to
avoid!

Textfilter

Am end of line from MS-DOS-Textdateien find he in the rule
control character for carriage return (CR) and linefeed (LF). In Amiga-
Textdateien are only linefeed-sign needed. Over it out
become no end of file-sign (EOF) uses. From the fact must by the
transfer from MS-DOS-files to the Amiga, or. From Amiga-files to MS-DOS
this sign distant or. Added become.

Textkonvertierung

over this option is the conversion of Amiga-font in the
MS-DOS-font controlled. In unite MS-DOS-files is for appointed
ASCII-sign an eighth Bit (high Bit) steady, around the sign an new
signification (e.g. By mutate) to give. Such umlauts must at Amiga
on other Codenummern converted become. When you "ASCII-7" as
Konvertierungsart (am back) choose, is the text the file in
standard-ASCII-text converted. Those kind the Textkonvertierung follow
only at reading the file from the MS-DOS-diskette. That means, that the
eighth Bit sure at reading the file herausgefiltert (excluded) is, but
at writing the file on the MS-DOS-diskette not again steady
is.

With the Textkonvertierung stand you two options to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

complete          ought as well as the file names as also the content the
conversion      files filtrated become, choose you to the complete
                   conversion "Textkonvertierung" and adjacent an
                   option in the Blttersymbol "Konvertierungsart" from.

Only file names     debit only file names filtrated become, permit you the
                   option "Textkonvertierung" not choose. You must
                   however over the Blttersymbol "Konvertierungsart" an
                   selection strike.

Konvertierungsarten

over the Blttersymbol able you an the following options for the
Textfilter or. The Textkonvertierung choose:

ASCII-7            Pat diue file on standard-ASCII-text on.

INTL               Bewahrt the international sign (e.g. , , ).
(International)

DANSK              Filtert danish Textdateien.

MAC                Filtert Apple macintosh ASCII-files, the on an
                   MS-DOS-Disk transfer become.

Detailliertere informations to "CrossDOS" find you in chapter 11 of
original-Workbench-manual page.

6.8. Exchange (Commodities-accociation)

over the progam "Exchange" become the in the background current
Commodity-program's administered. "Exchange" can with the key combination
<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Help> invoked become.

In window "Exchange" are all Commodity-program's listed, the to the
time charged are. Choose you an progam through Anklicken in the list
from, around in the right window informations displayed to get and an
the following actions thereupon apply:

active voice              with these Blttersymbol able you an progam
                   activate and again deactivate.

Remove          Dient to the remove of Commodity-program.

Advertisement uncover   it calls the window of Commodity-program on, so far
                   of existing is. Subsequent able you appointed
                   settings for this progam carry out.

Advertisement hidden  Schliet the window of Commodity-program, without it
                   to discontinue.

6.9. Find (fast seeking)

"Find" is an fast and leistunsstarkes Suchprogramm for the AmigaOS.
It is direct in the Workbench (over the "workbench.library") linked.
You able "Find" with the key combination <rechte Amiga>+<f> commence
or it in the Workbench-menu "window/seeking..." Invoice.

The window from "Find" contains only few elements:

pattern             in this field is the search key entered. That can
                   also only an part of word wein. Will you e.g.
                   To files with one particular extension seek, so
                   give you easy ".iff" an.

Filename/content   with "filename" is to files sought, the the
                   "pattern" correspond to. Very interesting and often also
                   very helpful is the quest within from files.
                   That goes with the option "content". Natural lasts
                   this option some time, but she can very useful
                   is!

Partitions-list  in the partitions-list able you the partitions
                   choose on those the files sought become shall.

Options           in menu from "Find" are special options eligible.
                   When you to a exact file names seek will,
                   must you "Exakte file names-quest?" Hitch on. If
                   you also still under consideration the eingetippten
                   grand- and Kleinschreiung seek will, activate you
                   "grand/use of small letters?". With "settings computer store"
                   able you this settings conserve.

Around the quest to commence, must you <Suche starten> press.

The search result is in a wider window displayed.

When you by a search result the obversely directory open
will, in the he the searched file is, press you either
<Rechte Amiga>+<d> or choose in the menu "drawer open..." From.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
you able also the complete path of program in the clipboard
copy, in that you the wished Suchergebnisse dial and entwerder
<Rechte Amiga>+<c> press or in the menu "filename in Clipboard"
choose. The complete path able you now with <Rechte Amiga>+<v>
e.g. In the Shell or the EditPad integrate.

6.10. Fkey (application keypad mode)

with help of program "Fkey" able you buttons appointed functions
assign. Thereby save you he e.g. The reiterated input always
recurring texts.

In Auswahlfeld are the to the time defined Tastenfolgen listed. With
help from "new key" and "key clean" able you Tastenfolgen
add or. Clean.

In Blttersymbol under "comand" able you a comand for the actual
Tastenfolge choose. The following comands stand to the zur ~ - at one's disposal:

through window      Holt the rearmost window one use in the
browse           foreground of Workbench-screen and chooses it from.

Through screens      Holt the rearmost onscreen in the foreground of
browse           reading area.

Window increase Vergrert the actual window on maximum bigness.
                   With it become the Bilschirmrnder considered.

Window            miniaturizing the augewhlte window on minimal bigness.
Decrease

windowgre       this comand has the same function how the selection of
switch         Zoom-symbol. The comand is also by window
                   carried out, the only over an Zoom-symbol and not over
                   an Grensymbol dispose.

Text integrate      with input the Tastenfolge is the specified
                   character string in an Konsolenwindow or. An
                   Texteingabefeld inserted.

                   This comand has no aftermath, when no
                   component picked is, the inputs over the
                   keyboard accepted. Give you the einzufgenden text
                   in the field "Befehlsargumente" an.

Progam commence   with input the angegebenen Tastenfolge is an
                   progam restarted. Give you the program names and the
                   accompanying arguments in the field "Befehlsargumente"
                   an.

ARexx-script       with input the angegebenen Tastenfolge is an ARexx-
commence            script restarted. Give you the script-names and the
                   accompanying arguments in the field "Befehlsargumente"
                   an. Is the script-name in quotation mark steady,
                   is the script in an ARexx-Zeichenkettendatei
                   converted.

In the Texteingabefeld "Befehlsargumente" able you arguments for the
last three these comands enter.

Debit e.g. The key combination <Alt>+<F1> to the activating of program
"MultiView" serve, go you how follows before:

1.  Choose you "new key" from.

2.  Give you <Alt>+<F1> in the field for the Tastenfolge an (<Alt> and
    <F1> must through an blanks apart is).

3.  Choose you in the Blttersymbol under "comand" the option "progam
    commence" from.

4.  Give you the path for the progam "MultiView" (SYS:utilities/
    MultiView) in the Texteingabefeld "Befehlsargumente" an.

6.11. Mouse Blanker (Mauspfeil blind out)

with the progam "Mouse Blanker" is the Mauspfeil ausgeblendet, when you
over the keyboard data enter. The Mauspfeil appear again, when you
the mouse move.

You call the progam "Mouse Blanker" on, in that you the corresponding
Icon double anklicken. You able the progam discontinue, in that you
the Icon once more double anklicken or in that you the window
"Exchange" open, from the list "Mouse Blanker" and then "remove"
choose.

6.12. NoCapsLock

over this progam is the key "only capital letters" (by the
typewriter also "Feststelltaste" gennant) deactivated. The
Funktionweise the shift key changes he not, but by
versehentlichem squeeze has the key "only capital letters" no
aftermath.

Click you to the activating of program "NoCapsLock" the corresponding
Icon double on. For this progam is no window open.
Click you to the Deaktivieren from "NoCapsLock" the corresponding pictograms
renewed double on. You able also the window "Exchange" open, under
"Verfgbare Commodities", "NoCapsLock" and adjacent "remove"
choose.

6.13. RAWBInfo

RAWBInfo is an newer info-dialog, the by the selection from
"info show..." In the Icon-menu your Workbench uses
is. In these info-dialog become the status-informations of
augewhlten Icon displayed. In addition able you here also
different Eingenschaften of Icon alter. Keyboard macros:
<Rechte Amiga>+<i>.

Right unscheinbar sees he from, the new information-Preferences, however the
functions stick in the detail. Some the Highlights are:

.   Advertisement the bigness from list (easy on the beam click,
    then is durchgezhlt)

.   Pictograms exchange (easy an other darauffallen leave)

.   Icon create (in case the file still neither has)

.   An new default-Icon create (the actual Icon the file
    is to the standard)

.   Pictograms in MagicWB-, OS2.1 or GlowIcons convert

.   Alternative- or. OS2.1-Icon remove

.   Comments to the file enter

.   And lot more...

6.13.1. The RAWBInfo-Preferences

the following informations become always displayed:

Titelleiste        shows the path of Icon on.

Image               shows the image of Icon. Is here an
                   Icon from one other file abandoned, is
                   the Icon the other file assumed.

6.13.1.1. The file-Preferences

in the menu file become following informations prepared:

name               here is the name of Icon and in braces
                   of it kind displayed (data medium, drawer
                   (directory), progam, project and paperbasket).

Version            here is the version number and in braces the date
                   of Icon displayed.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
then this info not by every Icon available is, is she
also standard not displayed. Will you this info inquire,
must you either the deplete beam next to the lettering anklicken or
<?> on the keyboard press.

Last change    here is the creation date or. The nderungsdatum
                   with weekday and time displayed.

Bigness              here is the bigness the file or of list
                   in bytes and behind in braces in block specified.
                   With list is the bigness first at stress on
                   the ledge next to the lettering accounts.

                   With disk drive how hard drives, CD-rom and
                   floppies become over that out still the
                   device, the driver (Handler), the used and free
                   area, the Blockgre and the status (am back)
                   displayed.

With drawers, the paperbasket, project and program able you
following Schutzbits set or. Remove, in that you the corresponding
Auswahlfeld anklicken:

Lesbar             is this Bit steady, can the file read become.
                   Is it not steady, is an Preogramm not
                   carried out and the project can not over the
                   standard-progam charged become. This Bit is
                   standard steady.

Schreibbar         if this Bit steady is can the file written
                   become. Is it not steady, can one the file not
                   more alter. This Bit is standard steady.

Archive             this Schutzbit is from Sicherungsprogrammen steady.
                   It gives on, that the file or the directory
                   archived (secured) became.

Erasable           Ist the Bit steady, can the drawer, the project
                   or the progam from data medium excluded become. Is
                   it not steady can one the file not clean.

Feasible         if steady, is the file an progam or script,
                   the from the Workbench or the Shell from invoked
                   become can. Is it not steady can one it not
                   more from the Shell out invoice.

Script             this Bit is only by files steady the an script
                   are (how e.g. DOS-comands in one text file). From the
                   Shell can one she how an progam aurfrufen.

Comment          in these field able you a till to 79 sign
                   reach comment enter. Many program's carry here
                   also automatic appointed informations an. Z.B's.
                   Carry many a browser in the comment the
                   heruntergeladenen files the Internetadresse an,
                   with it one the parentage still follow can.

6.13.1.2. The Icon-Preferences

in menu Icon gives it following informations:

standard program   is only by a project specified. This field
                   contains the path to the progam, with the the project
                   created became or with which progam the project
                   open become shall. With the undoing of project is to
                   of it processing simultaneous the standard program
                   open.

Stapelgre        Speicherkapazitt, the as more temporary storage space for
                   an progam reserved is.

Priority          gives the priority of progam-task on. The
                   Standardwert is 0. A negatives Priott means, that
                   this progam by the ration from cPU time not
                   so strong considered is. The Priotitt ought but
                   also not superior as 5 lie, because then could the
                   overall system negative affect become.

Boot through        here able you choose whereby the file restarted
                   become shall. It gives three different
                   Startmglichkeiten: Workbench, Shell and ARexx.

Tees           in field "tees" become different Startoptionen
                   for files specified.

6.13.2. The RAWBInfo-menu items

in the menu in the Workbenchleiste gives it again four submenu:

6.13.2.1. The project-menu

next           shall more Infowindow open is, can one with
                   these function to the next Infowindow toggle.

Previous         here able you to the previous Infowindow
                   switch back.

Version...         The difference to the Versionsabfrage in the window is, the
                   here still the author and (many a time) the Prozessorversion
                   displayed is.

Save          Speichert the Icon off.

Vorgabepiktogramm  replaced the actual Icon through the
load              Vorgabepiktogramm.

As                Speichert the Icon the actual file as
Vorgabepiktogramm  Vorgabepiktogramm.
Computer store

Icon clean Lscht the Icon.

Over               here stand the copyrights, the author and the
                   version number.

Quitting          the dialog is closed.

6.13.2.2. The type-menu

here able you the type of Icon alter. Five different kinds
stand by it to zur ~ - at one's disposal: "data medium", "directory", "progam",
"project" and "garbage can".

6.13.2.3. The images-menu

default            it loads the voreingestellte Icon, the by DefIcons
                   adjusted is. Those function is then useful, when
                   you e.g. A text without Icon-file have. Choose you
                   these menu item, so is the text file the default-
                   Icon given and you able the text from now on
                   over the Workbench show.

Copying           Kopiert the actually choosen Icon in the
                   clipboard.

Integrate           replaced the actually choosen Icon through the
                   Icon in the clipboard.

Reconstitute   Stellt the previous Icon again here.

To the Farbpiktogramm Erlaubt the conversion of Icon in the
konvert.           MagicWB-, standard- or to the GlowIcons-type.

Extras             Stellt you three options to zur ~ - at one's disposal:

                   Umfrben 1.3/2.0
                   ndert the colors from 4-colour-OS1.3- in the OS2.0-colour-
                   style.

                   Image2Icon
                   Ist the augewhlte file an image can one with these
                   function this image in an Icon convert.

                   Alternative image remove
                   here able you the second image, the by the selection
                   of Icon show is, clean leave. Then is
                   easy the first taken and abgedunkelt.

Featuring              shows the clipboard on.
Clipboard

IconEdit           it loads the actual Icon (Icon) direct in the
                   IconEdit.

Shop              it loads an Icon an.

Save          Speichert the Icon off.

Frameless          Entfernt the frame, the the Icon (under circumstance)
                   encompasses.

No one Newicons     Konvertiert the "NewIcon" at save in the OS3.5-
computer store          Iconformat.

No one planaren     The "GlowIcons" become always with a Icon in the old
data computer store    OS2.0-style saved. When you this additional
                   Icon not will or need (because you the file
                   not on intersystem with AmigaOS2.1 or older use
                   will), then able you this Icon clean. That
                   abates the Ladezeit of Icons.

The Merkale-menu

discharge            Lscht all tees.

Assortment          Sortiert all tees to the alphabet.

All deactivate  Deaktiviert all tees.

All activate    Aktiviert all tees.

Exchange           Wechselt the actual condition the tees in the
                   converse, i.e. The entries, the eliminated are
                   (with "(" and ")") become bracketed and reverse.

Reconstitute   Stellt the previous condition the tees again here.

Choose you to the save the adjustments in the window "info"
"save" (left back) from.

6.14. WB Clock

"WB Clock" is an progam, with the you the date and the time on
your Workbench show leave able.

Is the clock gerstartet, appear she on you Workbench-background.
Is the time not right adjusted, able you the time over the
progam "tIME" in the drawer "Prefs" alter. Further info to
these subject find you in the chapter "Prefs" under "tIME."

Around the settings the clock to change, Doppelklicken you on the clock-
Icon on you Workbench-background. The "WB Clock"-Preferences
offers four functional groups on:

6.14.1. Hand

Zeigertyp          Bestimmt the kind the hand.

Zeigerbreite       gives the fatness the hand on.

Shade           with it leaves he the shade an- and deactivate.

Length              gives the Zeigerlnge in percent on.

6.14.2. Dial

background        here able you the background the clock define. It
                   gives the selection between "reproducible copy" (transparent),
                   "image", "translucent image", "translucent skaliertes
                   image", "skaliertes image" and "colour". On wish leaves
                   he also still an frame plug. Choose you the
                   option "image" from, is in the field under the path of
                   picture specified.

Hand             here is the oneness for the Ziffernbltter
                   adjusted. Hereby leaves he from "nothing" (no
                   Ziffernbltter) till "minutes" all adjust. It can
                   besides still fixed become, if the Ziffernbltter
                   "Oval" or "normal" personated become shall.

Date              Auf wish can one also the date and the kind the
                   Datumsdarstellung show leave. A font and
                   "Outline" able also still for the date defined
                   become.

Breadth             gives the breadth the clock in pixel on.

Height               gives the height in pixel on.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
especially beautiful is the clock, when one e.g. An round image in the
background deposits. The image ought there to but just the same great is, how the
later clock (am settings for breadth and height at dial the
clock), because only then is the result real good. The possibility
"skaliertes image" brings often not so good result. The Hintergrundbild
ought besides outside of him form as "diaphanous" defined is. To this
must the background with a Malprogramm with the colour issue 0
filling become. As option for the background chooses one then
"translucent image".

6.14.3. Colors

here able you the colors for background, second hand,
Minutenanzeiger, Minutenzeigerrand, hour hand, Stundenzeigerrand,
Zeigerschatten etc. Adjust.

6.14.4. Noises

here able you every hour, every half hour and/or every viertel
hour a tone issue leave. With the "test"-button, on the right next to the
path-Preferences, check you the tone.

Around the settings to computer store go you in the Titelleistenmen under
"settings backup".

Will you the clock discontinue, so actuate you easy the "termination"-button
in the Einstellungswindow.

Around the position the clock to determine, is how by pictograms proceed.
You lay the clock on the wished place and fix this (with
"Fixieren" in the Workbench-menu "pictograms").

7. The Neuen multimedia-tools

the catchword "multimedia" is in the last years very in fashion
came and is today for nearly all uses, what with Computern to do
has. The AMIGA has one with safety as the first multimedia-computer
denote, because already by of him presentation 1985 had he so good how
all suppositions for it.

No whole "grown-up-date" is but the decor on multimedia-
software, the the AmigaOS the AMIGA-operator "from house from" mitliefert.
With AmisOS 3.9 are hence some new program's added, the these
fact calculation carry will. With the "bare essentials" is it now
possible MP3 (MPEG)-, AIFF/MAUD- and WAV-audio-files abzuspielen. Moreover
able the video-formats Apple Quicktime and AVI displayed become.

7.1. Action - the video-Player

Action is an faster and light to bediendender video-Abspieler for
the formats AVI and Apple Quicktime (QT). He used up besides very little
resources, what straight in the area video very weighty is.

The greatest challenge at playback from videos is it, also on
AMIGA-Computern with really weaker hardware-decor, an if possible
ruckelfreie and fluent representation to reach. Action has hence an
row from options, around if possible the fat from your hardware
to get out.

Action offers for it optimized video-Dekoder (for PicassoII/PIV, CV64 &
CV64/3D, CVPPC, BVPPC, Spectrum/Piccolo, RetinaZ3, domino, Merlin u's.a.)
and a special Abspielmodus for Zorro-2-Grafikkarten, around higher
celerities to reach (for PicassoII, PicassoIV or CV64/3D in the
Zorro-2-mode). He bolstered also the video-overlay the CV64/3D-,
PicassoIV- and CV/BVPPC-cards.

Furthermore offers he direct support for CyberGFX and Picasso96,
full AGA-support (256 colors, HAM8, 18-bit and expeditious 18-bit
STORM Dithering) and runs even on the old ECS-intersystem.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
if you Grafikfehler at playback from videos on one CVPPC/BVPPC in the
overlay-mode get, lies the probable on CyberGFX.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when you problems with Action at exchange of screen (Screens) have
()Action retypes other screens or alike), then use
you in best CyberGFX V4 or Picasso96.

7.1.1. The surface

The surface from Action is very easy be expected to. Above left is
he the Abspiel-/blueprint-button. Right next to is the Positionsregler, the
the position of videos to the overall length specifies. Right next to is the
number the images per second specified. Those leaves he with the both in
right edge befinlichen buttons adjust.

In the second row, whole left is the button, with the one to the previous
video alternate can. The button next to bounces then to the next video.
After this follows the audibleness- and the Helligkeitsregler. In right bottom
edge is then still the button for the Endloswiederholung (Tastaturkrzel
<i>) and for Frameskip (Tastaturkrzel <s>).

Action has still three functions, the only over keyboard obtainable are:

<r>                Stellt "images per second" again on the
                   default settings of videos zurckzustellen.

<ESC>              quitting of program.

<Leertaste>        Wechselt between playback and blueprint.

7.1.2. Requirements

Action needs at least a Amiga with 68020 or schnellerer CPU, AGA-
graphic (for Farbmodus till 256 colors and HAM8), ESC/OCS-graphic (then are
only 16 Graustufen possible) or an Grafikkarte, as soon as approx. 1Mb free
memory. Moreover is the "asyncio.library" (V39 or newer) required.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
for an fluid playback from videos, before all also in the Vollbildmodus,
commends it he, a AMIGA with 68040 or 060-CPU, an Grafikkarte
with CyberGFX- or Picasso96-Treibersoftware) and if possible much RAM to
use.

7.1.3. Supplementary video-formats and Codecs

worse luck gives it sure only few video-standard, but for it more video-
and audio-Komprimierungsverfahren, the "natural" not associate
compatible are. Action bolstered an entire row these formats and
ought hence in the position is, the most Quicktime- and AVI-videos
abzuspielen.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
shall you at playback of videos problems have, then is this with
high safety at it lie, that an special Komprimierungsverfahren
uses became, the from Action not bolstered is. Even so relates it
he, when you the video sure see, but not hear able, because also
here gives it again innumerable formats. Worse luck gives it in both cases
no possibility, the problem to repair and you able only try,
the video in a other format to take care of.

7.1.3.1. AVI-Videoformat

AccuPak (PalomAVI) (CLJR)      24 bit
Intel Raw          (YUV9)      16 bit
Intel Raw          (YUV9)      24 bit
microsoft RGB      (RGB)       8 bit
microsoft RGB      (RGB)       16 bit
microsoft RGB      (RGB)       24 bit
microsoft video 1  (CRAM/MSVC) 8 bit
microsoft video 1  (CRAM/MSVC) 16 bit
radius Cinepak     (CVID)      16 bit (+)
radius Cinepak     (CVID)      24 bit (+)
radius Cinepak     (CVID)      32 bit (+)
Run Length Encoded (RLE)       8 bit

7.1.3.2. Supplementary audio-Codecs from AVI

PCM                MONO/STEREO 8/16 bit
MS-ADPCM           MONO/STEREO 4 bit (16 bit)
DVI-ADPCM          MONO/STEREO 4 bit (16 bit)

7.1.3.3. QuickTime (.mov, .qt)

Apple animation    (RLE)       8 bit (color/gray)
Apple Graphics     (SMC)       8 bit (color/gray)
Apple video        (RPZA)      16 bit
radius Cinepak     (CVID)      16 bit
radius Cinepak     (CVID)      24 bit
radius Cinepak     (CVID)      32 bit

7.1.3.4. Supplementary audio-codes from QuickTime

ROH                MONO/STEREO 8/16 bit
TWOS               MONO/STEREO 8/16 bit
IMA-ADPCM          MONO/STEREO 4 bit (16 bit)
MACE 6:1           MONO/STEREO 8 bit
MACE 3:1           MONO/STEREO 8 bit

7.1.4. The tees from Action

Action can over an row from feature (Tooltypes) controlled become.
Choose you there to the Icon from "Action" on and choose you then the
menu item "pictograms/informations show..." There find you under
the rubric "Icon" the field for the tees.

The following tees able by Action specified become:

7.1.4.1. FILES

gives on which video you play back will. When you no video give
is the Dateiauswahl appear.

7.1.4.2. DITHER

here able you a Dither-mode choose. The following options stand to the
selection, the to the pattern "DITHER=DITHER ECS" entered become able:

.   DITHER HAM8
    with AGA-graphic is the HAM8-Dither-mode for 15/24-Bit-videos
    uses (these is really slow).

.   DITHER GRAY or GREY
    with AGA-graphic is the video on 256 Graustufen converted.

.   DITHER ECS
    16-shaded Graustufen. The single feasible mode on ECS/OCS-
    Amigas without Grafikkarte.

.   DITHER 18BIT
    Super-Hires AGA HAM8 (very beautiful colors, but regrettably really slow).

.   DITHER STORM
    Hires AGA HAM8-mode (beautiful colors and also very quick).

.   DITHER p96
    Picasso96 8bit/hi/truecolor

.   DITHER CGFX
    CyberGraphics 8bit/hi/truecolor

.   DITHER OVERLAY or DITHER PIP
    those option activates the playback in the overlay- or PIP (Picture in
    Picture = image in the image)-mode.

The following cards and system become till now bolstered:

.   With the CV64/3d (P96 v2.0+, CGX) must under CGFX the function
    MULTIMEDIAMEM steady is.

.   CVPPC and BVPPC owner under CGX must the following attribute in
    yours monitor-driver set: VLAYER=DESTRUCTIVE. The
    "cgxvideo.library" must in LIBS: existing is.

7.1.4.3. MODEID

here able you the Hexdezimalzahl the wished screen resolution
give. When you "MODEID ?" Fill out opens he the selection for the
Bildschirmmodus.

7.1.4.4. NOSOUND

Stellt the playback from Sound in the video off.

7.1.4.5. NOSKIP

Stellt the "FrameSkip" from. With the "FrameSkip" become images flashed,
when the film otherwise not fluent played become could. Is
"FrameSkip" cut out, so become all images of videos displayed. It
is commended this function not switch off, then Action over very
good "FrameSkip"-algorithms disposes.

7.1.4.6. FPS

here able you the images per second adjust. Those function should
you on the Standardwert leave, then he Action these worth direct from the
video fetches.

7.1.4.7. LOOPED

when this function ageschaltet is repeatedly Action the choosen video
in one Endlosschleife.

7.1.4.8. VERBOSE

with activation these function shows Action informations over the video
on.

7.1.4.9. NOCENTER

Stellt the Zentrieren of window on the onscreen from.

7.1.4.10. WINDOWPLAY or WINP

Aktiviert the playback in a window on a onscreen or the
Workbench.

7.1.4.11. FORCE16

Zwingt the "Chunky"-converter each 16 pixel on once to edit.
Those conversion is for 020/030-processors commended.

7.1.4.12. AKIKO or WRITECHUNKYPIXELS

those function activates the use the Akiko-chips of CD32.

7.1.4.13. SDBL or DOUBLEHEIGHT

those option doubled the height of screen around small videos in the
Vollbildschirm-mode abzuspielen.

Around beispielweise an 160x120-animation in the PAL-Vollbildmodus on a
AGA-Amiga abzuspielen, gives one the following on:
MooVId DITHER 18BIT SDBL <filename>

to the expeditious playback can one also the following try:
MooVId DITHER STORM LO SDBL <filename>

7.1.4.14. NOVIDEO

Deaktiviert the Dekodieren of videos and only the Sound is played.

7.1.4.15. MONITOR parameter

.   PAL,NTSC,VGA=MULTISCAN,EURO36
.   EURO72,SUPER72=SUP72,DBLPAL,DBLNTSC

those parameter are for the direct selection of video-mode.

Additional parameter for the selection the Ausflsung:

.   LORES=LO,HIRES=HI,SHIRES=SHI

7.1.4.16. NOGUI

it switches the surface from Action off. That can a lower-case
Geschwindigkeitsvorteil bring.

7.1.4.17. PUBSCREEN or PS

set you these parameter around the "ffentlichen onscreen"
(PublicScreen) for Action to set.

7.1.4.18. WINX and WINY

with these parameter able you the X- and Y-position of Action-window
give.

7.1.4.19. MABFIX

Behebt the faulty giving out from with MainActor Broadcast erstellten
AVIs.

7.1.4.20. NOSURROUNDMONO or NSM

it switches the Mono-Surround-function off. When you problems with the
Soundausgabe have (echoes, metallischer Sound...) activate you this
function again.

7.1.4.21. ZORRO2 or ZORRO2GFXBOARD

those function accelerated the playback by Zorro 2-Grafikkarten.

7.1.4.22. AUTOPLAY or AP

Aktiviert the automated activating of videos.

7.1.4.23. NOAUTOEXIT or NAE

those function brings about, that he Action to the end of videos not from
self cancels.

7.1.4.24. GRAPHICBOARDSCREENWIDTH or GBSW

with this able you an appointed breadth of screen fix.

7.1.4.25. GRAPHICBOARDSCREENHEIGHT or GBSH

with this be able you an appointed height of screen fix.

7.1.4.26. BUFSIZE

here able you the buffer size for Action fix.

7.1.4.27. DEFAULTPATH

here able you the standard-path to yours videos set.

7.1.4.28. COLORKEY

with these function able you the "Colorkey" in the overlay-mode appoint.
Standard is this function cut out (then problems with
Grafikkarten under CyberGFX occured are).

7.2. AMPlifier

AMPlifier is in first line an convenient Abspielprogramm for MP3
(MPEG)-audio, he can but also verschiedenste 16-bit-Sound-format
(AIFF, MAUD, WAV, ROH) play back. AMPlifier bolstered as well as hardware-
resting upon MPEG audio-Dekoder as also Softwaredekodierung by means of
MPEGA.library.

Especially interesting is it, that the graph look the surface
from operator changes become can, because AMPlifier used an so-called
"Skin"-system. Skins (eng. For skin, basin, clothing) are graphics,
the easy over the surface laid become. Those graphics can one
either self draw up, or one can she he from the Internet
download. With it is it an advantage from AMPlifier, that he the self
Skin-system how WinAMP used and it hence hundreds or at all  thousands from
Skins gives. Further informations to the Skin-system find you wider behind
by the description of menu item "advertisement".

AMPlifier bolstered as well as DSP-resting upon Dekoder-cards (Melody Z2,
Melody1200+/per, Peggy+, CD32 FMV) as also an Softwaredekodierung
(by means of mpega.library and AHI or X-audio). For the Softwaredekodierung
is the "mpega.library" from Stephan Tavenard required. With hardware
based decoding must the obversely MPEG-device adjusted
become.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
AMPlifier owns also a ARexx-Port. With it is it possible, the
functions from a other progam from to of use and quasi
fernzusteuern.

7.2.1. The Abspieler ("Player")

AMPlifier can from the Workbench or one Shell from restarted become.
The surface consists from three unabhngigen division: the Abspieler
(Player), the Equalizier and the Abspielliste. Equalizer and Abspielliste
able individual an- and ausgeblendet become. Moreover able she in Player-
window angedockt is or apart on the onscreen placed become.
Through draw on the right bottom corner the window, can one whose bigness
alter.

The Abspieler is the center part of AMPlifiers. In upper fields is
left the advertisement for the (expired) playtime, the with a click to the
Restanzeige is. Right next to is he the Titelanzeige with
wider informations to the actual Song. With MP3-files become here the
informations of ID3-entry displayed. Under it is he the
advertisement for the Samplerate (in kbps) and the Samplefrequenz (in kHz).
Under it is the Positionsanzeige, the the actual place within of
Songs announce. With the button within of actually kittenishly Songs
bounce. Right of it find you the Balance-governor and the switch for
the Equalizer and the Song-list.

The in principle handling of Players is the of CD-Players
vicarious. The Haptbedienleiste contains hence buttons for "playback"
(Play), "freeze", "blueprint" as soon as for the "berspringen" from title and
"retrogradation" to the before gespielten Song. Right next to these block
is he the key to the Einladen of new title. The switch
next to are for the accidental ("Shuffle") and unending playback the title
the list.

The to kittenishly title leave he by means of Dateiauswahl choose (e.g. With
the button in the centre the Hauptbedienleiste), where also the
Mehrfachauswahl (Multiselect) bolstered is. It is besides possible an
whole directory to select, in that one by the Dateiauswahl no
file, but only the directory select. The fastest and simplest
method, title abzuspielen, is files or entire directories by
"Drag-and-Drop" on the Player-window to abandon.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
data unavowedly format become in principle not played. One can
this through a Tooltype toleranter fashion, around ROH-Samples (formats
how e.g. Big-Endian, MSB-ridge, Motorola) abzuspielen.

7.2.2. The Abspielliste

in the Abspielliste become the to kittenishly Songs listed, where
each title and playtime displayed become. With MP3-files with ID3-
informations become this instead of title displayed.

To the editing the Abspielliste find he on the top side of window
the necessary functions. It able an or more files by means of
Dateiauswahl elective and with it to the derzeitigen list added
become. A Mehrfachauswahl is also here possible. It gives buttons to the
add (ADD), remove (REM), to the Selektieren (SEL) and to the assortment
(MISC) and Verwalten (WILE OPTED) the list. The buttons have by it another
subfunctions, the by daraufklicken ausklappen.

For so long the Player directories recursive rummages (drive or.
Directory, subdirectories, of it subdirectories etc.) is on the right
back an "breaking-off"-button displayed. Shall the quest to long last,
can she herewith broken off become. The button disappears, as soon as the
complete Verzeichnisbaum read in became. Already played entries
is from Fettauf on standard font changed.

7.2.3. The Equalizer

the Equalizer to the preemphasis or lowering individual Frequenzbnder can
electively connected become (switch "ON"). - aft the button "PRESETS"
is he the accociation from presettings, the created,
saved and charged become able. The left Schieberegler ("PREAMP")
collaborates quasi as attenuator. The ten governor on the right next to are
for the different Frequenzbnder able and one can he here the
sound the rendition individual adjust.

7.2.4. Menu items

The most functions the surface able also over a menu item
invoked become. The menu hold but also points, the not over
the surface callable are. It gives two Hauptmens: "project" and
"settings".

7.2.4.1. Project

undoing...          Over the Dateiauswahl become the Songtitel picked.

Add...      It opens an Dateiauswahl around more title to the
                   Abspielliste to add.

Abspielliste...    It opens the window with the Abspielliste.

Abspielliste       it loads an ahead conserved Abspielliste.
Load...

Abspielliste       Speichert the actual Abspielliste.
Computer store...

Over               informations over the author and the progam.

Conceal          with these "Commodity"-ability is it possible, the
                   surface of Players vanish to leave. With the
                   progam "Exchange" can one the Player again
                   produce.

                   Key combination: <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Help>

termination            termination of program.

7.2.4.2. Settings

config...   It opens the window with the settings (am wider
                   back).

Accident             with activation this point become the title in
                   one accidental order played.

Repetition       towards playback of last title begins the "Player"
                   again in the front in the list.

Elapsing time    shows the played time of title on.

Lingering time  shows the still lingering time (Restzeit) of title
                   on.

Skin choose...  It opens an window with the existing Skins around the
                   Player an new look to get.

Onscreen...      Here can one a own onscreen (Public Screen)
                   choose, on the the surface of AMPlifier
                   personated is.

Fix           with this become the position and bigness of Player-
                   window and the Abspielliste for the next
                   run saved.

7.2.5. Config

the menu item "settings/config" is very extensive and
grants individuals Einstellugen of AMPlifiers. Those become in the
following section envisaged.

7.2.5.1. Audio I/O

since AMPlifier 2 gives it an new modulares Plugin-system for
different input- and giving out-module.

Those module are for the Gateityp-identification and the respective ones
data stream able. Thereby yields he, that every input-module an
own Dateiinfo-window ready provided. The MPEG-audio-Player offers
beispielweise the familiarize ID3-day-editor. Every module owns possibly
also an own config-window, in the another settings
resolved to do become able.

The following module are to the time available:

.   Input-module: MP3 (MPEG)-audio-Player, AIFF/MAUD-Player, WAV-Player

.   Giving out-module: X-audio/AHI-module

7.2.5.2. MP3-Audioplayer

ID3 Title          the ID3-day is an hangs Infoblock for MP3-
                   files. There become informations how title,
                   interpreter, Musikrichtung etc. Discarded. It can
                   adjusted become if AMPlifier the advanced data
                   evaluate shall. With one Konfigurationszeile leaves he
                   the Anzeigeformat define.

Decoder            here become the MP3-settings for the hardware- and
                   software-decoding resolved to do. Those can apart
                   for MPEG-audio-Layer I/II and for Layer III
                   active and configured become.

MPEG-driver       here is the MPEG-Ausgabetreiber (Device) and the Unit
                   (hardware)-issue adjusted. That is at Betreib
                   several of these cards necessary, e.g. At firm from two
                   on top of each other gesteckten Melody 1200-cards.

                   For the Melody is the driver "melodympeg.device",
                   Peggy-owner carry here appropriate
                   "peggympeg.device" an.

Buffersize         here is the bigness of file-buffer adjusted.

Blocksize          The Blockgre gives on, in how great blocks the buffer
                   subdivided is. The file-transfer happens then in
                   the angegebenen Glockgre.

                   Attention: with Peggy permit the worth not greater as 5 kB
                   amount to.

7.2.5.3. X-audio/AHI-giving out

Device             here is the Ausgabetreiber and the Unit (hardware)-
                   issue adjusted.

X-audio            the name of audio-Devices (e.g. "melodyaudio.device").

AHI                Who no "Melody"-card uses toggle here on
                   AHI-giving out around. You able also more authorities from
                   AMPlifier commence and simultaneous over AHI the giving out
                   merge.

Buffering          here is the audio-buffer adjusted. The buffer size
                   is in seconds adjusted. Around at beginning of
                   title or to the seeks of Schiebereglers
                   temporary dropout to avoid is the
                   "Vorpuffern"-attitude necessary. Here is
                   specified, how much percent of audio-buffer filled
                   is must till the playback begins.

                   In addition can the priority of audio-task adjusted
                   become.

7.2.5.4. Options

proof Dateityp     initiated AMPlifier already at shop to check, if the
at shop         files abspielbar are. Fore the playback is in
                   every fall the Dateityp checked.

Air directory   the standard air-directory.

Titellisten        standard Titellisten-directory.
Directory

boot file        here can an title or an directory specified
                   become, which at run restarted or.
                   Read in is.

File pattern       with this leaves he the seeking to spielbaren title
                   abridge. It become only files heeds, the the
                   pattern correspond to.

Start playback   the input can ever to data pool very long
                   last. AMPlifier can hence already intermediate with
                   the play back begin, during the data medium still
                   to spielbaren title rummages become. The time, how
                   long bided become shall, is in seconds
                   adjustable.

7.2.5.5. Advertisement

Skins              AMPlifier can next to the traditionellen surface also
                   the so-called Skins of on PCs diffused Players
                   WinAMP use. Those gemalten surfaces are regrettably
                   oftentimes heavy to recognize and possession not the
                   ability free vergrerbar to is.

                   You are bedienungstechnisch confined but beautiful
                   variegated. It is even an matter of taste.

                   With use the Skin surface leaves he an visual
                   advertisement in form of vom by von from meter, Oscilloscope or
                   of Spectrum Analyzers plug.

                   (When an Melody1200 with MPEG hardware-support
                   existing is, so is the special hardware for the
                   graphiche advertisement unused!)

                   in these rubric can the directory elective become,
                   in the he the Skins find. The from the PC-world
                   stammenden Skins are in Echtfarben implemented. On
                   a Amiga with little colors see she so where appropriate. Some
                   bad from. It be on farbreduzierte conversions
                   referred. Shall it problems with the representation
                   give, is the "picture.Datatype" too old and possibly
                   also too slow.

                   They are the Skins activates, appear an newer menu item
                   in the Pull-Down-menu settings, about  this
                   picked become able.

Skins directory  directory, in the the separate Skind to find are.

Skin               current Skin.

windowinhalt at AMPlifier 2 bolstered the relocating the window in
relocating        Echtzeit. The window follow so the respective ones
show           Mausposition automatic.

                   The window able by the way on any place where
                   he no switch is angefat become (so not
                   only in the Titelliste).

windowinhalt      Ist this option powered, so "dock" the window
bind by nn    automatic together on, when this a distance from
Pixeln             nn Pixeln fallen below have.

7.3. Multiview - the all purpose-indicator

Multiview is an all purpose-Anzeigeprogramm, the all formats from picture,
write, Sounds and Animationen bolstered, so for it a Datatype
(Datatype) available is.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
those formats must in the directory "devs/Datatypess" and in the directory
"classes/Datatypess" existing is, with it MultiView she use can.

Around MultiView to commence, go you please in the directory "utilities"
on your Systemfestplatte and click there the "Multiview"-Icon
double on. Now opens he an Auswahl window, with the content your
Systemfestplatte. Give you now in the directory, in the your images,
Sounds or Animationen lie. You have now following possibilities:

image show      Whlen you the Bilddatei from and press then on
                   "undoing".

Text show      Whlen you an text file and press then on
                   "undoing".

Sound play back    Whlen you the Sounddatei from and actuate you
                   "undoing". Short thereafter opens he an small window
                   with a Icon. When you once on the
                   Icon click is the Sound played.

Animation          Whlen you the desired animation from the ASL-window
play back          and press then on "undoing". Now appear an
                   window with control element. Around the animation to
                   activating, press you on the Abspiel-button (Play) in
                   the centre. With the Buttons left and on the right next to the
                   Abspiel-button able she the animation fore- and
                   Zurckspulen. Right next to the control element is then
                   still the status indicator, the the momentary position the
                   animation specifies.

The Titelmen from MultiView apportions he in four submenu "project",
"Bearbeiten", "window" and "settings".

7.3.1. Project

undoing             with it able you an new image, a new Sound
                   or an new animation load.

Save as...   With it able you the images, Sounds and Animationen on
                   one other place conserve.

Printing            it prints the actually picked image.

Over               gives informations over MultiView and over the
                   picked project from.

Termination            Schliet the progam MultiView.

7.3.2. Process

Markieren          with it able you a particular area from a
                   image mark, the you computer store want.

Copying           Kopiert the picked file in the clipboard.

All choose    Whlt all in one text file from.

Selection clean    Lscht the Ausgewhlte.

7.3.3. Window

own screen     here is an image, an text or an animation not
open             direct on the Workbench show, but direct on
                   a own onscreen open.

Fractional            Skaliert the window on the smallest possible bigness.

Normal             Pat the window the image or the animation on.

Maximally            Skaliert the window on the maximum  windowgre.

Settings      here able you the settings computer store.

7.4. The new "Picture Datatype"

on these place still an short annotation to the new "Picture Datatype",
because these also from MultiView used is. The "Picture Datatype"
takes possession e.g. The conversion the Farbanzahl by the advertisement of 24-Bit-
images on a HAM8-onscreen. He calls again the respective ones loader
(Datatypes) for the Bildformate, how e.g. IFF, JPEG, PNG on. The "Picture
Datatype" lies off AmigaOS 3.9 in one vollwertigen PowerPC-version before,
whereby the advertisement from picture very strong accelerated become can. The
new data type can now also images in different assurance level
skalieren, so far this from the program so requisited is. Also this
function profits strong from the PPC-support.

7.5. PlayCD

PlayCD is an progam, with the one audio CDs play back can. Around PlayCD
to commence, go you please in the directory "tools" and Doppelklicken
the PlayCD-Icon.

The following functions have the control elements left back:

Play/blueprint         Spielt or. Stops the picked air.

Air back        Wechselt to the previous title.

In air            Spult in the title to behind.
zurckspulen

in air fast forward  Spult in the title to in the front.

Next air      Wechselt to the next title.

Freeze               put all again on normal, i.e. An defined
                   Programmfolge is excluded or the CD is in the
                   basic status go.

The control elements on the right side have following function:

emission            Wirft the CD from the CD-ROM-drive from.

Audibleness         Stellt the audibleness an.

Program            it can an special Titelreihenfolge programmed
                   become. Will you e.g., That to the first title
                   not the second follows, but the third, then must
                   you first on the Programmknopf press and then the
                   order through the squeeze the blue quantitative in the
                   display fix.

Random             The title become to the Zufallsprinzip picked.

Repeat             repeated the CD or the programmed Titelfolge
                   always again.

Power              Beendet the PlayCD-progam.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
PlayCD acknowledges automatic an available CD-ROM-drive. They are more
CD-ROM-drives on you Amiga connected, so must you the drive,
the you to the playback from music-CDs use will in a attribute
(Tooltype) of PlayCD-Icon enter. When you drive the
mark "CD0" has, then carry you as attribute "DOSDEV=CD0" an. The
mark is by use from CacheCDFS to the strapping one
music-CD in the Piktogrammnamen on the Workbench displayed.

8. Further program's

8.1. Warp3D

already 1998 existed on the Amiga three different Grafikkarten,
the over an hardware 3D-acceleration decreed: The CyberVision 3D,
CyberVision PPC and BlizzardVision PPC. Worse luck existed to these
date still no uniform interface, the it developer
allows would have, independent from the use hardware to program.
In addition offered neither the existing system an PowerPC-support.
The Warp3D-Team formed up he with the intention, this situation to
ameliorate...

Warp3D is ever since to the "Quasi-standard" avanciert. It offers the
programmer an uniform Programmierschnittstelle, with whose help
he the hardware use can, without he around details worry to must. For
the operator means this, that program's also on of him hardware
work, although possibly an other hardware from developer
unused became. Through the modularen architecture can an progam even
hardware lean, the first to a spteren date available is.

The Warp3D-system consists from three components: The Warp3D.library (or.
Warp3DPPC.library) stands the unified interface there. Under it
find he each an driver for the appropriated Grafikkartensystem
(to the time CyberGraphics or Piccaso96) and the driver for the 3D-
hardware.

8.1.1. Installing

The installing from Warp3D runs over an Installer-script. An
easier Doppelblick on the obversely Icon ought be enough.

The Installer reports he first with the challenge, the kind the
installing to choose: "Install" (fit), or "Uninstall"
(remove). An click on "Install" actuates the actual procedure.

Towards the Installer-usual question to the Erfahrungsstand of customer
(beginner, Erfahren, Fortgeschritten) is to a existing WarpUP
sought and the option necessary, the PPC-version from Warp3D to
install. When an PowerPC and the WarpUP-system existing are ought
one this option on each fall of use.

The next decision is the of Grafikkartensystems: Warp3D
bolstered to the time Picasso96 and the CyberGraphics-versions 3 and 4.
General is it possible, both Warp3D-driver simultaneous to
install. It is however commended, only the the use
graphics system accordingly driver to use.

Is Warp3D on a CyberGraphics-system installed is an another
decision due: ever after, which combination from Grafikkarte and
Cybergraphics-version installed is must the obversely driver
elective become.

In connection is to the existing hardware asked. Those is through
click on the obversely option elective. Also herewith become ever to
more chosen hardware still additional informations requested.

As last is still the possibility given, the demos and the
documentation to install. Of it ought one on each fall use
make, because the demos bid an simple possibility, the correcting
action from Warp3D to examine.

8.1.2. Directory structure

Warp3D installed two libraries direct in "Libs:"-directory, and
some another in a subdirectories with names "libs:Warp3D". The
overall hierarchy sees so from:

in Libs:

Warp3D.library     Hauptbibliothek

Warp3DPPC.library  Hauptbibliothek (PPC)

in Libs:Warp3D/GFXdrivers

W3D_CyberGFX.      CyberGraphics 3-driver
library

W3D_CyberGFX_PPC.  CyberGraphics 3-driver (PPC)
library

W3D_CyberGfx4.     CyberGraphics 4-driver
library

W3D_CyberGfx4_PPC. CyberGraphics 4-driver (PPC)
library

W3D_Picasso96.     Picasso96-driver
library

W3D_Picasso96_PPC. Picasso96-driver (PPC)
library

in Libs:Warp3D/HWdrivers

W3D_Permedia2.     3DLabs-Permedia2-driver
library

W3D_Permedia2_PPC. 3DLabs-Permedia2-driver (PPC)
library

W3D_Virge.library  S3 Virge-driver

W3D_Virge_PPC.     S3 Virge-driver (PPC)
library

from these Treiberbibliotheken become natural only the installed, the
during of Installationsvorgangs also requisited become. So become the
PPC-page driver only installed, when WarpUP installed is. To
note is, that together with the W3D_Permedia2#?.library always
automatic the W3D_CyberGfx4#?.library installed is, also when only
CyberGraphics 3 existing is. That is no error.

Shall an the libraries missing, ought an reinstalling
resolved to do become. The author's advise of it off, files from hand to
copy.

8.1.3. Error handling

towards more occurred installing ought direct supervised become, if Warp3D
serves: to this alternates one in the directory "demo". The progam
"WarpTest" ought as first restarted become. It opens a own
onscreen and shows in the centre an square on. The square can with the
mouse animates become, indern the left or raked Maustaste pressed
be expected to is.

When the square to see is means this, that Warp3D correct
installed is. As next ought one the different "Gears"-demos
commence. The demos lie each as PPC and 68K-versions before and of use
already a great part the functionality from Warp3D.

What but, when it not serves? First ought one examine, if
the obversely hardware existing is. Warp3D bolstered (to the
date of writing) the CyberVision 3D, CyberVision PPC and
BlizzardVision PPC. Graphics card how the Picasso 4, the over no 3D-
hardware dispose become not bolstered.

A another feasible source of error is an more obsolete Grafikkartentreiber.
For CyberGraphics V3 ought on each fall an "cgxsystem.library
41.21beta" or later used become, all earlier versions become
not work. In addition ought in union with the xVisionPPC-
cards the Monitortreiber "CVisionPPC 2.7 beta 3" or an later
version to the use come. From CyberGraphics V4 is in the relation with
Warp3D an "cgxsystem.library 42.0" assumed, farther the
Monitortreiber "CVisionPPC 4.0 beta 4" or. "BVisionPPC 4.0 beta 4".

They are this versions existing, should the settings in the monitor-
Icons supervised become. The V4-driver use the BitmapCache from
CyberGraphics, this option ought so in the Icon through the ToolType
"BITMAPCACHE=YES" dingeschaltet is. That necessary also for CyberGraphics V3
in union with one the xVisionPPC-cards. The CyberVision 3D knows
this Feature only in union with V4, by the old version must by means of
of Tooltypes "MULTIMEDIAMEM=YES" an foothold area from 1 MB of
Grafikspeichers reserved become.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
in general is from the use from CyberGraphics V3 with the
CyberVision 3D to advise, here ought on each fall the V4 or Picasso96
preferred become.

In relation with PowerPC-processors able likewise problems
occur. Those are then haputschlich on absent environment variable
to restore. Shall an problem only in union with Warp3D on PPC
occur, so should following environment variable supervised or. Steady
become:

powerpc/gfxaddr:
those variable must by use from CVisionPPC/BVisionPPC on the worth
$e0000000 steady become. Check can one the worth through "getenv
powerpc/gfxaddr". If not steady (or false) is the new worth
through "setenv powerpc/gfxaddr $e0000000" written.

powerpc/force:
here must an 1 steady is (in union with the xVisionPPC-cards).

powerpc/terminator:
with BlizzardPPC-cards, the the ppc.library in a ROM hold, must
WarpUP this library before terminieren. That can with these variables
controlled become. For Warp3D must these worth on "2" stand.

powerpc/memprot:
when all nothing helps ought one this variable on "0" set. Thereby
is every one memory protection switched off.

The above genannten methods should the functionality from Warp3D
guarantee. Worse luck is an correct action but many a time always
still not guaranteed. That can several causes have. To the one
able Patches in the system to Instabilitten lead. To this belong to  to the
example "MCP". In addition can it come forward, that program's with very many
bitmap work and so the Grafikspeicher scanty is. As rule of the thumb
ought one by problems in principle first once all Patches from the
system remove or a cold start carry out and in the Bootmen "boat
without startup-sequence" dial. After this is one he in the
Bootshell and can the Grafikkartentreiber manual commence.

Self the hardware on he can to problems lead. The Permedia 2-chip,
the on the PPC-cards to the use comes, is very quick very hot.
Shall during of operating brightly streak on the 3D-representation to
see is, so can this from a berhitzten chip originate. An
additional fan or heat sink can remedy create. Also
bertaktete PPC-cards able heat produce.

8.2. AHI

AHI is an standard for the Soundausgabe on the Amiga. It enables,
verschiedenste audio-hardware with the Amiga to of use, without that the
program's special for every unused audio-hardware adapted become
must. It play so no role, if you the Amiga-internal audio-
hardware of use or he an Soundkarte buy and then this of use.

AHI stands an standardized interface to the audio-hardware to the
zur ~ - at one's disposal, the by means of driver the each appropriated audio-hardware
accesses. The software-interface from AHI enables all program,
the AHI of use, the control the audio-giving out complete independent from the
use hardware.

AHI stands on the Amiga some particular functions to the zur ~ - at one's disposal. The
would be e.g.:

.   On-the-fly-Mixing from several audio-channel (normally owns
    the Sound-hardware only a way out (canal), AHI mix the giving out
    several of these canals during the giving out on a canal together)

.   Surround-mode

.   Echo-mode

.   Adjustable Sample-Mixing-frequency

.   Audibleness-attitude for more canals (e.g. Monitoring-way out by
    many Soundkarten)

.   And some more

each z.Z. For the Amiga obtainable Soundkarte bolstered ours knowledge
AHI and brings the for AHI necessary driver alike with. In the rule
finds he by the mitgelieferten software also an Installer-script, the
the constrain files for AHI on the correct places copied. Shall the
once not the fall is, find you in the AHI-Guide on the AmigaOS3.9-CD
clues, which files in which directory yours intrasystem copied
become must.

Towards the installing from AHI and the appositely driver for your
Soundkarte must AHI still on your needs configured become. The
Preferences is he, how all Preferences, in the directory
"Prefs" on you boat-drive.

8.2.1. AHI-Preferences

the AHI-Preferences is in two pages divided, where "mode-
settings" you the possibility offers, a driver for the
existing audio-hardware to choose and some in principle
settings for the control the audio-giving out to carry out. "Further
settings" contains the settings for some the "specialties"
from AHI, however there to later more. Occupy with we us first with the "mode-
settings".

Left-hand above is he an Roll-list, the normally "Musikeinheit"
shows. AHI bolstered more audio-"chunks". The means, that you
e.g. Different settings for the claims your audio-program's
carry out able and this settings (when it the progam allows)
during the progam runs direct alternate able, in that you the
desired oneness choose. So able you for instance with a audio-
progam made sounds once on your Soundkarte issue or on the
Amiga-internal audio-hardware alternate, around the sound on these hardware to
check. AHI offers altogether 5 chunks. The "Musikeinheit" has for AHI
an particular signification: you is for program's thought, the the audio-
hardware self on lowermost plane speak to must. Those progam
possession most an own selection-window for the wished audio-
mode. Choose you for an such progam the mode "standard" (Default)
is the "Musikeinheit" from AHI uses. All for this oneness
vorgenommenen settings are then active.

In the list under the Roll-list are the verfgbaren driver for audio-
hardware listed. The shaded personated driver is the for the
elective oneness active driver. The Einstellmglichkeiten worth for the
elective oneness and the with it "verbundenen" driver. Ever to driver or
Soundkarte able some options also in "Geisterschrift" personated
become. Those options are then for the appropriated audio-hardware not
usable (e.g. Number the canals, an-giving out-canals).

"Frequency" certain, which Sample-Mixing-frequency from AHI unused become
shall. Ever superior this frequency adjusted is, the more "virtual"
canals able unused become, without the the Ausgabequalitt of signal
audible suffers. The hchstmgliche frequency hangs from the use
audio-hardware off.

"Canals" certain, how many "voices" simultaneous displayed become
able. Conditional through the merging several of these voices on a
giving out-canal is the giving out with every one zustzlichen Stimmte quiet and
ever to efficiency yours computer can also an annoyance the
audio-giving out occur. Places you here only so many canals an, how you
really of use!

For the "Musikeinheit" is this option not eligible (she is in
"Geisterschrift" personated). You must the number the to verwendenden
canals then in you audio-progam adjust, the the "Musikeinheit" from
AHI used.

With "audibleness" can one the giving out-audibleness adjust. "Monitor"
offers the possibility, the audibleness for a sucked. "Monitoring"-way out
adjust. Is no more corresponding way out existing (many a time is he
also "Loop-trough"!) has these governor no effect. "Monitor" has in
these fall by the way nothing with a "data display terminal" to do, but
is an gesonderter way out, the quasi to the "Probehren" serves. He is
through the settings for the actual giving out-canal normally
not affect. In sound studio is so an "monitor" often uses, with it
one the Klangerzeuger examine can, without the actual studio to
accede.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
consider you, that it by to high settings for "audibleness" and
"monitor" to distortions and so-called "Clipping" come can.
Dangerous become this effects before all things by instabilen externe
booster (it gives only few real stably repeater!). In
worst fall able repeater, loudspeaker and even the Soundkarte
damaged or destroys become! Change you this settings hence
with care!

"Boost" manages the sucked. Eingangsgewinn (even the boost) of
Mikrofoneingangs your Soundkarte (in case existing). Then these governor
likewise influence on the giving out-audibleness have can, necessary also here,
the settings with care to carry out.

If you an Soundkarte with several an- and exit possession, able
you with "input" and "way out" the accordingly an- and exits for
the elective oneness determine.

8.2.2. Extended settings

"debug" - is here some other as "From" elective, gives AHI debug-
informations over the internal serial interface from. Consider you,
that the audio-giving out by activated Debugging strong verlangsant wurd.
Employ you "debug" only, when it real necessary is (and you some with
the giving out begin able).

"Echo" generated a "echo"-sound. Those function required very much
cPU time, hence can "echo" on Syemen with schwcheren processors
possibly not unused become. Is the processor much to slow for
this function, deactivates AHI the echo independent off.

"Surround in the fasts-mode" - is this function active, is likewise an
very faster processor required. When you the Soundausgabe with Surround-
Sound accelerate want, toggle you this function off. Further information
informations to the "Surround"-Feature and the "fasts"-mode find you in the
AHI-Guide.

"Audibleness" - an further Feature from AHI is the sucked. "Master-
audibleness". With these option able you where appropriate. Emerging disturbances by
the Soundausgabe repair or atleast mitigate. Choose you here "without
Clipping", become the disturbances strong reduced, but become for it
additional 128K memory required. A memory extension would so an
good idea, in case you not insufficient memory for this function to the
zur ~ - at one's disposal have. The "Master-audibleness" is in the AHI-Guide closer
explained.

"CPU-Auslastungsgrenze" for many a AHI-driver (but regrettably not for
all) can here preselected become, how much cPU time the driver maximally
for the giving out acknowledgement permit. Remains e.g. The Mauszeiger during the
giving out stand, stand you here the worth some inferior to. Is the giving out
on the other hand disturbed or discontinued, should you the worth light
raise. Consider you, that it by to high evaluate for the CPU-load
to system-cessations come can (the calculator "stays hang").
Change you these worth so with Bedacht!

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
Whlen you the Sample-Mixing-frequency only so high, how the highest from
you appropriated giving out-frequency. When you e.g. Frequently MP3-files
play back, is sufficient most an frequency from 44100 Hz. The has the advantage,
that AHI no complicated conversions on the really
Ausgabefrequenz carry out must. You Syustem runs then some faster,
in spite of "on-the-fly"-Mixing!

In by the way able you with these attitude two canals with the maximally
possible quality of Amiga-Soundchips issue (22050 Hz), without the the
Latstrke of signal reduced is (the necessary natural only, when you
an Soundkarte use and this frequencies from 44.1 kHz bolstered!).

Places you for a oneness only so many canals to the zur ~ - at one's disposal, how
really required become. The has already mentioned, is the Gesamtlautstrke
of output signal with every one zustzlichen Stiumme smaller. Consequently would then
also more display by the boost of signal necessary, and the quality
of signal is through boost in the exorbitance not unconditional better. Here
is the posy: fewer is more!

8.3. Smart file system (SFS)

"smart file system" or short SFS is an really new Filesystem for the
Amiga. An Filesystem is for it able, how the files on diskettes
and hard drives saved and administered become. On the Amiga is
normally the "fasts file system" (FFS) uses.

SFS offers some special features, the in the FFS not existing are:

.   Faster grips on files

.   Faster input from list

.   Faster seeking in files

.   Support from great Partition (till to 2000 gigabyte)

.   Long file names (till to 100 sign)

.   Support for great files (till 2 gigabyte)

.   Secure writing (no long Validieren to a abnormal system end
    or Stomausfall)

.   Intervention on the 25 at last gelschten files

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
you able SmartFileSystem in the Internet to the example with AWeb under
following address find: "http://www.xs4all.nl/~hjohn/SFS". The actual
version 1.84 find you under "http://www.xs4all.nl/~hjohn/".

8.3.1. SFS fit

--- WEIGHTY --------------------------------------------------------------
before you SFS install, should you unconditional an backup
from all data your Fesplatte lay against. The hard drive is during the
installing new formated and all data go so lost!

The installing from SFS must "from hand" resolved to do become. The clinkers
sure complicated, is but very easy, because proper only an manipulation
did become must. After you the archive unpacked have, copy you the
file "SmartFileSystem" in the directory "L:". You able this over the
Workbench by "Drag&Drop" dispose or the Kopierbefehl in the Shell
enter.

Undoing you an Shell and give you following row an:
copy Smartfilesystem/L/SmartFileSystem L:

activating you thereafter the HDToolbox, around SFS for the hard drive available to
make. Select you the hard drive from the list, and choose you
"hard drive partitionieren". Select you now under "file system"
the point "Hinzu/update". You see now an list the verfgbaren
Dateisysteme. Choose you "Filesystem add" and in the following
Dateiauswahl the "SmartFileSystem". Click you then on "shop". The
progam inverts on the side for the Filesystem-accociation back. Give
you now for SmartFileSystem as identification "0x53465301" ("SFS/01") an. With
"OK" come you again back on the Anfangsseite.

SFS is now in the "Rigid Disk block" (RDB) your hard drive installed,
is however still not used. Around the new Filesystem insert
select you again your hard drive in the HDToolbox, and choose
"hard drive partitionieren". Now select you the Partition, the SFS
use shall. The name the Partition is as Partitionsname show.
Under "file system" choose you "Verndern...".

--- WEIGHTY --------------------------------------------------------------
all info, the he on the hard drive is, goes now
lost! Before you continue, examine you still once, if you an
backup made have. When not, click you "breaking off", and
make you first an backup!

On the next side the HDToolbox able you now with the tarmac
"file system" the SmartFilesystem (SFS\01) choose. With "OK" kerhen you
to the window for the Partitionierung back. Make you the for every
Partition, the SFS use shall. Click you now on "save".
Again back on the Startseite from HDToolbox, click you "termination".

Lead you thereafter a restart of Amigas through and reformat you the
changed Partition(en). The installing and furniture from SFS is
now prosperous cancels and you able your data again back on
this Partition(en) copy.

8.3.2. The clever garbage can

Auf every one Partition, the you with SFS formated have, sets SFS the
drawer ".recycled" an. In these directory become all files, the
you clean, buffered. If you inadvertent once an
false file excluded have, so able you this easy zurckkopieren.
Consider you but, that SFS automatic files from ".recycled" extinguishes,
when he more as 25 files there find or when not more
insufficient storage space on your hard drive existing is.

8.3.3. The SFS-tools

8.3.3.1. Diskspeed

with this Shell-Program able you the speed your hard drives
test. For the parameter give you "Diskspeed ?" An.

8.3.3.2. SFSformat

you able SFS-partitions with the normal "format"-comand reformat,
the Spezialbefehl "SFSFormat" gives you however more possibilities:

SFSformat <Drive> <Name> <CASESENSITIVE>
normal formatted SFS-hard drives treat file names independent from the
grand/use of small letters. When you "CASESENSITIVE" at formatting enter,
become the files hanging from your grand/use of small letters discusses
("HDToolbox" is then not more alike "hdtoolbox").

SFSformat <Drive> <Name> <NORECYCLED>
standard deposits SFS at formatting the in the previous chapter
beschreibenen ".recycled"-directories on. When you this not will, so
give you "NORECYCLED" an.

SFSformat <Drive> <Name> <SHOWRECYCLED>
standard are the ".recycled"-directories "invisible". When you
she uncover have will, so give you "SHOWRECYCLED" an.

8.3.3.3. SFScheck

Prft the hard drive on error. If SFScheck error finds, is from
the hard drive an backup made and thereafter the hard drive new
formated.

8.3.3.4. SFSsetcache

with this stand you the advance-harvest-buffer an. Modernity hard drives read
by one harvest-requirement from of computer mostly more data as
requisited become. Often become this data however later from computer in
one wider harvest-requirement on the drive requested. SmartFilesystem
can this previously still to lesenden data alike by the first
requirement between computer store. To high values for these buffer able the
thereby gewonnenen Geschwindigkeitsvorteil again pick up.

You must here the names the Festplattenpartition enter, ensued from
the Zeilenanzahl and the Blockgre. e.g.:

SFSSetCache Workbench: LINES 50 READAHEAD 8192

ever to available memory are 50-400 lines (LINES)  8192, 16384 or
32768 bytes (READAHEAD) recommendable. The bigness of proved storeroom
accounts he from the number the lines multiplied with the bigness the
separate advance-Lesepuffer (READAHEAD).

8.3.3.5. SFSDefragmentGUI

when many small files over your hard drive distributed are, is he
the speed by Dateizugriffen decrease. With SFSDefragmentGUI
is your hard drive new rationed and you able again with the old
speed work.

SFSDefragmentGUI name:
(e.g. "SFSDefragmentGUI Workbench:"

8.4. Colorwheel

the new ColorWheel, the Farbrad, offers much more colors to the selection and
also much more beautiful Farbeverlufe. You able much particularly colors
choose, besides bolstered it Hi-(15/16bit) and Echtfarben (True color,
24/32bit).

This new Farbrad is to the example in the palette-Preferences uses,
but also in many other program, the an Farbauswahl offer.

8.5. Fontcache

the new Fontcache accelerated the shop the Zeichensatzliste in the
font-selection around an multiple. He created an Indexdatei, the
all important Font-informations contains. With great Fontmengen is
the shop and Darstellen the font-selection only still few seconds
last.

The Fontcache leaves he from the Shell how follows activate:

SetEnv diskfont "cache=yes"
Copy ENV:diskfont ENVARC: CLONE
MakeDir FONTS:_Cache

with it is an environment variable arranged, the the cache einschaltet,
as soon as an "_Cache"-directory in the directory, of it Fontliste
buffered become shall.

8.6. NewIconEmu

The NewIcon-Emulation brings program, the NewIcon-functions to the shop
from pictograms use by, AmigaOS 3.5/3.9 GlowIcons to load and to
computer store. It makes however in the rule sense, for the those concerned
program's alternatives to seek, the AmigaOS 3.5/3.9 GlowIcons direct
lean.

Fore the appearance from AmigaOS 3.5 boot the NewIcon-Patch an good
possibility, pictograms with many colors independent from the colour depth
of screen there-deliver. With the appearance from AmigaOS 3.5 became
for it an newer more homogeneous standard created.

The AmigaOS 3.5/3.9 - routines to the shop from pictograms lean
by it from he from also the shop from NewIcons. With it able all
program's, the this new routines use automatic also NewIcons
load. With the save become this however then as GlowIcons written.

9. AmigaOS and the Internet

9.1. Prelude to the Internet

what before round 20 years began is today in all mouth - the Internet,
those mysteriously, weltumspannende net, filled with informations and
ready also you at it participate to leave.

The concept "Internet" is frequently with the WWW or. "World Wide Web" or
to german the "weltweiten net" equated. That is however not whole
right, because the WWW is only an part of Internet. Also the
electronically mailing, the E-mail, the Usenet with his Newsgroups, the
Telnet-service and many other services belong to  to the great field of
Internet. In frame this chapter will we only the most weighty services
put forward. After this devote we us the program, the for it in the OS3.9 to the
zur ~ - at one's disposal stand, as soon as unite program, the you in the Internet load
able, around another services to of use.

Access             Am beginning stands the question: how come I in Internet?
                   The entire is in the practice really easy. As first
                   needs one a so-called Provider (eng. For
                   provider), so somebody, the a these access to the
                   zur ~ - at one's disposal stands. An such Provider is e.g. Traumatically-
                   Online, an daughter the German Telekom, other
                   be called Mobilcom, 1&1, Freenet uvm.

                   Of the Provider get you an telephone number, a
                   Benutzernamen and an Zugangswort (keyword).

                   The access to the Provider is in the rule over the
                   Telefonleitung establish. From the fact need you now
                   an analogous modem (for the analogen access) or an
                   ISDN-card or an ISDN-modem (for a digitalen
                   access). The modem is on the one hand with the Amiga over
                   the serial interface bound and to the other on
                   the Telefonleitung connected. Further details for this find
                   you in the hint yours modems.

                   Now miss only still the software, the the union from
                   Amiga to the Provider over the modem establishes. Those
                   software mention one TCP/IP-Stack. In our fall is
                   the progam there to Genesis. In this progam carry
                   you now the data an, the you from Provider get
                   have. When all worked out has, is the union to the
                   Internet built up and you are "within"!

WWW                the World Wide Web (worldwide net) is surely
                   one the most weighty services of Internet. Meant
                   is with it an special net from HTML-document, the
                   on Servern in the entire world distributed are and the
                   over special reproofs, the so-called "Links"
                   together bound are. The clinkers now under
                   circumstance more complicated as it is. An HTML-document
                   is letzlich only an text file, the on appointed kind
                   formated is. In these file come for instance
                   appointed concept before, the but in these text not
                   closer explains become. The author makes therefore a
                   animadversion on an other text file, the on a
                   other Server lies, the anywhere on the world stands.
                   The reader the text file can now on these Link
                   click and gets automatic the explanatory text
                   the else file displayed. So far the attempt, this
                   subject theoretical to explain, go we in the practice.

                   The has usual needs one for the WWW an special
                   progam. With the OS3.9 is for this the Webbrowser AWeb
                   delivered. The has all other program's is he
                   he in the drawer "Internet" on the hard drive,
                   on the you the OS3.9 installed have. When you
                   this progam restarted have, so give you
                   for instance our WWW-address an:

                   http://www.The hague-partner.com

                   towards one board Ladezeit (when the conduction free is)
                   is our Startseite on you onscreen
                   appear.

                   When we us the area "AMIGA" back left some
                   particularly look at, then fall the concept "English"
                   and "german" on, the each underlined are.
                   That are the associations ("Links") to our
                   englischen or. German area. Click you easy
                   thereupon and already to short time shall you on the
                   next side is.

E-mail             E-mail is the electronically mailing of Internet.
                   Surely is you already once an row how

                   KarlMustermann@t-online.DE

                   struck, the meanwhile on every one visiting-card
                   and every prospectus stands. That is the E-mail-
                   address from Karl Mustermann. After all where become this E-
                   mail "rested"? The answer is mostly really
                   easy: by you Provider, so the firm, the you
                   also the access to the Internet to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stands. With
                   these Provider have you then an E-mail-account, on
                   the the eingehenden E-mail rested become. With the
                   E-mail-progam call you this E-mail from E-mail-
                   account off. Natural able you with the E-mail-progam
                   also self E-mail create and this then
                   broadcast.

FTP                FTP (file transfer Protocol = data transfer-
                   journal) is an wider service of Internet and
                   he serves to the transfer from files. With a FTP-
                   progam able you files on a Server load
                   or from these gerunterladen. Places you he before,
                   you interest he for an appointed software,
                   e.g. Of us Grafikprogramm ArtEffect. Before you the
                   software buy, will you but an test- or
                   demonstration version view. Those find you again on
                   our FTP-Server under following address:

                   ftp://ftp.The hague-partner.com/ArtEffect/ArtEffect4Demo.
                   lha

                   around this file from our FTP-Server load to able
                   need you either an FTP-progam or you
                   use a Webbrowser how AWeb, the this also
                   can. You give so the above address in the
                   Suchfeld an and to one board time is AWeb an
                   Dateiauswahl open and you ask, where he the file
                   computer store shall. Then begins the loading process, the
                   some minutes or also longer last can.

IRC                human being strike he gladly, around together to talk.
                   To this goes one e.g. In an bar or an pub or
                   on an seminary or an other event -
                   not so in the Internet, because here gives it the IRC. IRC
                   (Internet Relay Chat) is an possibility, he with
                   other people in a "space", the Chat-space to
                   strike and with you over the keyboard to "talk".
                   With it play it no role, where on the world he the
                   people find, the he in these space strike.

Telnet             with a Telnet-progam ties one his calculator
                   with a other calculator and can then the other
                   calculator so attend, as se one direct before him.
                   That is then practical, when one on these computer
                   files copy, texts change or other things
                   do want.

That are only the most weighty services of Internet. Many other how
for instance ICQ, the Usenet with his Newsgroups, Whois, Gopher and
many other are another services, on the on these place but not
closer entered become shall. When you he first once in the Internet
find, then gives it for you many possibilities, he this
informations to take care of. In the succeeding chapter become now the
three Internet-program's of AmigaOS describe: Genesis, AWeb and
AmigaMAIL.

9.2. Genesis - the access in Internet

9.2.1. Prelude

Genesis is an so-called TCP/IP-Stack and enables it, the AMIGA with
the Internet or a lokalen network (Intranet) to connect. Genesis
consists from three Hauptkomponenten:

.   Genesis-Wizard

.   Genesis-Prefs

.   Genesis-main program

the Genesis-Wizard is an small Tool, the you the reduction of
Internet-entrance or of lokalen net relieved. In Wizard
become you Schrittfr-step through the Installationsvorgang led. In
end stands the ready union.

The Genesis-Prefs are the part of the program with the all settings from
Genesis resolved to do become. Settings gives it by Genesis abound,
hence is these part of the program very extensive. In the rule must you
however here not "from hand" encroach, because the settings become from
Genesis-Wizard resolved to do. When it however to problems comes or when
you as erfahrener operator adjustments on the settings carry out
will, then gives you Genesis-Prefs all possibilities there to.

The last part of the program mention he plain Genesis. He is the part, the
the union to the Internet or a lokalen net (the so-called
Intranet) establishes.

9.2.2. Online in 5 minutes - step for step in Internet

.   After you the Wizard restarted have, must you settle, if you
    an modem-union (analogous/ISDN) use want, around in Internet
    to go or an network-union to a other computer
    arrange want. We will with a modem in Internet and that is why
    choose we the upper option from. Later describe we also the
    second option, around an local network over "SanaII" to arrange.

.   As next become you from Wizard asked which modem you
    use. Is you modem in the list not listed, use you
    please the standard-modem ("all purpose or Generic"). When you you
    modem picked have appear the initialization in the field under.
    The initialization-comand contains the comands, the to beginning of
    Whlvorganges on the modem clever become, around appointed
    settings to carry out. When the dialing and the establishing of contact with
    the Provider not flips must you under circumstance you Modemhandbuch
    to help take.

.   As next is the device to enter, that to the addressing yours modems
    verwendt is (e.g. serial.device or "hyperCOMxyz.device" by one
    Hypercom-card). With oneness (Unit) stands in the rule an "0".

.   Now must you the Wahlverfahren give. That is in the rule the
    "Tonwahl", by elders Vermittlungsstellen could it still the
    "Pulswahl" is.

.   With the "Amtsholung" must you normally nothing give. Only when
    you modem on one Nebenstellenanlage hangs and some preselected
    become must, around an charge to get, then must you here this
    Eintragen, e.g. "0", when you an "0" vorwhlen must around the
    Freizeichen to get.

.   If the modem the Tonwahl not acknowledges (e.g. By one
    Nebenstellenanlage), then toggle you "Whlton ignore" an.

.   Choose you now a the "Internet-By-Call"-offerer from. With these
    provider must you no registration make, but able forthwith
    Online go. The charges become in the rule over your
    telephone bill accounted.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when you already a Internet-Provider have, but the Einwahl not
serves, then use you please first a the Provider from the
list around sicherzugehen, that it not on the data of Providers lies.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
Eigener Provider

when you already a Internet-Provider have and from these the
necessary data (telephone number, Zugangsnamen/Login, keyword) get
have, then choose you by the Providerwahl the entry "other".
Then opens he the here angegebenen window, in the you this data
fill out able.

.   Now hear you tone from you modem (in case the loudspeaker not
    switched off is) and some led's in modem would must additional shine.
    Short thereafter must then an small window with "please wait" come.
    In these time feels the Wizard some data from Provider.

.   When all worked out has, then comes an obversely report.

.   Now are all data for the access in Internet adjusted and the
    Genesis-Wizard can cancels become.

.   Now must you only still the Genesis-Icon Doppelklicken and on
    "connecting" (Online) press. Genesis chooses then yours Internet
    Provider on and stands an union to the Internet here. It appears
    then in the Genesis-window an greener point and the report "Genesis is
    now Online", have you it finally created - you are in the Internet.

9.2.3. Local network Aufbauen

coming we now to the furniture of lokalen net (LAN) over the
Genesis-Wizard. An local network is an union from two or
more Computern, the there to in the rule over network card and an
corresponding cable bound are. Towards the activating choose we this time
the point "network".

.   Now must you the SanaII-driver (Device) give with the your
    network card accessed become shall (e.g. AriadneII.device) and the
    correcting oneness (Unit, in the rule "0").

.   Wizard asks now, if you an special config for you SanaII-
    device need. With the Ariadne II can one here normally on
    "refusal" klikken. Otherwise able you an Konfigurationsdatei
    choose or the configuration data direct in the Textfeld
    enter. Please note you by it the documentation yours
    device driver.

.   Wizard attempted now, the local IP-address to ascertain. When this
    not serves appear following Preferences, the you with "yes"
    answer should.

.   When you now on "further" click, appear an small window in
    the you your IP address, the Netzmaske and the Router fill out
    able.

.   After this become you to the IP of domain-name-Servers (DNS) asked.
    When you no DNS in you network have, leave you the field
    easy empty. As last become you still to the Domainnem asked;
    this input is likewise optionally.

.   The configurations is now to "AmiTCP:db/Genesis.conf saved
    - and the Konfigurationsvorgang is with it cancels.

.   Now must you only still the Genesis-Icon Doppelklicken, the
    entry the network card choose and on "Online" press.
    It appears then in the Genesis-window an greener point and the report
    "Ariadne is now Online", have you an local network built up.

9.2.4. The Genesis-Preferences (Prefs)

Genesis-Prefs is the Einstellprogramm from Genesis, with the you every
function, the Genesis ready keeps, to yours Wschen adjust able.
This Preferences can for beginner very baffling is and therefore
should this also the Wizard benutzten. For advanced student are the
Genesis-Prefs but indispensable.

When you the Genesis-Prefs restarted have, appeared the Startbildschirm
with the Einschaltmeldung and left of it 8 Hauptmens (information,
interfaces, options, modems/TAs, file, User, Socks and Cost).
Dedicate we us first of all times the Hauptmen interfaces.

9.2.5. Interfaces

in the menu interfaces able you different sections your
associations fill out, with it you e.g. More Provider use or
next to the Internetzugang also still an local network run leave
able. Under the list with the Profielen find he 4 buttons (new,
copying, discharge and editing).

New

with new able you an new profile create.

Copying

with copying able you an already existing profile easy copying,
with it you by less adjustments not all new fill out must.
Choose you by it the desired profile from, the you copy want and
click then on "copying".

Discharge

with discharge able you an profile clean (care: when you an profile
once excluded have able you it not more fetch back, then must
you all new enter). Choose you by it the desired profile from and
press on discharge.

Editing

with editing able you the settings of bestehenden section
change. Choose you either the desired profile from and press then
on editing, or you make a Doppelklick on the profile.

Profile settings

when you an new profile create or an already existing editing,
opens he an new window, which in 7 subassemblies subdivided is
(interface, Sana-II, modem, PPP, services, happening and Resolv):

9.2.5.1. Interface

in the submenu interface gives it following Einstellungsmglichkeiten:

name

here able you a names for an profile enter or a the
Standardnamen choose. Around the list with the Standardnamen to open,
press you please on the symbol on the right next to the Textfeld.

IP address

here able you either an IP-address fill out or an dynamic
ascertain leave. With Internetverbindungen is nearly always an dynamic
IP-address uses, then the Provider you automatic an IP-address
assign.

With restaurants Netzwerkverbindungen is mostly an statically IP address
uses, how e.g. 192.168.0.50.

Goal

when you an place to place union (how PPP, BRIEFS plip, magplip)
use, must the interface know where you her packets sends.
That say you you, in that you the IP-address yours Zielrechners
registered (by PPP is the IP automatic found).

Gateway

an Gateway is an calculator, the an network with a other network
ties (how e.g. An local network with the Internet). The means
one can the Gateway e.g. There to use with several computer, over a
Intranetzugang, in Internet to go. With it is the Gateway the calculator,
the direct with the Internet in union stands. The other calculator
go easy over him in Internet, he serves so to speak as Router. With it
must all other calculator the IP-address of Gateway registered
have. When you over a Gateway in Internet go will, must you
in this field the IP-address of Gateways fill out.

Netzmaske

The Netzmaske gives on, which span on IP-addresses in you network to
zur ~ - at one's disposal stand. With Internet associations is this function but
generally not required (standard: 255.255.255.0).

MTU (maximum transfer Unit)

there gives one the maximum Transfereinheit on. For an PPP associations
is this attitude but not so censorious, because Genesis stands the
normally automatic an.

Params

many a one interfaces use not only the Sana-II Konfigurationsdatei
but need also still many other parameter, the earlier in
"amitcp:db/interfaces" together with the Schnittstellennamen, the driver
and with the Unit to find were. Since newest is this from Genesis
not more required (it is dynamic in env:netconfig/autointerfaces
generated) and therefore become the Schnittstellenparameter here registered.

9.2.5.2. Sana II

in the Sana II menu see you above an so-called selection menu. There
able you the journal choose, the you use want. It gives three
different protocols to the selection:

PPP

the is the journal for an Internetverbindung.

BRIEFS

old journal the today hardly still used is.

SANA-II

the is the journal for an local network.

When you latter choose, must you under still the device give,
the her network card responds (e.g. By one Ariadne 2 the
Ariadne_II.device), the Unit of device and the names the
device configuration. In the Textfeld under the Konfigurationsdatei, able
you also the device configuration from hand enter.

9.2.5.3. Modem

the modem menu is in three fields subdivided. Once in the part
"modem/TA settings", in "Login script" and in "Provider information". With
one lokalen union is by the modem/TA settings no modem
specified and then natural also no Login-Script and no Provider. With
one Internet union must you an modem auswahlen, and the
Providerdaten and Login-Scripte must registered is, because the Login
script are there to then, around with you Provider contact receive to able.

Modem/TA settings

in these area able you, how yes already mentioned, an modem adjust.
Around an new modem to register, use you please the button "new". When
you an modem from the list clean want then click you please on
"discharge". Will you by a bestehenden modem some settings
change, press you please on "editing". Create you an new
modem or editing an existing, opens he an new window with
several subassemblies (modem/TA, device, comands and results).

Modem/TA

there able you the Modemtyp, a comment and Wiederwahleinstellungen
make. With the Wiederwahleinstellungen able you the number the
Wiederwahlversuche and the Wiederwahlverzgerung adjust.

Device

here is again in two fields discriminated. Once in
Gerteeinstellungen and in options. In the area Gerteeinstellungen
able you the device, with the the modem accosted become shall (e.g.
Serial.device), the Unit of device, the baudrate (speed the
transfer, how e.g. 57600), the buffer size and the Flusskontrolle
(most modems use RTS/CTS) give. With the options able you
once fix, if the Highspeedmodus (reduced the CPU encumbrance), the
OwnDevUnit mode, the "DSR ignore" and the "Drop DTR" activates become
shall. The Highspeedmodus is generally to recommend, then there only
Parittschecks, the xon/xoff administration and test on Break signals
cease. Activate you the option "OwnDevUnit use", is the
ownDevUnit.library the permission reprimands also on the serial Schnittelle
seize to permit. "DSR ignore" able you plug, when you
modem/cable no DSR signal bolstered. Activate you "Drop DTR" is
the DTR signal only to the place abgeschalten.

Comands

with comands able you the Modemkommandostrings fill out. Normally
ought there through the selection of modems some registered is. Is this
not the fall, hit you please in yours Modemhandbuch to.

Modem Antwortkommandos

here able you the modem Antwortwortcodes fill out, this become but
normally automatic registered.

Results

here are the standard results listed. Is you modem accidental an
special case and has other results, then able you this here from hand
alter.

Provider information

when you now again in the menu modem go back, find you left back
the Provider information. There must you the Einwahlnummer, the Login and the
keyword yours Providers give.

Loginscript

right next to the Provider information is he the Loginskriptliste. There
are the Login-Scripte listed, the you to the contacting yours
Providers need. With "to this" be appropriate you an Script an and with
"remove" clean you an script.

PPP

the submenu PPP is in two area subdivided. Once in PPP options
and once in Callback settings. Walk we first times the PPP options
on.

Carrier Detect

is this function activates, checked the PPP device the Carrier Detect
signal to the modem. As soon as this signal wegfllt, deposits Genesis automatic
on.

MPP compression

is this function activates, is the microsoft Point2Point compression
uses. This Kompressionstyp has sure an high
Kompressionsgeschwindigkeit, is for it but also not so efficient. With
a 68030 or superior ought this Kompressionsformat work.

VJ compression

activate she this function, is the Van Jacobsen compression
uses. VJ compression ought generally activates become.

Use DNS address

PPP used the DNS-Server, the from Genesis receive become.

EOF mode

when activates, used PPP a effizienteren path the data from
Serial.device to read. Worse luck serves this function not with every
serial.device and Genesis refuses he then an union to build up.
Shall you this function unconditional use will, should you the
standard - "serial.device" use.

BSD compression

those Kompressionsmethode is very good, but speicherhungrig, slow and
required a leistungsstarken processor (060).

Deflate compression

those Kompressionsart is sure very efficient, but slow and required
much computing performance (060).

Callback settings

when you Provider "recalls" bolstered, able you here your
telephone number or a with the Provider arranged String enter.
With Timeout choose you the wait for the Wiederherstellen the
union during of recalls.

9.2.5.4. Services

here have we three subassemblies (time, different and Keep Alive).

Time

here able you over the point Sync Clock your clock with the of angegebenen
Servers synkronisieren. Squeeze you there to still "time computer store", is the
internal time of Amiga still conserved. With Timeserver, give you
easy the Server on with the you your time synchornisieren want.

Different

here able you over the point "boat use" adjust, if you Genesis,
the BOOTP journal neutzen leave. This special journal allows
Genesis an dynamic IP-address for an interface anzufordern and
important Netzwerkinformationen (how DNS and Domainnamen) automatic to
ascertain. No every one Provider bolstered this and is normally
for PPP associations not required. Moreover slowed it the registration
and it used up more memory. Use you BOOTP hence only in the
case of need. With car-Online able you Genesis say, the it forthwith
Online go shall, as soon as Genesis actuates is.

Keepalive

when you by these function a worth irregular naught choose, is Genesis
to the running down of specified range an Ping broadcast, around an
clasps the union because of inactivity to prevent.

9.2.5.5. Happening

in these menu able you define, what for events by particular
be in action tread shall. In the selection menu in upper
 windowrand stand you the different conditions an (Online, Online
fehgeschlagen, offline active, offline passive). Credit you now above a
condition picked, able you now with "to this" an happening add and
with "remove" an existing clean. Jetztt able you still the kind
of event choose. With it gives it the selection between CLI (Shell),
WB (Rowkrbench), Script and ARexx. Credit you the kind of call elective,
able you now from the ASL Requester the file choose, the in these
particular condition restarted become shall. Will you e.g. ICQ automatic
commence leave, when Genesis Online goes, choose you as condition Online,
as Ereignistype WB and as file the progam ICQ.EXE.

9.2.5.6. Resolv

coming we now to our last Untermenpunkt from interfaces
"Resolv". Here able you the important domain name Server (IP-address,
e.g. 212.185.252.73), Domainnamen (e.g. Test.DE) and the restaurants Host (how
e.g. Amiga1200) fill out. With the "to this" Button be appropriate you a in addition and
with "remove" clean you a Bestehenden from the list. With the
restaurants Host Einstellugen able you still choose, if the Hostname and the
Domainname requested become shall. With one Internetverbindung become always
an or more DNS entries and an Domainname required. Those data
get you either from you Provider direct, or by your first
union.

9.2.6. Options

with the Hauptmen options able you general settings strike.
Those are in 4 subassemblies subdivided (advertisement, different, carry out
and extended).

9.2.6.1. Advertisement

this submenu has again two subdivisons. To the a in
"Haupt window Anzeigeoptionen" and in "Status window Anzeigeoptionen". With
the "Haupt window Anzeigeoptionen" able you Genesis say what all in the
Haupt window to see is shall. Here gives it following informations, the
one he show leave can:

featuring Onlinezeit   shows the length the call time on.
(When active)

featuring              shows the actual Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit.
Speed
(when active)

featuring              shows the profile with yours momentary status.
Interfaces
(when active)

featuring Buttons      shows the connecting- and Trennbutton on.
(When active)

featuring              shows the status led's the interfaces on.
Interfaces
led's

featuring Mitschnitt   shows the Syslog-giving out on.
(When active)

featuring user     shows the actual user on.
(When active)

in desem area find you then still an selection menu, in that you the
behavior from Genesis at boot define able. Here gives it three
different behavior:

open at boot   holds the window to the boot open.

With the boot as     Iconifiziert Genesis. Around the window again appear
Icon               to leave, doppelklicken you easy on the
                   ikonifizierte Genesis-Icon on you
                   Workbenchhintergrund.

Closed at   Schliet the window and makes he invisible, i.e.
Boot              one sees on the Workbench no foretoken. When you
                   again the Genesis window show leave will,
                   click you please double on the Genesis Icon in the
                   Genesis directory.

Under the "Haupt window Anzeigeoptionen" find you the "Status window
Anzeigeoptionen". Three options stand here to the selection:

open              it opens the Status window at boot.
Status window
(when active)

featuring serial     shows the Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit and the seriellen
inputs           inputs, during the union built up is.

Open              shows the Netzwerkstatus window on.
Netzwerkstatus
window

9.2.6.2. Different

in these menu apportions he the window again in three fields: the
"Kontrolleinstellungen", the "Mitschnitteinstellungen" and the
"Starteinstellungen".

Kontrolleinstellungen

here able you following settings make:

Verbindungsabbruch affirm

here able you an safety query in the Trennenfunktion incorporate,
i.e. Always when you the "separation" Button anklicken, is an additional
window open and asked, if you the union abbort want. The
activation these function is particularly by important associations to
recommend.

Benutzernamen in end clean

is this function activates, is always to the expiration from Genesis
the Benutzemamen excluded.

Debugmodus

credit you often problems with your Internetverbindung, able you this
function activate. Here is you then detailed displayed what
Genesis straight makes.

No car-Traffic

when this anbgewhlt is, reach [for] Genesis and other program's at boot
not on the network to. Consequently become interfaces, the automatic
On- and Off-line go (e.g. ISDN cards and Router) not unnecessary
bound.

Kontrolleinstellungen

here able you the following adjust:

Mitschnittlevel

here is adjusted, which newscast in the Genesis Mitschnitt displayed
become shall.

Mitschnittdetaillevel

here is adjusted, which newscast in the Mitschnittdatei hold
is shall.

Mitschnittdatei

here give you the path for the Mitschnittdatei on.

Starteinstellungen

Hiuer able you the following adjust:

start Inetd

Inetd is accountable for the boot other demon how FTPd, httpd
etc.

TCP: Mounten

Mountet TCP: at boot.

Loopback configure (IO0)

with this able you at boot, an LoopbackSchnittstelle configure
leave. That means you able on local demon (FTP Server, www
Server) seize and around this to test.

9.2.6.3. Carry out

here able you a Shellbefehl, an progam, an ARexx Script or an
DOS Script define, the either at activating, or at termination from
Genesis invoked become shall. Objections you, when you car-online of use,
that this invocations still before the establishing of communication restarted become.

9.2.6.4. Extended

this last Untermenu is in dei fields subdivided:

Kerneloptionen

Gateway
an Gateway is an calculator, the an network with a other network
ties (e.g. An local network with the Internet). The means one
can the Gateway e.g. There to use with several computer, over a
Internetzugang, in Internet to go. With it is the Gateway the calculator,
the direct with the Internetin union stands. The other calculator
go easy over him in Internet, he serves as Router. When you will,
the you calculator as Gateway work shall, activate you this
function.

IP sends redirect when activates, sends IP ICMP newscast.

Sana debug      is this active, is the Sana II Debugging
                   activates.

ICMP               is this active, is the ICMP Debugging
                   activates.

IP debug        is this active, is the IP Debugging
                   activates.

Kernel Speichermanagement

Anfngliche Chunks here can the number the "mbuf Chunks" specified
become.

Cluster Chunks     here able you the number the cluster allocate.

A maximum of. Memory      here able you the maximum memory usage the
                   Genesis Kernels give.

Chunk              here can the number the "mbuf Chunks" specified
                   become.

Clustergre       here able you the bigness of "mbufs cluster"
                   give.

TCP buffer size

here is the Standardgre of transmitting- and reception-Socket buffer (TCP)
specified.

9.2.7. Modem/TAs

in these area able you an modem adjust. Around an new modem
to register, use you please the Button "new". When you an modem from
the list clean want, then click you please on "clean". Will
you by a bestehenden modem some settings change, print
you please on editing. Create you an new modem or editing an
existing, opens he an new window with several subassemblies
(modem/TA, device, comands and results).

9.2.7.1. Modem/TA

there able you the modemtyp, a comment and Wiederwahleinstellungen
make. With the Wiederwahleinstellungen able you the number the
Wiederwahlversuche and the Wiederwahlverzgerung adjust.

9.2.7.2. Device

here is again in two fields discriminated. Once in
Gerteeinstellungen and once in options. In the area
Gerteeinstellungen able you the device, with the the modem accosted
become shall (e.g. Serial.device), the Unit of device, the baudrate
(speed the transfer, how e.g. 57600), the buffer size and the
Flukontrolle (the most modems use RTS/CTS) give. With the
options able you einaml fix if the Highspeedmodus (reduced the
CPU encumbrance), the OwnDevUnit mode, the "DSR ignore" and the "Drop
DTR" activates become shall. The Highspeedmodus is generally to recommend,
then there only Parittschecks, the xon/xoff administration and test on Break
signals cease. Activate you the option "OwnDevUnit use", is
the ownDevUnit.library the permission reprimands also on the serial
Schnittelle seize to permit. "DSR ignore" able you plug,
when you modem/cable no DSR signal bolstered. Activate you "Drop
DTR" is the DTR signal only to the place abgeschalten.

9.2.7.3. Comands

with comands able you the Modemkommandostrings fill out. Normally
ought there through the selection of modems some registered is. Is this
not the fall, hit you please in her Modemhandbuch to.

Modem Antwortkommandos

here able you the modem Antwortwortcodes fill out. Those become but
normally automatic registered.

9.2.7.4. Results

here are the Standart results listed. Is you modem accidental an
special case and has other results, then able you this, here from hand
alter.

9.2.8. File

then the file very complex settings zulsst, is only
preceded user this section commended. Normally need
Internet user this section not, only by komplexen net, is
these area interesting.

9.2.8.1. Groups

that is the Gruppendatenbank from Genesis. Each row defined an
group. Groups become proper only for externe program's how NFS
required. With "to this" is an group to the list added and with
"remove" an consisting of group from the list excluded. The following values
able you one group fill out:

name

here is the name your group registered.

ID

here is the numerical Identifizierer specified. The ID issue ought
an decimal from 0-32767 is. Negatives groups IDs work sure
also, ought one but only by special project use. A groups
ID issue ought besides always unique is.

Hosts

here become the Hosts in the Genesis file registered. With "to this"
is an Host to the list added and with "remove" an existing
from the list excluded.

IP address

here is the IP address of Hosts registered.

Name

here is the full name of Host registered.

Aliases

here able you still a zustzlichen aliases for the Host give.

9.2.8.2. Protocols

the Protokollbereich the file contains all to zur ~ - at one's disposal standing
protocols, the for an transfer used become able.

9.2.8.3. Services

here stand the to zur ~ - at one's disposal standing services.

9.2.8.4. Grips

here become the Zugriffsbereichtigungen registered.

9.2.8.5. Inetd

here find you the Konfigurationsektion to Inetd.

9.2.8.6. Networks

here able you networks administer.

9.2.8.7. RPC

here is the Programmnummerdatenbank displayed.

9.2.9. User

here able Genesis user individuals arranged become. The is,
it able User confined and accomodated become.

New

with this is an new user in the list registered.

Discharge

here is an existing user from the list excluded.

Editing

here can an already existing user changed become.

Create you now a new user or editing a, is an
new window open the three groups tps of umfassen:

9.2.9.1. General

this area contains general info over the user of
angewhlten section.

Benutzername

here able you he a Benutzernamen fill out.

Authentic name

here is you authentic name registered.

Homeverzeichniss

here is the directory specified, the from the user unused become
shall.

BenutzerID groups ID

here become the IDs of user's and the the group specified, to the the
user heard.

Keyword alter

here able you an keyword for the user define, with it the profile
from not meddlers unused become can.

9.2.9.2. Countdown

in these Preferences become Zeitbegrenzungen for the user registered.
With the "to this" Button be appropriate you a period in addition and with "remove",
clean you a period from the list. With it able you in the selection menu
under the buttons the weekday and in the both Textfeldern the
space of time fill out.

9.2.10. Different

with these window able you the maximum call time, the time-
Server and the Benutzerwarnung plug.

9.2.10.1. Socks

Socks enables you with several computer an Internetverbindung
germeinsam of use to able. The Socks window is by it in two menu
subdivided: once "general" and "filter".

9.2.10.2. General

as first must you the Socks Wrapper in upper edge of menu
plug. Credit you him active, can one the other part
see and edit.

9.2.10.3. Socks Server

here carry you the IP address of Server, over the the Internetverbindung
runs an. Next to the Server IP must you still a Port give, these
is ordinary 1080. Credit you no DNS in you lokalen network must
you still the function "all Host falsify" activate.

9.2.10.4. With cut

here able the info from Socks Wrapper displayed become.

9.2.10.5. Authentification

when you Server an authentification required, must you here the
requisite names and the keyword fill out.

9.2.10.6. Filter

here able you the Socks Wrapper on the union to the Hosts or
serve adjust.

9.2.11. Cost

those menu consists from again two subassemblies: "costs" and "general".

9.2.11.1. Costs

here able you the costs the associations compute leave. In upper
menu carry you the weekday an. Now able you for the ausgewhlten
weekday an computation appoint. Choose you "to this", around an computation
to add and "remove" around an consisting of to clean.

Then must still values for the computation specified become. Here for must
you the "acceleration time", the "Endzeit", the "duration the oneness" and the
"costs the oneness" give.

9.2.11.2. General

The currency, the Verbindungsgebhr and the price reduction become here
specified. In addition able here still the entirety Kostendaten
conserved and charged become.

9.3. AWeb

AWeb is an faster and stronger browser for the World Wide Web
(WWW). The actual version offers all important functions, the one to the
Browsen in the Internet needs.

.   JavaScript 1.1

.   Frames

.   Charts (inclusive Tabellenhintergrnde)

.   Customer "Image Maps"

.   Embedded objects and background-Sounds

as an unique Feature, offers AWeb three different HTML modes,
which the correct advertisement almost every one side garantee:

.   The strict mode, by which only officially standard recognized is.

.   The permissively mode, which many Netscape and other amplifications
    acknowledges. The permissively mode offers also an error tolerance over against
    many typing error, inclusive lascher comments.

.   The compatibles mode, around bad programmed HTML pages represent
    to able, on those the most other browser despair become.

9.3.1. Special features from AWeb

images become at AWeb in the rule over data types (Datatypess)
read in. Thereby can he automatic from existing PowerPC-
optimized Ladern profit. Alternative able also special internal
Plugins uses become, the progressive Dekodieren for GIF, JPEG and
PNG images, as soon as encouraged GIFs unterstutzen.

You able for all Datatypes determine, which actions happen shall,
hanging from yours MIME-type-settings (am menu item "Viewers").
"Streaming input" for externe program's is also necessary. With write
checked AWeb, if it he real around text acts, before attempted
is, him to announce, around problems with Servern, the amplifications how
".lha" not recognize, to avoid.

A public Plugin-interface allows the simple integration from
Erweiterungsprogrammen in AWeb.

AWeb bolstered for the union in Internet each familiarize TCP/IP-
Stack, the it for the Amiga gives. He runs by it also problem-free with the
version from Genesis, the at AmigaOS 3.9 contains is. When you an
Internetseite attend will can AWeb the access automatic establish
and you must this not "from hand" carry out.

9.3.2. Settings

AWebs Konfigurationsmglichkeiten organize he in four unconnectedly
Einstell window, those permit you nearly all aspects from AWeb on your
personal affectations acclimatize. You able AWeb easy configure,
its window on a own ffentlichen screen (Public Screen), a
named ffentlichen screen or the voreingestellten ffentlichen
screen to open. The Netzwerkstatus-, Hostlist- and Geschichts window
become optionally automatic at run open.

You able the menu complete on your personal needs acclimatize.
You able menu new compilate or new menu items add, the
ARexx-comands or ARexx-macros accomplish.

You able the functions the ten Navigationsknpfe in the upper part of
Betrachter windows self determine.

You able the voreingestellte Popup-menu which for images, Links and
Frames appear, fix. Through Verwenden from ARexx-ordering able you
the functionality add, the you for useful hold. You able
even ARexx-macros or externe program's from Popup-menu from commence.

Make the "Fastlink"-buttons other browser offers AWeb far
stronger Benutzerknpfe. You able these buttons every one
any ARexx-comand allocate. That contains also an URL to open
(which the button in a simple Fastlink-button transform would),
an simple Konfigurationseinstellung to alter (how the HTML-mode) and
ARexx-macros or externe program's to commence. You able your own
functions on the most buttons the keyboard lay.

9.3.3. System requirements

those special Edition from AWeb required the following around run to able:

.   AmigaOS 3.9 or better

.   3Mb memory as absolute minimum. 4Mb or more is urgent
    commended.

.   Either Genesis, I-Net225 or ACE-225 around intervention from the World Wide
    Web to attain, or an TCP- Stack the with a from the genannten
    compatible is. Examples for compatibles products are Miami and
    TermiteTCP.

.   Suitable Datatypess to the announcement from picture GIF, JPEG and PNG, become
    through delivered Plugins dekodiert, but able this through
    other convenient Datatypess compensates become.

.   Around mood music on pages hear to able is an WAV and an GOLD
    Datatypes commended. Make of Datatypess able you also a
    externe gambler how Play16 use. For MIDI mood music is
    an MIDI gambler (how GMPlay) commended.

9.3.4. Installing

The installing from AWeb follow in the OS3.9-Hauptinstaller. Also by one
nachtrglichen installing use you the OS3.9-Hauptinstaller and
choose the installing in the menu from. Sequels you then the assignments of
program.

9.3.5. The Steuersymbole from AWeb

Am upper edge the browser-window are an number from field and
buttons. The accurately bigness and the look the buttons variation with yours
settings, but the position associate is fixated on. The separate field
become in the following describe:

URL-input field

this field shows the URL (Netzadresse) the at the moment angezeigten
side. You able here an new URL enter and the final
<Enter> worrys for it, that the side receive is.

The menu item "project/open WWW" or the Tastaturkrzel <Amiga>-<W>
activates this input field likewise. With it is already "http://www."
In the input field registered.

URL-defaults

this button opens an small Popup-list from the you a the usual
beginnings from URLs, how "http://www." Choose able. The URL-input field
is activates and the selection registered.

Statusindikator

this field serves two tacks:

.   When you with the Mauszeiger on a "Link" stand, so is here the
    address (URL) displayed. Those URL is charged, when you on the Link
    click.

.   When an side for this window charged is, is here the
    Ladestatus displayed. Formation data receive appear an
    Fortschrittsbalken, the announce how wide the loading process already
    forgeschritten is. Shall the bigness of document in the advance not
    known is, appear no Fortschrittsbalken.

Sicherheitsindikator

this indicator shows on, if the actual document over an certain
union charged is. Those function is in the SE-version not
available.

Hintergrundstatus

when an or more loading processes active are, shows this Angezeige a
or several small squares. With every one union, the closed is
and every block the receive is, animates he the square a step
wider.

Those advertisement leaves you know, if still things in the background charged become
and how quick the loading process fortschreitet. When you more details
want, get you this in the Netzwerkstatus window.

Back

with these button able you he in the window-course (History) forwards
move. The window-course contains all pages, the ahead in these
window looks at become.

Forward

this button leaves you through the window-course vorwrtsbewegen. The
window-course contains all pages, the ahead in these window
looks at become. Consider you please, that the window-course not over
ramifications disposes, but "linearly" is. The is, when you an couple
steps go back and then an other side invoice, is so the
another course of bisherigen window-course forget.

Home

this button calls the URL, the you as "Home"=Dokument adjusted have
on.

The Holist add

this button complies the URL the actual side to the Hotlist in addition.

Hotlist

this button shows your Hotlist on.

Breaking off

this button aborts the shop one side in these window off.
Loading processes in the background able with these button not broken off
become; use you instead of of it the "breaking off"-button in the
Netzwerkstatus window.

Netzwerkstatus

this button opens the Netzwerkstatus window or brings it in the
foreground, in case it already open is.

Seeking

this button opens the Such window or brings it in the foreground,
in case it already open is.

Reload

this button lades the actual document renewed. The side is from the
buffer excluded and renewed receive.

Images shop

this button lades all till now still not geladenen images on the
actual side.

Benutzerknpfe

The bottom row from buttons can with any functions allocates become.

When you more buttons defined have, as in the window fit, able
you the Menzeile horizontal durchrollen. Squeeze you the left Maustaste
and consider you simultaneous the mouse to left or on the right during you
the <Shift>-key pressed hold.

Around valuable Browserplatz on a lower-case screen to save, have you
the possibility the Benutzerknpfe to hide.

9.3.6. The Browser window

the Browser window is the prime window from AWeb. Here become the
pages of World Wide Web displayed. Over the window are some buttons.

9.3.6.1. Through pages move (scrollen)

you able the  windowinhalt horizontal and vertical durchrollen
(scrollen) as soon as the bigness of angezeigten document the  windowgre
exceeds. Natural able you the Scrollbalken and the
Pfeilknpfe to the Scrollen of text use, but AWeb understands over that
out still following buttons:

<Cursor high/      (both, cursor- key field and Numerisches key field)
runter>            high and down; scrollen for short distances.

<Shift> + <Cursor  (cursor- key field) an side high or down
high/runter>       scrollen.

<PgUp>, <PgDn>     (Numerisches key field) an side high or down
                   scrollen.

<Space>,           an side high or down scrollen.
<Backspace>

<Home>, <End>      (Numerisches key field) on the end or the beginning
                   of document bounce.

<Cursor left/     (both cursor- key field and Numerisches key field)
rechts>            left and on the right scrollen. That is only then possible,
                   webb the document an image or a preformatted
                   text, broader as the Browser window contains, then AWeb
                   otherwise the text so fora dull, that he in the
                    windowbreite goes.

<Shift> + <Cursor  (cursor- key field) left and on the right around the breadth
left/rechts>      one side scrollen.

Annotation: that are the voreingestellten buttons. You able other buttons
determine or other actions for this buttons fix.

9.3.6.2. Frames

many pages in the WWW of use an property the one as "Frames"
designates. "Frames" are an subdivision of Browser windows around an
side, the from several HTML-documents consists, show to able. When
"Frames" displayed become, are the Haupt window-Scrollbalken
probable on full with bigness (not scrollbar). Instead of this hold
many a "Frames" a Scrollbalken with the one the content of "Frames"
scrollen can.

In many through, "Frames" subdivide pages contains an Frame the
Hauptdokument and the other, most less "Frames" hold
additional things how Werbebanner or an Navigationsleiste. In such
cases stands AWeb an conjecture on, which the "Frames" in sinnvollsten
a Scrollbalken required. In these "Frame" able you then with the
above beschriebenen buttons scrollen. When you a other "Frame" as the
automatic ausgewhlten scrollen want, then click you easy with
the mouse in these "Frame" (or neutzen his Scrollbalken) and already
is these "Frame" for the future Scrollen with the keyboard activates.

Many a time define author's from Webseiten "Frames" explicit without
Scrollbalken, self when the content greater as the visible area is.
Although wier no Scrollbalken existing are, able you the content
this "Frames" with the keyboard roll.

"Frames" have you own Popup-menu. It is in the lefthand upper Eck of
each "Frames" dialable.

You able "Frames" always in hers bigness change. Snaps you he
easy the edge of "Frames" with the mouse and postpone you she, till
the desired bigness attains is. Use you the menu item "control/
Frames disfavour" around all "Frames" on her original bigness
zurckzusetzen.

In lower-case window (with only 200 or 256 Zeilenschirmen) appear an
side with "Frames" oftentimes bruised and is not easy to use.
In these fall able you AWeb so configure, that an greater surface
used is on which the side mapped is. Now able you the
 windowscrollbalken of use, around the through "Frames" subdivided side in
hers Gnze to scrollen.

9.3.6.3. Left-hand

Einter the most weighty tees of WWW is the ability "Links" (also
"Hyperlinks" called; ramifications to wider informations) in
documents to install. An Hyperlink is in one other colour
personated and voreingestellt underlined. You able the colour and the
underscore on the "options"-side by the browser-settings
alter.

Click you on the text or the image around a Link to follow, so is
the document or the file in the browser displayed, the he "behind" the
Link conceals. The URL (network address) of document, on the the
animadversion shows, is in the Statusindikator displayed, when he the mouse over
the Link is.

9.3.6.4. FTP-Links

many a time shows an Hyperlink not on an other document but
instead of this on an file or an directory. You able such
reproofs on hers URL (network address), which with "ftp:" begins,
recognize. When you on a Link click, the on an directory shows,
shows AWeb the content of list on. It gives for it no
standardized format, but normally become you the names the
files or subdirectories on the right side the list see.
Those are siederum Links, so that you through an Verzeichnisstruktur
browsen able, in that you on the Links click. Often contains the
listing also the filesize and the date.

When you on the Link one file click, is AWeb the file load and
try she to announce. When it not displayed become can, opens he
an Dateiauswahl, with it one the file conserve can.

When you computer over an Firewall (protective function) on the Internet
connected is, could it is, that this no FTP-associations on
normal ways allows. You able AWeb so configure, that he on an
other kind and wise man an FTP-union build up, by the it
probable is, that this also behind one Firewall serves.

9.3.6.5. Single images

many a time refer an Hyperlink not on an other document, but
instead of this on an image. Voreingestellt is, that AWeb this images in the
Browser window announce. You able but also AWeb so configure, that
an external Bildanzeiger used is, around the images there-deliver.

Objections you, that images the he already in the memory from AWeb find
not over a externe indicator personated become. That can the fall
is, when an Link on an image shows, which also already in a
document anticipates/occurs, which he in the Speicherpuffer is. Then the image
already dekodiert is and he in the memory is would it an
dissipation on resources it still once to decode and then also
still wider memory for the externe indicator aufzuwenden. When you the
image with a externe indicator view want, must you first the
AWeb-Speicherpuffer clean. An path an image to clean is the Popup-
menu to use.

9.3.6.6. Embedded images

an document can embedded images hold, the with the text
"verwoben" are. When an such image (still) not charged is ought,
shows AWEB on of it place an Icon. You able in "settings/
images load" choose, if images forthwith charged become shall or even
not.

AWeb shows under differently circumstance defferent pictograms
on:

*   this Icon stands for an not geladenes image.

    Click you it on around the image to load.

*   when an ungeladenes image simultaneous an Link on an document is,
    is an diagonal line over the image designed.

    Click you in the upper left half of Icon, around direct the
    Link to follow or in the bottom raked half, around the image to load.

This image stands for an unloaded, dialable Map. Because an
dialable Map always an Link on an other document is, appear here
even so an diagonal line. Click you on the bottom raked half around
the image to load. As soon as it charged is, able you a point on the
Map anklicken.

You able in the left upper half click around the Link without Map-
coordinates to follow. Server should in the position is this as an
requirement one pure Textversion the side to hear.

*   when an image from one of these ground not charged become can, is
    this Icon displayed.

For an image can an so-called OLD-text definieirt become. That is an
text the displayed is, when the browser the image not announce.
Natural understands AWeb these OLD-text and shows him instead of
Icon on. With a OLD-text provide images see unloaded
folgerndermaen from:

*   Ungeladenes image.

*   Ungeladenes image, which simultaneous a Link on an anklickbare
    Map represent.

9.3.6.7. Download

place a Link to follow and an new document to announce or an image
to load and to announce, able you an document or an image direct
download. Around this to carry execution hold you the <Shift>-key
pressed, during you on the Link click. The document or image is
now receive and an Dateiauswahl appear, the you a names and
a Speicherort determine leaves. When the document already in the buffer
existing is, is it not renewed over the net charged, but only
under the from you entered names conserved.

You able also announced image on this kind and wise man conserve.
Drkken you easy the <Shift>-key and hold you she pressed, during
you the image anklicken. That serves even with Hintergrundbildern
(only when which displayed become): Klicken you easy anywhere on the
background (simultaneous <Shift>-key press) and you become to the
names asked under the the background conserved become shall.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when the image also a Link represent ought, so could an <Shift>-
Klicken of picture equivocal is; in these fall saves AWeb the
image. When you the document "behind" the image download want,
should you the Popup- menu use.

9.3.6.8. Popup-menu

when you the <Alt> or the <Ctrl>-key press, during you on a
Link or an image click, opens AWeb an Popup-menu with different
very ntzlichen possibilities, the otherwise heavy to move would be.

You able AWeb so configure, that he the Popup-menu also opens,
when you the <Shift>-key press, or when you the medial or raked
Maustaste actuate.

9.3.6.9. Clipboard-use

this attribute is in the special Edition not available.

9.3.6.10. AppWindow-property

when you AWeb on the Workbench-screen run leave, relates he the
Browser window how an AppWindow. The means, that you an Workbench-
Icon on the Browser window consider able and the relevant file
in the underlying window open is.

9.3.6.11. Ikonifizieren

with the menu item "project/Ikonifizieren" able you AWeb ikonifizieren.
When you AWeb ikonifizieren, become all window closed and the AWeb
own screen closed, where memory enabled is (special when
AWeb on a own screen ran). In addition become all images from the
memory excluded. All transfers run in the background wider.

After you AWeb ikonifiziert have, appear an Icon on the
Workbench. Click you this double on, opens AWeb renewed his screen
and its window how ahead. You able also an other Icon on
the AWeb Icon consider around AWebs giving out again to activate and the
file, which to the Icon heard in a new AWeb window to
open.

9.3.7. AWeb-settings

9.3.7.1. Browser settings

this Preferences subdivided he in 5 subassemblies: options,
fonts, styles, colors and indicator.

Options

HTML modes          Strikt - only the officially standard is recognized.

                   Tolerant - many Netscape- and other amplifications
                   become recognized. In addition offers the permissively mode
                   also an error tolerance over against many
                   typing error, inclusive false comments.

                   Compatibles - around real bad programmed HTML
                   pages still represent to able.

Javascript
here can one Javascript deactivate or optimized and tolerant
adjust.

Warn by suspicious JavaScript
Warnt you by suspicious JavaScript code.

JavaScript error show
here able you determine, if Javascript error displayed become shall
or not.

Use Frames
here have she the choice between Frames use or not use.

Nominal Framehhe
in lower-case window (e.g. On a onscreen with one height from 200 or
256 pixel) appear an side with Frames often bruised. When you this
Kstschen dial, is an greater height for the formation of layouts
uses. The makes single Frames greater and easier unsuitable.

Blttersymbole as list show
many people use an Commodity, the Blttersymbole in Popup-menu
metabolizes. I hold the for no good idea, then it merely the
behavior of field changes, but not is look, and because it only
GadTools-field affect, the not constant used become (because of the
confinements the GadTools-Library). Sure have Blttersymbole also
some disadvantages, hence offers AWeb the possibility, Blttersymbole in
form one list there-deliver. Consider you, that Auswahlfelder with more
as five choices or with the possibility the Mehrfachauswahl
always as list personated become.

When you this small box choose, become Blttersymbole always as list
personated, also, when she few as five options bid.

Progressive charts-advertisement
accepted, an side contains an great table. The most browser
show then so nothing on, till the complete table read in is -
and the can long last. AWeb offers an progressive Tabellanzeige, and
the means, that he the table announce, during she still read is.
The advantage lies on the hand: you see already in one earlier
Ladephase more from the side.

It gives but two disadvantages: firstly can an later more read part
the table an greater Spaltenbreiten needed make - the leads to
a creation the entirety table. At the worst is the table
with every amount data block new built up; the leads to a ugly
mender. To the second can the progressive Tabellenaufbau about 10%
slower is as the normal advertisement, but the is through the earlier
advertisement from division the table more as balanced.

With these small box toggle you between more progressive and normally
Tabellenanzeige around.

Use backdrops and colors
many pages have Hintergrundbilder or -farben. Those become from AWeb
only displayed, when this small box choosen is. Is the not the fall,
become only the colors uses, the in the Browserfarben-settings
fixed become.

Handzeiger over Links
Wechselt by Links from normal Mauszeiger on a Handzeiger.

Use background Sound
some pages have an mood music. When this small box elective
is, is this music always played, when the side displayed is.
Otherwise is the music not automatic played. You able the
music then hear, when you the "menu item control/mood music
play back" choose.

Underlining Links
when active, become all Links still once additional underlined.

Blink (0.1s)
Blinkgeschwindigkeit in seconds.

Fonts

here able you the Schrifttyp, the font and the size of type
give.

Styles

for every HTML-style-mark (also day called) able you adjust, which
font-type (normal or setier breadth) and which bigness used become
shall. Even so be able you a Schriftstil choose.

The list contains all necessary styles for it. Under the list is an
short description the signification the straight gewhlten mark.

Celebrations breadth
Whlen you this small box, when you want, that for this mark an
font with foothold breadth instead of of Proportionalzeichensatzes
used is.

Abs. Bigness
for brands the headline (<H1> till <h6>) able you here an
Zeichensatzgre from 1 till 7 enter. Bigness 1 is the least, 7 the
greatest.

Transmit relay control. Bigness
for all other brands able you here an relative bigness enter.
Valid relative bulks are -6 till +6. The really bigness, the for
these type uses is, is then the actual normal bigness in the
document, corrected through these worth. Consider you, that the final
bigness never smaller as 1 or greater as 7 is is.

Normal, fat, cursive, underlined
Benutzen you this small box, around the notation for the edited
mark to choose.

Colors

here able you the colors from Links, already visited Links, angewhlten
Links, the background and the text adjust.

Indicator

here able you for the different Datatypes, indicator and Abspieler
define.

9.3.7.2. Progam-settings

the Preferences subdivided he in 4 subassemblies: onscreen, palette,
options and program's.

Onscreen

here able she the onscreen, on the AWeb run shall adjust. With it
have she the selection between a default ffentlichen onscreen,
a named ffentlichen onscreen or a own ffentlichen
onscreen.

Palette

Palettennderungen able here made become.

Options

Speicherpfad
here must the path adjusted become, where the files copied become
shall, the you from the Internet download.

More temporary path
this path is for temporary files used. The are files, the to
the externe Anzeigern transmitted become as soon as images, the not
buffered become.

Scroll-overlaps
when you an side high- and runterrollen, gives it an overlap.
When you an greater overlap wish - when you about a
greater font use - able you whose bigness here else.
Places you in these field the desired overlap (measured in
pixel) an.

Shell comands in Links permit
in the SE-version not verffbar.

Pictograms produce
when you this small box dial, generated AWeb for every file, the you
conserve or download, an Icon. When it an text file is
(HTML or easier text), is therein AWeb as standard program
specified, so that you the text easy through an Doppelklick on the
Icon look at able.

Hotlist window schlietg automatic
with the selection of Links from the Hotlist, is by the activation
these option, the Hotlink window automatic again closed.

Hotlist automatic open
Hotlist is at activating automatic open.

Window-story automatic open
the window "story" is at activating automatic open.

Window-story shuts automatic
the alike how by the Hotlist.

Indentations enable
in SE-version not available.

Network-status automatic open
Netzwert-Status window is at activating automatic open.

Truing Auswahl window
all Auswahl window become in the centre of AWeb-window open.

Program's

here able Siue adjust, which editor, HTML Quelltextanzeiger and
Bildanzeiger you use will and which Script at activating and
termination wervenden will.

9.3.7.3. GUI-settings

the GUI-Preferences apportions he in 6 submenu: options, menu, buttons,
Popup, buttons and navigation.

Options

navigational-buttons show
when active become all Navigationknpfe show.

User-buttons show
is this activates, become buttons of user's displayed.

Popup-menu activation
here able you adjust, with which key he the Popup-menu open
shall.

Menu

here able you the menu to yours Wschen configure. In the SE-
version but not available.

Buttons

in these menu able you buttons on your AWeb surface place, with
those you then different actions accomplish able, how Z.B's. Left-hand to
Internetseiten define or program's commence.

Popup

with these menu able you in you Popup-menu, to the already
voreingestellten actions, own add or also consisting of clean.

Buttons

here able you Tastaturkrzel (Shortcuts) for appointed actions
adjust. In the SE-version is this function but not available.

Navigation

here able you the Navigationsknpfen, actions allocate. In the SE-
version is this function but not available.

9.3.7.4. Network-settings

the NEtzwerkPreferences is in 6 submenu apportioned:

options

images load
here able you adjust if images, only the Maps or at all  no images
charged become shall.

Local index
gives the file for the lokalen index on.

A maximum of. Network- associations/Diskzugriffe
The maximum number from Netzwerkverbindungen and Diskzugriffe leave he
here adjust.

Homepage
here is the Internetadresse registered, the always when AWeb restarted
is, forthwith charged become shall.

Activating with the homepage
when the function not activates is, is no Startseite used.

Ignore MIME-type from Server
the has in the section "dayboy indicator" particularly explains, broadcast the
most Server the MIME-type together with the data. Unfortunately
able many a Server the correct MIME-type not ascertain and give so
false informations over that out. Thereby is an transfer file
under circumstance only conserved, instead of displayed, how it he heard.

Continuous animation
Kontrolliert the kind and wise man, in the the Hintegrund-status-indicator
(or. The transfer-animation) collaborates. In the default is these
indicator for every Bit on Netzwerkaktivitt a step wider animates.
When you the continuous animation adjust, runs the animation with
more unchangeable speed, so an transfer occurs.

Program's

in the SE-version not available.

Proxy

Proxy-Server
an Proxy-Server is an more specific Server, the between yours computer
and the Internet switched become can. Place an union to a
Server to produce, the perhaps in end the world lies, takes the
browser only contact to the Proxy-Server on. This has a buffer with
the in hufigsten angefragten pages, so that angefragtes document possible.
Already here ready lies. If not, fetches the Proxy-Server the document
for you. On this wise man is the commerce in the Internet decreased and the
Surfen accelerated.

Many a time is the Proxy-Server the sole possibility, with you Provider
in contact to tread. With it acted he also as Firewall.

One Proxy adjust
at first choose you the journal, for the you a Proxy adjust
will. In the Auswahlfeld are 4 possibilities defaulted:

.   HTTP

.   FTP

.   Gopher

.   Telnet

then give you the address of Proxy-Servers in the Proxy-field an.
Places you sure, that your data an these both forms has:

    http://proxy.foo.Bare

    http://proxy.foo.Bare:8080

(where name and Portnummer natural differ permit!)

when the address not with "http://" begins, sets AWeb this from he from
in front of it.

Confined Proxy-use
some Proxys able with form not bypass, when this METHOD=POST
conclude, or an Zugriffberechtigung necessitate. If you problems
with such pages have, try you it with these small box. It worrys
for it, that AWeb such pages direct administered, without use of Proxy.

Those Sites without Proxy use
if this list names from Sites contains (also known as "locations"
or "Hostnamen"), become documents or images from these Sites never over
the Proxy conducted.

Employ you the new-button, around a entry to add and the
"discharge"-button, around a ausgewhlten entry to remove. With a
Doppelklick on a entry able you him on place and place alter.

Buffer

AWeb deposits a buffer on your hard drive on, around objects to computer store.
You able here an Pufferverzeichnis give, which for it unused
become shall. You should for this an new directory lay against or an
empty use. Use you the directory exclusive of for the
AWeb-buffer.

Give you the full pathnames on or click you on the field, around with
help of Requesters choose to able.

Consider you, that changes settings not forthwith to the effect come,
when you she use or computer store. Around a widersprchlichen buffer to
avoid, used AWeb the old Pufferverzeichnis wider, till you the
progam leave. First then become the new settings active and
stand at next run to the zur ~ - at one's disposal.

Reviewing Pufferkopie
places you here the Kontrollmodus an. Once per meeting is the
commended attitude.

Fast answer
activate you this field, when you an swiftly answer of buffer
wish.

Buffer size
in these both field able you the maximum buffer size in the
main memory and on the hard drive fix.

All bulks should in kB specified become.

At least free leave
those two field lay the minimum on memory fast (chip and fasts), the
AWeb free leave shall. Shall few memory free is, as here
specified is, distant AWeb object from the memory. Normally
remained this objects then on your hard drive get.

When you here more memory give, as generally enabled become can
(to the example more as 0 kB fasts on a Amiga without fasts-memory),
distant AWeb to and to all documents and images from the memory.
Be you so careful, which values you here adjust.

The data happen in kB.

Those Sites not puffern
when this list names from Sites contains (also known as "locations"
or "Hostnamen"), become documents and images from these Sites not in the
buffer saved.

Employ you the new-button, around a new entry to add, and the
"discharge"-button, around the angewhlten entry to remove. With a
Doppelklick on a entry able she him on place and place change.

Private life

Referer during the Browsen suppress
reproofs become beneath the browsen constrained.

Spamblock at News posten activate
Spammer (i.e. Versender from unerwnschten for-sale E-mail)
rummage often all article in Newgroups to E-mail-addresses. When you
this small box choose, hold the from you verschickten article
changed Adressangaben, around you against such practices to protect.

E-mail address as FTP Anonymous-keyword
is this function activates, is at eventuation in a FTP Server the
enamel address as keyword used.

Use Cookies
here able you adjust, till to which degree you itself against an
violation your privacy through Cookies protect will.

RFC 2109

the new standard (RFC 2109) for Cookies offers a disabuse cover the
privacy as the original Cookie-mechanism from Netscape. Worse luck
are not all Server compatible to these standard. When you these
small box not mark, is the new mechanism parked (for the
fall, that you problems with a particular Site have).

Mail/News

here become all enamel-Datein registered, with it you with AWeb also enamel
ship and receive able. Further info for this find you in
the documentation to AWeb on the OS3.9-CD-ROM.

9.3.7.5. The menu

project menu

the project menu offers functions around window to open or to close,
documents to load or to computer store or AWeb to leave.

Window close  Schliet the actual window.

Open URL          over an Dateiauswahl can an HTML-file direct
                   charged become.

Open WWW          it opens the Dateiauswahl and carries already "http://www"
                   an.

News open        it starts the internal Newsreader.

Open local...     Over an Dateiauswahl can an HTML-file direct
                   charged become.

Seek-engines...  It opens the seek-window.

Quelltext          shows the HTML-Quellcode the actual side with the
show...          voreingestellten Anzeigeprogramm on.

Quelltext          it opens the Dateiauswahl around the Quelltext the actual
computer store...       HTML-file to store.

Over...            It opens an window with Versionsinformationen. When the
                   actual window over a ARexx-Port disposes, is
                   the name here displayed.

Ikonifizieren      Schliet all window and minimized AWeb on an
                   Icon on the Workbench. While AWeb ikonifiziert
                   is, runs the Netzwerkbertragung wider. Around the
                   window again to open, click you double on the
                   AWeb-Icon or consider you an other Icon
                   on the from AWeb.

End               Beendet AWeb; before become all current
                   Netzwerkoperationen broken off.

Control menu

the control menu offers the possibility AWebs other functions out of
those of buffer to control.

Images now load initiated the shop the images of actual
                   document. This menu item has two sub-dots:

                   all images
                   initiated all till now not geladenen images of
                   actual document to load.

                   Only Maps
                   initiated the shop all till now not geladenen,
                   anklickenbaren Maps of actual document.

Mood music   Spielt the mood music the augenblicklichen side
play back          off. Play the Sound already, is he broken off and
                   actuates renewed from in the front.

Frames             put all Frames the actual window on your
disfavour       predefined bigness back.

Network-status... It opens the Netzwerkstatus window, or brings it in
                   the foreground, in case it already open is.

Reload           current document
                   it loads the actual document renewed. The side is from
                   the buffer excluded and renewed receive.

                   Images of actual Dok.
                   It loads the images of actual document renewed. The
                   images become renewed from your Originalquelle
                   receive.

Shop abbort    Unterbricht the shop the side in these window.
                   Loading processes in the background able herewith not
                   broken off become, use you for this the
                   "breaking off"-button in the Netzwerkstatus window.

Proxy deactivate  when you Proxies configured have able you these
                   menu item use around the use the Proxies on- and
                   interrupt.

JavaScript         Stoppt all current JavaScript-program's.
Abbort

buffer menu

the buffer menu stands functions to the control of buffer, as soon as to the
store and discharge the gepufferten Autorisierungen ready.

Buffer-            it opens the buffer-advertisement.
Viewer...

From the memory   Lscht a the following points from the
remove          Speicherpuffer. When the objects also in the
                   Festplattenpuffer are, so remain she there!

                   No displayed images
                   all images, which not on the (the) actually,
                   visible Seite(n) uses become, become from the
                   memory excluded.

                   All images
                   all images inclusive the on the (the) actual
                   angezeigten Seite(n) become on the memory excluded.

                   No displayed documents
                   all documents the to the time not uncover are, become
                   from the memory excluded.

From Disk clean   Lscht a the following points from the
                   Festplattenpuffer, as soon as from the Speicherpuffer, when
                   the objects not in use are. You become first
                   to one confirmation asked.

                   All images
                   Lscht all images from the Festplattenpuffer.

                   All documents
                   Lscht all documents from the Festplattenpuffer.

                   Buffer clean
                   Lscht all images and documents from the
                   Festplattenpuffer.

Buffer             Synchronisiert the Pufferregistrierung with the files,
clean up...       The real on the hard drive found become.
                   In addition become all files in the buffer, the not to
                   AWebs cache belong to  excluded.

Zugriffsberechtig. Saves the actual Autorisierungsdetails.
Computer store

authorizations     it opens the Autorisierungsnderungs window.
Edit...

Navigational-menu

the navigational-menu offers functions around in window-course the documents
navigieren to able.

Back             it goes an document in the window-course back. The
                   window-course contains all pages, the ahead in
                   these window looked become.

Forward           it goes an document in the window-course forwards.

Home-document      it loads the side, the you as "Home" adjusted have.

Window-course    it opens the window-course.

Hotlist menu

the Hotlist menu offers functions to the use your Hotlist or around an
foreign Hotlist einzulesen.

The Hotlist        Fgt the actual document on the end your Hotlist
add         on.

Hotlist show   shows the Hotlist in the actual Anzeige window on.

Hotlist show...  It opens the Hotlist-window.

Hotlist-manager... It opens the window the Hotlist-accociation.

Settings menu

the settings menu contains functions around AWeb to configure.

Images load       here is fixed, if images forthwith or only on
                   wish charged become shall. He contains three
                   sub-dots: "all images", "only Maps" and "From", the
                   selbsterklrend are.

Hintergrundbilder  tuning the background color and the
                   Hintergrundbildeinstellungen.

Mood music   tuning the mood music.

Browser-           Lt the BrowserPreferences appear.
einstellungen...

Program's-         Lt the ProgrammPreferences appear.
instellungen...

GUI-               Lt the GUI-Preferences appear.
Settings...

Network-          Lt the network-Preferences appear.
einstellungen...

Actually           Speichert all actual settings.
Settings
computer store

settings      Speichert all actual settings as another
computer store as...   Config. A Dateiauswahl appear and you
                   able an directory determine in which the
                   settings conserved become shall.
                   Normally computer store you the settings in a
                   directory in ENVARC:Aweb3 off, so that you the
                   Verzeichnisnamen at boot from AWeb as CONFIG
                   Tooltype or argument use able.

Settings      it loads an alternate config.
Load...

Fix as        Speichert the actual positions all
alternate bigness  Einstell window of first Browser windows, as soon as
                   of it bigness off.

Help menu

the help menu offers you more Hilfsinformationen.

Documentation      shows the AWeb guide in these window.

AWeb-homepage      it loads the AWeb-homepage.

The Popup-menu

from a Link, a image or a Frame outgoing gives it
defferent things, the you with it do want. You want perhaps
a Link follow, is document download, him in a new window
open, an image load or clean, etc. The Popup- menu gives you the
possibility between all these things on simple and clear
wise man choose to able.

Furthermore able you the choices in the Popup- menu self on
your needs optimal acclimatize.

Around the Popup-menu to open, hold you either the <Alt>- or the
<Ctrl>-key pressed and click on a Link or an image; or you
click with the middle Maustaste on a Link or an image (in case
you an Dreitastenmaus possession). The menu opens he and presents
you an list from choices hanging from type of object,
on which you clicked have. Then click you on the from you
desired function.

Around the Popup-menu for a Frame to open, click you likewise
anywhere in the Frame, outside of Links or of Vordergrundbildes.
When you on a Link or an image click is the Popup- menu for
this object displayed.

You able AWeb also so configure, that the Popup-menu also at
Drkken the right Maustaste or when you the <Shift>-key pressed
hold appear.

Around the menu to close without an function to select, press you the
raked Maustaste or click you anywhere outside of Popup-menu.

9.3.7.6. Image-functions

when you the Popup menu for an image open have, can it
voreingestellt following functions hold, in as much she applicable are:

image load         it loads the image, exactly how when you on the image clicked
                   have.

Image remove     Lscht the image from the memory.

Image new load     it loads the image renewed.

Image computer store     Speichert the image, exactly how when you with <Shift> on
                   the image pressed have.

Image downloaden    it loads the image down.

Image show        those function shows the image with the externe indicator
                   for these Bildtyp on.

9.3.7.7. Left-hand-functions

when you the Popup-menu for a Link open, can it voreingestellt
following functions hold, in as much she applicable are:

Link open        it opens the Link in the resemble window, exactly how when you
                   on the Link clicked have.

Left-hand in the            it loads the document in the background, shows it but in
background open not window on. You able herewith an document in
                   the cache to the spteren observation download.

Left-hand computer store     Speichert the file, on the the Link shows on
                   hard drive.

Left-hand downloaden    it loads the file, on the the Link shows.

Left-hand the Hotlist   Fgt a entry in the Hotlist with the URL of
attach            Links an.

When you the Popup-menu for an image, which simultaneous an Link is
open, contains it both sentences on functions.

9.3.7.8. Fram-functions

when you the Popup-menu for a Frame open, can it voreingestellt
following functions hold:

contents new load  it loads the Frame renewed an.

Quelltext          Speichert the Quelltext the file, the straight in the Frame
computer store          displayed is.

Quelltext show   it starts the HTML-indicator around the Quelltext the file,
                   the straight in the Frame displayed is, to announce.

Einzein show     shows only the actual content of Frames in a
                   separate Browser window on.

In the contents    it starts the Suchfunktion for the side, the straight in the
seek             Frame displayed is.

Info        it opens the Informations window for the side, the
                   straight in the Frame displayed is.

When the document in the Frame an Hintergrundbild has, contains the Popup-
menu functions for the Hintergrundbild and for the Frame.

9.3.8. Frequently problems

Unterstehend some the hufigeren problems the aufreten could and her
solutions.

.   AWeb want not commence. It say it can xxx.image or xxx.gadget
    not find.

    Probable have you OS3.9 not complete installed. Those
    special Edition runs only on AmigaOS 3.9 or superior.

.   AWeb falls at shop of GIF picture off.

    The frequently used ZGif Datatype version 39.16 has a error.
    Assure you he version 39.18 or better of, or an other
    GIF Datatype to use.

.   AWeb shows not the entire side on. Others browser show the side
    correct on.

    Probable contains the side some error in the HTML code. Single sculler the
    hufigen error is the use from false comment as an
    Unterteilungslinie in the HTML Quelltext. In permissively HTML mode
    attempted AWeb the comment so to interpret, how it from author
    wahscheinlich meant was. In strikten HTML mode become great part
    the side based on the defective syntax possibly auskommentiert.

    Attempts you the HTML mode on tolerant or compatible umzustellen.

.   AWeb is dreadful slow when it on a own screen runs.
    The has what with the use of chip Memorys and the DMA bandwidth
    to do. Apparent is this problem worse, when you a
    quickened calculator have.

    The solution is either an inferior to or an higher
    speed ("baudrate") by your union to the modem to
    use. Activating you by your modem speed (when you an
    14k4 modem, commence you by 14k4 Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit). Then
    raise you the speed till you an dramatically retardation
    ascertain. Then go you again a step back with the
    Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit.

    Around the Verbindungsgeschwindigkeit to you modem to alter, can it
    needed is settings in you Anwahlprogramm, TCP Stack
    and/or you SANA driver to alter. The seeing you please in the
    accordingly instructions.

.   Backdrops in AWeb are dreadful slow, much slower as by
    Amiga Browsern the opposition.

    That can on a ineptly picture Datatype lie. Benefit you the
    24-bit picture Datatype only on CyberGraphics umbrellas; on original
    Amiga umbrellas is this Datatype very slow. Use you the
    original picture.Datatype your Workbench diskette.

.   The Farbrequester the Programmeinstellungen: The palette side generated
    Streffekte on a CyberGraphics screen.

    That lies on the palettes-orientated redesigned of AmigaOS. This
    redesigned serves good on Amiga Chipsatz umbrellas, is but not
    bestonders suitable for Grafikkarten.

.   With me runs AWeb on a lower-case screen and the save-,
    Benutzen-, test-, Abbrechenknpfe in the Einstellungs windown are
    outside of screen.

    Activating you the Reaction Preference-progam, go you on the "Misc"
    side and set you "clearance" down.

.   When I the ffentlichen AWeb-screen clos, during an
    Besucher window open is, falls the calculator often off when it he
    around a Cybergraphics screen acts.

    That is an error in CyberGraphics V2.15 and inferior to. The equality
    passes also on other CyberGraphics umbrellas.

.   When the Fenstger not activates is and one in the Scrollbalken-
    area klickt (outside of Scrollbalkens) animates he sure the
    Rollbalken, but the  windowinhalt is not mitgescrollt.

    That is an error in intuition. The equality passes many a time also
    in MultiView.

.   I use MagicMenu and off and on hangs he the system on when I
    an menu open.

    With MagicMenu version 2.15 or superior ought this problem
    disappeared is.

.   I use not MagicMenu but my system hangs, when I on the
    great part the Auswahlknpfe in the settings- menu klicke.

    Assure you he, that you the version of "chooser.gadget"
    use, the these archive appositional is.

    In addition are some Mauspointer- animation- Commodities known
    for it the ground for this Hnger to is.

9.3.9. Use of Low-week Amiga

you able a Low-week-Amiga with little memory use, when you him
right configure. Here are some recommendations:

.   Clasps you all unntigen window, applications, etc.

.   Letting you AWeb on the voreingestellten ffentlichen screen run.

.   Places you images load on "from", and load you only images, the you
    real see want.

.   Switching you the mood music off.

.   Fit you not any own GUI buttons but of use
    you the voreingestellten.

.   Places you the maximum number from contemporaneously
    Netzwerkverbindungen and Festplattenzugriffen on 1. Each union
    used up valuable memory.

.   Places you the temporren path on an directory on your
    hard drive and not on the RAM.

.   Places you yours buffer how follows an:

    Speicherpuffergre: rough 50% of free storeroom when AWeb
    runs.
    Festplattenpuffergre: so much you want.
    Minimum free chip-RAM: about 50kB.
    Minimum free fasts-RAM: 0kB.

    Use you no JavaScript.

When you this recommendations note is Websurfen with little memory
possible. Be you but thereupon prepared, that complex pages (with
great charts) under circumstance not in the memory fit and that's why
cropped or illegibly become.

Natural is Websurfen with insufficient memory essential comfortablier.
You able AWeb on a own screen with more colors and a
greater Speicherpuffer, etc. Run leave.

9.4. AmigaMail

AmigaMail is an small and simple E-mail-progam. It bolstered
PO3-Mailboxen and the SMTP-journal. It contains also an small
address directory and is hence for each insufficient, the only off and to an E-
mail broadcast or receive is.

When you the AmigaMail commence appear the above mapped
Haupt window. When you the progam the first time use, must you
first still an couple settings carry out. Choose you there to in the menu the
point "settings". The Preferences has four sub-dots "user",
"SMTP Server", "POP Server" and "POP settings", the you all
cover must and the in the following described become.

9.4.0.1. The Preferences "user"

here give you your personal data an.

Correct name:    yours fore- and surnames (e.g. "Fred Mustermann").

Enamel-address:     your enamel-address (e.g. "xyz@xyz.Netto").

Organization:      the compay name or the organization.

Antwortadresse:    here must only then an E-mail-address registered
                   become, when the answer-mail on an other address,
                   as the under "enamel-address" specified address
                   clever become shall.

Signature-     when you not every time under your enamel your
datei:             signature or. Label (e.g. "With kinds
                   salute, Fred Mustermann") write will, dan
                   create you an file with these lines and give
                   here the path to these file on. Those file is then
                   on every one mail from you appended.

9.4.0.2. The Preferences "SMTP Server"

with SMTP-Server carry you the SMTP-Server of provider an, from the you
your enamel-address get have. The is in our fall
"the hague-partner.com", by the German Telekom would it
"mailto.Traumatically-online.DE". The Port-issue stands standard on "25" and you
should these worth also not change.

If AmigaMail an Log-file lead shall, the all activities of
program logged, click you "Aktiviere Log" on. With "Log file"
must you the path and the names for the file fix.

9.4.0.3. The Preferences "POP Server"

with POP-Server must you the POP-Server yours Mailkonto-provider
fill out.

Around an new mail-account (Account) adjust, must you on
"add" press. Then become the points on the right activates.

POP Host           that is the address yours POP-Servers. In our fall
                   is the "the hague-partner.com", by the Telekom
                   "pop.Traumatically-online.DE".

POP Benutzername   give you here the names an, under the the Mailkonto
                   by you Provider (e.g. German Telekom) arranged
                   became.

POP keyword        give you here the keyword an, the for the mail-account
                   be taken became.

Spool-file        in these file become the ausgehenden and ankommenden
                   mail this POP-accounts saved. Give you a
                   path and a names on, under the this file created
                   become shall.

On Server clean those function brings about, that mail, as soon as you she from
                   mail-account collected have, excluded become. When you
                   the mail not clean, could you account anytime
                   full is and then able you no wider mail more
                   get.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
when you no Spool-file give is AmigaMail no mailing from Server
load!

Make you on each fall a crotchet by "Auf Server clean", because
AmigaMail lades otherwise every time the old files again an, so that you
she then mehrach in you p.O. box have. Worse luck has AmigaMail no
function, how "Dublikate avoid".

9.4.0.4. The Preferences "POP settings"

The POP-settings are optionally, i.e. You need here not
unconditional some to register or to alter.

Periodically check  when your enamel always regular, e.g. Every half
                   hour fetched become shall (only when you online are),
                   toggle you the point "periodically check" and on and
                   stand by "period (minutes)" the time an.

Action by newer   when you over new mail informed become will
mail               choose you here an action from:

                   advertisement spark:
                   the Workbench-onscreen glares on.
                   Tone playing:
                   the adjusted tone (by sound the tone choose) is
                   played.

Start command    it starts an file, when you an mail get.

The handling

the Haup window from AmigaMail has practical two-part. In upper area
is the accociation the Postfcher and the bottom area is for the
Erstellen and Bearbeiten from mail reserved.

The list "p.O. box" contains all Postfcher or. Enamel-accounts, the you
arranged have. The following Postfcher are already installed:

Inbox              the incoming mail. In this subject become all ankommenden
                   enamel charged.

Outbox             the outgoing mail. In this subject become all from you
                   verschickten enamel saved.

Trash              the garbage can. Here are the from you gelschten mail
                   saved.

Drafts             The drafts. Here stand the mail, the you
                   written, but still not sent have.

Saved              the Mailspeicher. The mail, the you special secured
                   have.

Spool

right of it is the list the mail of p.O. box, the you in the right
"p.O. box"-list activates have (e.g. "Inbox").

In bottom area of Haupt windows become mail personated, edited
and created. The upper area is for the representation of Kopfbereichs
the mail ("headers"), on the right of it is displayed from which element the
mail consists. The great field under shows the text the mail on.

Above of mail-field is the Icon-ledge with the one AmigaMail
ctrl can. The pictograms mean from left to on the right:

 1. New mail compose
 2. Mail clean
 3. Mail computer store
 4. Mail answer
 5. Previous mail
 6. Next mail
 7. Choosen file computer store
 8. Mailing call
 9. Printing
10. Address table

after mail to the discharge and save enabled become must you in the
menu "message index new create" choose, with it you the
settings appropriate einsortiert become.

9.4.0.5. New mail compose

when you in the Haupt window from AmigaMail on the first Icon clicked
have, opens he the window to the input one mail.

The pictograms have the following Beudeutung:

 1. Mail forthwith ship
 2. Mail as pattern in Drafts computer store
 3. Mail later ship
 4. File on mail hitch on (is on the right displayed)
 5. Mail clean
 6. Clipboard
 7. Copying
 8. Integrate

under it are the important input fields:

on                 the recipient the mail. With the right button able
                   you the addresses from the address directory choose.

Cc                 "CC" (eng. Carboxylic Copy) means "carbon copy". On
                   this address is an copy the mail clever.

Re            give you here the subject the mail on. The re
                   (eng. "Subject" is very weighty, because he enables
                   it the recipient, the mail quick to recognize and
                   whose concern assign.

Textfeld           in Textfeld give you the text your mail an.

9.5. Tips & alternatives

Auf the Amiga gives it an wide gefcherte Softwarepalette round around the
Internet. To the existing Internet-program in the AmigaOS 3.9 gives it also
still some alternatives. Those will we you here short put forward.

Browser

Auf the Browsermarkt gives it next to AWeb still two another browser - to the
a is IBrowse (www.hisoft.co.uk) to name and to the other Voyager
(v3.vapor.com), the also in the NetConnect-parcel (www.The hague-partner.com)
hold is.

E-mail Clients

the well in hufigsten used E-mail-progam for the Amiga is YAM (Yet
Another Mailer = still an other mail-progam). He owns monumental
more functions as AmigaMAIL. In the actual version 2.2 offers he
voluminous filter-possibilities, multiuser-support, PGP (Pretty
Good Privacy)-integration, an convenient address directory, voluminous
Suchfunktion and still lot more. Informations and the Download-archives
gives it under www.yam.ch. Then these Mailer an Freeware-product is and
through its efficiency convinced, is he simple to
recommend.

Meanwhile gives it still an other Freeware-mail-progam: Stargate.
This resembles AmigaMAIL, is really quick and around some more extensive.
Informations and the Download-archive find you under
www.toysoft-dev.com.

The sole for-sale agent in these area is Microdot-II. He
resembles in the range of function YAM, is but around some faster. You find
him likewise on the NetConnect-CD. Informations find you under
www.vapor.com or. www.The hague-partner.com.

FTP-Clients

with FTP-program become files from Server charged or on this
transfer. In these area gives it some agent, the all very
competent are. The in hufigsten benutzten are well AmFTP and
AmiTradeCenter. AmFTP is an shareware-product and is from Vapor
(www.vapor.com) dislodged and is likewise on the NetConnect-CD
hold. AmiTradeCenter is Freeware and you able it under
www.amitradecenter.Netto load.

Chat (IRC)

the IRC-Chat is an the blichsten forms of "together talking" in the
Internet. Here are again the two Verbreitesten to name. The would
once Black IRC and to the other the standard author AmIRC. Black IRC is
meanwhile as Freeware under www.Innovative-web.Netto get.

AmIRC is shareware and under www.vapor.com obtainable. He offers more
functions, as Black IRC and is also regular gepfelgt and is also
in the NetConnect-parcel hold.

ICQ

ICQ is also an kind Chat. You have an address directory in that you all
wished Chat-partner fill out or. Seek able, the likewise ICQ
possession. When one these persons Online is and ICQ restarted has is
he with the status "Online" highlighted. You able then with him chatten.
Further information informations find you under http://www.multimania.com/aubioane/
stricq/stricq.html.

9.5.1. Interesting Amiga-pages in the Internet

news round around the Amiga find you under:

www.amiga-news.DE
www.amiga.org
www.realdreams.cz/amiga
www.ann.lu

Amiga games Nachrichtenseiten:

www.amigaflame.co.uk
www.amigafire.com
www.amigaextreme.com

Amiga journals:

www.amigaplus.DE
www.amigamagazin.DE
www.amigafuture.DE
www.amigactive.com

Online warehouses:

www.amigatimes.DE
www.playamiga.DE
www.risc-amiga.DE

OS3.9 Support:

www.amiga.com
www.The hague-partner.com

others Links:

www.amiga-club.DE
aminet.Netto

10. ARexx

10.1. Introduction - what is ARexx?

ARexx, the Amiga-companion to the IBM-programming language REXX< enables
you the indivuelle formation your work environment.

It characterizes he particularly good for script, over the uses controlled
become. So able you e.g. With a ARexx-script, an
Bildverarbeitungsprogramm there to arrange for, an whole directory full with
images how from Geisterhand controlled in a landslide with a particular
effect to edit. You able by it also more ARexx-capable
uses collaborate leave, around so for instance the edited
images automatic by enamel to broadcast.

It gives many uses, the ARexx lean, however what is with the
operating system self? Till AmigaOS 3.1 gave it only the possibility over the
addressing from AmigaDOS-ordering and externe Funktionsbibliotheken on
the operating system access. Neither the Workbench still other program's
offered a ARexx-Port on. The is with AmigaOS 3.9 - and also already
AmigaOS 3.5 - otherwise become.

Those ARexx-introduction serves not as substitute for the ARexx-guide, the
with AmigaOS 3.1 extradited is and he as HTML- and PDF-file also
on the OS3.9-CDROM is. This describes already very good the
separate comands from ARexx and is so an god book of reference. Place
of it stands she there, how you the new ARexx-fhigen components from
AmigaOS 3.9 head on able.

Around you the first steps with ARexx to relieve, first of all but first
once some bases. Many examples shall you over that out
help, to hear, how you the new Funtionen use able.

10.2. First steps

before you with ARexx work able, must you first of all once
guarantee, that it also restarted became. Undoing you there to an Shell and
write you:

    9.Ram Disk:> rx 'say "hello world!"'
    hello world!

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
then one already alike in the first example both kinds from apostrophe needs,
step also alike here the problem on: where are because the simple
apostrophe on the keyboard. Solution: <Alt>+<>

as answer ought how in the example show "hello world!" Appear.

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
it appears by you instead of the giving out the error message "Host-surroundings
not found" or "Host environment not found" then is ARexx on
you Amiga at boot not restarted. That able you however light
recover, in that you in the Shell the comand "RexxMast" enter.

Normally is ARexx, or. RexxMast at first invocation automatic
restarted, when this not already at boot of AMIGA follow is. This
comand says you if ARexx already runs:

    9.Ram Disk:> rexxmast
    ARexx version 1.15
    copyright  1987 passer William page. Hawes
    all Rights Reserved
    REXX server already taetig

when the last zeile "REXX server already taetig" (REXX-Server already
active) not displayed is, then was ARexx still not charged, became
but now restarted.

Around however not every time these comand enter to must, able you him
also in her "User-Startup" write. Undoing you there to with a editor,
to the example the "EditPad", the file "page:User-Startup" and be appropriate you you
following row in addition:

    RexxMast >NIL:

the "NILE:" brings about by it only, that the giving out of imperative "in Nirvana"
clever is, with it he not by every boot an Shell-window
opens.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
Who no change on the "User-Startup" carry out want, can RexxMast
also from the "system"-drawer to WBStartup copy. Then is ARexx
likewise at activating of AMIGA activates.

Now able you ARexx already from one Shell from use, in that you
single comands direct accomplish leave. The has but able you self an
ARexx-script create?

An ARexx-script is an simple text file, the ARexx-comands contains.
With it she from ARexx eindutig recognized become can, must she with a ARexx-
comment commence. Here now an simple example the at the same time also a
ARexx-comand the new Workbench applies:

    /* open RAM:-script */
    ADDRESS Workbench
    WINDOW '"ram Disk:" OPEN

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
the name "ram Disk" must twice in quotation mark comprised
become. The Befehlsparameter become twice evaluated: once from ARexx
and once from the Workbench: The simple quotation mark ' say
ARexx, that it he around a text acts, the Arexx not evaluate shall,
so no variable name and no formula. The twofold
quotation mark " say the Workbench, that it he around an individual
argument and not around two unconnectedly parameter acts.

Typing you this small script easy to the example with "EditPad" an and
computer store you it under the names "open-RAM.rexx".

Zun checking able you it easy in the RAM-Disk computer store. When you it
keep want, computer store you it in best to "REXX:". Those assignment
shows on the standard-directory for ARexx-script. Ordinary is this
the directory "SYS:page". Both directories have the advantage,
standard in the Kommandosuchpfad hold to is: So must you only the
names of ARexx-script, not but the PFad to the directory give.

You able the script now easy through with the comand "RX" commence:

    rx open-RAM.rexx

what makes the script? The is easy: it opens an Workbench-window with
the content the "RAM-Disk".

The is so, as if you with the mouse on the symbol the RAM-Disk double
clicked have.

The first comand in the script "ADDRESS Workbench" is by it an pure ARexx-
comand, the ARexx inform, in future unavowedly comands on the Workbench
shed. ARexx speaks with it the ARexx-Port the Workbench on. Every
ARexxfhige progam has a ARexx-Port, on the ARexx-comands broadcast and
from the ARexx answers get can.

The second comand "WINDOW" is an comand, the the Workbench to the zur ~ - at one's disposal
stands. With the option "OPEN" know he the Workbench on, the Workbench-
window for the angegebenen path to open.

The ability ARexx-comands with help of Shell-imperative "RX" direct from
the Shell from to carry out has many implementation possible applications. So
able you quick simple calculations accomplish:

    9.Ram Disk:> rx 'SAY (10-5)/2'
    2.5

that is by it wide stronger as the Shell-comand "Eval", then
ARexx quantitative with Dezimalanteil even so bolstered how point- before stroke-
calculation and braces.

You able he the calculating even still more easily make, in that you a
Shell-aliases define:

    9.Ram Disk: alias calc rx 'SAY []'

you have he so a new Shell-comand created, the she how follows
use able:

    9.Ram Disk: calc 2*3
    6

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
with it the aliases everlasting for Shell-window necessary able you him in the
file "page:Shell-Startup" fill out.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when it you disturbs, the comand "RX" on the side give to must, able you for
the file "open-RAM.rexx" also the "page"-Dateiattribut set, the an
file as AmigaDOS- or ARexx-script marked. To the example so:

    protect RAM:open-RAM.rexx +s

after this able you the script easy through the details its name
commence:

    open-RAM.rexx

10.3. The remote controlled Workbench

The new Workbench from AmigaOS 3.9 offers an entire row very
interessanter ARexx-comands. You able with it fast all actions
telecontrol, the actions telecontrol, the you otherwise with mouse and
keyboard accomplish become. Many script from Drittanbietern zutzen this
possibilities already extensive. The seeing you he there to calm times in the
"Contributions"-directory on the AmigaOS 3.9-CD-ROM around.

The ARexx-interface the Workbench is in five Hauptbereiche
subdivided:

.   The "GETATTR"-comand allows it, different informations from the
    Workbench to get, so e.g. The version number the Workbench, but
    also the position of Workbench-Fenters or the type of
    Icon.

.   The "WINDOW"-comand opens, shuts and changed Workbench-window.
    Certain window-actions how e.g. The Minimieren/Maximieren or the
    in the foreground bring are additional on over own comands
    available.

.   The "ICONS"-comand manipulated pictograms: you able on- or
    given up or deferred become and lot more.

.   The "MENU"-comand allows it, every Workbench-menu to carry out, as if
    the user it choosen would have, and new entries in the resource-
    menu to add.

.   Additional gives it still comands for appointed actions the Workbench
    how e.g. The Umbenennen from files or the call of Workbench-
    Informations windows as soon as some special comands to the blocking the
    surface, so an ARexx-script collaborates, or to the translating
    one error number in plain text.

For each these fields flgen now an or two examples with
explanation. For an complete description the separate ARexx-comands and
all hers parameter read you please the Workbench-AREXX-hint on the
OS3.9-CD-ROM.

10.3.1. I know what

the "GETATTR"-comand accepted following parameter:

    GETATTR [OBJECT] <Objektname> [NAME <Name of Eintrags>] [STEM
    <Name the root-Variable>] [VAR <Variablenname>]

the hears he first of all once reasonable complicated on, is but in the principle
whole easy: "GETATTR" assign the Workbench on, to a particular object
the "Workbench-file" informations to catch up and this in one
ARexx-variable to computer store.

So gives it to the example the Hauptobjekt "APPLICATION", with the one
attributes the Workbench self inquire can. The can to the example so
look:

    /* Workbench-informations */

    ADDRESS Workbench
    OPTIONS RESULTS

    /* name of ARexx-ports the Workbench */

    GETATTR APPLICATION.AREXX
    SAY "The Workbench leaves he over the ARexx-Port >"RESULT"<
    speak to."

    /* name of Workbench-Icon-font */

    GETATTR APPLICATION.FONT.ICON.NAME VAR ikonschrift
    SAY "The Workbench uses the font >"ikonschrift"< for"
    SAY "Icon-names."

When you this script in one Shell commence, get you following
informations:

    9.Ram Disk:> rx Workbench-informations.rexx
    The Workbench leaves he over the ARexx-Port >WORKBENCH< speak to.
    The Workbench uses the font >Helvetica.font< for
    Icon-names.

What is new on these script in the opposition to the first example? The second
comand "OPTIONS RESULTS" know ARexx on, from other program result
contrary to to take. Without these comand could you from the Workbench no
informations inquire.

The both "GETATTR"-comands ask defferent attributes the
Workbench self off. With the first is the result easy in the
standard-ARexx-variable for result, in the variable "RESULT"
conserved. With the second is expressly specified, in which variable
the result saved become shall.

Now still an some fortgeschritteneres example, the alike an list
all geffneten Workbench-window spends and some info over the
first Icon in the "ROOT"-window - the Haupt window the Workbench -
announce. The must by it not unconditional the Icon whole above left is!

    /* still-more-information */

    /* shows the names all geffneten Workbench-window */
    ADDRESS Workbench
    OPTIONS RESULTS
    GETATTR WINDOWS STEM  windowliste
    DO ignoring = 0 UP  windowliste.count-1
        SAY  windowliste.Ignoring
    WEEK
    SAY

    /* question name, position, bigness and type of first Icon
    in the Workbench-Haupt window off
    */

    GETATTR WINDOW.ICONS.ALL.0 NAME root STEM ikon

    SAY "name:       " ikon.name
    SAY "position: X:" ikon.Links "Y:" ikon.top
    SAY "bigness:      " ikon.width "x" icon.height
    SAY "type:        " ikon.Letter

this script shows now also the uses benzin gas the root-variables from
ARexx. The are variables, the more under-variables in he combine
able. In these example is the window-list prompted and in the
root-variable " windowliste" discarded. " windowliste.count" contains by it
the number the window, " windowliste.0" the names of first window,
" windowliste.1" the names of second window etc. Those  windownamen
gives the "DO"-bow  from.

The second part of Skriptes asks the attributes of first
pictograms in the Haupt window the Workbench off. After all how leave he this
informations now of use? Some examples find you in the next
cut off.

10.3.2. Many beautiful window

Workbench-window able over the comand "WINDOWS" changed become:

    WINDOW [WINDOWS] < windowname> .. < windowname> [OPEN|CLOSE]
    [SNAPSHOT] [ACTIVATE] [MIN|MAX] [FRONT|BACK] [CYCLE PREVIOUS|NEXT]

one gives so the or the names the window on, on the the Workbench
an action accomplish shall. The name of window yields he by it from
the path to the directory, of it content it represent. Typical names
are ever to the architecture theirs intrasystem "ram Disk:", "Workbench:utilities"
or "Work:texts".

Next to the "WINDOW"-comand gives it also still special comands, the only
an appointed action on an window use. So activates the
"ACTIVATEWINDOW" an particular window, the "CHANGEWINDOW" changes the
bigness of window etc. The Befehlsreferenz contains another such
comands.

Now an couple examples - an easier 3-Zeiler could to the example the
"ram Disk"-window close:

    /* inferring-RAM.rexx */
    ADDRESS Workbench
    WINDOW WINDOWS '"ram Disk:"' CLOSE

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
you able such lower-case comands also direct in the Shell try out,
without an script to write:

    rx "ADDRESS Workbench WINDOW '""RAM:""' CLOSE"

several of these comand leave he with semicolons from each other separate.

Of angze comand must by it in quotation mark comprised become,
with it "RX" not attempted instead of of it an script-file to commence. With it
the double-length Anfhrungzeichen by "RAM:" still as such recognized become,
must you double typed become (am AmigaOS 3.1 ARexx-guide,
chapter 3.1.3).

Together "GETATTR" leave he all on the Workbench geffneten window
close. To this liet one first the list all geffneten window an and
shuts every:

    /* inferring-all.rexx */

    ADDRESS Workbench
    OPTIONS RESULTS

    GETATTR WINDOWS STEM  windowliste

    DO ignoring = 0 UP fenterliste.count-1
        IF  windowliste.i~=="root" THEN DO
            WINDOW WINDOWS '"' windowliste.Ignoring'"' CLOSE
        WEEK
    WEEK

with it is "root" - the Haupt window the Workbench not closed. The
gives in the rule only an error message, then the Workbench based on still
current program's not cancels become can.

Place all window to schlien, able you also all window
minimalisieren or in the foreground bring. Substitution you there to in the
row with the "WINDOW"-comand the action "CLOSE" through an the following
actions:

OPEN               it opens window
CLOSE              Schliet window
SNAPSHOT           Fixiert window
ACTIVATE           Aktiviert window
R.P.M.                Verkleinert window to hers smallest bigness
A MAXIMUM OF                Vergrert window on her maximum bigness
FRONT              places window in the foreground
BACK               places window in the background

er "WINDOW"-comand and the comands, the special window-operations
accomplish, accepting as argument also "TAETIG" for the straight active
window. That is in the example here not uses, then when ARexx-
script from a Shell-window from commence, no Workbench-window active
is. The parameter makes sense, when ARexx-script direct over the
Workbench restarted become. See there to the section "menu and
Tastenkombinationen" wider behind in these chapter.

10.3.3. Pictograms move he

the "ICON"-comand offers an entire row on possibilities:

    ICON [WINDOW] < windowname> <Piktogramm-Name> ... <Piktogramm-Name>
    [OPEN] [MAKEVISIBLE] [SELECT] [UNSELECT] [GROWN <Pixel>] [DOWN <Pixel>]
    [LINKS <Pixel] [RIGHT <Pixel>] [X <Horizontale Position>]
    [Y <Vertikale position] [ACTIVATE UP|DOWN|LEFT|RIGHT]
    [CYCLE PREVIOUS|NEXT] [MOVE IN|OUT]

with the "ICON"-comand leave he pictograms choose or abwhlen,
postpone, open and lot another more. With following script goes to the
example the "ram Disk"-Icon on the peregrination:

    /* shift-RAM.rexx */

    ADDRESS Workbench

    DO i=1 UP 50
        ICON WINDOW root '"ram Disk"' RIGHT 4
    WEEK

    DO i=1 UP 50
        ICON WINDOW root '"ram Disk"' DOWN 4
    WEEK

    DO i=1 UP 50
        ICON WINDOW root '"ram Disk"' LINKS 4
    WEEK

    DO i=1 UP 50
        ICON WINDOW root '"ram Disk"' GROWN 4
    WEEK

what first of all only how an nattily game looks, can together with the
"GETATTR" to a script advanced become, the in a
directory all pictograms beautiful arrange and fixated on.

With the "ICON"-comand able you also pictograms choose. The following
script chooses every Icon in the Workbench-Haupt window from, of it names
the letters "a" contains, and chooses all other off:

    /* Whlerisch.rexx */

    ADDRESS Workbench
    OPTIONS RESULTS
    GETATTR WINDOW.ICONS.ALL.COUNT NAME root VAR anzahl

    DO i=0 UP anzahl-1
        GETATTR WINDOW.ICONS.ALL.Ignoring NAME root STEM ikon
        IF POS("a", ikon.name)>0 THEN DO
            ICON WINDOW root '"'ikon.name'"' SELECT
        WEEK
        ELSE DO
            ICON WINDOW root '"'ikon.name'"' UNSELECT
        WEEK
    WEEK

to this requested it from the Workbench first of all the number the in the Haupt window
dargestellten pictograms and leaves he then from every Icon the
names give. When these an kleingeschriebenes "a" contains, assign the
script the Workbench on, it to select, when not, it abzuwhlen.

This script could to one nattily Suchfunktion erweitet become. In
a great window with many pictograms, the he not in the visible
Dereicht of window find, could it with the parameter "MAKEVISIBLE"
an particular Icon in the visible roll and it then also
dial, with it it through his Glheffekt alike in eye falls.

10.3.4. Menu and Tastenkombinationen

The ARexx-interface offers the possibility, existing menu-Punke the
Workbench to dial. Moreover able ARexx-script the "resource"-menu
own menu items add. Both is over the "MENU"-comand done.

With the call from menu items is the Workbench-window, from of it menu
an function invoked become shall, quote. That works he then to the
example thereupon from, in which directory the menu option "window/new
drawer lay against" an drawer create is.

Moreover gives one on, which menu option carried out become shall. The
Workbench knows following menu items:

10.3.4.1. "Workbench"-menu

WORKBENCH.BACKDROP Workbench as background?

WORKBENCH.EXECUTE  comand accomplish

WORKBENCH.         Image new base on
REDRAWALL

WORKBENCH.         All update
UPDATEALL

WORKBENCH.         Last report show
LASTMESSAGE

WORKBENCH.ABOUT    version, copyright...

WORKBENCH.QUIT     Workbench leave...

10.3.4.2. "Window"-menu

WINDOW.NEWDRAWER   new drawer lay against

WINDOW.OPENPARENT  bergeordnete drawer open

WINDOW.CLOSE       clasps

WINDOW.UPDATE      Aktualisieren

WINDOW.            All choose
SELECTCONTENTS

WINDOW.            Indentations clean
CLEARSELECTION

WINDOW.CLEANUPBY.  Content clean up to: chinks
COLUMN

WINDOW.CLEANUPBY.                         Names
NAME

WINDOW.CLEANUPBY.                         Date
DATE

WINDOW.CLEANUPBY.                         Bigness
SIZE

WINDOW.CLEANUPBY.                         Type
LETTER

WINDOW.RESIZETOFIT bigness acclimatize

WINDOW.SNAPSHOT.   Fix of window
WINDOW

WINDOW.SNAPSHOT.   Fix: all
ALL

WINDOW.SHOW.       Content anzaeigen: only files with pictograms
ONLYICONS

WINDOW.SHOW.       All files
ALLFILES

WINDOW.VIEWBY.ICON content gold list: as pictograms

WINDOW.VIEWBY.NAME                   to names

WINDOW.VIEWBY.DATE                   to date

WINDOW.VIEWBY.SIZE                   to bigness

WINDOW.VIEWBY.LETTER                   to type

10.3.4.3. "Icon"-menu

ICONS.OPEN         undoing

ICONS.COPY         copying

ICONS.RENAME       Umbenennen...

ICONS.INFO  informations show...

ICONS.SNAPSHOT     Fixieren

ICONS.UNSNAPSHOT   position deallocate

ICONS.LEAVEOUT     Auslagern

ICONS.PUTAWAY      Zurcklegen

ICONS.DELETE       discharge

ICONS.FORMATDISK   Disk reformat

ICONS.EMPTYTRASH   paperbasket deplete

10.3.4.4. "Resource"-menu

TOOLS.RESETWB      Workbench disfavour

with the dialing of these menu items makes the Workbench exactly the, what
she make would, when you self these MEnpunkt with the mouse or the
appositely key combination picked have. So opens
"WINDOW.NEWDRAWER" the dialog-window to the Erstellen one new drawer:
the user is requested a names for the drawer quote and
first then, when he establishes, is the drawer generated. The "NEWDRAWER"-
comand created however an drawer complete without the Zutun of
user's (am the next chapter "what otherwise still possible is").

The following example shows exactly, how it goes. It opens the in these
hint so ingratiate "ram Disk"-window and offers the user on, there
an drawer to create:

    /* Erzuge-drawer.rexx */
    ADDRESS Workbench
    WINDOW WINDOWS '"ram Disk"' OPEN
    MENU WINDOW '"ram Disk:"' INVOKE WINDOW.NEWDRAWER

a other possibility would it, with the "ICON"-comand appointed
pictograms to select and she with the menu item "ICONS.COPY" to
duplicate.

Still interessanter is however the possibility, own entries in the
"resource"-menu the Workbench to add. With it give you the
menu item a internal names and the mark, how he in the
"Hilfmittel"-menu appear shall. Moreover is weighty quote, what
pass shall, when the menu item choosen is. In addition leaves he still
an Tastenkrzel give. The following script complies the resource-menu
some interssante functions in addition:

    /* resource.rexx */

    ADDRESS Workbench

    MENU ADD NAME schlissen TITLE '"all window close"'
    CMD 'Schliee-all.rexx'

    MENU ADD NAME oeffneRAM TITLE '"open RAM Disk"'
    SHORTCUT '"."' CMD '"WINDOW """RAM Disk:""" OPEN'

    SAY "squeeze you the enter key, around the menu"
    SAY "again to remove"
    PULL
    MENU REMOVE NAME close
    MENU REMOVE NAME oeffneRAM

the script shows two possibilities, an menu-function to define: one
can either an external script invoice or direct ARexx-comands in
a Einzeiler accomplish leave. With letzterem is it weighty on the
quotation mark to respect, with it all flips. For the second menu-
entry is an key defined. Those necessary always together with the for
menu usual right Amigataste.

Pushes one the enter key in the Shell, from the from the script restarted
became, become the menu again distant. With it is only necessary, the
Workbench the internal names the menu-entries communicate.

Next to menu leave he also Tastenkombinationen define. That goes with
the "KEYBOARD"-comand. The following script complies the Workbench an
keyboard-control for the "ram Disk"-Icon in addition. You able it,
so the Tastenkombinationen active are, with the arrow on the
Ziffernblock the keyboard ctrl:

    /* keyboard.rexx */

    ADDRESS Workbench

    KEYBOARD ADD NAME left KEY '"NUMPAD 4"' CMD '"ICON WINDOW root
    """ram Disk""" LINKS 20"'

    KEYBOARD ADD NAME high KEY '"NUMPAD 8"' CMD '"ICON WINDOW root
    """ram Disk""" GROWN 20"'

    KEYBOARD ADD NAME on the right KEY '"NUMPAD 6"' CMD '"ICON WINDOW root
    """ram Disk""" RIGHT 20"'

    KEYBOARD ADD NAME down KEY '"NUMPAD 2"' CMD '"ICON WINDOW root
    """ram Disk""" DOWN 20"'
    SAY "you able the 'RAM-Disk'-Icon"
    SAY "now with the Zehnertasten ctrl, after"
    SAY "you the Workbench-window activates have."
    SAY "squeeze you the enter key, around the"
    SAY "Tastenkombinationen again to remove."
    PULL

    KEYBOARD REMOVE NAME left
    KEYBOARD REMOVE NAME high
    KEYBOARD REMOVE NAME on the right
    KEYBOARD REMOVE NAME down

each key combination has analagous to the menu a internal names. Also
the auszufhrende action is on the same wise man fixed how at
"MENU"-comand. The definition the to use key is however
more flexible as by the menu-definitions. You able in the principle every
possible key combination give. Some possibilities:

shift key (eng. "Qualifier"):

CTRL               <Ctrl>-key

SHIFT              any <Shift-Taste>

LSHIFT             <Linke Shift>-key

RSHIFT             <Rechte Shift>-key

OLD                any <Alt>-key

LALT               <Linke Alt>-key

RALT               <Rechte Alt>-key

NUMPAD             key on the Ziffernblock

keyname:

TAB                <Tabulator>-key

F1-F10             <F>-buttons

BACKSPACE          <Rcktaste>

DEL                <DEL>-key

HELP               <HELP>-key

CR             <Eingabetaste>

NUMPAD ENTER       <ENTER>-key

eighth you thereupon no Tastenkombinationen to use, the from the
Workbench already used become!

10.3.5. What otherwise still possible is

Zu the already beschriebenen ordering gives it still another. So gives it
some comands around Workbench-actions immediate to carry out. "DELETE"
extinguishes files, "NEWDRAWER" deposits new directories on and "RENAME"
renames files around. With it is the user, otherwise as at ARexx-
gesteuerten invocation the accordingly menu items the Workbench, not
asked.

    /* action-in the-RAM.rexx */

    ADDRESS Workbench

    WINDOW '"ram Disk:"' OPEN

    SAY "I erstelle now an new drawer."
    SAY "further with enter key."
    PULL

    NEWDRAWER '"ram Disk:new"'

    SAY "Nun designate I the drawer around."
    SAY "further with enter key."
    PULL

    RENAME '"ram Disk:new" "Umbenannt"'

    SAY "And now is she excluded ;-)"
    SAY "further with enter key."
    PULL

    DELETE '"ram Disk:Umbenannt"'

with all three ordering is weighty, that you a absolute path give.
The comands work independent from Workbench-window and know hence
otherwise not, on which drive and in which directory she active
become shall. Simple only "new" as Schubladenname would have here not
handed.

Two another comand are not unimportant: The till now unnatural
example-script prevented not, that the user the Workbench
used, during she self also active are. So would have an user
easy the in the previous example created drawer clean able,
before the script wider runs. The "RENAME"- and the "DELETE"-comand would be
then in emptiness ran.

From the fact is it weighty, in critically momenta the surface from the
Workbench for the user to barricade and thereafter again to unlock. The
following example clarified this:

    /* spaced.rexx */

    ADDRESS Workbench

    LOCKGUI

    SAY "The surface the Workbench is now barricided."
    SAY "further with enter key."
    PULL

    /* here able critically actions run off */

    UNLOCKGUI

The bisherigen examples handled possibly emerging error
not. With a error would be you easy with one ARexx-error message
broken off. ARexx and Workbench bid however also helpfully functions,
around on error gezeilt to react:

    /* error.rexx */

    ADDRESS Workbench
    OPTIONS RESULTS
    SIGNAL ON ERROR

    WINDOW '"ram Disk:gibtsnicht"' OPEN

    QUITS

    error:

        SAY "the comand gave as acknowledgement an" RC "back."
        SAY "the means, its execution is aborted."
        SAY "over the WORKBENCH.LASTERROR-variable leaves he more
        hear."
        SAY "the last occured error has the issue:"
        WORKBENCH.LASTERROR
        FAULT WORKBENCH.LASTERROR
        SAY "the means:" RESULT

    CR

this script activates with "SIGNAL ON ERROR" the ARexx-error handling.
With a error is ARexx not more easy with one error message
abbort, but the routine "error:" invoice.

After this attempted the ARexx-script an Workbench-window for an not
existing directory to open. Then the not goes, miscarries the
"WINDOW"-comand and gives an "10" as acknowledgement. Then the "WINDOW"-error
with a Rckgabewert irregular "0" a error reports, bounces ARexx now
in the error processing routine.

Those shows first of all the in the "RC"-variable (cr code) store
Rckgabewert of "WINDOW"-imperative on. After this is the
"WORKBENCH.LASTERROR"-variable to instalment pulled, the the AmigaDOS-
error number of last mistake contains. Those can by means of of
Workbench-imperative "FAULT" finally in plain text translated become. The
script gives so the following from:

    the comand gave as acknowledgement an 10 back.

    The means, its execution is aborted.

    Over the WORKBENCH.LASTERROR-variable leaves he more hear.

    The last occured error has the issue: 205

    the means: object not found

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
the plain text to AmigaDOS-Fehlernummern able you also in one Shell over
the "Fault"-comand get:

    12> fault 205
    Fault 205: object not found

10.4. Commodities active

also some Commodities leave he with ARexx head on. So offers the
Commodity "Exchange" different comands to the Erfragen from informations
or the encryption from Commodity-surfaces:

ACTIVATE           Aktiviert the specified Commodity
<Commodity-Name>

DEACTIVATE         Deaktiviert the angebebene Commodity
<Commodity-Name>

GETINFO            it asks informations to the Commodity off. Put following
<Commodity-Name>   variables:

                   CXINFO.1    Commodity-name
                   CXINFO.2    Commodity-title
                   CXINFO.3    Commodity-description
                   CXINFO.4    TRUE = surface existing
                               FALSE = no surface existing

HASGUI             has the Commodity an surface?
<Commodity-Name>

HIDE               Versteckt the surface from "Exchange"

HIDEGUI            Versteckt the surface of angegebenen Commodities
<Commodity-Name>

ICONIFY            Ikonifiziert "Exchange"

ISACTIVE           Ist the Commodity straight active?
<Commodity-Name>

ISRUNNING          Luft the Commodity?
<Commodity-Name>

WILE               gives an list the straight current Commodities
<Trennzeichen>     back. Isolated entries become through the specified
                   separator apart.

QUIT               Beendet "Exchange"

SHOWGUI            shows the surface of angegebenen Commodity on.
<Commodity-Name>

UNHIDE             shows the surface from "Exchange" again on.

UNICONIFY          Deikonifiziert "Exchange"

VERSION            gives the version number from Exchange back.

Fasts all comands give in the variable "RC" back, if you invocation issue
had or not. All comands become on the ARexx-Port "Exchange.1"
geschrickt - the issue is appended, in case, how by Exchange not
possible, more copies of Commodities run off. To this an small
example:

    /* Commodity.rexx */

    ADDRESS Exchange.1
    OPTIONS RESULTS

    GETINFO "Exchange"

    SAY "informations to Exchange:"
    SAY "name:         " CXINFO.1
    SAY "title:        " CXINFO.2
    SAY "description: " CXINFO.3
    SAY "surface?   " CXINFO.4
    
    WILE ","

    SAY
    SAY "Nun follows an through commas unconnectedly list the"
    SAY "straight current Commodities:"
    
    SAY RESULT
    
    SAY
    SAY "Luft Blanker straight?"
    SAY "further with enter key."
    PULL
    ISRUNNING "Blanker"
    IF RESULT=0 THEN DO
        SAY "refusal, start Blanker."
        ADDRESS COMMAND "Run SYS:tools/Commodities/Blanker"
    WEEK
    ELSE DO
        SAY "yes. Runs already."
    WEEK
    
    SAY
    SAY "open and clos surface from Blanker several time."
    SAY "Am end is the surface closed."
    SAY "further with enter key."
    PULL
    
    DO i=1 UP 5
        SHOWGUI "Blanker"
        HIDEGUI "Blanker"
    WEEK
    
    SAY
    SAY "Aktiviere the Blanker."
    SAY "further with enter key"
    PULL
    
    ADDRESS Blanker.1 BRIGHT
    
    SAY
    SAY "Beende the Blanker."
    SAY "further with enter key"
    PULL
    
    ADDRESS Blanker.1 QUIT

the script shows first some informations on and tests then if the
"Blanker" runs. When not, is the Blanker over AmigaDOS as comand
restarted. Then is the surface of "Blanker" several time open and
closed. Then speaks the script the Blanker direct on, the
analagous to Exchange over the ARexx-Port "Blanker.1"-comands entgegennimmt.
It apportions the Blanker with, the onscreen to shining. Zuguterletzt is
cheerful, in that the Blanker dependent is, he self to discontinue.

Here to the digest still the comands other Commodities. All Commodities
with ReAction-surface react atleast on the comands "HIDE",
"UNHIDE", "ICONIFY" and "UNICONIFY", the analagous how by "Exchange"
work. Over it out bid you still following comands:

Blanker

ANIMATION          ON = it switches the encouraged graphic at Blanken an
                   or
                   OFF = from

BRIGHT              Verdunkelt the onscreen

CYCLECOLORS        ON = it switches the Farbverlauf an or
                   OFF = from

SECONDS            put the number the seconds, before the onscreen
                   darkened become shall.

UNBLANK            Beendet the Bildschirmblanken

FKey

ADDKEY <Taste>     Fgt an key combination in addition, (comands am the
<Befehl>           list back).
<Argumente>

KEYINFO <Taste>    Erfragt informations to one particular
                   key layout. Those become in the variable FKEYINFO
                   saved:

                   FKEYINFO.1 = name the key
                   FKEYINFO.2 = Welcher comand shall carried out become?
                   (Am list back)
                   FKEYINFO.3 = Befehlsargumente

with it gives it following comands: (by "ADDKEY" and "KEYINFO" please always
the Befehlsnummer give):

1 = leaves window
2 = leaves screens
3 = Maximiere window
4 = Minimiere window

The following three comands need arguments:

5 = Fge text in addition
6 = start an progam
7 = start an ARexx-script

11. WarpOS - full achievement for the PowerPC

11.1. Introduction

WarpOS is an Multitasting-kernel for PowerPc-processors (PPC), whereby PPC-
applications on the Amiga used become able. WarpOS can one in about
compare with "exec", the operating system-kernel of AmigaOS. So is it
not unsurprisingly, that many functions of WarpOS an reflection
more corresponding "exec"-functions represent.

With WarpOS is also always the "PowerPC.library" bound. WarpOS is in
the "PowerPC.library" integrated and is restarted, as soon as the
"PowerPC.library" to the first time open is. The PowerPC.library is
an miscellanous "Shared-Library" (Mixed Binary), which as well as functions
for the 68K-, how also for the PPC-processor contains.

--- WEIGHTY --------------------------------------------------------------
as soon as WarpOS revved became, can the original-ppc.library from
Phase5/DCE not more used become. Ought WarpUP- and PowerUP-program's
simultaneous carried out become, is for this an PowerUP-Emulation
required 9der PPCLibEmu from Frank will is he in the WarpOS-archive).

It follows an digest the most weighty Features from WarpOS:

.   Executable on all at present verfgbaren PPC-cards (accomodations on
    coming PPC-cards are planned)

.   High-speed-Kumminikations-interface between 68K and
    PPC-processor.

.   Complete natives Multitasting

.   Speicherverwaltung, semaphores, wiles/Tageverwaltung, signaling,
    Message-accociation complete in PPC-code

.   Fakulativer memory protection: task get the possibility,
    geschtzten memory to allozieren

.   Virtual signals, i.e. Signals are "CPU-shared" and become always to the
    correct CPU redirected

.   Inter-CPU-Message-system: it able Message (newscast) between the
    cpu sent become

.   Optimal use the PPC-MMU and of PPC-cache

.   MMU/Exeption-Handling-Support for applications

.   Stromsparfunktion, when no PPC-applications run

.   PowerPC-Enforcer (cover the first footboy)

.   Fuller fall-dialog, which developer optimal by the
    debugging bolstered

.   Integrated Debugging-system to the simplification the debugging

.   More specific Support for hochoptimierte software, how games and demos

.   Complete Entwicklerunterlagen to the optimal development from PPC-
    software

WarpUP and the most add on program become in assembler developed, the
greatest part of it with the StormPowerASM (PPC-assembler).

11.2. WarpOS install

around WarpOS on you calculator to install, must you the WarpOS-
drawer open. Choose you the language, in the WarpOS installed become
shall. The installing finds in four they strode instead of:

11.2.1. Which PPC-Board have you!

Choose you here the obversely Board from. If you no PPC-card in
you calculator have, choose you "no PPC-Board existing".

11.2.2. WShell-compatible

when these menu item not activates is, can it in the relation with
program how the WShell to great problems come. Worse luck able then
but on the other hand the Tool-program's "stackppc" and "changemmu" not more
used become. Those Tool-program's find he in the tools-directory,
which he in the WarpOS-drawer is.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
this menu item should you on each fall activate! In the WarpOS-
Prefs is an deactivation anytime possible!

11.2.3. Selection the Grafikkarte

Whlen you here the Grafikkarte from, the you installed have.

11.2.4. Would like she WarpOS V16 or the PowerUP-compatibles V7 fit

Whlen you here the WarpOS-versions from.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
take you to possibility always the recent WarpOS-version; in these
fall WarpOS V16! Only by problems should you the old version V7
try out.

After you WwarpOS prosperous installed have, should you the calculator
new boot, around all WarpOS-Systemdateien in you system einzubinden.

11.3. The WarpOS-Prefs

in AmigaOS 3.9 is the WarpOS-Preferences new added. He is in five
fields divided:

1.  General (brasshat)

2.  PowerUP

3.  Video-address

4.  Debugging

5.  Logdateien (Logfiles)

The settings have following effect:

general (brasshat)

memory protection     is these menu item activates, become the
(Memory            Speicherschutzmglichkeiten from WarpOS active.
Protection)        when Speicherplatzprobleme emerge, can it help,
                   the memory protection to deactivate.

No PPC (No PPC)  this menu item must by all no-PPC-intersystem
                   activates is. With this work all demos,
                   which also without PPC run, but the "PowerPC.library"
                   to open try. Is these menu item by no-
                   PPC-intersystem deactivated, falls the Library in the
                   Initalisierung off.

Early Term         is these menu item not activates, can it in the
                   relation with program how the WShell to great
                   problems come, in these fall ought these
                   menu item activates become. Worse luck able then but the
                   Tool-program's "stackppc" and "changemmu" not more
                   used become. Those Tool-program's find he in the
                   "tools"-directory, which in the "WarpOS"-drawer
                   to find is.

PowerUP

the terminator-    this Preferences represent the terminator-
Blttersymbol      mechanism, which required is, around WarpOS on
                   intersystem hochzufahren, aufdenen he the "ppc.library"
                   not deactivate leaves. This is e.g. By the
                   BlizzardPPC the fall! Those variable ought always on
                   the worth 2 steady become!

Premonitions          Ist these menu item activates, is the appearance the
hide (Hide   premonitions virhindert, which in the relation with the
Warning)           "ppc.library" appear and the operator report,
                   that WarpOS not so without further run up can.

No Patch (No     is these menu item activates, is not attempted,
patch)             by use of terminator no.2 the functions the
                   "ppc.library" on "Dummy"-functions umzubiegen. This
                   menu item ought never activates become, out of when
                   expressly specified. This menu item became in
                   first line implemented, around PowerUP-emulations possible
                   to make, with it also PowerUP-software under WarpOS
                   carried out become can.

Videro-address

Verlangt an hexadecimal Adreangabe. When the "PowerPC.library" not
in the position is the graphic-RAM to localize, learns from it the address
these - ambient (Environment)-variable. When now an expansion-
Adreraum found is, which the specified address contains, so
is attempted, these Adreraum in the BEGGED-register to adopt, around an
better Zugriffsgeschwindigkeit to reach.

Those variable can also on 0 steady become, when no problems with the
Grafikadresse emerge.

--- WEIGHTY --------------------------------------------------------------
user from CyberVisionPPC- and BVisionPPC-Grafikkarten must on each
fall this variable on "e0000000" put. Additional must the variable
"powerpc/force" on "1" steady become.

Debugging

no Debugging (No this Preferences contains 3 Debugg-levels. Shall always
Debugging)         on "No Debugging" adjusted remained, out of anybody
                   interested he for the goins-on at bootstrapping!

Segment-information       Ist these menu item activates, become by crashes
(segment info)     segment-informations (Hunk/Offset-couples) displayed.
                   This Feature requested, that the "SegTrakker" and
                   "Sushi" installed are!

Fibbed-files (Logfiles)

fall (crash):   Verlangt an filename. When an PPC-fall
                   happens, prescribes WarpOS the Absturzdaten in this
                   file.

Warning (Alert):   Verlangt an filename. When an PPC-fall
                   happens, prescribes WarpOS the system-messages, e.g.
                   By korrupten semaphores, in this file.

Save          Speichert the settings.

Use           varied settings become only for the current
                   meeting used.

Breaking off          Schliet the WarpOS-Preferences-window. Varied
                   settings go lost!

11.4. First help by difficulties with WarpOS

The "powerpc.library" can not open become. The WarpUp-demos
work at all  not and give possibly error reports the kind from
'Kann powerpc.library not open'.

The "powerpc.library V8" or greater can only then open become, when
the "ppc.library" from phase 5 not runs.The is, when one WarpOS
use want, must one for it look after, that no PowerPC-program's run,
which the "ppc.library" need.

It is by it to note, that self program's, which discretely in the
background run, the "ppc.library" use able, under other gives
it versions the Grafikkarten-software 'CyberGraphX' which the
"ppc.library" use. In these fall must an CyberGraphX-version without
"ppc.library"-support installed become, when WarpOS uses
become shall.

The "powerpc.library" can not open become, although never an
application restarted became, which the "ppc.library" opens.

In these fall can it is, that the "ppc.library" already at boot
open became, she lies then in a nichtflchtigen memory (ROM).

The best solution would, an upgrade of nichtflchtigen storeroom to
make, which the "ppc.library" not more at boot opens. The
Funktionstchtigkeit the hardware and software could problem-free
guaranteed become. Only then can he WarpOS also complete conformist
in system bind.

When no upgrade to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stands, which above effect brings about,
ought the Environment-variable 'powerpc/terminator' on a worth
irregular naught steady become. Then attempted WarpOS, the "ppc.library" and
cognates resources from hand to remove. If the problems make
ought, begs H&P around notice, with it one another terminators
develop can, which the problems debug.

Every demo, which the "powerpc.library" opens, falls off.

On intersystem without PPC-card must unconditional the menu item "No PPC" activates
become. After this run all demos, which also without PPC come out (but the
"powerpc.library" to open try).

Always when an demo several time in the Shell restarted became, gives it
crashes.

The problem step for instance with the WShell on, the signals free unlocks,
which she self not alloziert has. The problem can with the
activation from "Early Term" remedied become. When these menu item
activates is, should the problems removed is. Undoubtedly able then
no globalen settings in the Shell more made become, which the
PPC concern, i.e. The tools 'stackppc' and 'changemmu' work
not more. The PPC-Stapelspreicher (Stack) must then by means of the 'stack'-
comand steady become (the PPC-Stack is about double so great how the 68K-
Stack).

The Voxelspace-demo runs ever since the version 1.6 not more with Picasso96.

Since version 1.6 bolstered the Voxelspace-demo the OS3.0-Multibuffering
for Picasso96 around an still better Bildqualitt to reach. Therefore
requested the demo now an newly version from Picasso96.

With the activating the demos comes an Screenmode-Preferences, which but empty
is.

This effect step on, when with one CyberGFX-Emulation for AGA
operated is. In these fall must the demos with the parameter 'PAL'
restarted become.

It tread by different program 'ramlib'-crashes on.

This effect step by new BlizzardPPC-cards (or. With new
FlashROM-versions) on, because the AmigaOS so patched is, that it without
the "ppc.library" not more correct work can. Therefore must
an new kind the termination for WarpOS developed become. The
terminator-Blttersymbol ought on the worth 2 steady become.

The WarpUp-demos run EXTREME slow.

Then is presumable the Debugging-variable steady. The variable in the
Debugging-Blttersymbol must unconditional on naught steady become.

Some applications, which the Grafikkarten-memory direct
speak to, fall off.

With use from CyberVisionPPC/BVisionPPC-Grafikkarten must WarpOS the
Adreraum the Grafikkarte intimated become. To this must following
variables steady become:

    powerpc/force 1
    powerpc/gfxaddr $e0000000

the Installer from WarpUP V4 and V5 ought this config automatic
carry out.

12. Picasso the Treibersystem for Amiga Grafikkarten

Picasso is an modularly and stremfreundliche Softwareumgebung for
different Amiga-Grafikkarten. The most weighty targets, the by the
programming pursues become, are compatibility, transparency and
safeness. Around gglichst compatible to remained, become only the
notwendigsten functions of AmigaOS changed.

A another particularity from Picasso is the ability, more
Grafikkarten (also differently model) simultaneous to operated.

12.1. Supplementary Grafikkarten

the following Grafikkarten become till now unterstntzt:

CyberVision 64, CyberVision 64/3D, domino, Merlin, oMniBus, PicassoII,
PicassoII+, PicassoIV, Piccolo, Piccolo SD64, pixel 64, Retina BLT Z3,
Spectrum 24/28

CyberVision 64:

The CyberVision 64 is an reasonable modern card with a S3 triplet 64
and ZorroIII bus inferface. This driver became from Michael Teske
created, the also the NetBSD-driver for the CyberVision developed has.

CyberVision 64/3D:

The CyberVision 64/#d is an modern card with a S3 ViRGE and
Autosensing-ZorroII/III-bus-inferface.

Domino:

The domino is an old Grafikkarte, the from one ZorroII-card and
one ISA VGA Grafikkarte consists, where the VGA-card piggy-back mounted
is.

Merlin:

The Merline is an ZorroII/III Grafikkarte, the a Tseng ET4000W32
Grafikkontroller and a 24bit Echtfarben-DAC owns. Especially beautiful
on the Merlin are you tricolour Hardwaresprite and an really faster
Blitter with three sources.

oMniBus:

the oMniBus VGA system consists from one ZorroII-ISA-Brckenkarte and one
ISA-VGA Grafikkarte.

PicassoII/II+:

The PicassoII from Village Tronic is an weitverbreite ZorroII
Grafikkarte with the Cirrus GD5426 or GD5428 Grafikkontroller. The
PicassoII is an redesigning the PicassoII.

PicassoIV:

The PicassoIV from Village Tronic is an ZorroII/III Grafikkarte with the
modern and expeditious PCI-CHip Cirrus GD5446. The PicassoIV offers
standmig a eingebuaten FlickerFixer.

Piccolo:

The Piccolo is an ZorroII/III Grafikkarte and uses also the Cirrus
GD5426. Particularity: the developer the Piccolo (and also the Spectrum)
have the connections the red- and the Blaukomponente of RGB-signal
exchanged, with it the cards a RGB-mode lean, because the Cirrus
normally only the BGR-Echtfarbenmodus bolstered.

Piccolo SD64:

The Piccolo SD64 used the Cirrus GD5434, a expeditious 64 bit
Grafikprozessor. The card is like how the Piccolo and the Spectrum
built up. The driver became from Niels Knoop developed.

Pixel 64:

The pixel 64 is how the Piccolo SD64 an Grafikkarte on basis of
Cirrus GD5434. You is for the Ateobus A1200 Erweiterungssystem from Ateo
Concepts thought.

RetinaBLT Z3:

The RetinaBLT Z3 has a leistungsfhigen Grafikprozessor with a very
leistungsfhigen Blitter. On the other hand heard standard no
automatischer Monitorumschalter how by other cards to the Lieferumfgang,
what the handling some aggravates.

Spectrum 24/28:

The GVP Spectrum relates he in the great and entire how the Piccolo.

12.2. No espoused Grafikkarten:

Retina Z2:

The Retina Z2 is an very old card, the her memory only segmented
einbindet, what with the liniearen Speicherkonzept from Picasso96 collided.
Therefore is she possible. Never bolstered become because the there to lead would,
that the other cards through the higher administration effort beutlich
lansamer become.

12.3. What software collaborates with Picasso together?

Basic every software, the conformist collaborates and not direct
under bypass of operating system direct on the Grafikspeicher zugreift.

Direct support in form of Treibermoduls exist for:

.   Kind Department Professional (Bildbearbeitungsprogramm from ASDG),

.   Photogenics (time- and Bildbearbeitungsprogramm from Almathera),

.   ShapeShifter (Apple macintosh emulator from Christian farmer),

.   XiPaint (24bit Malprogramm from Thomas thorn and Herbert Beilschmidt).

Further module find he in development.

Furthermore work with Picasso96 nearly all program's, the
CyberGraphX, to the example CyberWindow (obtainable in the AmiNet), or the
"vilintuisup.library" the old PicassoII-software, to the example whose
Bilderanzeiger ShowGIF, lean.

12.4. The installing

to the installing from Picasso96 use you easy the
Installationsskript on the OS3.9 CD. With it is the software automatic
installed.

--- ATTENTION --------------------------------------------------------------
before you Picasso96 install must you your old Graffikarten-
software deactivate or deinstallieren. It is technical regrettably not
possible, different Grafikkarten-Softwaresysteme simultaneous to
use.

Please read you in the documentation your old Grafikkarten-software
to, how this exactly goes.

When you the old Picasso-software use, then go you so before:

Enterfnen you the file Picasso from the directory "Devs:monitor" or.
From the drawer WBStartup.

Enternen you the file "village.library" from the directory expansion
yours Startvolumes or. From the directory "libs:".

When you CyberGraphX use, then go you so before:

Enterfernen you from the directory "Devs:monitor" or. From the drawer
WBStartup all CyberGraphX-Kartentreiber.

Please remove you from the directory "libs:" the files
"cybergraphics.library", "cyberlayers.library" and
"cyberintuition.library".

Picasso96-driver for another program's

The Picasso96-driver for program's how AdPro, Photogenics etc. Find you
in the Picasso96-formatters, the the Installationsskript installed. There find
you to every driver an decently Installationsskript.

12.5. The use from Picasso

after you Picasso96 installed and the calculator new restarted have,
choose you easy in the Prefs-progam "ScreenMode" a the new
Bildschirmmodi from. The Workbench and other program's able now your
Grafikkarte use.

If you unerwarteterweise problems have, Picasso96 in firm to
take, use you please "CheckBoards", around to find, if your card
also right recognized and linked became. If this the fall is and
you despite that no Picasso96-DisplayIDs to the zur ~ - at one's disposal stand, should
you try, with Picasso96Mode an berstehendes Setting on your card to
bind, in that you by Picasso96Mode in the menu "Attach Setting up" your card
dial, then conserve and a restart actuate.

12.6. The tees the Monitordateien

The monitor-files, the in Devs:monitor installed become, and the
names the Grafikkarten carry (e.g. PicassoIV) hold tees
(ToolTypes) with those the accordingly cards configured become
able:

BoardType: necessary; deposits the KartenTyp fast, e.g. PicassoIV. Is from
Installationsskript already right registered.

IgnoreMask: optionally; with it is by many functions, the the Blitter
the Grafikkarte use, the BitPlane-mask ignored, whereby the
operations on many cards strong accelerated become able.
Undoubtedly is the then not more complete correct, whereby under circumstance
boring Grafikfehler occur able! With it an PicassoII with Picasso96
just the same quick scrollt how with the old Picasso-software, must you
these ToolType on YES put! Voreingestellt is 'No'.

BorderBlank: optionally; sets frame (without: how in the system).

BigSprite: optionally; when she "Yes" give, is the Mauszeiger double
so great personated.

SettingsFile: optionally; voreingestellt is "DEVS:Picasso96Settings".

SoftSprite: optionally; "Yes:": no hardware-Mauszeiger take (in case
generally possible).

DisplayChain: optionally "No": Amiga-signal is not durchgeschleift, the
Grafikkarte reaches always the signal the card wider (useful in intersystem
with several monitors and Grafikkarten).

12.7. PicassoMode: the Bildschirmmodus-Preferences

Picasso96Mode is used, around consisting of dissolutions otherwise adjust
and around new to produce. It is exclusive of over the graphical
user interface to attend.

In the upper lefthand corner of window see you four control elements, the
you the following permit:

.   New objects produce (this able Settings, dissolutions or modes
    is, ever after on which the three wiles you the new object fall
    leave),

.   An object between computer store and it thereafter again there rauziehen,

.   An copy of object to produce and

.   An object to clean.

From every one the three wiles able you an element the list reach [for], around it
then to the above beschreibenen control element to consider. To this must the
element with the mouse choosen and then with one zgigen horizontal
movement by more pressed left Maustaste from the list pulled out
become.

Before you a mode on your Grafikkarte represent able, must you
still the actual attitude dieserr card by means of of menu allocate.

Around an resolution or a mode to activate, must si it easy
double with the mouse in the list anklicken. An further Doppelklick
deactivated the resolution or the mode again. Only the active
dissolutions and modes are for the remainder of intrasystem uncover.

Around a mode to change, must you the button "Edit" press, then
is an Testbild show. With the arrow able you now:

.   The fashion postpone (when you only the arrow press),

.   The frame increase/decrease (when you additional still an
    <Alt>-key press) or together with the <Ctrl>-key the
    Videofrequenz change or

.   The bigness of mode change (when you additional still an the SHIFT
    buttons press); this is frequently necessary is.

The button "test" opens an Geometrietestbild with the difference, that
here nothing changed become can.

To the conclusion ought the config saved and thereafter an "Reset"
caused become, with it the adjustments active become.

12.8. Help by problems

with problems stand you your question in the Picasso-Mailingliste. The
Mailingliste is on english over "ninemoons.com" led. With interest
please an EMail on majordomo@ninemoons.com with the keyword "Help" in
the message. When you he fill out leave will, schichken you an
mail with "subscribe Picasso" in the trunk on majordomo@ninemoons.com.

13. Keyboard macros (Shortcuts)

13.1. Workbench

<R-AMIGA>+<b>      Workbench as background
<R-AMIGA>+<e>      comand accomplish
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      Workbench leave

<R-AMIGA>+<n>      new drawer lay against
<R-AMIGA>+<k>      clasps
<R-AMIGA>+<m>      Aktualisieren
<R-AMIGA>+<a>      all choose
<R-AMIGA>+<z>      indentations clean
<R-AMIGA>+<j>      content to chinks clean up
<R-AMIGA>+<->      only files with Icon show
<R-AMIGA>+<+>      all files show
<R-AMIGA>+<1>      content as Icon show
<R-AMIGA>+<2>      content to names list
<R-AMIGA>+<3>      content to date ausflisten
<R-AMIGA>+<4>      content to bigness list
<R-AMIGA>+<5>      content to kind list
<R-AMIGA>+<f>      seeking

<R-AMIGA>+<o>      undoing
<R-AMIGA>+<c>      copying
<R-AMIGA>+<r>      Umbenennen
<R-AMIGA>+<i>      info show
<R-AMIGA>+<s>      Fixieren
<R-AMIGA>+<u>      position deallocate
<R-AMIGA>+<l>      Auslagern
<R-AMIGA>+<p>      Zurcklegen

<L-AMIGA>+<v>      warning message affirm
<L-AMIGA>+<b>      warning message abbort
<L-AMIGA>+<m>      Nchster onscreen
<L-AMIGA>+<n>      Vorheriger onscreen
<ALT>+<Pfeil       Nachstes window
rechts>
<ALT>+<Pfeil       Vorheriges window
links>

<R-AMIGA>+         copying instead of postpone
<L-Maustaste>

<R-AMIGA>+         it opens the choosen directory, shuts but the
<L-Maustaste       Mutterverzeichniss
Doppelklick on
an Verzeichniss>

<SHIFT>+<Auswahl   Fgt to the bestehenden selection another files or
from files or   directories in addition
Verzeichnissen>

<CTRL>+<Auswahl    Zeiht the bestehenden selection another files or
from files or   directories off.
Verzeichnissen>

13.2. Editpad

<R-AMIGA>+<n>      new document
<R-AMIGA>+<o>      undoing
<R-AMIGA>+<s>      save
<R-AMIGA>+<p>      printing
<R-AMIGA>+<i>      Ikonifizieren
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

<R-AMIGA>+<x>      Ausschneiden
<R-AMIGA>+<c>      copying
<R-AMIGA>+<v>      Einfgen
<R-AMIGA>+<z>      withdrawals

<R-AMIGA>+<f>      finding
<R-AMIGA>+<.>      Finde next
<R-AMIGA>+<r>      finding and replace...
<R-AMIGA>+<j>      go to row...

<ALT>+<Pfeiltaste  side back
to oben>
<ALT>+<Pfeiltasten next side
to unten>

13.3. ASL - Dateiauswahl

<R-AMIGA>+<l>      last name
<R-AMIGA>+<n>      Nchster name
<R-AMIGA>+<r>      back on default
<R-AMIGA>+<p>      Mutterverzeichnis
<R-AMIGA>+<v>      data medium
<R-AMIGA>+<a>      Aktualisieren
<R-AMIGA>+<d>      discharge
<R-AMIGA>+<m>      Umbenennen
<R-AMIGA>+<#>      Markieren
<R-AMIGA>+<o>      OK
<R-AMIGA>+<c>      breaking off

<R-AMIGA>+<1>      files to names assorted list
<R-AMIGA>+<2>      files to date assorted gold list
<R-AMIGA>+<3>      files to bigness assorted gold list
<R-AMIGA>+<+>      files in ascending order list
<R-AMIGA>+<->      files in get off order gold list
<R-AMIGA>+<4>      drawers on the beginning stand
<R-AMIGA>+<5>      drawers and files merge
<R-AMIGA>+<6>      drawers at the end stand

13.4. Texteingabefelder

(e.g. Shell, coding line, line of text in ASL Dateiauswahl, ReAction-
text fields etc.)

<CTRL>+<a>         Springe with the cursor to the beginning the row
<CTRL>+<h>         Rcktaste or extinguish the highlighting text
<CTRL>+<k>         breeze all sign on the right from cursor
<CTRL>+<m>         cr or Enter
<CTRL>+<w>         breeze previous word
<CTRL>+<u>         breeze all sign left from cursor
<CTRL>+<x>         Schneidet the character string from and copied she in the
                   clipboard
<CTRL>+<z>         cr or Enter

<Pfeil links>      go to the voherigen sign
<SHIFT>+<Pfeil     Springe with the cursor to the beginning the row
links>
<ALT>+<Pfeil       the cursor goes on the beginning of actual word
links>
<Pfeil rechts>     go to the next sign
<SHIFT>+<Pfeil     Springe with the cursor on the end of text
rechts>
<ALT>+<Pfeil       the cursor goes on the end of actual word
rechts>
<DEL>              Lscht the sign under the cursor or the highlighting
                   character string
<SHIFT>+<DEL>      extinguish all sign on the right from cursor
<Rcktaste>        Lscht the sign left from cursor or the highlighting
                   character string
<SHIFT>+           breeze all sign left from cursor
<Rcktaste>
<Return> or      Bricht the input off
<Enter> or <ESC>
<Pfeiltasten high/ Wechsle to previous/chsten Textfeld
runter>
<TAB>              chang to next Textfeld
<SHIFT>+<TAB>      chang to the previous Textfeld
<F1-F3>            used the cursor as bookmarks
<SHIFT>+<F1-F3>    put the bookmarks
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      Wiederherstellen
<R-AMIGA>+<Q>      Tauscht the content of Wiederherstellpuffers with the
                   of actual content of field
<R-AMIGA>+<x>      Schneidet the character string from and copied she in the
                   clipboard
<R-AMIGA>+<G>      Wechselt at word under the cursor between grand- and
                   use of small letters
<R-AMIGA>+<g>      Wechselt at sign under the cursor between grand-
                   and use of small letters
<R-AMIGA>+<c>      Kopiert the highlighting text in the clipboard
<R-AMIGA>+<x>      Schneidet the highlighting character string from and copied
                   she in the clipboard
<R-AMIGA>+<v>      Fgt the character string from the clipboard in the
                   cursor position an
<R-AMIGA>+<V>      replacing the actual text with the in the clipboard
<R-AMIGA>+<+>      raised the issue under the cursor
<R-AMIGA>+<->      Vermindert the issue under the cursor
<R-AMIGA>+<a>      whole text mark
<R-AMIGA>+<z>      Wiederherstellen the last change
(eng. undo)
<R-AMIGA>+<Z>      Wiederhergestellte again zurckgngig make
(eng. redo)
<R-AMIGA>+<#>      Konvertiert hexadecimal under the cursor to
                   decimals
<R-AMIGA>+<$>      Konvertert decimal under the cursor to
                   Hexadezimalzahlen
<R-AMIGA>+<TAB>    Komlettiert the file names under the cursor

13.4.0.1. Text.Datatype

(e.g. By announcement from write in Multiview)

<Return> or      seeking
<Enter>
<Space>            side to in the front
<Rcktaste>        side to back

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
when one with the mouse an character string dial and the Mausknopf loose
leaves, is the character string automatic in the clipboard copied.

13.5. Commodities

13.5.0.1. Exchange

<CTRL>+<ALT>+      Exchange is restarted
<HELP>
<R-AMIGA>+<h>      Verbergen
<R-AMIGA>+<i>      Ikonifizieren
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

13.5.0.2. FKey

<CTRL>+<ALT>+<f>   FKey is restarted
<R-AMIGA>+<s>      save
<R-AMIGA>+<h>      Verbergen
<R-AMIGA>+<i>      Ikonifizieren
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

13.5.0.3. Blanker

<CTRL>+<ALT>+<b>   Blanker is restarted
<R-AMIGA>+<s>      save
<R-AMIGA>+<h>      Verbergen
<R-AMIGA>+<i>      Ikonifizieren
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

13.5.0.4. CrossDOS

<CTRL>+<ALT>+<c>   CrossDOS is restarted
<R-AMIGA>+<s>      save
<R-AMIGA>+<h>      Verbergen
<R-AMIGA>+<i>      Ikonifizieren
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

13.5.0.5. RAWBInfo

<R-AMIGA>+<,>      next Info window
<R-AMIGA>+<.>      Vorheriges Info window
<R-AMIGA>+<o>      default-Icon load
<R-AMIGA>+<a>      as default-Icon computer store
<R-AMIGA>+<>      Icon clean
<R-AMIGA>+<?>      general information information to RAWBInfo
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      Informationsdialog leave

<R-AMIGA>+<1>      Icontyp on data medium alter
<R-AMIGA>+<2>      Icontyp on drawer alter
<R-AMIGA>+<3>      Icontyp on progam alter
<R-AMIGA>+<4>      Icontyp on project alter
<R-AMIGA>+<5>      Icontyp on garbage can alter

<R-AMIGA>+<D>      default Icon use
<R-AMIGA>+<c>      Icon in the clipboard copy
<R-AMIGA>+<v>      Icon from the clipboard integrate
<R-AMIGA>+<r>      Wiederherstellen of Icon
<R-AMIGA>+<m>      Umfrben of Icon from 1.3 on 2.0 colors
<R-AMIGA>+<z>      featuring clipboard
<R-AMIGA>+<l>      Icon load
<R-AMIGA>+<s>      Icon computer store
<R-AMIGA>+<h>      Rahmenlos
<R-AMIGA>+<n>      no one Newicons-informations computer store
<R-AMIGA>+<p>      no one plaren bitmap computer store

<R-AMIGA>+<i>      all tees deactivate
<R-AMIGA>+<k>      all tees activate
<R-AMIGA>+<w>      Wiederherstellen

<R-AMIGA>+<L-      Schliet all geffneten Informations window
Maustaste on the
Schliesymbol>

13.5.0.6. Find

<R-AMIGA>+<?>      information over Find
<R-AMIGA>+<i>      Ikonifizieren
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      Find discontinue
<R-AMIGA>+<c>      filename in the clipboard copy
<R-AMIGA>+<d>      drawer open

<R-AMIGA>+<e>      Exakte Dateinamensuche
<R-AMIGA>+<g>      grand- and use of small letters note
<R-AMIGA>+<s>      settings computer store

13.5.0.7. AmiDOCK

<R-AMIGA>+<c>      config
<R-AMIGA>+<s>      config backup
<R-AMIGA>+<a>      information to the AmiDOCK
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

13.6. AWeb

<R-AMIGA>+<k>      window close
<R-AMIGA>+<u>      ffene URL
<R-AMIGA>+<w>      open www
<R-AMIGA>+<l>      open local file
<R-AMIGA>+<g>      seeking
<R-AMIGA>+<s>      Quelltext computer store
<R-AMIGA>+<\>      Ikonifizieren
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

<R-AMIGA>+<i>      all images load
<R-AMIGA>+<m>      only Maps load
<R-AMIGA>+<j>      mood music play back
<R-AMIGA>+<?>      Netzwerkstatus
<R-AMIGA>+<r>      current document new load
<R-AMIGA>+<z>      shop abbort
<R-AMIGA>+<y>      Proxy deactivate
<R-AMIGA>+<x>      JavaScript abbort

<R-AMIGA>+<b>      back
<R-AMIGA>+<f>      forward
<R-AMIGA>+<d>      Home-document
<R-AMIGA>+<->       window=Geschichte

<R-AMIGA>+<a>      the Hotlist add
<R-AMIGA>+<h>      Hotlist show
<R-AMIGA>+<v>      Hotlist show
<R-AMIGA>+<t>      Hotlist-manager

<R-AMIGA>+<c>      copying
<R-AMIGA>+<v>      Einfgen

13.7. AmigaMAIL

<R-AMIGA>+<i>      Ikonifizieren
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

<R-AMIGA>+<1>      settings
<R-AMIGA>+<2>      address table
<R-AMIGA>+<3>      Fixiere window

<R-AMIGA>+<f>      file anhgen
<R-AMIGA>+<x>      Ausschneiden
<R-AMIGA>+<c>      copying
<R-AMIGA>+<v>      Einfgen
<R-AMIGA>+<m>      send
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      mail close

13.8. Genesis

<R-AMIGA>+<r>      Genesis-report
<R-AMIGA>+<n>      Netzwerkstatus
<R-AMIGA>+<?>      info over Genesis
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

<R-AMIGA>+<1>      featuring Onlinezeit
<R-AMIGA>+<2>      featuring led's
<R-AMIGA>+<3>      featuring Connect String
<R-AMIGA>+<4>      featuring Schnittstellenliste
<R-AMIGA>+<5>      featuring Benutzerliste
<R-AMIGA>+<6>      featuring Mitschnitt
<R-AMIGA>+<7>      featuring Button
<R-AMIGA>+<8>      featuring status-window
<R-AMIGA>+<9>      featuring serial data
<R-AMIGA>+<g>      settings

13.9. AMPlifier

<R-AMIGA>+<o>      undoing
<R-AMIGA>+<a>      add
<R-AMIGA>+<i>      information
<R-AMIGA>+<l>      Abspielliste
<R-AMIGA>+<?>      information over the Amplifier
<R-AMIGA>+<h>      Verbergen
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

<R-AMIGA>+<p>      onscreen

13.10. Iomega tools

<R-AMIGA>+<s>      reviewing the SCSI-hardware
<R-AMIGA>+<d>      reviewing the DOS-hardware
<R-AMIGA>+<i>      Ikonifizieren
<R-AMIGA>+<h>      encryption
<R-AMIGA>+<q>      termination

<R-AMIGA>+<e>      diskette spit
<R-AMIGA>+<r>      start drive

14. Problems and solutions

this area gives answers and solutions to frequently gestellten question.
The seeing you hence always first here beyond, when you an problem have and
read you the separate fields attentive through.

The question and answers base to the part on the officially OS3.5 FAQs
and eilweise on the "unofficial" OS3.5 FAQs, the earlier from "Alex"
and now from Gregory thunder (www.gregdonner.org) fostered become and the
us kindly the approval to the use given has.

14.1. Preparation to the installing

Erstellen you unconditional an Notfalldiskette and when possible an
backup your Systempartition.

Possibly must you your Systempartition also increase around OS3.9
install to able, because it become at least 20Mb free
Festplattenplatz required.

While of startings of AmigaOS is the "startup-sequence" and the "user-
startup" carried out. Shall you there program's commence, the deeper in
AmigaOS encroach, so deactivate you this first. The installing from
AmigaOS 3.9 takes no adjustments on these files before.

68040 or. 68060.library

with the complete neuinstallation from OS3.9, must you note, that
possibly for the firm necessary 68040- or/and 68060-libraries
from the respective ones original-diskettes installed become must, with it you
system from these new installed Festplattenpartition again restarted
become can.

In simplest produce you he an Notfalldiskette, boot over this
diskette and install then you system new. With it become as well as the
necessary CPU-libraries as also an possibly available
Grafikkartentreiber automatic installed.

14.2. Problems with Patches, Icons, NewIcons, MagicWB and SetPatch

the progam SetPAtch is in the "startup-sequence" restarted and
corrected in the essential publicly known error in the AmigaOS. Off OS3.5 compensates
it besides the driver for the accessing the internal SCSI- and IDE-
hardware the different models. Those new driver permit the
firm from hard drives with one capacity greater as 4Gb.

It are PRobleme with unite Amiga 3000 model and unite 4fach-
expansion card for IDE known. In these fall broaden you the
invocation of SetPatch program please as follows:

    C:SetPatch QUIET SKRIPROMUPDATES "scsi.device"

objections you, that also OS3.9 no direct support for 4fach-adapter
for IDE contains. Please use you the same software, the you also
until the present time uses have.

Shall you all the same problems with the boot from AmigaOS 3.9 have, so
name you the file "DEVS:AmigaOS ROM update" around. Thereby become the
Ersatzmodule altogether hilarious.

--- ATTENTION --------------------------------------------------------------
is SETPATCH at activating deactivated, stands neither the new Icon- still
the Workbench.library to the zur ~ - at one's disposal.

SetPatch with NewStyleDevice Patch

the progam SetPatch extended many publicly known Hardwaretreiber around new
possibilities. To this used it the Konfigurationsdatei
"DEVS:NSDPatch.cfg". Us is an conflict between the Hardwaretreiber
"cd.device", the part of AmigaOS is and a wider "cd.device"
(fabricator unknown) notified been. Shall you this "cd.device"
use, so deactivate you please the obversely row in
"DEVS:NSDPatch.cfg", in the you with a text editor before the row an
"#"-sign stand.

LoadV43Module

when you you system already through the comand LoadV43Module and appositely
Moduldateien for the firm from hard drives greater 4 gigabyte extended
have, so should you this comands remove. SetPatch takes possession now
this jobs.

NSDPatch

the invocation from NSDPatch is not more necessary, then SetPatch this duty
takes possession.

NewIcons

since AmigaOS 3.5 gives it the new "icon.library". Those library is for
the accociation and representation the pictograms accountable. Many
user have "NewIcons" installed, a Patch, the an improvement
the Icon-representation brings about. The effect this Patches is only
also through the "icon.library" undertaken. You able and should the
invocation of NewIcon-Patches from your "startup-sequence" or "user-
startup" remove.

--- WRINKLE ------------------------------------------------------------------
the progam IconEdit can used become, around NewIcons in real OS3.5-
Icons to transform. The is not necessary, around NewIcons on the
Workbench to see, accelerated but the shop and Darstellen the
pictograms.

Fllstandsanzeiger

The Workbench shows you now - how already to times from OS1.3 - the
Fllstand your hard drive left in the window on. Those advertisement is however
also from unite Patches obtains. Deactivate you this Patches, otherwise
get you the Fllstandanzeige double.

ARQ

ARQ (an Patch, the the system-Requester embellished) has problems on
many OS3.1-intersystem causes. For OS3.9 appear more system affected
to is. Please replace you these Patch through a other.

MagicWB

will she furthermore MagicWB-pictograms use, so need you
furthermore a Patch, the the colour-Pens for it reserved. Otherwise become
the pictograms with false colors personated.

FastIPrefs

when you the progam FastIPrefs use, so should you this again
through IPrefs replace. IPrefs from AmigaOS 3.9 bolstered new
Preferences, the OS3.1 not knew and bolstered likewise some
options from FastIPrefs. Even so become publicly known error distant.

No one GlowIcons to the installing

when to the Hauptinstallation no GlowIcons uncover are lies the on
a error in the use Filesystem. The phenomenon became under
SmartFileSystem already corrected. Please use you the most up to date
version.

Under PFS3 comes it before, that the Tool, the the pictograms compensates
(MergeIcons) no files to the substitution finds. Hereby helps only the
manual introduction the pictograms with the new Workbench-attributes.

Frame around the Ikons can not switched off become

see point "FastIPrefs".

DOpus 5 stands the new 3.5 pictograms not there!

The Piktogrammformat the WB3.5 is to the previous different and it
is also not the NewIcons-format. One required hence the update-Patch
for DOpus from the Webseite from GP software.

Why opens the IconEdit or the other Preferences always a new
Screen, when I a 16-Bit onscreen run have?

The lies at it, that not sufficient coloured chalk free are and therefore on
a new onscreen quibbled is. Around this to prevent, stand
you easy the Piktogrammqualitt, in you Workbench-Preferences, on
"Schwach".

14.3. Problems with RTG, Picasso 96, CyberGraphX

CyberGraphx and Picasso96

OS3.9 bolstered the Grafikkarten-software CyberGraphX and Picasso96. For
the firm from CyberGraphX is it however necessary, that you the new version
3 use. Those find you on the OS3.9-CD under Contributions.

Nutzer the version 4.0 from CyberGraphX load he please to the update on
V4.1 the file biz/patch/cgxv41_r1.lha from the Aminet or from the "open air
update"-side the Schatztruhe-homepage (www.schatztruhe.DE).

What brings about "LoadWB SIMPLEGELS"?

It sets the system on the old OS3.1-style for the sampling and draw
from pictograms back: filled and of to the other position.
OS3.5 colors she an and positioned all simultaneous. On mine A1200T
hindered SIMPLEGELS the losing from 300K chip-RAM with FBlit and WBCtrl
on AGA.

A operator report, that is system (BVisionPPC with CGX4) before
use the option "SIMPLEGELS" very unstable was. If one problems
has, ought one once this option attempt, also with one Grafikkarte.

14.4. Hard drives-problems

hard drives-partitions vanish

when by you Festplattenpartitionen not more displayed become or
when your hard drive not over the 4Gb-border partitioniert become can,
must the used "Device" the NSD-Patch known made become.

Undoing you for this a editor e.g. The EditPad and load the file
"DEVS:NSDPATCH.cfg". Seeking you the appositely "Device" and clean you the
Kommentarsymbol "#" in beginning the row.

For the "CYBPPC.Device" must following row inserted become:

    DEVICE cybppc.device DEVICETYPE NSDEVTYPE_TRACKDISK COMMANDS 2-7,
    9-15, 20-28, 33-39, 41-44, 46-49, 51-72 TD64

save you the file and commence the Amiga new. Towards the restart
able you he assure, if the registration serves has, in that you
an Shell open and the command: "SetPatch PatchInfo" enter. Seeking
you in the angezeigten list you Device from and check you if the details
by -Patch countgrer 0 is.

Now ought your hard drive in full with bigness usable is.

The has got I the new FastFileSystem (FFS) in the RDB my
hard drive?

Activating you the HDToolbox and choose you the controller and the
ancestral drive.

Squeeze you on "hard drive partitionieren". In the bottom right corner
is the section "file system", under stands the present used
for the picked Partition.

Choose you "Hinzu./Update..." And then from the list the Filesystem,
which rebuild become shall (it ought "FastFileSystem" be called).

Printings "Filesystem renew...". In Dateiauswahl window choose you now
the new FFS (L:FastFileSystem).

With "OK" turn you to the Partitionen window back, there "save"
choose.

The HDToolbox is closed and you have it created. Around the change
to activate, must you the Amiga new commence.

With these they strode copy you the Filesystem *in* the RDB, it is
not only an hand on the with the OS3.5-Installer installed
Filesystem.

I have an HDD, the with SCSIConfig from phase5 prepared became. When
I with the HDToolBox thereupon zugreife, appears some not to attune,
e.g. Apportions the HDTB with, that to storing adjustments exist.

One ought never SCSIConfig and HDToolBox for an and the same
hard drive use. That necessary atleast for all versions from
SCSIconfig till to the 4 February 2000. Process you your hard drive always
with the progam, with the you prepared became.

SCSIConfig accounts the geometry otherwise as the HDToolbox; even, when
the switch "synchronous" in SCSIConfig activates is, prescribes it its
own Geometrieberechnungen in the RDB, what an capable confusion
at add newer partitions cause; an result could
berlappende partitions is!

Where must my Bootpartition is, when I an hard drive greater as 4Gb
in internal connection use want?

Towards a cold start (when the machine put is), has one neither
the 64bit functionality of NSDPatch, still the "AmigaOS ROM update"
activates.

No disturb, this necessary only at cold start!

--- HINT --------------------------------------------------------------
the following hint necessary for all Amiga-models with internem "SCSI"-
connection, be it an legit "scsi.device" (A3000/T, A4000T) or "an
false" IDE_scsi.device (A600, A1200, A4000):

The Bootpartition must in the bottom 4Gb lie! Even by fit
FFS v45+ in the RDB the HDD. FFS v45 unaccompanied can NO 64bit comands with
the old v40 "scsi.device" of use!

Furthermore has the v40 "IDE_scsi.device" an internal invariant
8Gb-border, what means:

with use of Dateisystems with "direkt scsi" or "TD64"-
support (e.g. PFS, SFS) on a A600/A1200/A4000, must the
Bootpartition in the bottom 8Gb lie.

I have problems with the ROM-Aktualisierten "scsi.device" (the machine
reboots not o's..), can I the "ROM update" remove and NSDPatch for
the 64bit functionality of old "scsi.device" (from 3.1 ROM) for
hard drives greater 4Gb of use?

Is not the NSD-patched "v40 scsi.device" same, how the
"v43scsi.device" from "ROM update"?

An NSD-gepatchtes "scsi.device" has an simple 64bit-functionality,
it is an Emulation over "HD_SCSICMD", not more. The complete parcel
with intern control, iterations, error handling etc.Is only with
the "scsi.device" v43 in the "ROM update" through SetPatch available.

And not forget: with a A600/A1200/A4000 has one by use of
v40 IDE_scsi.device an 8Gb-border. With the NSD-gepatchten
IDE_scsi.device v40 can one only HDDs till 8Gb of use - 8Gb, not more.

Dateisysteme how PFS and SFS with one "direkt scsi"-version must the
"IDE_scsi.device" of use, so step also here the 8Gb-border on (the
documentation from PFS bypasses this subject some).

One can the internal 8Gb-border of old "IDE_scsi.device" not patchen,
neither with NSDPatch still with the "direkt scsi"-version of Dateisystems
of Drittanbieters.

If one an hard drive greater as 8Gb in internal "IDE_scsi"-connection
of A600/A1200/A4000 of use want, equal with which Filesystem, must one
the "IDE_Scsi.device" of ROM-update use.

The has can I more as 30 sign at file names adjust?

Worse luck bolstered the FFS only 30 sign, around more to activate, must
you an other Filesystem install. e.g. The SFS (smart file system)
bolstered 107 sign.

14.5. Problems with uses

Wordworth 7

Wordworth7 actuates not more, then the kind of aufrufenden Icon
not correct interpreted is.

Remedy: Wordworth-Icon anklicken, "informations show" invoice
and the "boot through:" from ARexx on Workbench alter. After this leaves he
Wordworth again faultless commence.

14.6. Problems with Internet-program

mine AWeb Werkzeugleistenknpfe are destroys. It can one the prevent?

Ark you the Werkzeugleisten-image in an Grafikprogramm and restoring you
it as GIF-image off or remove you the tees (Tooltype)
"diaphanous" the ".info"-file from AWeb.

AmigaMAIL fetches no enamel

the lies at it, that you no Spool-file specified have. Give you
please in the Preferences under "POP Servers" by the point "Spooldatei"
a file names on.

14.7. Sundries problems

The AnimatedIcons work not, what can I do?

Check you yours GIF.Datatype, if these from the OS3.5- or OS3.9-CD
comes. In addition must you, when you the "gifanim.Datatype" installed
have, these deactivate.

SKIPROMMODULES

under the error description in the Installationshandbuch is regrettably for the
shutdown of new SCSI-Devices an false command line-option
specified. The correct command line must be called:

    SetPatch QUIET SKIPROMUPDATES scsi.device

the simple Umbenennen the file "DEVS:AmigaOS3.5 ROM update" leads to the
resemble result.

Fall at undoing one drawer on the Workbench

obvious hangs these error with the installed Picasso 2-
Softwarezusammen. Please install you CyberGraphX or Picasso96
which you on the CD-ROM find.

Prefs program's able not restarted become

obvious is on you system an old ClassAct in "LIBS:"
installed. Please control you, if Boopsi-Classen in the drawer
"LIBS:Classes" hold are and deactivate you she. Lead you thereafter
a restart through and attempt you it renewed. Eventually exist also
an drawer "Sys:ClassAct", the likewise deactivated become must.

15. Glossary

the in hand glossary contains the computer- and Amiga-specific
specialist terms, the in these book, the original-manual and the
program uses become.

15.1. A

WATER (eng. AGA)     see Advanced Graphics Architecture.

Backtrace   see Tracing.

Address            The Identifikationsnummer one cell in the
                   computer or of peripheral device (SCSI).

Aktionssymbol      an symbol with Klartextbeschriftung in a window,
                   kber of it selection in these window an operation
                   invoked is. Ordinary Aktionssymbole are
                   "save", "further" and "breaking off".

Active voice              is with reference on the onscreen, the Shell-window
                   or. The Workbench-window uses, in the to the time
                   data entered become able.

Advanced Graphics  an Amiga-chip-setting, with the more colors displayed
Architecture (WATER)  become able and the the Systemleistung enhanced.

Current          The presently position within the
directory        Verzeichnisstruktur. The directory, the AmigaDOS as
                   standardmiges Arbeitsverzeichnis used, when no
                   other directory specified is.

Akzenttaste (eng. A key or key combination, which the giving out
tot key)          the key changed, the immediate thereafter pressed
                   is. To this belong to  e.g. The Akzenttasten left and
                   on the right the numerical series on your keyboard (^, ' and `).

Surrogate name          an alternative name for a AmigaDOS-comand or.
                   An character string, the/the with the comand ALIAS
                   specified is.

AmigaDOS           the from Amiga-Computern appropriated Disk-operating system
                   (Disk Operating system - DOS). The Disk-operating system
                   contains the most weighty functions of computer.

AppIcon            an special Icon (Icon), the from one
                   use created and uses is.

AppWindow          the window one use, in the an Icon
                   pulled become can, around the corresponding file in the
                   use to load. The MultiView-window and the
                   Amiga-Dateiauswahl window are AppWindows.

Use (also    an or more progam, the an specific duty
application)       accomplish, e.g. An word processing program, an
                   file or an video-Titler.

Display panel        an rectangular small box, the normally under
                   a Rollsymbol or next to a Auswahlsymbol stands
                   and the actual selection announce. An display panel can
                   not ediert become.

Archive             a archival backup copy one or several of these files.

Archiver        the copying from files on Disk(ette) or tape to
                   Sicherungszwecken.

Argument           a ancillary information, e.g. An filename, an worth
                   or an option, the to a comand specified is.
                   Those ancillary information certain the accurately action of
                   respective ones imperative.

Argumentweitergabe The details from parameter in the coding line for
                   ein(en) subsequent/succeeding progam or.
                   Comand.

ASCII (amerikanisch    an standard for Textdarstellung, the sign
standard code for  uniform Codenummern assign and thereby the
info        data exchange between differently Computertypen
Interchange)       enables.

Resolution (eng.   The number the pixel in the respective ones
motion)        Bildschirmmodus. An normally PAL-high-Res-onscreen
                   has e.g. An resolution from 640 (horizontal) x 256
                   (vertical) Bildpunkten.

Expression           what you black on know from you printer consider.

                   A in writen direction, the an follows from
                   variables, field or constants through arithmetical,
                   comparative or logic operators knot.

Carry out (eng.   The follow the assignments in one coding line,
execute)           a progam or one script-file through the
                   calculator.

Selection through      the contemporaneously sampling several of these pictograms through
draw (eng. drag Gedrckthalten the Auswahltaste and draw of
select)            frame around the wished pictograms with help the
                   mouse. With enable the Maustaste are all within
                   this frame lying pictograms picked.

Sampling (eng.   The Whlen of element, with the you work will,
select)            through Zeigen on the element with the mouse and
                   anschlieendes simple Klicken with the Auswahltaste.

Auswahlfeld        an field, in the an option an- or cut out
                   become can. When the Auswahlfeld an tick contains,
                   is the option picked (active).

Auswahlsymbol      an symbol, from the of from several angezeigten
                   element picked become can. That is frequently for
                   colors used.

Auswahltaste       The left Maustaste.

Car-roles        the automated relocating the screen display,
                   as soon as the Mauspfeil on the edge of reading area
                   reaches.

15.2. B

back up             see archival backup copy.

Bandlaufwerk       see Streamer.

Baud-instalment          The speed, with the an device informations
                   by the communicating over the serial interface
                   feels or sends. Correspond rough Bit per
                   second.

Bedingunskenn-     a variable, the a Rckgabewert contains, the for
zeichen            the triumphantly or not triumphantly execution
(Ergebniscode,     of imperative stands.
Eng. return code)

comand             a direction on the Amiga to the execution one
                   duty or obtaining of particular result.

Befehlswieder-     a furniture the Shell, the it enables, ahead
holung             entered coding line with help the arrow key
                   again abzurufen.

Befehlwieder-      an storage area, in the the at last in one
holungspuffer      particular Shell eingegebenen comands preserved
                   become, around where appropriate. With the arrow key (i.e. Without
                   repeated input the coding line) again called up
                   become to able.

Befehlsdatei       see script.

Befehlsschablone   a kind, the duly syntax for a AmigaDOS-
(eng. template)   or ARexx-comand quote. You able he the
                   stencil for each AmigaDOS-comand show leave, in
                   the you the Befehlsnamen with a mark of interrogation (?) as
                   one argument enter.

Coding line       The row, in the comands and the accompanying
                   arguments entered become. As coding line
                   designates one also the entirety informations, the in
                   the this row entered become.

Operating system     software in the ROM or on diskette or hard drive, the
(OS) (braised.a.         The most weighty functions of computer steers.
AmigaDOS)

library (eng.  An contiguous setting from functions and data,
library)           the from different program used become can.
                   In ROM or. In the drawer LIBS: find he
                   libraries.

Pixel (eng.  The flying spot, from those he the screen display
pixel)             of Amiga put. An pixel is the least
                   oneness the Anzeigeinformationen on a onscreen.
                   (The eng. Mark "pixel" became from "picture
                   element" (pixel) deduced.)

onscreen (eng.  An area the advertisement, for the appointed graphical
screen)            attributes (e.g. Resolution and colors) worth.
                   Screens are always at least so wide how the
                   visible area. With the Amiga able more
                   screens with differently attributes
                   simultaneous open and uncover is.

Bildschirmmodis    a naming for the parameter set, e.g. Resolution
(eng. screen      and Ablenkfrequenz, the a onscreen defined. 640
mode)              x 256 pixel (wide x height) are e.g. An
                   high-resolution Bildschirmmodus (high Res) for PAL-
                   Amigas.

Binary              the two-party-numbering system, in the only the digits 0 and 1
                   come forward.

Bit                a single, binary figure (1 or 0), the
                   smallest possible Informationseinheit.

Bitplane (eng.    An area of RAM, the graphical data for
plane = plane)     screens contains. Every Bit in one Bitplane
                   steers a pixel of screen. The number the
                   Bitplanes deposits the maximum number from colors fast, the
                   simultaneous on the onscreen displayed become
                   able.

Blttersymbol      an symbol to the selection one from several options. It
                   is always only an option displayed. Towards selection
                   this symbol is always the each next option
                   uncover. The displayed option is the to the time
                   picked option.

Block              a contiguous Bytegruppe (normally 512),
                   the in the RAM or in a permantenten Speichermedium
                   as single logic oneness discusses is.

                   An contiguous or markierter section one
                   text file (e.g. IF-block in a script).

Boolean (eng.    Boolean is, that two different conditions feasible
boolean)           are: on or From, truth or falsity, yes or refusal, 0
                   or 1.

Bootfhig          cover he on an device, from the from the Amiga
(bootable,         restarted become can (am "boot"). A bootfhige
startfhig)        Disk must all Systemdateien hold, the the computer
                   to the reception of operating required.

Boot (dt.        The system commence, in that the for it necessary data
commence, new       from one Speichereinheit (e.g. Hard drive or
commence)           diskette) in the memory of computer read in
                   become. Cover he on components, the by these
                   case uses become: the boat-Disk. (See new
                   commence.)

Brckenkarte       a from AMIGA technology establish
                   expansion card, the the Amiga the hardware-
                   Emulierung PC-compatibles computer enables.

Brush              see brush.

Elbow                see error.

Byte               a from eight Bit consisting of Speichereinheit, the in
                   the rule a sign complies.

15.3. C

cache-Spreicher    an more temporary storage area with extreme rapid
                   intervention, the the Systemleistung enhanced.

CD-ROM             only-harvest-memory. On these data medium able more
                   as 550Mb data saved become (commensurable with
                   one audio-CD).

Chip               an electronic circuit in the Kleinstformat, the
                   he in a lower-case, black, rectangularly casing
                   is and on the pages Verbindungsstifte identifies.
                   An computer sets he from one plurality more specific
                   chips together.

Chip-RAM           the area of RAM, on the the special-chip-setting of
                   Amiga zugreit. This memory is for graphical/
                   acoustic data uses and also as Grafikspeicher
                   designates.

CLI (imperative-      a possibility the communicating with a computer
zeileneingabe,     through input from ordering over the keyboard. The CLI
braised.a. Shell)        of Amiga is the Shell.

Clipboard          see buffer.

Steuern-           see Steuertastenkombination.
Buttons-
kombinationen

controller         an Har\dware-hardware, e.g. On one Steckkarte, the
                   as interface between the computer and a
                   peripheral device (e.g. Hard drive) serves.

Coprocessor        see Koprozessor.

CPU                see central processing unit.

Cursor             an emphasized rectangle or. An upright beam
                   on the onscreen to the advertisement the Schreibposition.

Cycle Gadget       see Blttersymbol.

15.4. D

file (eng. file) a ordered data collection, the with a names
                   designates and on a vehicle saved is.

Filesystem        The organization and the corresponding software, with the
                   data, files and directories on a data medium
                   saved become. The Amiga uses before all the
                   FFS (fasts file system) and OFS (Old file system).

Data              a assemblage from informations.

Data medium (eng. A declared Speichereinheit, e.g. An diskette
volume)            or an Festplattenpartition.

Datentrgername    the name of data medium (not to confound with
                   the Gertenamen!). The Umbenennen one Disk changes
                   her Datentrgernamen, not but the Gertenamen.

Debugging          see Fehlerbehebung.

Default            see standard.

Device             see device.

Dialog window      an window, the appear, when the system on an
(eng. requester)  Benutzereingabe dependent is. An Dialog window
                   contains Aktionssymbole, under those you between
                   continuation and breaking off the current operation choose
                   able. To the quitting of Dialog windows must you
                   of the angezeigten symbols choose.

Density (eng.      Number working point per custom. Many printer lean
density)           more Druckdichten, Normalerweise necessary: ever superior the
                   density, the keener and kontrastreicher the
                   printout.

Dientsprogramm     an progam, the data created or used, e.g. An
(eng. tool =      text- or Grafikprogramm.
Tool)

directory          see directory.

Disk               an vehicle to the storage great amounts of data. The
                   most computer-Disks computer store the data magnetic
                   (diskettes, hard drives), it become but also visual
                   Disks (laser-Disks) uses.

Disk-              The software, the the most weighty Einlese- and
operating system     Speicherfunktionen of computer steers.
(DOS) (Disk
Operating system,
DOS)

Disk-drive      an Speichergert, the data on an memory-Disk
(eng. drive)      (e.g. An diskette or hard drive) prescribes and from
                   these reads.

Diskette (eng.    An auswechselbares, magnetic Speichermedium. The
floppy disk)       Amiga collaborates with doppelseitigen 3,5-custom-diskettes
                   with more stable Kunststoffhlle.

Diskettenwechsel   alternately different diskettes in an and dasselb
(eng. disk swap)  drive inserting, e.g. At copying one diskette
                   on a system with only a floppy.

Display            Engl. For advertisement, onscreen or also monitor.

Doppelklicken      Zweimal short one after the other the Auswahltaste press.

DOS                see Disk-operating system.

Drive              see Disk-drive.

Printer driver     an progam, the the Amiga the communicating with a
(eng. printer     angegebenen printer enables.
drive)
                   the printer driver acted by it as "translator"
                   between computer and printer. He accepted data from
                   computer in a standardized format (ASCII-
                   sign and ANSI-Escape-sequences) and sets she in an
                   for the printer understandable format around.

Druckknopfsymbol   an round symbol next to one option in one list.
(Eng. radio       to the selection one option is the ancestral tast
button)            to select. It can always only each an option from
                   the list elective become.

Dump (Graphic      printout of in onscreen angezeigten image.
Dump)

15.5. E

ECS                see Erweiterter chip-setting.

Editor             an progam, with the appointed kinds from files
                   created and changes become able. The Amiga disposes
                   over Preferences-Editoren, with those you
                   presettings (Prefs) change of able, as soon as
                   the Texteditoren Memacs and ED to the Bearbeiten from
                   Textdateien.

Eingabeauf-        a report or an symbol, the/the say, that the
forderung          computer Texteingabe expected.

Eingabepuffer      an storage area, the by the seriellen
                   communicating used is, around in-depth data
                   to include.

Oneness,           an physically or logic device (e.g. Serial
Gerteeinheit      interface) can where appropriate. More subunits
(eng. unit)       possession, the over her Einheitennummer discriminated
                   become.

Ergebniscode       see Bedingungskennzeichen.

Extended selection the sampling several of these pictograms on once through
                   Gedrckthalten the shift key and sampling the
                   wished pictograms with the mouse.

More extended chip-  The rectified version the Agnus- and denise-
setting (ECS -        Koprozessor-chips of Amiga. The ECS offers additional
Enhancer chip Set) Bildschirmmodi (ECS-modes) and extended the bestehenden
                   graphing possibilities. Many preference of ECS able
                   only unused become, when at least with version 2 of
                   operating system operated is.

Escape-sequence     a follows from sign, the with the Escape-sign
                   begins and the an Sonderfunktion release, when she
                   in the coding line entered or as part one
                   character string printed. Escape-sequences become
                   normally uses, around the font (or other
                   settings) of print page or of
                   Konsolen windows to change.

On the side Halfbrite    an more specific Grafikmodus to the doubling the number
(EHB, half        the Bildschirmfarben. With it is to every one existing
brightness)        colour additional an correspondence with more halved
                   brightness (intensity) prepared.

15.6. F

Farbkorrektur      a Druckoption, the over the Grafikdrucker-
                   Preferences (PrinterGfx) picked is. You serves
                   there to, the colors one printout the colors the
                   screen display if possible to adjust.

Fasts-RAM (nearly =   more general memory, the from program and data
eng. For quick) used is. In names is already recognizable, that fasts-
                   RAM normally faster collaborates as chip-RAM.

Error ("elbow")     an software- or Hardwarefehler.

Fehlerbehebung     the Lokalisieren and Korrigieren from software- and
(eng. debugging)  Hardwarefehlern.

Error code         see Bedingungskennzeichen.

Field               the Bildschirmbereich in the background of text under
                   a Workbench-Icon. The colour this field
                   can with the font-Preferences (Font) changed
                   become.

Window (eng.     An rechteckiger Bildschirmbereich, the informations
window)            receive or show can, every window owns
                   an Titelleiste, the it defined, and can symbols
                   on the edge command.

Hard drive (eng.  An high-speed-Datenspeichergert high
hart disk)         capacity, from the the Disks normally not
                   distant become able. Is frequently also as
                   Plattenlaufwerk or Festplattenlaufwerk designates.

File               see file.

Fix (eng.    The save the positions of window and/or
snapshot =         the therein existing pictograms.
Schnappschu)

flag               see Schutzbits.

Font               see font.

Format             description the correcting syntax from AmigaDOS-Befelen.

Formatting        prepare one Disk for the use with the
                   Amiga. With the formatting become all ahead on these
                   Diskj store data excluded.

Fragmentierung     that designates the Verstreuung from zusammengehrigen
                   data on one Disk or. In the memory. That leads to
                   one low Systemleistung. In addition able by
                   Speicherfragmentierung some program's where appropriate. Not
                   ordnungsgem carried out become.

Function keys    The buttons whole above on the Amiga-keyboard. You are
                   with F1 till F10 inscribes and able for the
                   Ausfuhrung from special functions programmed become.

15.7. G

Gadget             see symbol.

Gateway (dt. About  a externe union between other computer,
Verbindungsglied)  intersystem or net.

Gedrckthalten     a (mouse)-key pressed hold, during one other
(key)            actions undertakes (mouse consider, Zusatztaste press
                   etc.).

Geisterschrift-    The advertisement from menu- or Symboloptionen in
advertisement            schwcherer writing. That means, that the
                   those concerned options presently not picked
                   become able.

Genlock            a Hardwarekomponente, which the overlay from
                   Bildsignalen external hardware (e.g. TV sets,
                   video recorder) with Amiga-Grafikdaten enables and the
                   Amiga thereupon synchronizes. Genlocks become frequently to the
                   berlagern from Videobildern with title or subtitle
                   deployed.

Device (eng.       A physically furniture, e.g. An printer or an
device)            floppy or an Softwareeinheit (logic
                   device), e.g. CON: or NILE: the as spring or goal
                   for data deployed is.

Gertename (eng.  An short name how DF0:, PC1: or PRT:, the an
device name)       particular hardware- or Softwaregert designates.
                   Gertenamen must always with a double point (:)
                   end.

Polish            a Druckoption in the Grafikdrucker-Preferences
                   (Printer Gfx), with the attempted become can,
                   treppenfrmige or dental lines to smooth, the
                   casual in print come forward able.

Globally             in all process valid. The converse from local.

Grafikspeicher     see chip-RAM.

Graphical          an on bildlicher representation based system, over
user interface the you the computer assignments give. Only happens
                   this here not over the input from ordering, but
                   through use graphic symbols. The Workbench is
                   the GUI of Amiga.

Grersymbol       an symbol, the in the right bottom corner of
(eng. size        window appear can and over the an window
gadget)            enlarges or belittles become can.

15.8. H

HAM - Hold and     an Grafikmodus of Amiga, the the advertisement the
Modify (holding and complete colour palette of Amiga in onscreen
Modifizieren)      enables.

Handler (dt. About  program files, the as Zwischeninstanzen zwiswchen
device driver)     AmigaDOS and the physical device serve. The
                   "trader" are in the directory L: saved.

Handshaking        the electronically or software journal, the
                   to the liquidation the seriellen communicating between
                   two Computergerten erforderich is.

Main register   the center directory on a data medium. The
(eng. root        main register stands on the vertex the
directory)         Verzeichnishierarchie and is at formatting of
                   data medium created. All other directories on
                   the data medium find he in the main register, i.e.
                   Are these ancillary. The main register is
                   with the Datentrgernamen, ensued from a double point
                   specified.

Hexadecimal        this numbering system, the on the basis 16 based on, is
                   hufg in the Computerprogrammierung deployed. As
                   hexadecimal digits become the quantitative 0-9 and the
                   letters A-02135 : cpr (for the values 10-15) uses. Under
                   AmigaDOS must an hexadecimal with 0x or x
                   start, by ARexx is an x trailing.

Hierarchical       this concept serves to description the geschaltelten
                   Verzeichnisstruktur from AmigaDOS, in the directories
                   as well as other directories (subdirectories) as
                   also files or both hold able.

Hintergrundproze  an progam, the from the Shell with the comand RUN
(eng. background  restarted became. This progam runs then "in the
process)           background", during one in the Shell already with
                   Anderem go on working can.

Host (dt. About     an superordinate calculator - or Softwaresystem, with
Gastrechner/       the communicated is.
-programm)

Hot Key            see Tastenbefehl.

15.9. I, J

Icon               see pictograms.

IFF (Interchange   the standardized format, in the the Amiga graphical,
file format)       acoustic and other data saves.

.info-file        a file, the the image-and Positionsdaten of
                   Icon contains (is marked as
                   "point-info").

Initialize     synonym for formatting. With printer also bermitteln
                   from basic settings, how e.g. Zeilanabstand.

Interlace          see Zeilensprungdarstellung.

Internal             cover he on a AmigaDOS-comand, the in the
                   Shell integrated is, so not from one Disk charged
                   become must.

Wildcard character       an sign, the in Namensmustern use finds and
(eng. wildcard)   for an row differently values stand can. So
                   able you e.g. File names give, the all with the
                   resemble letters start or end. The
                   mark of interrogation (?) is an wildcard character, the for an
                   any individual sign stands.

Jumper (dt. About   an smaller jack, the on one printed circuit board on
Kurzschlustecker) different pencils tucked become can, around hardware
                   to configure.

15.10. K, L

cold start          one ausgeschalteten Amiga plug.

Catalog            The files, which the compilations the system- and
                   Meldungstexte in an other language (not english)
                   hold.

Kb (kilobyte)      1024 byte. Is frequently also as K abbreviated. (Against it
                   stands an small worries keep him awake exact for 1000 how in kg.)

Keymap             see keyboard assignment.

Kickstart          cover he on the part of Amiga-Betriebssytstems,
                   the he in the ROM is.

Click            a Maustaste short press and let go. If not
                   otherwise specified, must the shortlist (left key)
                   pressed become.

Konsolen window    an window, the to the an- and giving out from text
                   uses is, e.g. The Shell-window.

Copying and       the copying of data block (text and/or graphic)
Einfgen (eng.    And Einfgen this blocks on one other place.
copy and dough)

Koprozessor        an more separate processor-chip, the the Zentralprozessor
                   through the execution appointed expenditure bolstered,
                   e.g. Mathematics calculations or faster
                   Datentransfer.

Laufwerksname      an a Disk-drive or one Festplattenpartition
                   zugeordneter Datentrgemame, e.g. DF0: or DH1:.

Reading (eng. read) the interrogation more stored informations.

Library            see library.

Local              only in the actual case valid. The converse from
                   globally.

Discharge (eng.     An Bit or an badges on 0 (from) set, i.e.
Klar)             inactivate. Opposition to "set". One onscreen
                   or an  windowanzeige remove.

Discharge (eng.     The remove one file, of buffer or of
delete)            other in the memory standing element.

15.11. M

macro              an individual comand, the for an row from ordering
                   stands. Many Editoren and uses lean the
                   use from macros to the simplification frequently
                   benutzter Befehlsfolgen. ARexx-program's become frequently
                   as macros designates.

Mouse               the device, with the you the Mauspfeil on the onscreen
                   move and with the Amiga comunicate able. The
                   Maustasten serve to the announcement from menu as soon as to the
                   sampling and draw from pictograms, window and
                   Bilschirmen.

Mouse acceleration a over the input-Preferences (Input) auswahlbare
                   option, through the the movement of Mauspfeils in the
                   relationship to the movement the Mauys accelerated is.
                   The Mausbeschleunigung enables an better
                   control over small Mausbewegungen and an lesser
                   control, for it but higher speed, by
                   great movements the mouse.

Mouse pointer (eng.   A small mapping in onscreen (frequently in form
pointer, hand)   of arrow o's.a. Reticles), the the movements the
                   mouse follows. With the Mauspfeil able pictograms,
                   symbols and also menu items picked become.

Mb (megabyte)      1024 kilobyte (1,048,576 byte). Is frequently also as M
                   or Meg abbreviated. (In exotischen cases
                   (Festplattenspezifikationen) stands Mb but also for
                   1000K = 1,024,000 byte or even for exactly 1,000,000
                   byte.)

menu               a list from options on the onscreen, the
                   displayed is, when she the Mentaste press. From the
                   menu able you comands to the control of program's
                   choose.

Menleiste         The list the Mentitel, the in upper edge of
                   screen appear, when the Mentaste pressed
                   be expected to is.

Menu items         a option, the in a menu appear. "New
                   drawer" is e.g. The first menu item in the Workbench-
                   menu "window".

Mentaste          The raked Maustaste.

Tees (eng.    An random anzugebender parameter, the you in the
Tool Types)        Informations window of Icon to the control
                   of program enter able. Is e.g. The attribute
                   SECONDS (seconds) in the Informations window the clock
                   entered, shows the clock also seconds on, when she
                   open is.

Microprocessor     see central processing unit.

Modem              an device, the the serial data transfer over
                   telephone lines enables.

Monitor            an video-reproducer, on the the visible
                   giving out of computer displayed is. It gives
                   different kinds from monitors. For the
                   Standardausgabe of Amiga is an analogous "RGB-
                   colored monitor" uses, the as well as text as also graphic
                   show can.

Multiscan          an appointed Monitortyp, the different
                   Ablenkfrequenzen bolstered (Bildschirmmodi).

Multitasking       The ability of Amiga-operating system, more
                   program's (or task) quasi simultaneous to carry out.
                   You able you e.g. Simultaneous an budged graphic
                   show, an akutische file play back, with a
                   other computer comunicate and an diskette
                   reformat.

15.12. N, O

Namensmuster       a AmigaDOS-Fahigkeit, the it the user
                   enables, file- and Verzeichnisnamen under
                   use from wildcard character to enter. Wildcard character
                   enable the details from Suchmustern, with those on
                   more files reference taken become can, whose names
                   an jointly Textmuster hold. It must so
                   not all file names individual specified become.

New commence       the resetting of Amiga through simultaneous Drkken
(eng. reboot)     the key Ctrl as soon as the lefthand and right Amiga-
                   key. That has rough the same result how the
                   an- and power down the battery. The memory
                   is rewound. This procedure is also as
                   warm start designates.

No-             an font (e.g. Topaz) in the every sign the
proportionaler     resemble space take up. The great "W" takes e.g. Not
font        more place an as the small "I". Is also as
                   Monospace-font designates.

Only legibly (eng.  When he the Disk in the status "only legibly" (Read Only)
read only)         is, can you content only displayed, but not
                   changed become.

Undoing (eng.      The picked object to the use provide.
Open)              an Icon is through Doppelklicken on the
                   Icon or through sampling of Icon and
                   anschlieendes sampling of menu item "undoing" from
                   the Menu "Icon" open. With the undoing of Disk-
                   or drawers-Icon appear an window, in
                   the the content the Disk or. The drawer displayed
                   is. With the undoing of project- or progam-
                   Icon is an progam restarted.

Offset             an Versatz to left or on the right or general an
                   distance (relative to a other point).

Overscan           see guard zone.

15.13. P, Q

paperbasket (eng.  An directory to the reception from files, the (later)
trashcan)          excluded become shall.

Parallel (also     an interfaces-connection, the by the
"Centronics")      data transfer each an complete byte (8 Bit)
                   transferred. In opposition there to become by the
                   seriellen interface Einzelbits transfer. The
                   Amiga disposes over a parallel connection, the in the
                   rule as printer connection serves.

Parity            an process to the discovery from debugged by the
                   seriellen communicating. With it is a waiting data bytes an
                   additional Bit added.

Partition          under it understands one a storage area on one
                   hard drive, the to the storage from data uses
                   is and from system how an own drive discusses
                   is.

Dough              Engl. For Einfgen.

Path               see path.

Periphery         an external, on the Amiga connected
                   Hardwaregert.

Path (eng. path)  The character string from data medium- and Schbladennamen,
                   the the Speicherposition one file defined.

Icon (eng.  A small graphic, the an Disk, an drawer, an
icon)              project or an progam represent. Pictograms able
                   with the mouse deferred and picked become, so that
                   you with the through the Icon dargestellen element
                   work able.

Brush (eng.      A IFF-Grafikdatei, normally an cutout from
brush)             one vollformatigen mapping.

Pitch              character density by printout (cpi - sign per
                   custom).

Pixel              see pixel.

Pointer            english for hand. Sea Mauspfeil.

Port               english for elektrischen interfaces-connection.

                   As "Message-Port" an software-interface to the
                   communicating between two simultaneous current
                   program (ARexx).

PostScript-printer an high-resolution printer, the text and Grafikdaten
                   in the PostScript-Seitenbeschreibungsprache process
                   can.

Printer driver     see Drucktertreiber.

Progam           a row from assignments and ordering, the the Amiga
                   report, how appointed workings to carry out are. To
                   the program belong to  u's.a. Uses and the
                   systems software.

Project            a file, in the the from a progam erstellten
                   or benutzten files saved become. Files, the
                   with a text editor or Grafikprogramm created
                   become, are e.g. Projects.

With dispatch             see Eingabeaufforderung.

Processor          see central processing unit.

Pseudo-Icon  an Icon, the for an object displayed is, to
(eng. default     the no .info=Datei lies, when the menu items
icon)              "content show all files" picked became.

Buffer (eng.      An more temporary storage area in the RAM.
buffer)

point              unit of measure for the vertical size of type.
                   Usually is this 1/72 custom. With the Amiga complies
                   this a pixel in onscreen.

Pure (eng. Pure)   Beschreibt a comand or an progam, the/the
                   resident made become can. When an file "pure"
                   is, is the Schutzbit p steady.

Spring (eng.      An device, an drawer (i.e. An directory) or
source)            an file, the/the data affords. With the copying one
                   diskette designates one e.g. The diskette, the copied
                   is, as Quelldiskette.

15.14. R

radio button       see Druckknopfsymbol.

RAM (Random Access the part of internal storeroom of Amiga, the for the
Memory),           data storage uses become can and on the the
main memory    processor-chip direct intervention has. Uses become
                   from Disk in the RAM charged and acknowledgement additional
                   RAM to the processing and storage from Date, so
                   the computer active is. Data in the RAM go
                   lost, when the Amiga new restarted (Reboot) or
                   cut out is.

RAM-Disk           an area of RAM, the the functions of disk drive
                   accomplish can, where the RAM-Disk essential faster
                   is as an physically drive, then she no
                   mechanical elements contains.

Guard zone (eng. The normally not used Rahmenbereich around a
overscan)          onscreen from Standardgre. With help of Overscan-
                   editor able you yours onscreen broaden, around also
                   these area to of use.

Read               see reading.

Reboot             see new commence.

Release            an more precise details from software-version numbers in the
                   English.

Resident           as resident designates one a comand or an
                   progam, the/the with the comand RESIDENT staendig in
                   the memory charged became, around its execution to
                   accelerate. Resident commands become special
                   arranged, with it she by repeated execution
                   not renewed charged become must. Only pure files
                   able resident saved become.

Cr code        see Bedingungskennzeichen.

RGB (red-green-     a kind from Videosignal; the three primary Farbsignale
blue)              become by it separate sent. The standard
                   Amiga-giving out uses a analogen RGB-monitor.

Rollbalken (eng.  The shaded area, in the the Rollbalken pulled
scroll bare)        become can. You able in the Rolleiste klikken, around
                   the Rollbalken to move.

Rolleiste          the hervorgehobe area within the Rolleiste, the
                   to the advertisement till now not sichbarer part of window
                   on an other position pulled become can. The bigness
                   of Rollbalkens is variable and leaves thereupon close,
                   how much from entirety window presently uncover is.

Roles (eng.      The move of contents through the reading area of
scroll)            window or one list.

Rolliste           The options, the in a Rollsymbol appear. When
                   the list to great is, around complete in the Rollsymbol
                   displayed become to able, able you the list with
                   help of Rollbalkens or the Rollpfeile cover.

Rollpfeile         symbols, the in a window appear able and it
                   the user enable, the reading area
                   continuous to postpone.

Rollsymbol         an window, the it the user enables, an
                   Optionsliste durchzugehen or he through the
                   reading area of window to move. An
                   Rollsymbol consists from Rolliste, Rolleiste, Rollbalken,
                   and Rollpfeilen.

ROM (Read Only     Permanenter memory, the with Systemanweisungen
Memory = only-harvest- preprogrammed is and not changed become can.
Memory           Benutzerbefehle or Programmoperationen have no
                   influence on the content of ROM.

Root               see Haputverzeichnis.

Root-block (dt.    The area one Disk, the the names the Disk, the
about Hauptblock)   main register and informations to the Disk-
                   organization contains. Is the Root-block excluded,
                   able no data more from the Disk called up become -
                   she is practical empty.

15.15. S

shade       generation gleichmiger colour- or Graustufen-
(eng. dithering)  shades through rotatory Bildpunktfarben or
                   -compose. The Preferences-Editoren PrinterGfx and
                   PrinterPS bid more Einstellmglichkeiten for the
                   automated shade from printed graphics.

                   Creation of Erscheinungsbilds one Farge through an
                   from other colors compounder pattern, e.g. The
                   representation the colour violet through alternately red
                   and blue pixel.

Schieberegler-     an symbol, from the through draw of Schiebereglers
symbol             through the symbol an worth picked become can. With the
                   move of Schiebereglers become different values
                   displayed.

Schiebereglerwert  a number, the take a Schiebereglersymbol to
                   see is and the to the time ausgewhlten worth announce.

Clasps (eng.   The remove of window from the advertisement, around an
close)             progam or the intervention on an Datendatei to
                   discontinue.

Codeword      an word, the from a AmigaDOS-comand or in a
(eng. keyword)    attribute-entry as identification of argument
                   or breakdown a option recognized is.

Authoring-/legibly    when he an Disk in the status "authoring-/legibly" (Read/
(eng. read/write) Write) is, can you content as well as culled as
                   also vernder become.

Writing (eng.   The write-out from data in the memory or on a
write)             Speichermedium (e.g. One diskette).

Writing          with these attitude able data on an
activate (eng.  Speichergert written become. A diskette is on
write-enable)      "write-enable" or. Read/Write adjusted, when the
                   opening in the corner the diskette through the lower-case
                   Kunststoffschieber closed is.

Write-protected   the entitled of Speichergerts, by the the writing
(eng. write-      from data on these Datentger not possible is.
protect)           diskettes possession a lower-case Kunststoffschieber,
                   the so deferred become can (the opening in the corner
                   the diskette must uncover is), that the overall
                   diskette write-protected is, i.e. She is only legibly.

Drawer (eng.   An partition of Disk-storage area. A
drawer)            drawer complies a AmigaDOS-directory.

Schutzbits         an row from badges, the with every one file
                   conserved become. Schutzbits denote the
                   Dateityp and ctrl the for this file admissive
                   operations (read, write, clean etc.).

Level (eng. An worth of Grafikdrucker-Preferencess (PrinterGfx),
threshold)         the he on the Farbintensitt correlates. He certain,
                   which colors at black-white-stress as black and
                   which as white printed become.

Screen             see onscreen.

Scrollen           see roles

Seitenverhltnis   the relationship from height to breadth by picture.
(Eng. aspect)

serial           an interfaces-connection, the data einzelbitweise
interface      ubertrgt. Opposition to the parallel interface, the
(eng. serial      detailed bytes (eight Bit) simultaneous
port, also RS-232) transferred. The Amiga disposes over a seriellen
                   Port, on the often an modem, an MIDI-Schnitstelle or
                   an printer connected is.

Set (eng. set) the changeover of bits or sign in the
                   activate status ("an"). Opposition to "discharge".

Shell (braised.a. CLI)   The Befehlszeilenschnittstelle, over the entered
                   comands on the Amiga sent become. The Shell is an
                   Konsolen window, the numerous special functions
                   bolstered, e.g. Befehlszeilenwiederholung, surrogate name
                   as soon as photostatic- and Einfgeoperationen.

Securing            Anlegen one archival backup copy.

Archival backup copy    a copy one file (or one entire hard drive)
(eng. backup      on diskette, Bandkassette or plate, the in the fall
copy)              of data loss to the Wiederherstellen the data
                   used become can.

Scaling          the to scale re design the bigness one anzuzeigenden
                   or to drukkenden mapping or font. In the
                   rule is an onscreen to the printing belittles. A
                   aggrandizement is however self-evident also
                   possible.

Script (also       a text file, the an row automatic more practicable
Befehlsdatei,      AmigaDOS-comands contains, which together to the
eng. Also batch)  execution one komplexen or he repetitively
                   duty serve. An example for an script is the
                   file "Startup-sequence", the at activating of Amiga
                   carried out is.

Source             see spring.

Memory (eng.    The internal storage area of Amiga, in the data and
memory)            program's saved become. The Amiga disposes over
                   chip-RAM (Grafikspeicher), fasts-RAM (normally memory)
                   as soon as ROM-memory (Read Only Memory). The bigness of
                   RAM-storeroom (Random Access Memory) is an
                   decisivier factor for bigness and number the on the
                   Amiga simultaneous ausfhrbaren program's. External
                   memory (how Disks) is also as bulk memory
                   designates.

Trace (eng. Tracked) Teilt an Disk in concentric circle on. See also
                   cyl.

Standard (eng.    An worth or an action, the/the the system
default)           automatic accepts, so far the user nothing other
                   specifies.

Standard program   an in the Informations window of project-Icon
(eng. Default     specified progam. With undoing of project-
Tool)              Icon is the standard program automatic
                   charged and to the Bearbeiten of project restarted.

Pop stack     an more specific area of RAM, the as more temporary
(eng. stack)      memory for an progam reserved is.

Activating            see boot.

Startfhig         see Bootable.

Startup-Sequence   a AmigaDOS-script-file, the at activating of Amiga
                   automatic carried out is and for the config
                   the hardware and the Verzeichnissysteme worrys.

Steuertasten-      a key combination, the an Sonderfunktion
kombination        carry out. With it is the Ctrl-key pressed be expected to
                   and simultaneous an other key on the keyboard
                   pressed. Many a one functions from
                   Steuertastenkombinationen become immediate to the
                   squeeze the key combination carried out, e.g. The
                   breaking-off the execution of AmigaDOS-imperative at
                   squeeze from Ctrl-C. Others combinations turn out
                   merely an reverse dargestelltes sign and have
                   no other immediate effect.

Stop bits          additional bits, the by the seriellen communicating
                   appended become, around the end of sign to
                   mark.

Streamer (also     an Massenspeichergert high capacity, the
Tape-Streamer,     magnetic Bandkassetten uses. The
Bandlaufwerk)      Normalanwendungen are backup copies great
                   hard drives.

String             see character string.

Suchpfad (eng.    The list the directories, the AmigaDOS by the quest
search path)       to a comand peruses. Directories able over
                   the comand PATH from the list excluded or in she
                   absorbed become.

Symbol (eng.      A programmed graphic, the in a window, a
gadget)            Dialog window or a onscreen appear and over
                   the with the mouse an appointed function caused
                   become can. Every symbol heard to a individual
                   type and has an appointed function. With the
                   dreidimensionalen representation in onscreen appear
                   the most symbols some from the advertisement herauszuragen
                   and at sampling how an tast in the onscreen to
                   "sank".

SYS:               the name, the the data medium allied is, on the
                   the Amiga its Systemdateien and -verzeichnisse seeks.
                   Normally also the data medium, from the from the
                   system restarted is.

15.16. T

keyboard assignment   a file, the the layout from sign on the
(eng. keymap)     keyboard and the signification every one separate key
                   defined. Each language owns her own
                   keyboard assignment.

Tastaturkuzbefehl  a method, an Mausaktion over the keyboard
                   to carry out (through squeeze one key or
                   key combination).

Tastenbefehl       a key or key combination, with the by
(eng. hot key)    Commodity-Exchange-program an concealed window
                   open become can.

                   An rechtecktiges small box, in the you
                   Textinformationen enter able, e.g. A
                   file names or a comand. Texteingabefelder
                   appear by invocation the menu items "rename" and
                   "comand accomplish" and become also from many
                   program uses.

Titelleiste        the upper edge of screen or window, the
                   normally the Manen of screen or window
                   announce.

Tool               see utility.

Tool Types         see attribute.

Tracing (dt.       A appointed mode of interpreter how e.g.
Backtrace)  ARexx, in the interim results of actual
                   object run einsehbar are and to every date in
                   the object run encroached become can. With it leave
                   he Programm window exact encircle.

Trashcan           see paperbasket.

Separator       an sign, the the beginning and the end one
(eng. Delimiter)  character string marked.

15.17. U, V

bergeordnet       the window, from the from an other window open
(window, eng.    Became. The directory, the the actual directory
parent)            or. The actual drawer contains.

Overwriting      the writing from data in the memory, in an file
                   or on an Disk, where the till now there stored
                   content through the new data compensates is.

Deflect (eng.    The Umdefinieren the Standardvorgaben for spring or
redirect)          goal the an- or giving out of imperative with help the
                   special character < and >.

Changeover (eng.  Cover he on an option, by the between two
toggle)            be there- and hergeschaltet become can (e.g.
                   Between "an" and "From").

Reverse (eng.  A key how Shift (the actual shift key),
qualifier)         Ctrl or alto, the an other interpretation the
                   simultaneous or thereafter erfolgenden keyboard-/
                   Mauseingabe through the Amiga brings about. Is normally
                   with Commodity-Exchange-program uses.

Unit               see oneness.

Submenu          an Sekundrmen, the appear, when appointed
                   menu items picked become. When an menu item he
                   to a submenu verzeigt, see you really from these
                   menu item the sign >>.

Subdirectories   an directory, the within of other
(eng.             List stands (complies one drawer
subdirectory)      within one drawer).

User-startup       an from user created file, the the specific
(file)            comands for settings contains, the at system start
                   processed is.

Utility            english for "utility", most an auxiliary routine.

Directory (eng. A subdivision within of Ablagesystems of
directory)         computer to the organizes Abspeicherung from files
                   and other list (subdirectories). On
                   the Workbench become directories as pictograms in
                   form from drawers personated.

Vom by von from             see data medium.

Vorauseingabe      a furniture the Shell, the it enables, comands
(eng. Letter ahead) to enter, during still the giving out of ahead
                   eingegebenen imperative displayed is.

Fore-/           an symbol, the in the upper right corner of
Hintergrundsymbol  window or screen appear can. Me help
                   this symbol can an window or onscreen in the
                   foreground the advertisement fetched or in the background
                   posed become.

Preferences      a Workbench-drawer with Editoren, the Sum to the
(eng.             Konfiguraturieren and adapt your Amiga-surroundings
Preferences)       substitute able, e.g. Re design the Bildschirmfarben or
                   set the settings for the communicating over the
                   serial interface.

15.18. W, Z

Wartezeiger        image one stopwatch, the instead of normal
                   Mauspfeils displayed is, when the Workbench collaborates
                   and therefore no wider input data accepting
                   can.

Wildcard           see wildcard character.

Window             see window.

Workbench          The on pictograms resting upon, graphical
                   user interface (GUI) of Amiga.

Write              see writing.

Character density      The number sign, measured in cpi, the within
                   of custom (horizontal) listed become.

Character string       an zusammenhngendes bit text, the as oneness
(eng. string)     discusses is.

Font (eng. Also: font. An particular redesigned of setting
font)              from letters, special character and digits, the for the
                   Textanzeige used become, e.g. Topaz and Helvetica.
                   Fonts or fonts are in the rule in
                   different bulks available, the in points specified
                   become (10-point, 12-point etc.).

Show             the Mauspfeil so place, that is goal the
                   object affected, on the show become shall.

Hand (eng.      More general genus for Mauspfeil and Wartezeiger.
pointer)           in program also an appointed Variablentyp, the
                   for his part the address of other Speicherobjekts
                   contains, so on this shows.

Line skip-      an Darstellungsmodus, the by many Amiga-
darstellung        Bildschirmmodi the vertical screen resolution
                   doubled.

Time marker (eng.   Single sculler file assigned date and time.
time stamp)        Normalerweise date and time the building or the
                   last change the file (or of list).

Central processing unit     the "brain" of computer. The microprocessor-chips
(Central           is an IC (more integrated circuit), the in first
Processing Unit =  line for the execution from assignments in a
CPU)               progam accountable is. As central processing unit
                   designates one also often the entire calculator with casing,
                   in the opposition to of him periphery.

Draw (eng.      Relocating of Icon, window, symbol or
drag)              screen over the advertisement through Zeigen on the
                   object, Gedrckthalten the Auswahltaste and move the
                   mouse.

Goal (eng.        The device, the directory or the file, the/the
destination)       data feels.

Goal (eng.   The pixel in a Mauspfeil (normally the
hot spot)          vertex by a arrow or the point of intersection by a
                   crossing), the an object on the onscreen meet
                   must, with it this augewhlt is.

Zoom-symbol (eng. An symbol, the in the upper right corner of
zoom gadget)       window appear can. Over this symbol can
                   between  windowgren bandied become.

Allocate           with the comand ASSIGN an union between a
                   logic Gertenamen and a Verzeichnisnamen
                   establish, with it program's, the the directory
                   use, each only a only one Gertenamen
                   use must. Example: the Gertename T: is in
                   the rule the directory RAM:T allocated.

Buffer   an area in the memory, the to the temporren save
(eng. clipboard)  from text and graphics serves, with it this between
                   program transfer become able.

Cyl (eng.    A logic subdivision einter Magnetspeicherplatte
cylinder)          or. -diskette. Amiga-3.5-custom-diskettes become by the
                   formatting in 80 cyl subdivided. An cyl
                   is the summary bereinanderliegender intertrack
                   on several Plattenoberflchen.
